canon np6350 sm

SERVICEMANUALREVISION 0

FY8-13F0-000JULY 1997

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

IMPORTANT

THIS DOCUMENTATION IS PUBLISHED BY CANON INC., JAPAN, TO SERVE AS A SOURCE OFREFERENCE FOR WORK IN THE FIELD.

SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN MAY VARY SLIGHTLY FROMACTUAL MACHINE VALUES OR THOSE FOUND IN ADVERTISING AND OTHER PRINTEDMATTER.

ANY QUESTIONS REGARDING INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN SHOULD BE DIRECTED TOTHE COPIER SERVICE DEPARTMENT OF THE SALES COMPANY.

THIS DOCUMENTATION IS INTENDED FOR ALL SALES AREAS, AND MAY CONTAININFORMATION NOT APPLICABLE TO CERTAIN AREAS.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC.

Printed in Japan

Imprimé au Japon

Use of this manual should be

strictly supervised to avoid

disclosure of confidential

information.

Prepared by

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 1

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISION

CANON INC.

5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302 Japan

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) i

This Service Manual contains basic data and figures on the plain paper copierNP6350/NP6251 needed to service the machine in the field.

The NP6350/NP6251 is designed to enable full automatic copying work, and comeswith the following systems accessories:

1. Stapler Sorter-E22. RDF-D13. Paper Deck-A14. Sorter-G1

This Service Manual covers the copier only, and consists of the following chapters:

Chapter 1 General Description introduces the copier’s features and specifications,shows how to operate the copier, and explains how copies are made.

Chapter 2 Basic Operation provides outlines of the copier's various mechanicalworkings.

Chapter 3 Exposure System discusses the principles of operation used for thecopier's lens drive unit and scanner drive unit. It also explains the timingat which these drive units are operated, and shows how they may bedisassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 4 Image Formation System discusses the principles of how images areformed. It also explains the timing at which the various units involved inimage formation are operated, and shows how they may bedisassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 5 Pick-Up/Feeding System explains the principles used from when copypaper is picked up to when a copy is delivered in view of the functions ofelectrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation.It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled andadjusted.

Chapter 6 Fixing System explains the principles used to fuse toner images totransfer media in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical unitsand in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows how these unitsmay be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 7 Externals/Auxiliary Mechanisms shows the copier’s external parts, andexplains the principles used for the copier’s various control mechanismsin view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relationto their timing of operation. It also shows how these units may bedisassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 8 Paper Deck-A1 explains the principles used from when copy paper ispicked up to when a copy is delivered in view of the functions of electricaland mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It alsoshows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

Chapter 9 Installation introduces requirements for the site of installation, and showshow the copier may be installed using step-by-step instructions.

Chapter 10 Maintenance and Servicing provides tables of periodically replaced partsand consumables/durables and scheduled servicing charts.

INTRODUCTION

Chapter 11 Troubleshooting provides tables of maintenance/inspection,standards/adjustments, and problem identification (imagefault/malfunction).

Appendix contains a general timing chart and general circuit diagrams.

The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual:

1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and therelationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to thetiming of operation.

In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive—where asignal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the directionof the electric signal.

The expression “turn on the power” means flipping on the power switch, closing thefront door, and closing the delivery unit door, which results in supplying the machinewith power.

2. In the digital circuits, ‘1’ is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signalis “High,” while ‘0’ is used to indicate “Low.” (The voltage value, however, differsfrom circuit to circuit.)

In practically all cases, the internal mechanisms of a microprocessor cannot bechecked in the field. Therefore, the operations of the microprocessors used in themachines are not discussed: they are explained in terms of from sensors to theinput of the DC controller PCB and from the output of the DC controller PCB to theloads.

The descriptions in this Service Manual are subject to change without notice forproduct improvement or other purposes, and major changes will be communicated in theform of Service Information bulletins.

All service persons are expected to have a good understanding of the contents of thisService Manual and all relevant Service Information bulletins and be able to identify andisolate faults in the machine.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)ii

System ConfigurationThe NP6350/NP6251 is designed to accommodate the following accessories:

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) iii

Stapler Sorter-E2

RDF-D1

NP6350/NP6251(front paper deck + cassette type)

Paper Deck-A1

Sorter G1

Control Card V

It feeds a stack of originals to the copier, sheet by sheet.

It allows control of copy volume.

It can automatically sort and group copies.

It can accommodate as many as 3,500 sheets of A4/B5/LTR paper.

In addition to the functions of the 20-Bin Stapler Sorter, it can automatically staple sorted copies. It also is equipped with a front access function, in which copies may be removed from the front, and a multiple stacking function, in which two or more sets may be delivered in a single bin.

1. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)iv

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) v

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

I. FEATURES.........................................1-1II. SPECIFICATIONS..............................1-2

A. Copier ............................................1-21. Type..........................................1-22. Mechanisms .............................1-23. Performance.............................1-34. Others.......................................1-6

B. Paper Deck-A1 ..............................1-9III. NAMES OF PARTS ............................1-10

A. External View.................................1-10B. Cross Section ................................1-12

1. Copier .......................................1-12IV. OPERATING THE MACHINE.............1-13

A. Control Panel.................................1-13B. Extended Modes ...........................1-14C. User Mode.....................................1-15

1. Types of User Modes ...............1-15V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE

USER..................................................1-19VI. POINTS TO NOTE (BY THE USER) .1-19VII. IMAGE FORMATION..........................1-20

A. Outline ...........................................1-20

CHAPTER 2 BASIC OPERATION

I. BASIC MECHANISMS .......................2-1A. Functional Construction.................2-1B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry ...2-2C. Basic Sequence of Operations......2-4

1. Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On (1/2).....................2-4

2. Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On (2/2).....................2-5

3. Basic Sequence of Operations................................2-7

4. Basic Sequence of Operations in Page Separation Mode.........2-9

D. Main Motor (M1) Control Circuitry..2-111. Outline ......................................2-112. Operation..................................2-123. Detecting an Error ....................2-12

E. Inputs to the DC Controller............2-13F. Outputs from the DC Controller.....2-21G. Inputs to and Outputs from

Accessories ...................................2-32

CHAPTER 3 EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I. OUTLINE OF OPERATION................3-1A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio.....3-1

II. LENS DRIVE SYSTEM ......................3-2A. Moving of the Lens........................3-2

1. Outline of the Movement ..........3-22. Moving the Lens.......................3-33. Lens Motor Control Circuit .......3-34. Moving the Lens.......................3-4

III. SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM ..............3-6A. Scanner Movement .......................3-6

1. Outline of Movement ................3-62. Relationship between the

Scanner Sensors and theSignals......................................3-7

3. Basic Sequence of Operations..3-84. Movement of the Scanner in

Page Separation Mode ............3-9

5. Movement of the Scanner with the RDF in Use (A4, 2 originals,1 copy)......................................3-11

6. Movement of the Scanner with the RDF in Use (A4, 2 copies)..3-13

7. Scanner Motor (M3) Control Circuit .......................................3-17

IV. OTHERS.............................................3-20A. Original Size Detection..................3-20

1. Outline of Detection..................3-202. Operation..................................3-213. Sizes of Originals .....................3-22

V. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......3-23A. Scanner Drive Assembly ...............3-24

1. Removing the Scanner Drive Motor ........................................3-24

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)vi

I. PROCESSES .....................................4-1A. Controlling the Drum Surface

Potential.........................................4-11. Outline ......................................4-12. Control Method.........................4-23. Potential Measurement Circuit..4-4

B. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp .............................4-61. Outline ......................................4-62. Operation..................................4-73. Auto Exposure Control .............4-74. Making Checks.........................4-10

C. Controlling the Primary/Transfer Corona Current..............................4-111. Outline ......................................4-112. Controlling the Primary

Corona Current.........................4-113. Controlling the Transfer

Corona Current.........................4-13D. Controlling the Separation/Pre-

Transfer Corona Current ...............4-151. Outline ......................................4-152. Turning ON and OFF the

Separation/ Pre-Transfer Corona Current.........................4-16

3. Separation Corona Current (DC component) .......................4-17

4. Pre-Transfer Corona Current (DC component) .......................4-17

5. Controlling the DC Component of the Separation/Pre-TransferCorona Current.........................4-18

E. Controlling the Blanking Exposure Lamp (LED) ...................................4-191. Outline ......................................4-192. Controlling the Activation in

Reduce Mode ...........................4-193. Controlling the Activation in

Direct Mode ..............................4-19

4. Controlling the Activation in Sheet Frame Erase Mode ........4-19

5. Controlling the Activation in Original Frame Erase Mode .....4-20

6. Controlling the Activation in Book Frame Erase Mode .........4-20

7. Controlling the Activation in Hole Image Erase Mode ..........4-21

8. Controlling the Activation in AE Mode...................................4-21

F. Drum Heater Circuit.......................4-221. Outline ......................................4-222. Idle Rotation of the

Photosensitive Drum and theDeveloping Cylinder .................4-24

G. Cleaning the Primary Charging Wire ...............................................4-251. Outline ......................................4-252. Automatic Cleaning

Mechanism ...............................4-25H. Pre-Transfer/Transfer/Separation

Charging Wire Automatic Cleaning Mechanism.....................4-26

II. DRUM CLEANING ASSEMBLY /DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ...............4-28A. Outline ...........................................4-28B. Detecting the Level of Toner and

Controlling the Supply Operation ..4-30C. Controlling the Developing

Bias/Roller Electrode.....................4-321. Outline ......................................4-322. Control Timing ..........................4-323. Developing Bias Control

Circuit .......................................4-354. Roller Electrode Bias Control

Circuit .......................................4-36D. Detecting the Waste Toner Feeding

Screw (locking) ..............................4-38III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......4-39

CHAPTER 4 IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

2. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable ........................................3-26

3. Orienting the Heat Absorbing Glass ........................................3-26

4. Removing the Scanner Drive Cable ........................................3-27

5. Adjusting the Tension of the Scanner Drive Cable ................3-29

6. Positioning the Mirror ...............3-297. Adjusting the Scanner Home

Position.....................................3-308. Positioning the Scanner Locking

Solenoid (SL1)..........................3-31B. Lens Drive Assembly.....................3-32

1. Removing the Lens Y Direction Drive Motor...............................3-32

2. Removing the Lens StageTemporarily ...............................3-34

3. Installing the Light-Blocking Belt Mount ................................3-35

4. Removing the Lens X Direction Drive Motor...............................3-36

5. Attaching the Lens X Direction Drive Belt..................................3-37

6. Routing the Light-Blocking Belt ...........................................3-37

7. Replacing the Light-Blocking Belt.............................3-38

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) vii

A. Scanning Lamp Assembly.............4-391. Removing the Scanning Lamp.4-392. Removing the Thermal Fuse....4-41

B. Standard White Plate ....................4-41C. Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit ...............4-43

1. Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit .................................4-43

D. Blanking Exposure LampAssembly .......................................4-441. Removing the Blanking

Exposure Lamp Assembly .......4-44E. Photosensitive Drum .....................4-45

1. Removing the Drum Unit..........4-452. Replacing the Drum Heater......4-473. Installing the Photosensitive

Drum.........................................4-47F. Potential Sensor Assembly ...........4-48

1. Removing the Potential Sensor Assembly .....................4-48

G. Primary Charging Assembly..........4-481. Removing the Primary

Charging Assembly ..................4-48H. Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly ..4-49

1. Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly ..................4-49

I. Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly .......................................4-491. Removing the Transfer/

Separation Charging Assembly..................................4-49

2. Installing the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly..................................4-51

J. Charging Wire ...............................4-531. Outline ......................................4-53

2. Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Primary Charging Assembly..................................4-53

3. Stringing the Charging Wires ...4-534. Stringing the Grid Wire of the

Primary Charging Assembly.....4-565. Adjusting the Height of the

Charging Wire ..........................4-586. Cleaning the Primary Charging

Assembly Anti-Stray Sheet ......4-59K. Developing Assembly....................4-60

1. Removing the Developing Assembly from the Copier........4-60

2. Removing the Blade Unit .........4-613. Installing the Blade...................4-614. Removing the Developing

Cylinder and the Magnetic Seal ..........................................4-62

5. Cleaning the Developing Assembly Anti-Stray Sheet ......4-65

L. Hopper Assembly ..........................4-661. Removing the Hopper

Assembly from the Copier........4-66M. Drum Cleaner ................................4-67

1. Construction .............................4-672. Removing the Cleaning Blade..4-673. Installing the Cleaning Blade....4-684. Installing the Side Seal.............4-695. Cleaning the Cleaning Side

Scraper .....................................4-70N. Separation Claw/Separation

Claw Drive Assembly ....................4-711. Removing from the Drum Unit .4-71

O. Waste Toner Feeding Assembly....4-72

CHAPTER 5 PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

I. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ............5-1A. Outline ...........................................5-1

II. CASSETTE PICK-UP .........................5-4A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-4

1. Outline ......................................5-52. Sequence of Pick-Up

Operations................................5-5B. Cassette Lifter Operation ..............5-6C. Identifying the Size of Copy

Paper in the Cassette....................5-81. Outline ......................................5-82. Identifying the Size of Copy

Paper........................................5-83. Markings on the Width Guide

Rail ...........................................5-104. Paper Size................................5-115. Registering Paper Width Basic

Value.........................................5-12

III. FRONT PAPER DECK ASSEMBLY......5-13A. Outline ...........................................5-13

1. Pick-Up Operation ....................5-142. Sequence of Pick-Up

Operations................................5-15B. Lifter Operation..............................5-16

1. Operation..................................5-162. Deck Limit Detection ................5-18

C. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper in the Deck......................5-191. Detecting the Presence/

Absence of Paper in the Deck ..5-192. Detecting the Size of the Deck..5-19

D. High-Speed Pick-Up......................5-19IV. MULTIFEEDER...................................5-20

A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-20B. Identifying the Size of Paper in

the Multifeeder...............................5-21

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)viii

C. Sequence of Pick-Up Operations (multifeeder) ..................................5-22

V. CONTROLLING THE REGISTRATION CLUTCH .................5-23

VI. MAKING TWO-SIDED/OVERLAY COPIES ..............................................5-24A. Making Two-Sided/Overlay

Copies (1st side) ...........................5-241. Sequence of Operations

(two-sided/overlay copies; 1st side)....................................5-25

B. Making Two-Sided Copies (2nd side) ......................................5-261. Sequence of Operations

(two-sided copying; 2nd side) ..5-27C. Making Overlay Copies

(2nd side) ......................................5-281. Outline ......................................5-282. Outline of Operation .................5-293. Sequence of Operations

(overlay copying; 2nd side) ......5-31D. Reversal Delivery ..........................5-32

1. Sequence of Reversal Delivery Operations..................5-33

E. Switching the Paper Size for Two-Sided/Overlay/Reversal Delivery Copies ...........................................5-341. Movement of the Paper Size

Guide........................................5-342. Movement of the Paper

Jogging Plate and the Trailing Edge Guide Plate .....................5-35

3. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Copy Paper ...........5-36

F. Re-Pick Up from the Holding Tray................................................5-37

G. Skipping Operation........................5-381. Outline ......................................5-382. Outline of Operations ...............5-393. Skipping Operation (odd

number of originals) .................5-414. Skipping Operation (odd

number of originals) .................5-425. Reversal Delivery .....................5-45

VII. DETECTING JAMS ............................5-46A. Outline ...........................................5-46

1. Registration Roller Delay Jam..5-492. Registration Roller Stationary

Jam...........................................5-493. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding

0/1 Delay Jam ..........................5-504. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding

0/1 Stationary Jam ...................5-505. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding

2 through 4 Delay Jam.............5-516. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding

2 through 4 Stationary Jam......5-517. Fixing Assembly Outlet Delay

Jam...........................................5-52

8. Fixing Assembly Outlet Stationary Jam .........................5-52

9. External Delivery Delay Jam....5-5310.External Delivery Stationary

Jam...........................................5-5311.Internal Delivery Delay Jam .....5-5412.Internal Delivery Stationary

Jam...........................................5-5413.Holding Tray Inlet Delay Jam ...5-5514.Holding Tray Inlet Stationary

Jam...........................................5-5515.Holding Tray Re-Pick Up Delay

Jam...........................................5-5616.Holding Tray Registration

Delay Jam ................................5-5617.Holding Tray Registration

Stationary Jam .........................5-5718.Holding Tray Feeding 1/2

Delay Jam ................................5-5719.Holding Tray Feeding 1/2

Stationary Jam .........................5-5820.Left Deck Pick-Up Delay Jam ..5-5821.Left Deck Pick-Up Stationary

Jam...........................................5-5922.Fixing Separation Claw

Assembly Stationary Jam.........5-59VIII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......5-60

A. Multifeeder Assembly ....................5-611. Removing the Multifeeder

Assembly..................................5-612. Removing the Pick-Up Roller ...5-613. Installing the Pick-Up Roller .....5-624. Removing the Separation

Roller ........................................5-635. Removing the Feeding Roller...5-656. Removing the Multifeeder

Paper Sensor ...........................5-667. Attaching the Side Guide

Timing Belt in the MultifeederAssembly..................................5-68

8. Installing the Feeding Roller of the Multifeeder..........................5-69

9. Adjusting the Pressure of the Pick-Up/Feeding Roller of theMultifeeder................................5-69

10.Position of the Pick-Up RollerReleasing Solenoid of the Multifeeder................................5-70

B. Front Paper Deck Assembly .........5-711. Removing the Paper Deck

Assembly from the Copier........5-712. Removing the Lifter Cable........5-723. Changing the Deck Paper Size..5-774. Adjusting the Deck

Registration ..............................5-79C. Right Deck Pick-Up Assembly

(cassette holder)............................5-801. Removing the Pick-Up

Assembly from the Copier........5-80

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) ix

2. Removing the Pick-Up Roller ...5-803. Removing the Feeding Roller...5-824. Removing the Separation

Roller ........................................5-825. Adjusting the Pressure of the

Separation Roller......................5-846. Orientation of the Separation

Roller ........................................5-857. Orientation of the Feeding

Roller of the Cassette/Deck Pick-Up Assembly ....................5-86

8. Positioning the Pick-Up RollerReleasing Solenoid of the Deck .........................................5-86

9. Positioning of the Pick-Up RollerReleasing Solenoid of the Cassette ...................................5-87

10.Adjusting the Registration ofthe Cassette .............................5-87

D. Left Deck Pick-Up Assembly.........5-881. Removing the Pick-Up

Assembly from the Copier........5-882. Removing the Pick-Up Roller ...5-883. Removing the Feeding Roller...5-904. Removing the Separation

Roller ........................................5-905. Orientation of the Feeding

Roller Assembly of the Left Deck Pick-Up Assembly...........5-91

E. Pick-Up Vertical Path Roller Assembly .......................................5-921. Removing the Pick-Up Vertical

Path Roller Assembly...............5-92F. Registration Feeding Assembly.....5-93

1. Construction .............................5-932. Removing the Registration

Feeding Assembly....................5-933. Removing the Registration

Roller (upper rubber roller).......5-94G. Feeding Assembly.........................5-96

1. Construction .............................5-962. Removing the Fixing/Feeding

Unit ...........................................5-963. Removing the Feeding Belt......5-97

H. Holding Tray Assembly..................5-1011. Construction .............................5-1012. Removing the Holding Tray

from the Copier ........................5-1023. Removing the Holding Tray

Re-Pick Up Assembly ..............5-102

4. Removing the Holding TrayRegistration Paper Sensor .......5-103

5. Removing the Re-Pick Up Roller ........................................5-104

6. Removing the Holding Tray Driver PCB ...............................5-104

7. Removing the Holding Tray Y Motor ........................................5-105

8. Removing the Y Motor HomePosition Sensor ........................5-107

9. Removing the Holding Tray Inlet Assembly ..........................5-107

10.Removing the FeedingRoller/Separation Belt Assembly..................................5-109

11.Removing the Feeding Roller...5-11012.Removing the Separation Belt

Assembly..................................5-11113.Adjusting the Pressure of the

Separation Roller of the Holding Tray .............................5-111

14.Positioning the Holding Tray Paper Deflecting Plate Drive Solenoid ...................................5-112

15.Removing the Side Guide Plate Assembly.........................5-112

16.Removing the Holding Tray X Motor ........................................5-113

17.Removing the Holding Tray Re-Circulating Motor ................5-113

18.Removing the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Solenoid ...........5-114

19.Installing the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Guide Plate Assembly..................................5-116

20.Installing the Holding Tray Assembly Side Guide PlateAssembly..................................5-116

21.Attaching the Timing Belt of the Holding Tray Assembly Paper Jogging Guide Plate ......5-117

22.Positioning the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Solenoid ...........5-117

I. Holding Tray Feeding Assembly ...5-1181. Removing the Holding Tray

Feeding Assembly from the Copier .......................................5-118

2. Removing the Sensor from theHolding Tray Feeding Assembly..................................5-119

CHAPTER 6 FIXING SYSTEM

I. OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS..............6-1A. Outline ...........................................6-1B. Fixing Drive Assembly...................6-3

C. Controlling the Fixing Temperature ..6-5D. Reciprocating Mechanism for

the Main Thermistor (TH1) ............6-10

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)x

CHAPTER 7 EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

I. CONTROL PANEL .............................7-1A. Outline ...........................................7-1B. Operation.......................................7-1

1. Data Communication................7-12. LCD Processing .......................7-23. Automatic Control of LCD

Contrast ....................................7-44. Touch Switch Inputs .................7-5

II. FANS ..................................................7-6III. POWER SUPPLY ...............................7-9

A. Outline of Power Supply................7-9B. Power Supply Circuit .....................7-10C. Date/Time Display Power Supply..7-12

IV. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......7-13A. External Covers.............................7-14

1. Removing the Front Door.........7-152. Removing the Inside Upper

Cover ........................................7-163. Removing the Fixing/Feeding

Unit Front Cover .......................7-174. Removing the Rear Cover........7-175. Sliding Out the Hopper

Assembly..................................7-18

6. Removing the Process Unit......7-187. Installing the Process Unit........7-21

B. Control Panel.................................7-221. Removing the Control Panel

from the Copier ........................7-222. Removing the Control Panel

PCB ..........................................7-253. Removing the Touch Panel ......7-264. Removing the Control Panel

Controller (CPU) PCB ..............7-27C. Door Switch Assembly ..................7-28

1. Removing the Front Door Switch Assembly ......................7-28

2. Removing the Multifeeder Door Switch Assembly .............7-28

3. Installing the Drum Heater Switch.......................................7-29

D. Fan Unit .........................................7-301. Removing the Scanner

Cooling Fan ..............................7-302. Removing the Exhaust Fan......7-303. Removing the Fixing Heat

Exhaust Fan .............................7-31

E. Reciprocating Mechanism for the Upper Separation Claw ...........6-11

F. SSR Error Detection Circuit for the Fixing Heater ...........................6-12

G. Locking Operation (fixing/feeding unit)................................................6-14

H. Error Detection Circuit ...................6-151. Outline ......................................6-152. Scanning Lamp Error

Activation Detection Circuit ......6-153. Fixing Heater Error Activation

Detection Circuit .......................6-164. Motor Error Rotation

Detection Circuit .......................6-17II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......6-18

A. Fixing Assembly ............................6-191. Construction .............................6-192. Locking Mechanism..................6-193. Removing the Fixing Cleaning

Belt ...........................................6-204. Installing the Fixing Cleaning

Belt ...........................................6-225. Removing the Upper Fixing

Unit ...........................................6-236. Removing the Fixing Heater.....6-257. Installing the Fixing Heater.......6-278. Removing the Fixing Upper

Roller ........................................6-279. Installing the Upper Fixing

Roller ........................................6-29

10.Removing the Thermal Switch..6-3011.Removing the Main Thermistor

(TH1) ........................................6-3012.Removing the Lower

Separation Claw Assembly ......6-3113.Removing the Lower Roller......6-3214.Removing the Upper

Separation Claw .......................6-3215.Adjusting the Nip (tightening

the pressure adjusting nut).......6-3316.Adjusting the Fixing Clutch.......6-3417.Removing the Sub Thermistor

(TH2) ........................................6-35B. Delivery Assembly.........................6-36

1. Construction .............................6-362. Removing the Delivery Upper

Guide (fixing/delivery assembly) .................................6-36

3. Removing the Fixing/FeedingAssembly Locking Assembly....6-37

4. Removing the External Delivery Roller ..........................6-37

5. Removing the External DeliveryPaper Sensor and the Internal Delivery Paper Sensor .............6-39

6. Removing the Fixing Assembly Outlet Paper Sensor Assembly..................................6-39

7. Removing the Internal DeliveryAssembly Roller .......................6-40

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) xi

4. Removing the Developing Fan ...........................................7-31

5. Removing the Cleaner Fan ......7-326. Removing the Feeding Fan......7-33

E. Removing the Counter Assembly..7-33F. Main Motor Assembly....................7-34

1. Removing the Main Motor ........7-34G. Fixing/Waste Toner Drive

Assembly .......................................7-351. Construction .............................7-352. Removing the Waste Toner

Bottle ........................................7-353. Removing the Fixing/Waste

Toner Drive Assembly ..............7-35H. Main Drive Assembly (drum/

developing) ....................................7-381. Construction .............................7-382. Removing .................................7-38

I. Vertical Path Drive Assembly ........7-401. Construction .............................7-402. Removing .................................7-40

J. Pick-Up Drive Assembly................7-421. Construction .............................7-422. Removing .................................7-43

K. Duplexing Drive (1) Assembly.......7-441. Construction .............................7-442. Removing .................................7-45

L. Lifter Drive Assembly ....................7-461. Construction .............................7-462. Removing .................................7-46

M. Cassette Pick-Up Drive Assembly .......................................7-481. Construction .............................7-482. Removing .................................7-48

N. Attaching the Drive Belt.................7-50O. DC Controller PCB ........................7-51

1. Removing the DC Controller PCB ..........................................7-51

2. Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller PCB.............7-51

P. DC Power Supply Assembly .........7-521. Removing the DC Power

Supply Assembly......................7-52Q. High-Voltage Transformer

Assembly .......................................7-531. Remove the High-Voltage

Transformer Assembly .............7-53R. Power Supply Inlet Assembly........7-54

I. SIDE PAPER DECK ...........................8-1A. Inputs to and Outputs from the

Side Deck Driver ...........................8-11. Inputs to the Side Deck Driver

(1/2) ..........................................8-12. Inputs to the Side Deck Driver

(2/2) ..........................................8-23. Outputs from the Side Deck

Driver (1/1) ...............................8-3B. Pick-Up ..........................................8-4

1. Outline ......................................8-42. Pick-Up Operation ....................8-43. Sequence of Operations (deck

pick-up).....................................8-6C. Detection of Paper for the Deck....8-7

1. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper.....................8-7

2. Changing the Paper Size for the Deck ...................................8-7

D. Deck Lifter .....................................8-81. Lifter Operation.........................8-82. Detecting the Level of the

Stack in the Deck (compartment) ..........................8-10

E. Opening/Closing the Deck (compartment) ...............................8-111. Opening/Closing the Deck .......8-112. Sequence of Operations (deck

opening/closing) .......................8-12

F. Controlling the Deck Motor............8-131. Controlling the Deck Main

Motor (M101)............................8-132. Controlling the Deck Lifter

Motor (M102)............................8-15II. DETECTING JAMS ............................8-17

A. Outline ...........................................8-171. When copy paper is present at

any of the sensors at power-on, end of wait-up, or during standby. ....................................8-18

2. Deck Pick-Up/Vertical Path Delay Jam ................................8-18

3. Deck Pick-Up/Vertical PathStationary Jam .........................8-18

III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......8-19A. External Covers.............................8-20

1. Removing the Front Cover .......8-212. Removing the Vertical Path

Cover (rear) ..............................8-243. Removing the Right Cover .......8-254. Removing the Upper Cover......8-26

B. Paper Deck....................................8-281. Removing the Deck from the

Copier .......................................8-282. Removing the Compartment ....8-303. Changing the Deck Paper

Size ..........................................8-324. Adjusting the Deck Registration ..8-33

CHAPTER 8 PAPER DECK-A1

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)xii

5. Positioning the Roll ..................8-34C. Drive System .................................8-35

1. Removing the Deck Pick-Up Clutch (CL102) .........................8-35

2. Removing the Deck Vertical Path Clutch (CL101).................8-35

3. Removing the Deck Main Motor (M101)............................8-36

4. Removing the Deck Lifter Motor (M102)............................8-37

5. Removing the Lifter Cable (deck front) ...............................8-38

6. Removing the Lifter Cable (deck rear) ................................8-40

7. Routing the Lifter Cable ...........8-43D. Feeding System ............................8-44

1. Removing the Deck Pick-Up Unit ...........................................8-44

2. Removing the Deck Pick-Up Roller ........................................8-45

3. Orientation of the Deck Pick-Up Roller ..........................8-45

4. Removing the Deck Feeding Roller ........................................8-46

5. Orientation of the Deck Feeding Roller ..........................8-46

6. Removing the Deck SeparationRoller ........................................8-47

7. Adjusting the Deck Separation Roller Pressure.........................8-48

8. Positioning the Deck Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL101).....................................8-48

E. Electrical System...........................8-491. Removing the Side Deck

Driver PCB ...............................8-492. Removing the OPEN Switch

PCB ..........................................8-49

I. SELECTING THE SITE......................9-1II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING ........9-4

A. Unpacking......................................9-5B. Installing the Scanner....................9-7C. Installing the Fixing Assembly.......9-8D. Installing the AP Kit and the

Charging Assemblies ....................9-10E. Installing the Copy Tray.................9-16

1. Replacing the Delivery Gear ....9-162. Replacing the Delivery Roller

Leaf Spring ...............................9-17F. Checking the Developing

Assembly .......................................9-18G. Installing the Pick-Up Assembly....9-20H. Supplying Toner.............................9-22

I. Connecting the PDF Connector ....9-26J. Image/Function Checks and

User Mode.....................................9-27III. RELOCATING THE MACHINE...........9-31IV. INSTALLING THE CONTROL

CARD V ..............................................9-32V. INSTALLING THE COPY DATA

CONTROLLER-A1 .............................9-40A. Setting the Board...........................9-40B. Installing to the Copier ..................9-44C. Checking the Operation.................9-46

VI. INSTALLING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II....................9-56A. Installation to the Copier ...............9-56

CHAPTER 9 INSTALLATION

CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICING

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS..............................................10-1

II. CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES.10-2A. Copier..........................................10-2B. Paper Deck-A1 ............................10-3

III. SCHEDULED SERVICING TABLE ..10-4IV. SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART .10-6

A. Copier..........................................10-6B. Paper Deck-A1 ............................10-8

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) xiii

CHAPTER 11 TROUBLESHOOTING

I. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION.11-3A. Image Adjustment Basic

Procedure....................................11-3B. Points to Note for Scheduled

Servicing......................................11-4II. STANDARDS/ADJUSTMENTS ........11-5

A. Image Adjustment .......................11-51. Adjusting the Image Leading

Edge Margin...........................11-52. Adjusting the Image Leading

Edge Non-Image Width (registration) ...........................11-5

3. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration (left/right front deck paper deck, cassette) ....11-6

3-1. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration (paper deck-A1)..11-7

4. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration (holding tray position; 2nd side of two-sided/overlay copies) .............11-8

5. Adjusting the Left/Right Margin ....................................11-8

6. Executing AE Automatic Adjustment .............................11-9

7. Adjusting the AE Slope ..........11-10B. Exposure System ........................11-11

1. Adjusting the Scanner Home Position...................................11-11

2. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable ......................................11-12

3. Orientation of the Heat Absorbing Glass.....................11-13

4. Adjusting the Tension of theScanning Lamp Cable............11-13

5. Adjusting the Position of the Mirror ......................................11-14

6. Cleaning the Mirror (No. 5 mirror).....................................11-15

7. Routing the Light-Blocking Belt .........................................11-15

8. Routing the Lens X Direction Drive Belt................................11-16

9. Adjusting the Position of the Scanner Locking Solenoid (SL1).......................................11-16

C. Image Formation System ............11-171. Grid Wire of the Primary

Charging Assembly ................11-172. Adjusting the Height of the

Charging Wire ........................11-193. Adjusting the Position of the

Blanking Exposure Lamp .......11-204. Position of the Roller

Electrode ................................11-21

5. Adjusting the Position of the Cleaning Assembly Side Seal ........................................11-21

6. Cleaning the Cleaner Side Scraper...................................11-22

D. Pick-Up/Feeding System.............11-241. Orientation of the Cassette/

Front Paper Deck Pick-Up Roller ......................................11-24

2. Orientation of the Cassette/Front Paper Deck Separation Roller ......................................11-25

3. Orientation of the Feeding Roller (cassette/ front paperdeck).......................................11-25

4. Orientation of the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller ........................11-26

4-1. Orientation of the Paper Deck-A1 Pick-Up Roller .........11-26

5. Rotation of the Multifeeder Feeding Roller ........................11-27

5-1. Orientation of the PaperDeck-A1 Feeding Roller .........11-27

6. Adjusting the Separation Roller Pressure of the Cassette/Front Paper Deck....11-28

7. Adjusting the Separation Roller Pressure of the Holding Tray ...........................11-29

8. Pick-Up/Feeding Roller of the Multifeeder .......................11-29

9. Adjusting the Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (cassette) ................11-30

9-1. Adjusting the Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (front paper deck)....11-31

9-2. Adjusting the Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (paper deck-A1) ......11-31

10.Adjusting the Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (multifeeder) ............11-32

11.Routing the Timing Belt of the Side Guide (multifeeder assembly) ...............................11-33

12.Adjusting the Position of the Solenoid (delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid) .......11-33

13.Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Deflecting Plate Drive Solenoid...............11-34

14.Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Assembly Side Guide Plate ............................11-34

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)xiv

15.Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Plate .......................................11-35

16.Adjusting the Timing Belt of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Guide Plate...............11-35

17.Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Plate Solenoid ........................11-36

18.Drive Belt................................11-36E. Fixing System..............................11-38

1. Points to Note When Installing the Fixing Heater....................11-38

2. Adjusting the Position of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide......................................11-38

3. Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip).........................11-40

4. Adjusting the Fixing Clutch ....11-41F. Electrical System.........................11-42

1. When Replacing the DC Controller PCB .......................11-42

2. Checking the Surface Potential Control System........11-42

3. Checking the Potential System ...................................11-47

4. Potential Control System Conversion Table ...................11-49

5. Checking the Environment Sensor ....................................11-54

6. Checking the Photointerrupters....................11-55

7. Registering the Paper Width Basic Value (]4]; cassette/multifeeder) ............................11-63

III. IMAGE FAULTS................................11-64A. Initial Checks ...............................11-64

1. Checking the Site Environment ...........................11-64

2. Checking the Originals ...........11-643. Checking the Copyboard

Cover, Copyboard Glass, andStandard White Plate .............11-65

4. Checking the Charging Assemblies .............................11-65

5. Checking the Developing Assembly................................11-65

6. Checking the Paper................11-657. Checking the Periodically

Replaced Parts.......................11-658. Others.....................................11-65

B. Sample Image Faults ..................11-68C. Troubleshooting Image Faults.....11-69

1. The copy is too light (halftone only). .......................11-69

2. The copy is too light (including solid black). ............................11-70

3. The copy is too light (entire face). ...........................11-70

4. The copy has an uneven density (darker at front). .........11-72

5. The copy has an uneven density (lighter at front). .........11-72

6. The copy is foggy. (overall). ...11-737. The copy has vertical

fogging....................................11-748. The copy has black lines

(vertical, fuzzy, thick)..............11-749. The copy has black lines

(vertical, fine)..........................11-7510.The copy has white spots

(vertical)..................................11-7611.The copy has white lines

(vertical)..................................11-7612.The copy has white spots

(horizontal). ............................11-7813.The copy has a soiled back. ..11-7914.The copy has fixing faults. .....11-8015., 16., 17. The copy has

displaced leading edge registration.............................. 11-81

18.The copy is blurred andfuzzy. ......................................11-82

19.The copy has horizontal fogging....................................11-83

20.The copy has poor sharpness...............................11-83

21.The copy is blank. ..................11-8422.The copy is solid black...........11-84

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS .............................11-85A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions .....11-85

1. E000 .......................................11-852. E001 .......................................11-863. E002 .......................................11-874. E003 .......................................11-875. E004 .......................................11-876. E005 .......................................11-887. E006 .......................................11-888. E010 .......................................11-889. E013 .......................................11-8910.E015 .......................................11-9011.E020 .......................................11-9112.E030 (The total copy counter

fails to turn on.) ......................11-9213.E031 (The option counter

has an open circuit.)...............11-9214.E043 (paper deck-A1) ............11-9315.E050 .......................................11-9416.E051 .......................................11-9417.E202 (The keys on the

control panel are locked.).......11-9518.E203 .......................................11-9519.E204 (The keys on the

control panel are locked.).......11-9520.E210 (fault in lens X direction

drive system)..........................11-96

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) xv

21.E212 (fault in lens Y direction drive system)..........................11-96

22.E213 .......................................11-9623.E240 .......................................11-9624.E243 .......................................11-9725.E710/E711..............................11-9726.E712 .......................................11-9727.E713 .......................................11-9728.E800 .......................................11-9829.E802 .......................................11-9830.AC power is absent. ...............11-9931.DC power supply is absent. ...11-10032.Pick-up fails. (deck pick-up;

front paper deck + cassette) ..11-10133.The deck lifter fails to move up.

(front paper deck + cassette)..11-10234.Pick-up fails. (cassette

pick-up)...................................11-10335.The lifter fails to move up.

(cassette)................................11-10536.Pick-up fails. (multifeeder)......11-10637.The vertical path roller fails to

rotate. .....................................11-10738.The registration roller fails to

rotate. .....................................11-10739.The scanner fails to move

forward. ..................................11-10840.The scanner fails to move in

reverse. ..................................11-10841.The blanking exposure lamp

fails to turn on. .......................11-10942.The pre-exposure lamp fails

to turn on. ...............................11-10943.The scanning lamp fails to

turn on. ...................................11-11044.The hopper motor (M10) fails

to operate. ..............................11-11145.The hopper motor (M11) fails

to operate. ..............................11-11246.The drum heater fails to

operate. ..................................11-11247.The lens fails to move. ...........11-11348.The Add Toner indicator fails

to turn on. ...............................11-11449.The Add Toner indicator fails

to turn off. ...............................11-11450.The Set Control Card

message fails to turn off. ........11-11551.The Set Control Card

message fails to turn off. ........11-11552.Jams occur at the fixing

assembly inlet. .......................11-11553.The Add Paper message

fails to turn off.........................11-11554.The fixing heater fails to

operate. ..................................11-11655.Pick-up fails. (paper deck-A1)..11-11756.The deck lifter fails to move

up. (paper deck-A1) ...............11-118

V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS......................................11-119A. Copy Paper Jams........................11-119

1. Pick-Up Assembly ..................11-1202. Separation/Feeding

Assembly................................11-1213. Fixing/Delivery Assembly .......11-1224. Fixing/Delivery Assembly

(reversed delivery) .................11-1225. Cleaning Assembly ................11-1236. Holding Tray Assembly (two-

sided/overlay copying, 1st side)........................................11-123

7. Holding Tray Assembly (re-pick up) .............................11-124

8. Holding Tray Assembly (overlay, re-pick up)................11-124

9. Holding Tray Feeding Assembly................................11-125

B. Feeding Faults.............................11-1261. Double Feeding......................11-1262. Wrinkles..................................11-126

VI. ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS ................11-127A. Sensors .......................................11-128B. Switches and Solenoids ..............11-132C. Motors and Fans .........................11-136D. Clutches ......................................11-138E. Lamps, Heaters, and

Photosensors ..............................11-140F. PCBs ...........................................11-142G. Paper Deck-A1 ............................11-144

1. Sensors and Switches............11-1442. Motors, Clutches, Solenoids,

and PCBs ...............................11-146H. Variable Resistors (VR),

Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB..............11-1481. DC Controller PCB.................11-1482. AC Driver PCB .......................11-1513. DC Power Supply PCB ..........11-1514. Control CPU PCB...................11-1525. Holding Tray Driver PCB........11-1536. Potential Measurement PCB..11-1547. HVT1 PCB..............................11-1558. HVT2 PCB..............................11-1569. Inverter PCB...........................11-15610.Lamp Regulator PCB .............11-15711.Counter PCB ..........................11-15712.Side Deck Driver

(paper deck-A1) .....................11-158VII. SERVICE MODE..............................11-159

A. Outline .........................................11-159B. Using Service Mode ....................11-160C. Using Adjustment Mode and

Options Mode..............................11-160D. Display Mode ( ) ...............11-162E. I/O Display Mode ( ) .........11-179F. Adjustment Mode ( ) .........11-215]3]

]2]

]1]

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON)xvi

APPENDIX

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ..........A-1B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS ...A-3

1. Signals......................................A-32. Abbreviations............................A-4

C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM....A-5not available

D. PAPER DECK-A1 GENERALCIRCUIT DIAGRAM ......................A-7

E. SPECIAL TOOLS LIST .................A-9F. SOLVENTS AND OILS..................A-10

G. Function Mode ( ) .............11-233H. Options Mode ( )...............11-244I. Counter Mode ( ) ..............11-253

VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS ...........................11-259

A. Copier..........................................11-259B. RDF-D1 .......................................11-264C. Sorter...........................................11-266]6]

]5]

]4]

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV.0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 1

GENERAL DESCRIPTION

I. FEATURES.........................................1-1II. SPECIFICATIONS..............................1-2

A. Copier ............................................1-2B. Paper Deck-A1 ..............................1-9

III. NAMES OF PARTS ............................1-10A. External View.................................1-10B. Cross Section ................................1-12

IV. OPERATING THE MACHINE.............1-13

A. Control Panel.................................1-13B. Extended Modes ...........................1-14C. User Mode.....................................1-15

V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE USER..................................................1-19

VI. POINTS TO NOTE (BY THE USER) ..1-19VII. IMAGE FORMATION..........................1-20

A. Outline ...........................................1-20

This chapter introduces the copier’s features and specifications, shows how to operate the copier, andexplains how copies are made.

I. FEATURES

1. It offers 50-sheet copying (A4, horizontal) and 60-sheet copying (A4, horizontal; 1original) using the RDF’s stream reading.

2. It has a reduced rate of jamming, thanks to new pick-up and feeding mechanisms.3 It promises to produce high-quality copies for a long time, which is a prerequisite for

all high-speed copiers.The use of Canon’s proprietary A-Si (amorphous silicon) photosensitive drumensures durability, while its single-component toner projection developingmechanism leads to enhanced image reproduction.

4. It comes with a large-size liquid crystal display for ease of viewing.5. When fitted with a side paper deck (accessory), it will hold as many as 7,550 sheets

(5,550 sheets if NP6250).



1-1

II. SPECIFICATIONS

A. Copier

1. Type

2. Mechanisms

Copying

Charging

Exposure

Copy densityadjustment

Development

Pick-up Auto

Manual

Transfer

Separation

Cleaning

Fixing

Indirect electrostatographic

Corona

Slit (moving light source)

Automatic or manual

Dry (toner projection)

Multifeeder (5.5 mm deep, 50 sheets of 80 g/m2)

Corona

Corona (static)

Blade

Heating roller (790 W + 410 W; 120V), (1200W; 220/240V)



1-2

Body

Copyboard

Light source

Lens

Photosensitivemedium

Console

Fixed

Halogen lamp (70 V, 265 W)

Zoom

Amorphous silicon (80 mm dia.)

Front cassette (2)Front paper deck (2)

3. Performance



1-3

Original type

Maximum original size

Direct

Reduce I

Reduce II

Reduce III

Reduce IV

Enlarge I

Enlarge II

Enlarge III

Enlarge IV

Zoom

Wait time

First copy

Continuous copying

Copying size

Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.)

A3

1:1

1:0.500

1:0.707

1:0.816

1:0.865

1:2.000

1:1.414

1:1.224

1:1.154

1:0.490 to 2.040 (1% increments)

5 min min. (at 20°C)

3.0 sec (A4, non-AE, right deck pick-up)

999 copies max.

One-sidedA: A3 (max.), A6 vertical (min.; postcard)Inch: 279.4×431 mm (11"×17", max.) STMT (min.)Two-sidedA: A3 (max.), A5 horizontal (min.)Inch: 279.4×431.8 mm (11"×17", max.), STMT horizontal (min.)

Repro-ductionratio

*May be used, but may not feed properly.



1-4

Copypapertype

Cassette pick-up

Front paper deckpick-up

Multifeeder pick-up

Automatic

Multifeeder

Automatic

Multifeeder

• Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTR-R,A5, A5R, STMT, STMTR, Foolscap, GLTR, GLTR-R, KLGL,K-LGL-R, OFFICIO, E-OFFICIO, A-OFFICIO, B-OFFICIO,A-LTR, ALTR-R, A-LGL

• Tracing paper* (SM-1)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R

• Colored paper (Canon-recommended)B4, A4

• Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2)A4, B5, LTR

• Colored paper (Canon-recommended)A4

• Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4, B5R, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTR-R,STMT-R*, postcard

• Tracing paper* (SM-1)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R

• Transparency (Canon-recommended)A4, LTR

• Colored paper* (Canon-recommended)B4, A4

• Label sheet (Canon-recommended)A4, LTR

• Thick paper* (91 to 200 g/m2)

• Plain paper* (64 to 90 g/m2)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTR-R,A5, STMT

• Colored paper (Canon-recommended)B4, A4

• Plain paper* (64 to 90 g/m2)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTR-R,STMT-R, A5, STMT


• Plain paper* (64 to 90 g/m2)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTR-R,A5, STMT

• Color paper* (Canon-recommended)B4, A4

Plain paper* (64 to 90 g/m2)A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTR-R,STMT-R, A5, STMT


Two-sidedcopying

Overlaycopying

Tray

Non-image width

Auto clear

Auto power-off

Accessory



1-5

Claw

Cassette

Front paper deck

Copy tray

Leading edge

Trailing edge

Left/right (1st side)

Left/right (2nd side)

None

55 mm deep (about 500 sheets each of 80 g/m2 paper)

162 mm deep(about 1500 sheets each of 80 g/m2)

250 sheets (approx.; A3, of 80 g/m2)

For Direct, 4.5 ±1.5 mm (for non-default, overlay,two-sided, 4.5 ±1.5 mm)

2.0 ±1.5 mm (non-default, overlay, two-sided, 2.0±1.0 mm); if with RDF-D1, 2.0 ±1.8 mm

2.75 ±2.5 mm; if with RDF-D1, 2.75 ±2.75 mm

2.75 ±2.5 mm; if with RDF-D1, 2.75 ±2.75 mm

Provided (2 min standard; may be variedbetween 0 and 1 hr in 10-min increments; maybe varied between 1 and 2 hr in 1-hr increments)

Provided (1 hr standard; may be varied between0 and 1 hr in 10-min increments; may be variedbetween 1 and 2 hr in 1-hr increments)

• Sorter-G1 • Control Card-V• Paper Deck-A1 • Copy Data Controller-A1• Stapler Sorter-E2• Remote Diagnostic Device II

4. Others



1-6

Temperature 7.5° to 32.5°C/45.5°C to 90.5°F

Humidity 5% to 80% RH

NP6350 NP6251

120V NGT XXXXX –220/ 240V PCV XXXXX –220/ 240V (UK) – DJB XXXXX220/ 240V (CA) RBK XXXXX –220/ 240V (FRN) – BJB XXXXX220/ 240V (GER) – AJB XXXXX220/ 240V (AMS) – UCJ XXXXX, CJB XXXXX

Atmospheric 810.6 to 1013.3 hPa (0.8 to 1.0 atm)

pressure

Operatingenvironment

Power supply

Powerconsumption

Noise

Dimensions

Ozone

Weight

Consumables

Maximum 1.5 kW or less

Standby 0.3 kWh (approx.; reference only)

Copying 71 dB or less (sound power level by ISO)

Standby Satisfies standard of 50 dB or less

Width 643mm/25.3 in

Depth 725mm/28.5 in

Height 1169mm/46.0 in

Copy paper Keep wrapped to protect against humidity.

Toner Avoid direct sunshine; keep at 40°C, 85% or under.

210 kg/ 462.8lb (approx.; w/ RDF)

0.05 ppm or less (avr over 8 hr)

Continuous1.2 kWh (approx.; reference only)

copying

Table 1-201 Copying Speed (copier only)



1-7

Ratio

Direct

Reduce

Enlarge

I(50%)

II(70%)

III(81%)

IV(86%)

I(200%)

II(141%)

III(122%)

IV(115%)

Copies/min

25

50

33

50

39

44

43

36

41

50

38

32

50

24

25

33

46

33

25

50

Copy paper

A3

A4

B4

B5

A4R

B5R

A5R

A4R

B5R

A5

A4R

B4

B5

A3

A3

B4

A4

B4

A3

A4

Size

A3(297 × 420mm)

A4(210 × 297mm)

B4(257 × 364mm)

B5(182 × 257mm)

A4R(297 × 210mm)

B5R(257 × 182mm)

A3 Õ 5R

A3 Õ A4R

B4 Õ B5R

A4 Õ A5

B4 Õ A4R

A3 Õ B4

A4 Õ B5

A5R Õ A3

A4R Õ A3

B5R Õ B4

A5 Õ A4

A4R Õ B4

B4 Õ A3

B5 Õ A4

Table 1-202 Copying Speed (copier only)

Specifications subject to change without notice.



1-8

Ratio

Direct

Reduce

Enlarge

I(50%)

II(64.7%)

III(73.3%)

I(200%)

II(129.4%)

III(121.4%)

Copies/min

50

25

34

41

50

43

38

39

24

25

25

Copy paper

LTR

11" × 17"

LGL

LTRR

STMT/STMTR

STMTR

LTRR

LTRR

11" × 17"

11" × 17"

11" × 17"

Size

LTR

11" × 17"

LGL

LTRR

STMT/STMTR

11" × 17" Õ STMTR

11" × 17" Õ LTRR

11" × 15" Õ LTRR

STMR Õ 11" × 17"

LTRR Õ 11" × 17"

LGL Õ 11" × 17"



1-9

B. Paper Deck-A1

Specifications subject to change without notice.

Item

Pick-up

Paper compartment

Copy paper

Paper volume

Serial number

Paper size alteration

Dimensions

Weight

Power supply

Operating environmentTemperatureHumidity

Specifications

Clawless (retard)

Side tray

• Plain paper (64 to 90 g/m2)A4, B5, LTR

• Colored paper (Canon-recommended)A4

385 mm high (stack; about 3,500 sheets of 80 g/m2 paper)

ZHY XXXXX (A/B), ZHZ XXXXX (Inch)

By size guide plate (in steps), in service mode (*5*)

329 (W) × 583 (D) × 680 (H) mm/13.0 (W) × 23.0 (D) × 26.8 (H) in

33.5 kg/73.8 lb

DC from copier

Same as copier



1-10

III. NAMES OF PARTS

A. External View

Figure 1-301

q r

uio!0!1!2!3

w e t y

q Copy trayw RDFe Toner supply mouthr Original tray/Instructions trayt Power switchy Multifeederu Upper right door

i Lower right dooro Cassette 4!0 Cassette 3!1 Right deck!2 Left deck!3 Front door



1-11

Figure 1-302

!8!9@0@1

!4 !5 !7!6

!4 Fixing assembly knob!5 Fixing feeding assembly!6 Fixing/feeding assembly lever!7 Toner hopper

!8 Holding tray feeding assembly knob!9 Holding tray feeding assembly@0 Holding tray assembly@1 Holding tray knob



1-12

B. Cross Section

1. Copier

Figure 1-303

q w er t y u i o !0 !1 !2 !3 !4 !5 !6 !7 !8

!9@0@111@2@3@4@5@6@7@8@9

q No. 3 mirrorw No. 2 mirrore Heat absorbing glassr Scanning lampt No. 1 mirrory Fixing assemblyu Copyboard glassi Fixing webo Lens!0 Drum cleaning

assembly!1 Pre-exposure lamp

!2 Primary chargingassembly

!3 Potential sensor!4 No. 6 mirror!5 Blanking exposure

lamp!6 Developing cylinder!7 No. 4 mirror!8 No. 5 mirror!9 Multifeeder pick-up

roller@0 Roller electrode

@1 Pre-transfer coronaassembly

@2 Registration roller@3 Transfer/separation@4 Feeding belt@5 Duplexing feeding

unit assembly@6 Holding tray@7 Fixing roller@8 Holding tray pick-up

(crescent) roller@9 Delivery roller



1-13

IV. OPERATING THE MACHINE

A. Control Panel

Figure 1-401

Figure 1-402

Ready to copy.

% LTRREDUCE DIRECT ENLARGE

LIGHT DARK

PAPERSELECT

FIT IMAGE ZOOM

SORTER 2-SIDED

SPECIAL FEATURESA

!4

Pre-Heat key

Image contrast keyReset key

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

10 0 C

?

CGuide key

User mode key

Interrupt key

Start key

Stop key

C

q w r ty u ie

o!0!1!2!3

q Touch panel displayw Guide keye Reset keyr Numeric keypadt Image contrast keyy Pre-Heat keyu Stop key

i Toner supply moutho Pilot lamp!0 Start key!1 Clear key!2 Interrupt key!3 User mode key!4 Preference key



1-14

B. Extended Modes

Table 1-401

Mode

Auto Start

Pre-Heat

Bind

Frame Erase

Two-Sided Copy

Overlay Copy

Auto Paper Select

Auto Ratio Select

Interrupt

Reduced ImageComposition

Cover mode

ID

Description

Use it while in wait state for automatic start.

Use it to turn off the indicators on the control panel except thePower and the Pre-Heat indicators.

Use it to select right binding, left binding, top binding, or bottombinding.

Use it to select original frame erasing, sheet frame erasing, holeimage erasing, or book frame erasing.

Use it to select “one-sided original to two-sided copy,” “two-sidedoriginal to two-sided copy,” or “two-sided original to one-sidedcopy.”

Use it to make overlay copies.

Use it for automatic selection of copy paper best suited to originalsize and copy size.

Use it for automatic selection of reproduction ratio best suited tooriginal size and copy paper size.

Use it to interrupt on-going continuous copying for a differentoriginal.

Use it to select 2-on-1, 4-on-1, 2-on-1 two-sided, or 2-on-1overlay.

Use it to select cover, back cover, or interleaf (20 sheets or less).

Use it so that copying is possible only in response to a pre-registered ID (300 max.).



1-15

C. User Mode

1. Types of User ModesThe machine provides the following four types of user modes:1. Settings2. Adjust/Clean3. Timer4. Preference

[1] Settings

Table 1-402(a)

Item

Auto Sort

Sorter Front Access

Skip

Feeder ManualFeed Auto Start

Auto CassetteChange/APS

Manual SizeSelection

Descriptions

Use it to enable or disable auto sort mode inresponse to multiple originals (count of 2 or more)when the RDF is used.

When the sorter is connected,ON: Enable sorter auto front access.OFF: Disable sorter auto front access.

Use it to enable or disable skip copying to avoidwrong orientation of mirror originals (holes onodd/even-numbered pages).ON: Enable skip copy.OFF: Disable skip copy.

Use it to enable or disable auto start when the RDFis used for manual feeding (whether copying shouldstart immediately after pulling in an original or aftera press on the Copy Start key).ON: Enable auto start.OFF: Disable auto start.

Use it to enable or disable auto cassettechange/APS when the selected cassette runs out ofcopy paper to a cassette holding same-size paperin continuous copying.ON: Enable auto cassette change/APS.OFF: Disable auto cassette change/APS.

Use it to show or not show the multi feeder sizeinput screen when the multifeeder is selected as thesource of paper.ON: Show size input screen.OFF: Do not show size input screen.

Remarks

Default: ON

Default: ONPaper: A4,B5, LTR inhorizontal feed

Default: ON

Default: ON

Default: ON

Default: OFF



1-16

Table 1-402(b)

Item

Inch Input

Wait TimeIndicator

Buzzer ON/OFF

Just Fit Ratio

Just Fit Center

Just Fit Non-Image

Pre-Heat

Initialize Settings

Standard ModeChange

Descriptions

Use it to enable or disable inch input when selectingbinding width, hole margin width, and zoomprogram.ON: Enable inch input.OFF: Disable inch input.

Use it to show or not show how long the on-goingcopying takes.ON: Show.OFF: Do not show.

Use it to specify whether the buzzer should besounded in response to inputs, warnings, standby,and copying end.ON: Enable the buzzer.OFF: Disable the buzzer.

Use it to select the reproduction ratio for the just fitfunction between 90% and 99% in 1% increments.

Use it to enable or disable centering in just fit mode.ON: Enable centering.OFF: Disable centering.

Use it to enable or disable non-imaging in just fitmode.ON: Enable non-imaging.OFF: Disable non-imaging.

Use it to select a power saving rate in pre-heatmode.10%: at 10%25%: at 25%50%: at 50%No resetting: no saving (at 0%)

Use it to initialize user mode settings.

Use it to store the mode to be selected in responseto a press on the Reset key (or in auto clear). Youmay select factory default as post-initializationmode.

Remarks

Default: OFF

Default: OFF

Default: ON

Default: 93%

Default: ON

Default: OFF

A saving rate isin relation to themachine’s totalconsumption.Default: Noresetting.

DefaultCopy ratio,100%; autopaper select,ON; densitycontrol, manual;copy count, 1.



1-17

[2] Adjust/Clean

Table 1-403

[3] Timer

Table 1-404

Item

Wire Clean

Feeder Clean

Zoom Fine Adjust

Description

Use it to execute automatic cleaning of the primarycharging wire, pre-transfer charging wire, transfercharging wire, or separation charging wire.

Place 10 sheets of blank copy paper in the feeder,and press the OK key.The sheets will be fed in ‘one-sided to one-sided’copying mode, thereby cleaning the separation beltand the feeding roller.

Use it to fine adjust the vertical and the horizontalreproduction ratios in 0.2% increments.Width: –1.0% to +1.0%Unit: 0.2%

Remarks

Item

Auto Clear Time

Auto Power-OffTime

Weekly Timer

Time/Day

Description

Use it to set the auto clear time between 1 and 9min in 1-min increments or between 0 and 50 sec in10-sec increments. Set it to 0 sec to disable theauto clear function.

Use it to set the auto power-off time between 10min and 2 hr in 10-min increments (within 1 hr) or in1-hr increments (1 to 2 hr). You may disable theauto power-off function in service mode.

If ‘no’ is selected, power will not turn offautomatically from Monday through Sunday atspecified times. (Be sure that the machine is set tothe correct time.)

Use it to set the time/day of the week for the built-inclock.

Remarks

At time ofshipment, set to2 min.

At time ofshipment, set to1 hr.

Used for theweekly timer.



1-18

[4] Preferences

Table 1-405

Item

User Customize

Description

Use it to assign specific modes to keys on theStandard screen.

Remarks

2 max.



1-19

V. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE BY THE USER

Advise the user to be sure to clean the following at least once a week:1. Copyboard Glass

Wipe it with a moist cloth; then, dry wipe it.2. RDF Feeding Belt

Wipe it with a cloth moistened with a solution of mild detergent; then, dry wipe it.

VI. POINTS TO NOTE (BY THE USER)

• Handling the Toner BottleInstruct the user to dispose of any empty toner bottle as nonflammable material.

Do NOT throw the cartridges into fire; it can burst or explode.Caution:!



1-20

VII. IMAGE FORMATION

A. Outline

The machine uses an electrophotographic method, and is constructed as shown in Figure 1-601.

In addition to the mechanisms shown, the machine is equipped with an automatic controlfunction to control the potential of the drum surface.

Figure 1-601

Copyboard glass

Scanninglamp Lens

Fixing assembly

Cleaning assembly

Pre-exposure LED lamp

Primary charging assembly

Blanking exposure LED lamp

Developing assembly

Roller electrodePre-transfer charging assembly

Pick-up (multifeeder)

Pick-up (cassette re-pick up)Transfer charging

assemblySeparation charging assembly

Separation claw

The machine forms an image using the following nine steps:Step 1 Pre-exposureStep 2 Primary charging (positive DC)Step 3 Image exposureStep 4 Development (AC + positive DC)Step 5 Pre-transfer charging (AC + negative DC)Step 6 Transfer (positive DC)Step 7 Separation (AC + positive DC)Step 8 FixingStep 9 Drum cleaning

Figure 1-602

2. Primary charging

1. Pre-exposure

4. Development

Delivery 8. Fixing 7. Separation

9. Drum cleaning

3. Image exposure

Flow of copy paper

Rotation of drum

Multifeeder6. Transfer

Pick-up

Registration

Static latent image formation block

5. Pre-transfer charging



1-21



1-22


CHAPTER 2

BASIC OPERATION

I. BASIC MECHANISMS .......................2-1A. Functional Construction.................2-1B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry ...2-2C. Basic Sequence of Operations......2-4D. Main Motor (M1) Control Circuitry..2-11

E. Inputs to the DC Controller............2-13F. Outputs from the DC Controller ...2-21G. Inputs to and Outputs from

Accessories ...................................2-32

This chapter provides outlines of the copier’s various mechanical workings. (Note that a single rotationof the drum takes about 0.79 sec.)

I. BASIC MECHANISMS

A. Functional Construction

The machine can be divided into four blocks: pick-up/feeding, exposure, imageformation, and control.

Figure 2-101

Control system

Copyboard

Scanning assembly

Surface potential control

assembly

Primary charging

Photosensitive drum

Developing assembly

Drum cleaning assembly

Toner collecting assembly

Feeding assembly

Pick-up control

assembly

Multifeeder

Holding tray inlet assembly

Cassette/paper deck

Pick-up feeding assembly

Delivery control

assembly

Exposure system

Holding tray

Holding tray feeding assembly

Control panel

Image formation system

Copy tray

Control circuitry

Fixing assembly

Separation Transfer

Optical assembly



2-1

B. Outline of the Electrical Circuitry

The machine’s major electrical mechanisms are controlled by the microprocessor onthe DC controller PCB:

• Controlling copying sequence• Controlling high-voltage• Controlling scanner drive• Controlling pick-up/feeding• Controlling the lens motor (X, Y)• Controlling the blanking exposure LED• Controlling the analog signal inputs

Thermistor signalPotential sensor signalAmbient temperature signalManual feed size signal

The machine’s control panel is equipped with a dedicated CPU (Q937) whichcontrols the keys, LEDs, and LCD on the control panel.

The machine communicates with the RDF and the sorter using the communicationsIC on its DC controller PCB and the communications IC (IPC) on the controller PCB ofeach accessory. (IPC communication 2).

Figure 2-102 is a block diagram which shows the relationship between the machine’smajor circuits.



2-2

Figure 2-102

Sensors/switches

Sensors/switches

IPC

IPC

Micro-processor

Micro-processor

RDF controller PCB

Sorter controller PCB Stapler sorter

RDF

Holding tray driver

PCB

Lamp regulator

HVT

Holding tray unit

Fan

Scanning lamp

Charging assemblyDeveloping cylinder

Roller electrode

LED

Lens motor

SolenoidClutch

Heaters

Main motorScanner motor

Motor driver PCB

AC driver PCB

Sensors/switches

Control panel

(CPU)

Q156(CPU)

Q160Q161

(ROM)

Q136Q137Q138Q162

(RAM)

Q2001

<Loads><Control>

<Sensors>DC controller PCB

Q158(IPC)

Side deck driver PCB

Sensors/switches

Side paper deck

Potential sensor

Potential measurement

circuit



2-3

C. Basic Sequence of Operations

1. Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On (1/2)When the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 75°C or less and, in addition, the

ambient temperature is 17°C or more at power-on,

Figure 2-103

Primary, transfer, separation, pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor

INTR

Power switchON

Fixing sub heater (H2)

Main motor (M1)


Developing bias DC

Developing bias AC

Pre-transfer charging assembly DC

Pre-transfer charging assembly AC

Transfer charging assembly

Separation charging assembly DC

Separation charging assembly AC

Pre-exposure LED

Blanking exposure LED

*+,-.//00

Fixing main heater(H1)

Surface potential control timing

Scanning lamp (LA1)*1 *1

VD VL1 VL2

*2

*1

WMUP

195°C

CNTR1 CNTR2 LSTR STBY

About 10 sec after end of CNTR2

Controlled to 200°C

*3

*1 During potential control (CNTR1, CNTR2), VD and VL1 are measured; therefore, blanking exposure lamp LEDs corresponding to the potential sensor are turned OFF.

*2 If the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100°C or less when the power switch is turnedON, the primary/pre-transfer/transfer/separation charging wire is cleaned. (Cleaning is also executed every 2,000 copies.)

*3 Wait-up state ends in 10 sec after the end of potential control to speed up warm-up time.



2-4

2. Basic Sequence of Operations at Power-On (2/2)When the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 75°C or less and, in addition, the

ambient temperature is 17°C or less at power-on,

Figure 2-104

Charging wire cleaning motor

INTR

PowerON


Main motor (M1)


Developing bias DC

Developing bias AC






Pre-exposure LED


Fixing main heater (H1)

Surface potential control

Scanning lamp (LA1)

VD VL1 VL2

WMUP

195°C(200°C)

CNTR1 CNTR2 LSTR STBY

200°C(205°C)

WMUPR

Controlled to 200°C(210°C)

Differences from Sequence 1/2• WMUPR is executed until the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 200°C (210°C)

without ending LSTR in 10 sec after potential control (CNTR1, CNTR2).• The surface temperature of the fixing roller is 75°C or less at power-on and the ambient

temperature is 17°C or less for the value within parentheses; for the value outside parentheses, if the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 75°C or more.



2-5

Table 2-101



2-6

WMUP (warm up)

INTR(initial totalrotation)

CNTR1 (controlrotation 1)


LSTR (last rotation)

STBY (standby)

Period

From when thepower switch isturned on to whenthe surfacetemperature of theupper fixing rollerreaches 195°C.

From when WMUPends until whenCNTR1 starts afterthe surfacetemperature of theupper fixing rollerhas reached 195°C.

For about 5 secafter the end ofINTR.

For about 5 secafter the end ofCNTR1.

While thephotosensitive drummakes a singlerotation.

From when LSTRends to when theCopy Start key ispressed or thepower switch isturned off.

Function

• Waits until thefixing assemblywarms up.

• Evens out the sur-face temperatureof the fixing roller.

• Discharges copypaper, if any.

Measures the drumsurface potentialVD.

Measures the drumsurface potentialVL.

Rids the surface ofstatic charges aspost-treatment.

• Waits for a presson the Copy Startkey or anoperation key.

Remarks

• If the temperatureof the fixing rolleris 100°C or less atpower-on, the pri-mary/pre-trans-fer/separation/transfer chargingwire is cleaned.

• The lens moves toA4 wide (297 mm)Direct position.

Determines thevalue of the devel-oping bias (DCcomponent) forcopying accordingto the measurementof VL2.

• In 2 min after theend of LSTR, thecontrol panelchanges tostandard modeindication.

• If the Copy Startkey is pressed(auto start) duringa wait period,copying starts atthe end of LSTR.

WAIT(wait)

3. Basic Sequence of Operations

Figure 2-105

Copy Start keyON


Developing bias DC

Developing bias AC






Pre-exposure LED


Scanning lamp (LA1)

Main motor (M1)

Developing clutch (CL1)

Scanner motor (M3)

STBY INTR CNTR1 AER SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBYCNTR2

*1

Forward Reverse

*1 Turns off the blanking exposure LEDs corresponding to the potential sensor for potential measurement (VD, VL1, VL2).



2-7

Table 2-102



2-8

From when the CopyStart key is pressed towhen CNTR1 starts.

For about 5 sec afterthe end of INTR.

For about 5 sec afterthe end of CNTR1.

From when thescanner has movedforward about 120 mmto when it returns tohome position.

While the scanner ismoving forward:• The distance the

scanner travelsforward variesaccording to copypaper size and ratio.

• The speed at whichthe scanner travelsforward variesaccording to ratio.

While the scanner ismoving in reverse.

From the end ofSCRV to when themain motor stops.

Period Remarks

• Executed when mov-ing the lens. If thelens fails to reach aspecific position withina specific period oftime, INTR is contin-ued until the lens iscorrectly positioned.

Before executing poten-tial control, the scannermotor is rotated inreverse to return thescanner to home posi-tion without fail.

Determines the value ofthe developing bias (DCcomponent) for copyingaccording to themeasurement of VL2.

• Executed only in AEmode.

• The registration signalis generated to movethe copy paper to thetransfer assembly.

• The pick-up signal isgenerated to pick-upthe second sheet.

Discharges the lastsheet.

Function

Stabilizes the sensitivityof the drum inpreparation for copying.

Controls the drumsurface potential VD.

Controls the drumsurface potential VL.

Measures the density ofthe original while thescanner is moving inreverse.

The scanning lampilluminates the original,and the reflected opticalimage is projected tothe photosensitive drumthrough mirrors andlenses.

• Returns the scannerto home position inpreparation for nextcopying.

Rids the surface of thedrum of charges as posttreatment.

INTR (initialrotation)



AER (AE rotation)

SCFW (scannerforward)

SCRV (scannerreverse)

LSTR (lastrotation)

4. Basic Sequence of Operations in Page Separation ModeWhen making copies in page separation mode, the original on the left on the

copyboard is copied (SCFW1) and then the original on the right (SCFW2).If the copy count is ‘2’ or higher, the original on the left on the copyboard is copied

for as many copies as specified, and then the original on the right for as many copies.In page separation mode, the copier’s AE mode (if ON) is used. The density of the

original in such a case is over a distance 120 mm from the leading edge of the original;the originals on both left and right sides on the copyboard are copied based on theresulting measurements.

Reference:If the conditions for potential control given on p. 4-1 are met, potential controlrotation (CNTR1, 2) is executed after INTR.

Figure 2-106

Copy Start keyON


Separation charging assembly

Blanking exposure LED lamp

Scanner


Scanning lamp (LA1)

Main motor (M1)

INTR AER SCFW2

Reverse

SCFW1SCRV1 LSTR STBYSSCRV2

SCDP

Pre-transfer charging assembly

Right deck/cassette pick-up clutch (CL14)

Forward



2-9

Note: For copy sequences other than the above, see Table 2-102.

Table 2-103



2-10

While the scanner ismoving forward• The distance over

which the scannermoves forwardvaries according tocopy paper size andratio.

From when thescanner starts tomove in reverse towhen the copy paperis delivered.

While the scanner ismoving forward.• The distance over

which the scannertravels variesaccording to copypaper size and ratio.

From when thescanner starts tomove in reverse towhen the developingclutch turns off.

Period Remarks

• The registration signalis generated to movethe copy paper to thetransfer assembly.

• The pick-up signal isgenerated to pick upthe next sheet.

• The registration signalis generated so thatthe leading edge ofthe image of theoriginal on the rightmatches the copypaper with referenceto the SCDP signal.

Function

Illuminates the originalon the left on the copy-board with the scanninglamp, and the reflectedoptical image is project-ed on the photosensi-tive drum throughmirrors and lenses.

• Returns the scannerto home position inpreparation for thenext copy.

• Transfers the tonerimage on the drum tocopy paper.

Illuminates the originalon the right on thecopyboard with thescanning lamp, and thereflected optical imageis projected on thephotosensitive drumthrough mirrors andlenses.

• Returns the scannerto home position inpreparation for thenext copy.

• Transfers the tonerimage on the drum tocopy paper.

SCFW1 (scannerforward 1;copyingoriginal onleft)

SCRV1 (scannerforward 1)

SCFW2 (scannerforward 2;copyingoriginal onright)

SCRV (scannerreverse 2)

D. Main Motor (M1) Control Circuitry

1. OutlineFigure 2-107 is a block diagram showing the main motor control circuitry, which has

the following functions:q Turning off and on the main motor.w Controlling the main motor to a specific speed.

The main motor is a DC motor equipped with a built-in clock pulse generator whichgenerates clock pulses (MMCLK) when the motor rotates in numbers corresponding tothe revolution.

The main motor control PCB uses these clock pulses to ensure that the motor rotatesat a specific speed at all times.

These clock pulses are also sent to the DC controller PCB after its frequency isdivided to 1/4.

Figure 2-107

DC controllerPCB

Q156Master

Main motor control PCB

Main motor Rotor

Hall IC

V

W

Motor driver circuit

MMCLK

Frequency comparison

signal

Phase comparison

signal

Mixing

Switch circuit

Phase comparison

Frequency comparison

Reference signal generator circuitry

1/4 divisionB3 M1FG 2

B4 M1ON

1

J602

U

J111

Clock pulse generator



2-11

2. Operationa. Turning On and Off

When the main motor drive signal (M1ON) goes ‘1’, the phase comparison circuit andthe frequency circuitry shown in Figure 2-107 send control signals.

The control signals from both circuits are combined and sent to the motor drivecircuit, turning on the motor drive circuit and rotating the main motor.

When M1ON goes ‘0’, on the other hand, the output of the control signal stops andremains so, keeping the motor stationary.b. Controlling to a Specific Speed

The rotation of the machine’s main motor is controlled to a specific speed.The reference signal generating circuit on the motor control PCB generates

reference pulses which are sent to the phase comparison circuit and the frequencycomparison circuit.

The phase comparison circuit generates control signals (phase comparison signals)so that the phase of the clock pulses (MMCLK) from the main motor matches that of thereference signals.

Likewise, the frequency comparison circuit generates control signals (frequencycomparison signals) so that the frequency of the clock pulses (MMCLK) from the mainmotor matches that of the reference pulses.

After both phase comparison signal and frequency comparison signal have beencombined, they are sent to the motor drive circuit for control of the power to the mainmotor, thereby keeping the revolution to a specific number.

3. Detecting an ErrorWhen an excess load is imposed on the motor for some reason, the DC controller

PCB will detect a fault in the clock pulses from the main motor and, as a result, willindicate ‘E010’ and an error message on the control panel.



2-12

E. Inputs to the DC Controller

Inputs to the DC controller (1/8)

Figure 2-108

SCHP

J728-1-2-3

J727-3-2-1

+5V

PS1

J111A-1-2-3

SCDP1

J729-1-2-3

J727-6-5-4

+5V

PS3

J111A-4-5-6

SCDP2

J730-1-2-3

J727-9-8-7

+5V

PS4

J111A-7-8-9

CBCC

J776-1-2-3

J775-5-4-3

+5V

PS5

J112A-5-4-3

LXHP

J2742-1-2-3

J736-9-8-7

+5V

PS6

J110A-9-8-7

LYHP

J744-1-2-3

J738-3-2-1

+5V

PS7

J110A-3-2-1

PS8D

J869-1-2-3

J868-1-2-3

+5V

PS8

J119A-5-4-3

PS9D

J7720-3-2-1

J771-1-2-3

+5V

PS9 J113B-12

J739-9-8-7

-2-1

J203-3-2-1

When PS9 has detected paper, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS9.)


When the lens is at Y home posiion, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS7.)

When the lens is at X home position, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS6.)

When the copyboard cover/RDF is closed, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS5.)

When the scanning lamp is at image leading edge 2, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS4.)

When the scanning lamp is at image leading edge 1, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS3.)

When the scanner is at home position, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS1.)

DC controller PCB

Scanner home position sensor

Scanner original leading edge 1 sensor


Copyboard cover open/closed sensor

Lens X home position sensor

Lens Y home position sensor

Holding tray feeding assembly 1 paper sensor

Holding tray feeding assembly 2 paper sensor

J8671-3



2-13

Inputs to the DC controller (2/8)

Figure 2-109

Holding tray control PCB


PS10

PS11

PS12

PS14

PS15

PS17

PS19

EXDPD

+5V

CBOP

J2743-1-2-3

J2755-14-13-12

+5V

J108A-14-13-12

IDPD

J2751-1-2-3

J2755-27-28-29

+5V

J108B-13-12-11

PS14D

J762-1-2-3

J204-4-5-6

J113A-3

PS15D

J761-1-2-3

J204-7-8-9

J758-7-8-9

J113B-10

PS17D

J763-1-2-3

J204-1-2-3

J113B-11

HPLPD

J2062-1-2-3

J207-3-2-1

J113B-6

J2757-5-4-3

J742-3-2-1

J758-4-5-6

J758-1-2-3

J2071-3-2-1

J7581-3-2-1

J875-3-2-1

J7581-6-5-4

J754-3-2-1

J202A

-12

J202B

-4

J202B

-3

DC controller PCB

External delivery sensor

Fixing cleaningbelt length sensor

Internal delivery sensor

Holding tray registrationpaper sensor

Holding tray inlet paper sensor

Holding tray pick-up sensor

Holding tray re-circulating lever home position sensor

J2747-1-2-3

J2755-32-33-34

J108B-8-7-6



When the fixing cleaning belt is shorter than the specified length, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS11.)

When PS12 has detected copy paper, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS12.)

When copy paper is present at registration of the holding tray, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS14.)

When copy paper is present at the inlet of the holding tray, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS15.)

When copy paper is at the pick-up assembly of the holding tray, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS17.)

When PS19 has detected the light-blocking plate, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS19.)



2-14

Inputs to the DC Controller (3/8)

Figure 2-110

PS20

PS21

PS22

PS23

PS24

PS25

PS26

PS27

PS28

PS29

Holding tray Y home position sensor

Holding tray X home position sensor

Pick-up vertical path 0 sensor

Cassette 3 lifter position sensor

Cassette 3 paper sensor


Cassette 4 lifter position sensor

Cassette 4 paper sensor

Multifeeder paper sensor

Registration paper sensor

J752-1-2-3

J208-3-2-1

J2081-3-2-1

J202A

-5

J113A-10 HTYHP

J113B-1

J202B

-13J210-3

-2-1

J750-1-2-3

HTXHP

J791-1-2-3

J789-6-5-4

J115B-8-7-6

J2741-1-2-3

J2756-10-9-8

J108A-8-7-6

J2738-7-6-5

MFS

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

RGPD

PS24D

C3LTP

C3PD

PS27D

C4LTP

C4PD

+5V

+5V

J786-1-2-3

J797-3-2-1

J116B-8-7-6

J807-1-2-3

J805-5-4-3

J117A-5-4-3

J808-1-2-3

-8-7-6

J117A-8-7-6

J811-1-2-3

J809-5-4-3

J117B-5-4-3

J814-1-2-3

J812-5-4-3

J130A-5-4-3

J815-1-2-3

-8-7-6

J130A-8-7-6


DC controller PCB

When the side guide is at PS20, '1'.(When the side guide is at both ends.)

When the rear partition is at PS21,'1'.(When the rear partition is at the rear end.)

When paper is present at multifeeder, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS22.)


When PS 24 has detected copy paper, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS24.)

When PS25 has detected the lifter, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS25.)

When PS26 has detected paper, '1'.(When the light-detecting plate is at PS26.)


When PS28 has detected the lifter, '1'.(When the light-detecting plate is at PS28.)




2-15


Figure 2-111

PS30

PS31

PS32

PS33

PS34

PS35

PS36

PS37

PS38

PS39

J818-1-2-3

J795-1-2-3

J796-1-2-3

J821-1-2-3

J847-1-2-3

J848-1-2-3

J8491-1-2-3

J798-1-2-3

J797-9-8-7

J116B-14-13-12

J799-1-2-3

-6-5-4

J116B-11-10-9

J849-1-2-3

J8442-3-2-1

J121B-3-2-1

-3-2-1

-9-8-7

J121B-11-10-9

J844-3-4-5

J121A-8-7-6

-6-7-8

J121A-11-10-9

-3-2-1

J841-3-2-1

J119A-8-7-6

-8-7-6

J116A-8-7-6

J793-5-4-3

J116A-3-4-5

J816-5-4-3

J130B-5-4-3

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

PS30D

J8211

RDLTP

RDPD

LDLTP/C2LTP

LDPD

PS36D

RDEOP*

LDEL

RDEL

PS33D

J8444 J8443

When the left deck has reached the limiter, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS39.)


Right deck lifter position sensor

Right deck paper sensor


Left deck lifter position sensor

Left deck paper sensor


Right deck open/closed sensor

Left deck limiter sensor

Right deck limiter sensor

DC controller PCB








When the right deck has reached the limiter, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS37.)

When the right deck is open, '0'. (When the light-blocking plate is at PS38.)



2-16


Figure 2-112

PS40

PS41

PS42

PS46

PS47

PS48

PS49

PS50

PS51

PS52

PS53

J845-1-2-3

J844-3-2-1

J121A-3-2-1

J839-1-2-3

J838-5-4-3

J119B-5-4-3

J840-1-2-3

-8-7-6

J119B-8-7-6

J725-1-2-3

J7252-1-2-3

J105A-10-9-8

J2748-1-2-3

J7255-35-36-37

J108B-5-4-3

J7741-1-2-3

J7741-3-2-1

J114-15-14-13

J8492-1-2-3

J8442-6-5-4

J121B-6-5-4

J1811-1-2-3

J809-8-7-6

J117B-8-7-6

J1818-1-2-3

J816-8-7-6

J130B-8-7-6

J7445-1-2-3

J2755-20-19-18

J108A-20-19-18

J957-1-2-3

J2756-5-4-3

J108A-3-2

J108B-20

J103B-7

-8

-9

-10

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+5V

+24V

LDEOP*/C2SS

RUPDOP*

RLWDOP

MFDC

FXDEL

LEXTPD

C3SS

C4SS

PS52D

FFUS

POTONPOT

SCLK

Potential measurement PCB

Sensor

Left deck open/closed sensor

Upper right door sensor

Lower right door sensor

Multifeeder door sensor

Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor

Scanner locked sensor

Left deck outlet paper sensor

Cassette 3 open/closed sensor

Cassette 4 open/closed sensor

Claw jam sensor

Fixing/feeding unit sensor

Potential measurement sensor

DC controller PCB

When the left deck is open, '0'. (When the light-blocking plate is at PS40.)

When the right door (upper) is open, '0'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS41.)

When the right door (lower) is open, '0'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS42.)

When the door of the multifeeder is closed, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS46.)

When paper is present at the outlet of the fixing assembly, '1'.(When copy paper is present at PS47.)

When the scanner locking solenoid (SL1) has turned on, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS48.)

When paper is present at the outlet of the left deck pick-up assembly, '1'.(When paper is present at PS49.)

When the grip of the cassette 3 is held, '1'.

When the grip of the cassette 4 is held, '1'.

When paper is present over the sensor, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at PS52.)

When the fixing/feeding unit (lever) is set, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is not at PS53.)

See p. 4-4.



2-17

Inputs to the DC Controller(6/8)

Figure 2-113

J738-13-12-11-10

J714-2

-1

FDODJ104A-4

-3

J745-3

-2

-1

J738-6

-5

-4

+5V

DSZ1

J110B-6

-5

-4

J746-3

-2

-1

J738-9

-8

-7

+5V

DSZ2

J110B-9

-8

-7

J747-4-3-2-1

+5V

DSZ3BDSZ3A

J110B-13-12-11-10

J921-2

-1SSWON*J106B-5

-6

J780-1

-3WTFL*J114B-1

-2

J7251-1

-2HV24VUJ304-4

-5

SW2

DS1

DS2

DS3

SW04

MSW4

MSW5

DC controller PCB

When the front door is open, '1'.

Varies according to the size of the original.



When the service switch is pressed, '0'.

When the waste toner feeding screw is locked, '0'.('E013' is indicated.)

When 24 VU is supplied, '1'.

Front doorswitch

Original size detection 1



Service switch

Waste toner feeding screwlocked detection

Multifeeder door switch detection



2-18


Figure 2-114

MFPW

C3PW

C4PW

HTCNT*

SVR1

SVR2

SVR3

J789-3-2-1

J115B-3-4-5

J826-1-2-3

J117B-11-10-9

J828-1-2-3

J117A-13-12-11

J202-1 J113A-14

+5V

+5V

+5V

J792-1-2-3

TEP*

DTEP*

TS1

TS2

J721-1-2-3

J770-5-6-7

J105A-5-6-7

J722-1-2-3

J106B-7-8-9

+5V

+5V

Multifeeder paper width detection

Cassette 3 paper width detection

Cassette 4 paper width detection

Hopper toner sensor

Developing assembly toner level detection

Holding tray unit detection

DC controller PCB

Varies according to the size of copy paper.



When the level of toner drops below a specific level, '0'.

When the level of toner drops below a specific level, '0'.

When the holding tray unit is slid into the copier, '0'.



2-19


Figure 2-115

TH1

C3PL0C3PL1

C4PL0C4PL1

4C3KSW*

TH1

HUM2

HUM1

J827-4-1-2-3

+5V

+5V

J122B-4-1-2-3

J119B-2

-1

J2745-2

-1

J2757-6

-7

J8492-4-5

J116B-2-1

+5V

J829-4-1-2-3

J122A-4-1-2-3

J108A-15

-16

TH2TH2J2721-1

-2

J2757-8

-9

J108A-9

-17

+5V

-1-2-3

-5-4-3

THHUM1

SV2

SV1Cassette 3 paper length detection

Cassette 4 paper length detection

4-cassette/front paper deck type identification jumper wire (part of copier harness)

Fixing assembly main thermistor

Fixing assembly sub thermistor

Environment sensor

DC controller PCB

Varies according to the length of copy paper.

Varies according to the length of copy paper.

When the 4-cassette type is used, '0'.

When the temperature of the fixing roller increases, the voltage decreases.(analog signal)

When the temperature of thefixing roller increases, the voltage decreases.(analog signal)

When the temperature inside the machine increases, the voltage decreases.(analog signal)

When the humidity inside the machine increases, the voltage decreases.(analog signal)



2-20

F. Outputs from the DC Controller

Outputs from the DC Controller (1/11)

Figure 2-116

CB1

Scanning lampLA1

Thermal fuseTP2

ThermistorTH

Drum heaterH3

Thermal fuseTP3

Drum heater control

PCB

Thermal switchTP1

Cassette heater

Fixing heater (main)H1

Fixing heater (sub)H2 (120V model only)

Power switchSW1

Power unit

FDOD

DC controller PCB

PWOFF*

SW1ON*

RL401D*

24VA38VCHK*0V

LAON

PWMCONCVRON

CHON

DHRD

MHOND

SHOND

SHRD

Lamp regulator

MHRD

LF1

SW2

SW3

J714-2 -1

J104A-4-3

-7-8

J716-2 -1

J5-4

-3

J5-1 J5-2

-5

-6

-2

-5

-6

J6-1

+12V

5V

-3

-3

J302-1

-3

J301-1

J301-5

-1-2-3

-9-8-7

J503

-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-9

-8

-7

-6

-5

J111BJ501-4

-6

-3

-1

J2-2

J2-1

J4-2

-1

J3-2

-1

J7-1

-2

J01-5-6

-3

-1

J1-4

-8

-2

-6

-1

-2

J641-3

-4

-8

-4

-7

-6

J642

-2

-6

-3

-1

-4

-5

-9

-3J643-1 -7

-5

Front door switch

Drum heater

J311-4

-5

J102A-6

-5

J102B

AC

driv

er P

CB

When '1', the front door is open.

When '0', the power switch is OFF.

When the power switch is ON, '0'.

When '0', the power supply unit internal relay is OFF.

When '0', 38 V is OFF.

See p. 4-6.

See p. 4-22.

See p. 6-5.

(100V model only)



2-21


Figure 2-117

M1

M3

J112B-2

-1

-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

-3

J778-3

-2

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-10

-11

-12

-13

-4

J632-11

-12

-9

-8

-7

-6

-5

-4

-3

-2

-1

-10

M3FTM3CLM3BRKM3ONM3F/RM3MD2M3MD1M3MD0M3FGM3FS

J631-1

-2

38V

0V

From power supply unit

Scanner motor

M2M2BRKM2FGM2H/LM2ON

Pick-up motor

J612-1

-3

-8

-7

-6

-5

-4

-2

J114B-10

-12

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

-11

5V

5V

5V

5V

M1FG

M1ON

J611-1

-2

38V

0V


J601-1

-2

38V

0V


DC controller PCB

J111B-2

-3

-4

-1

J602-12

-11

-14

-13

J733-3

-4

-5

-2

Main motor



2-22


Figure 2-118

M4

J741-1

-2-3

-4

-5-6

M5

J740-1

-2-3

-4

-5-6

Lens (Y) motor

M6J2737-1

-2

Transfer/separation charging wire cleaning motor

J739

DC controller PCB

J736

J110A-3

-6

-1

-2

-4

-5

M4_AM4_A*M4_BM4_B*

X-HOLD

While M16 is rotating, alternates between '1' and '0'.(pulse signal)

J110A-12

-15

-10

-11

-13

-14

M5_A

M5_A*

M5_B

M5_B*

Y-HOLD

While M17 is rotating, alternates between '1' and '0'.(pulse signal)

J736

J2756

J108A-1

-2

-1

-2TSCLM1

TSCLM2

Lens (X) motor

When '0', M6 rotates CW (forward).When '1', M6 rotates CCW (reverse).



2-23


Figure 2-119

Holding tray re-circulating lever motor

Holding tray (X) motor

Holding tray (Y)motor

DC controller PCB

When '1', M7 turns on.M7

M8

M8_AWhile the motor is rotating, alternates between '1' and '0'.

While the motor is rotating, alternates between '1' and '0'.



M9

M7ON

M8_HLD

M8_B

M9_A

M9_HLD

M9_B

J755-1

-2

-4

-5

J754-4

-5

J2071-4

-5

J207

J113A-9

J113A-13

-12

-11

J209-1

-2

-3

-4

-5

-6

J208-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

J208-4

-5

-6

-7

-8

-9

J113B-2

-3

-4

When '1', M9 stops.

When '1', M8 stops.

J751-1-2

-3-4-5

-6

J753-1-2

-3-4

-5-6





2-24


Figure 2-120

M10

M11

M12

M13

M14

M15

J719-1

-2

-3

-4

J105A-1

-2

J720-1

-2

J105A-3

-4

24V

24V

M10ON*

M11ON*

PCLM1

PCLM2

C3LMD

C4LMD

PTRCLM1PTRCLM2

J713-1

-2

J103B-3

-4

J103A-1

-2

J709-1

-2

J841-4

-5J119A-9

-10

J119A-11

-12

J842-1

-2

J843-1

-2

J770-1

-2

-6

-7

M18

M19

RDLMD

LDLMD

J119B-11

-12

J119B-9

-10

J825-2

-1

J826-2

-1

Hopper motor(stirring)

Hopper motor (supplying)

Primary charging wire cleaning motor

Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor

Cassette 3 lifter motor


Right deck lifter motor

Left deck lifter motor

DC controller PCB

When '0', M10 turns on.


When '1', M12 rotates CW (forward).When '1', M12 rotates CCW (reverse).

When '1', M14 turns on




When '1', M13 rotates CW (forward).When '1', M13 rotates CWW (reverse).



2-25


Figure 2-121

DC controller PCB

At 12 V, half-speed rotation;24 V, full-speed oration.

At 24 V, ON.

FM2D

FM3D

At 24 V, ON.FM5D

12 V, half-speed rotation;at 24 V, full-speed rotation.

FM6D

12 V, half-speed rotation;at 24 V, full-speed oration.

FM7D

At 12 V, half-speed oration;at 24 V, full speed rotation.

FM8D

FM2J704-1

-2

J117B-12

-13

FM3J710-1

-2

J104A-1

-2

FM5J784-1

-2

J115A-1

-2

FM6J109-1

-2

J109-1

-2

FM7J3774-1

-2

J114B-3

-4

FM8J715-2

-1

J104A-5

-6


5V

0V

J201-1-2

-3-4

J842-1

-2

J781-2

-1

24V0V

Heat exhaust fan

Fixing heat exhaust fan

Developing fan

Feeding fan

Cleaner fan

Scanner cooling fan




2-26


Figure 2-122

CL1

CL2

CL3

CL4

CL5

CL6

CL7

CL8

CL9

CL10

J764 J205


J775

24V

24V

24V

24V

24V

24V

HTF1CD*

HTF2CD*

HTRGCD*

HTRVCD*

HTFWCD*

HTSPCD*

MFPCD*

DEVCD*

RGCD*

C3PUCD*

DC controller PCB

When '0', CL1 turns on.










J2739-1

-2

J806-1

-2

J805-1

-2

J117A-1

-2

-4

-3

-6

-7

-4

-5

J108A-4

-5

J782-1

-2

-1

-2

J788-1

-2

J115B-1

-2

J767-1

-2

-6

-7

-6

-7 J113B-8

J766-1

-2

-8

-7

-8

-7 J113A-7

J768-1

-2

-4

-3

-4

-3 J113A-6

J765-1

-2

-10

-9

-10

-9 J113B-7

J871-2

-1

J112A-8

-9

J870-2

-1

J112A-6

-7

J112A-1

-2

Holding tray feeding 1clutch

Holding tray feeding 2clutch

Holding tray reversing clutch

Holding tray forward clutch

Holding tray separationclutch

Multifeeder pick-up clutch

Developing clutch

Registration roller drive clutch

Cassette 3 pick-up clutch

Holding tray registration clutch

J2738 J2756 J2755



2-27


Figure 2-123

Pick-up vertical path roller 3 drive clutch

DC controller PCB

When '0', CL11 turns on.CL11D*

J810-1-2

J809-1-2

24V

CL11J117B-1

-2

Cassette 4 pick-up clutch When '0', CL12 turns on.C4PUCD*

J813-1-2

J812-1-2

24V

CL12J130A-1

-2



J817-1-2

J816-1-2

24V

CL13J130B-1

-2

Right deck pick-up clutch When '0', CL14 turns on.RDPUCD*

J794-1-2

J793-1-2

24V

CL14J116A-1

-2



J819-1-2

24V

CL15J117A-14

-15

Left deckpick-up clutch When '0', CL16 turns on.LDPUCD*

J846-1-2

J844-1-2

24V

CL16J121A-4

-5


When '0', CL18 turns On.CL18D*

J787-1-2

24V

CL18J115A-3

-4



2-28


Figure 2-124

DC controller PCB

When '0', SL10 turns on for normal direction.When '0', SL10 turns on for reverse direction.

SL10FD*SL10BD*

24V

Scanner locking solenoid SLCKSD*

J774-1-2

24V

J114A-11-12

When '0', SL2 turns on.DPDSD*

24V

When '0', SL3 turns on.FXDSD*

24V

When '0', SL4 turns on.RDPURR*

24V

When '0', SL5 turns on.LDPURR*

24V

When '1', SL6 turns on.HTDSD

When '1', SL7 turns on.HTWSD

When '1', SL8 turns on.HTFSD

When '1', SL9 turns on.HTJSD

Multifeeder pick-up solenoid

Delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid

Fixing drive stop solenoid

Right deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid

Left deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid

Holding tray re-pick up roller (D - cut roller) solenoid

Holding tray weight solenoid

Holding tray paper deflecting plate solenoid

Holding tray swinging solenoid

SL10

SL1

SL2

SL3

SL4

SL5

SL6

SL7

SL8

SL9

J874-1-2-3

J115B-11-12-13

J2749-2-1

J2755-31-30

J108B-9-10

J2753-2-1

J2755-23-22

J108B-9-10

J866-1-2

J121A-14-15

J865-1-2

J121A-12-13

J769-2-1

J205-2-1 J113A-5

J760-2-1

J204-11-10 J113A-4

J759-2-1

-13-12 J113B-9

J756-1-2

J207-6-7 J113B-5

J764-2-1

J758-11-10

-13-12

J7071-6-7



When '0', SL1 turns on.



2-29


Figure 2-125

DC controller PCB

When '0', SL15 turns on.

MFRLSD*Multifeeder pick-up relay solenoid SL15

J865-1-2

J789-2-1

J115B-9-10

J7891-1-2

Cassette 3 pick-up roller releasing solenoid When '0', SL11

turns on.C3PURR*

J822-1-2

24V

J117A-9-10SL11

Cassette 4 pick-up roller releasing solenoid When '0', SL12

turns on.C4PURR*

J823-1-2

24V

J130A-9-10SL12

Fixing/feeding unit locking solenoid When '0', SL13

turns on.FFULSD*

J2754-1-2

24V

J108B-1-2SL13

Fixing cleaning belt drive solenoid When '0', SL14

turns on.FCBSD*

J2746-1-2

24V

J108A-10-11SL14

When '0', SL16 turns on for normal direction.When '1'1, SL16 turns on for reverse direction.

SL16FD*SL16BD

Fixing assembly inlet guide drive solenoid

SL16J108B-16

-15-14

J7444-3-2-1

J7444-1-2-3

24V

24V



2-30


Figure 2-126

DC controller PCB

Counter 1 When '0', the total counter turns on.TCNTD*CNT1

Counter 2 (accessory)

When '0', the accessory counter turns on.OPCNTD*CNT2

Accessory counter PCB

J718-1-2

24V

J104B-1-2

24V

J104B-7-6

J7181-1-2

Pre-exposure LED When '0', the pre-exposure

LED turns onPEXP*

J712-1-3

24V

J103B-1-2

LED1

J711-1-3

J706-9-5-6-7-8

-10

J706-5-1-2-3-4-6

J708-4-8-7-6-5-3

J103A-9-5-6-7-8

-10

-2-1

J312-1-3

LED2

LED2DT*LED2CK*LED2LD*LED2ON*

5V

+5V0V


See p. 4-19.

Power supply for lamp-7-8

-11-12

To power supply unit



2-31

G. Inputs to and Outputs from Accessories (1/1)

Figure 2-127

To RDF

To side paper deck (Paper Deck-A1)

DC controller PCB

See the RDF Service Manual.

TXDGNDRXDGNDFGRFEDGE

-1-2-3-4-7-8

-11-12-9

-10-6

J7710-1-2-3-4-5-6

J887-1-2-3-4-5

J772

J3003

J2001

J115A-5-6-7-8-910

Control card When '0', CC-V turns on.When '0', the card is detected.

CCNTD*CCNNT*

J726-3-1-2-4

+5V

CC-V

J106B-3-1-2-4

24VU0VU24VA0VA38VU

To sorterSee the Sorter Service Manual.

See Chapter 8.

TXDGNDRXDGND

-1-2-3-4-5-6-7

-11-12-910

J701-1-2-3-4

J702-2-1-4-3

J703J102-1

-2-3-4

24VU10VU24VA0VA





2-32

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)

CHAPTER 3

EXPOSURE SYSTEM

I. OUTLINE OF OPERATION................3-1A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio.....3-1

II. LENS DRIVE SYSTEM ......................3-2A. Moving of the Lens........................3-2

III. SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM ..............3-6A. Scanner Movement .......................3-6

IV. OTHERS.............................................3-20A. Original Size Detection..................3-20

V. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......3-23A. Scanner Drive Assembly ...............3-24B. Lens Drive Assembly.....................3-32

This chapter discusses the principles of operation used for the copier's lens drive unit and scannerdrive unit. It also explains the timing at which these drive units are operated, and shows how they may bedisassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I. OUTLINE OF OPERATION

A. Varying the Reproduction Ratio

The reproduction ratio in the axial direction of the drum is varied by the lens drivesystem, while that in the peripheral direction of the drum is varied by the scanner drivesystem and the main drive system.

The lens drive system uses a zoom lens, which varies the reproduction ratio in thedrum axial direction by changing the focal distance and the position of the lens as shownin Figure 3-101.

The scanner drive system varies the reproduction ratio in the peripheral direction ofthe drum by moving the No. mirror faster (for reduction) or slower (for enlargement).

Reference:1.The copier will not move the mirror to suit any reproduction.2.The peripheral speed of the drum is the same as the speed of the movement of

the mirror in Direct.

Figure 3-101

Direct

Reduce

Enlarge

F2

F1

F

F2'

F1'

F'



3-1

II. LENS DRIVE SYSTEM

A. Movement of the Lens

1. Outline of the MovementThe copier uses center reference, in which copy paper is picked up and fed in

relation to the center of the feeding paths and originals are placed in relation to the rearof the machine (when using the copyboard cover). As such, the lens is moved in Y(vertical) direction even in Direct mode to suit the width of copy paper.

n Using the Copyboard Cover

Figure 3-201 (top view)

The RDF installed to the machine uses center reference; when the size of theoriginal and the size of the copy paper are identical in Direct mode, the lens is not movedin Y (vertical) direction (Figure 3-202).

If the size of the original and the size of the paper are different, on the other hand,or in Reduce/Enlarge mode, the lens is moved in Y (vertical) direction so that the imageon the copy paper will be correct.

n Using the RDF

Figure 3-202 (top view)

Original (small)

Original (large)

Copy paper (small)

LensCoy paper (large)

Y d

irect

ion

Original (small)

Original (large)

Original (small)

Lens position (Direct) for copy paper (small)

Lens position (Direct) for copy paper (large)

Copy paper (large)

Y d

irect

ion



3-2

2. Moving the Lensa. Moving the Lens in Y (vertical) Direction

The machine’s lens is mounted on a lens stage, which is moved in Y (verticaldirection) when the lens Y motor (M5) is rotated.b. Moving the Lens in the X (horizontal) Direction

The lens X motor (M4) mounted behind the lens stage is used to move the lens in X(horizontal) direction.

3. Lens Motor Control CircuitThe lens X motor (M4) and the lens Y motor (M5) are 4-phase stepping motors. Both

motors are controlled in the same way, and the lens X motor is discussed here.The motor is controlled by the four types of motor drive signals from the DC controller

PCB: M4A, M4A*, M4B, M4B*. The direction of the motor is changed by changing thetiming at which these motor drive signals are sent.

To keep the lens X motor stationary, the lens X motor hold signal (X-HOLD) isgenerated, thereby applying brakes in the form of a voltage lower than when rotating themotor.

Figure 3-203

DC controller PCB

Q156

Micro-processor

24V

24V

Lens X motor drive circuit

Lens Y motor drive circuit

J110A-3

-6

-1

-2

-4

-5

X-HOLD

M4A

M4A*

M4B

M4B*

J736

J736

J739

M4

M5

Lens (X) motor

Lens (Y) motor

J110A-12

-15

-10

-11

-13

-14

Y-HOLD

M5A

M5A*

M5B

M5B*



3-3

4. Moving the Lensa. At Power-On

When the power switch is turned on, the lens X motor (M4) starts to rotate, and thelens moves in the direction of the lens X home position sensor (PS6). Then the lens Ymotor (M5) rotates to move the lens in the direction of the lens Y home position sensor(PS7). When the signal plate on the lens housing blocks the lens X home position sensor(PS6), the X motor starts to rotate in reverse; when the signal plate on the lens stageblocks the Y home position sensor (PS7), the lens Y motor (M5) starts to rotate inreverse.

The motors stop to rotate when the lens has reached Direct/A4 width position. (Seeperiod I of Figure 3-204.)

b. While Making CopiesThe microprocessor slave (Q140) remembers the location of the lens in Direct/A4

position. When a different ratio is selected, it immediately applies drive pulses to the lensX motor (M4)/Y motor (M5) to change the position of the lens. (See period II of Figure 3-204.)

The lens Y motor (M5) starts to rotate to move the lens when the Copy Start key hasbeen pressed and the sizes of the original and the copy paper have been determined.(See period III of Figure 3-204.)

• Sequence of Operations

Figure 3-204

Power switchON

Lens Y motor (M5)

Lens X motor (M4)

WMUP/WMUPR

Ratio change (Reduce)

Lens X home position (PS6) Lens Y home position sensor (PS7)

Motor CW/sensor ON

Motor CCW

Motor ON (direction depends on conditions)

STBY INTR

Ratio change (Enlarge)

Copy Start keyON

I II IIIII



3-4

Figure 3-205

ReduceEnlarge

DC controller PCB

Lens Y motor (M5)

Lens Y position sensor (PS7)

Signal plate

Cam plate

Lens

Light-blocking belt

Lens stage

Cam groove

Signal plate

Y direction

Lens X motor (M4)

Lens X home position sensor(PS6)

Lens

Y h

ome

posi

tion

sign

al

Lens

Y m

otor

driv

e si

gnal

Lens

X m

otor

driv

e si

gnal

Lens

X h

ome

posi

tion

sign

al

Light-blocking belt

X direction



3-5

III. SCANNER DRIVE SYSTEM

A. Scanner Movement

1. Outline of MovementThe scanner is moved forward or in reverse by changing the direction of rotation of

the scanner motor (M3).The speed of rotation of the scanner motor when the scanner is moving forward

varies according to the selected reproduction ratio.The speed of the scanner motor when the scanner is moving in reverse is 2.9 times

the speed when the scanner is moving forward regardless of the selected reproductionratio.

Figure 3-301

Scanner home position sensor (PS1)

Scanner original leading edge 1 sensor (PS3)

Signal plate


Scanner motor

DC controller PCB

No. 1 mirror mount

No. 2/No. 3 mirror mount

SC

HP

SC

DP

1

SC

DP

2

Sca

nner

hom

e po

sitio

n si

gnal

Orig

inal

lead

ing

edge

dete

ctio

n si

gnal

1

Orig

inal

lead

ing

edge

de

tect

ion

sign

al 2

M3

Forward



3-6

The scanner is slowed down as soon as the signal plate has reached the scanneroriginal leading edge 1 sensor (PS3); brakes are applied when it reaches the scannerhome position sensor (PS1) so that it stops at its home position.

When stream reading mode is selected with the RDF in use, the scanner originalleading edge 2 sensor (PS4) is used to find out whether the No. 1 mirror mount of thescanner has reached a specific position.

The distance over which the scanner travels varies according to the size of the copypaper and the selected reproduction ratio.

2. Relationship between the Scanner Sensors and the Signals

Table 3-301



3-7

Sensor

Scanner homeposition sensor(PS1)

Original leadingedge 1 sensor(PS3)

Scanner leadingedge 2 sensor(PS4)

Signal

SCHP

SCDP1

SCDP2

Description

• Indicates that the scanner is athome position.

• Indicates that the scanner hasreached a point in homeposition.

• Indicates that the registrationclutch has turned on.

• Indicates the scanner forwarddistance reference.

• Indicates that the scannerbrakes have turned on.

• Indicates that the scanner hasreached stream readingposition.

Scanner

Forward Reverse

3. Basic Sequence of OperationsThe distance over which the scanner moves is determined by the microprocessor

based on the copy size, reproduction ratio, and copying mode.The microprocessor computes the dimensions of the original when determining the

distance over which the scanner moves forward.

Figure 3-302

Ratio key ON

Scanner motor drive signal (M3ON)

Scanner forward signal (SCFW)

Scanner stop signal (M3BLK)

Blanking exposure lamp


Lens drive motor (M4, M5)

Scanner motor (M3)

INTR AER SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY


Scanning lamp (LA1)

STBY

*2 Brake *2 Brake

Copy Start key ON

*1

FD RS

*1 Moves the lens according to the selected reproduction ratio and copy size.*2 The degree of braking may be adjusted in service mode (*3*).



3-8

4. Movement of the Scanner in Page Separation Mode

Figure 3-303

In Figure 3-303, all periods I, II, and III are controlled by the microprocessor on theDC controller PCB with reference to the original leading edge signal 1 (falling edge ofSCDP1) for the 1st page.

The microprocessor determines the distance over which the scanner moves forwardbased on the selected reproduction ratio and the size of the original or selected cassette.I, II: The distance over which the scanner moves forward is determined based on the

selected reproduction ratio and the size of the original or the cassette size.III: If original size detection has been executed, the microprocessor halves the

measured size and uses the result as the center of the original, and the scannermoves assuming it to be the leading edge of the 2nd page.If page separation is selected without original size detection, the control is based on

the size of the selected cassette.If the forward distance of II in Figure 3-303 is about 220 mm or more, the point about

220 mm is assumed as the leading edge of the 2nd page.If the 1st and the 2nd pages are reversed using extended mode (Chapter 1), no

change will occur except that the order of SCFW2/SCRV2 and SCFW1/SCRV1 isreversed.

Original leading edge 1 sensor (PS3)

Scanner motor (M3)


Scanning lamp (LA1)

INTR AER SCFW1 SCRV1 SCFW2 SCRV2 LSTR

Copy Start keyON

Leading edge of 1st page

Leading edge of 1st page

Leading edge of 2nd page

FD RS

I II III



3-9

Reference:If two or more mode is selected, the scanner is controlled based on the minimumvalue of the sizes which have been measured.The microprocessor exerts control based on the size of the original when any of thefollowing modes has been selected:

Table 3-302



3-10

Mode

• RDF in use

• Original frameerase mode

Size used

Size of original detected by feeder

Size of original specified by user

5. Movement of the Scanner with the RDF in Use (A4, 2 originals, 1 copy)

Figure 3-304

a. OutlineIf the copier is equipped with an RDF, stream reading is executed under the following

conditions:In stream reading, the copier's scanner is held in place, and the RDF slides the

originals from right to left.n Conditions• A4, LTR, or B5 one-sided original• 1 original to 1 copy• 70% to 115% reproduction ratio• paper source NOT cassette 4

The use of stream reading enables omission of the scanner reverse period, therebyreducing the sheet-to-sheet distance and, ultimately, enabling a copying speed of 60copies/minute (A4, LTR).

Scanner motor (M3)

Scanner locking solenoid (SL1)

Scanner home position signal (PS1)

Image leading signal*

SCFW SCFW SCRV

Original leading edge sensor 1 (PS3)

Scanning lamp (LA1)

INTR

Copy Start keyON

Original leading edge sensor 2 (PS4)

Belt motor (M3)

FD

LSTR

*Generated by the RDF to match RDF and copier registration.

Cop

ier

RD

F



3-11

b. Stream Reading with the RDF in Use

Figure 3-305



3-12

Originals

RDF

Copier

1

2

Scanner

1

2

qOriginals are placed. wThe Copy Start key is pressed. The 2ndoriginal is picked up from the right. Thescanner moves to the center of thecopyboard, and is locked in place by thescanner locking solenoid.

2

1

2 1

eThe RDF sends the image leading edgesignal to the copier when the leadingedge of the 2nd original moves rightnext to the scanner. In response, thecopier turns on the registration clutch sothat the original and the copy paper arematched.By this time, the 1st original has beenpicked up and is following the 2ndoriginal.

rThe 2nd original is illuminated while it ismoved over the scanner.Then, the RDF sends the image leadingedge signal for the 1st original.

1

2 1

2

tThe 1st original is illuminated whilemoving over the scanner.The 2nd original is delivered from theleft.

yThe scanner returns to home position.The 1st original is delivered from theleft.

6. Movement of the Scanner with the RDF in Use (A4, 2 copies)

Figure 3-306

a. OutlineIf the copier is equipped with an RDF, it makes copies by combining stream reading

(fixed scanner) and normal scanning (moving scanner).n Conditions• A4, LTR, B5 one-sided original• 1 original to multiple copies• 70% to 115% reproduction ratio• paper source NOT cassette 4

The sequence of operation is as follows:qThe 1st copy is made in stream reading.wImmediately after stream reading, the original is stopped on the copyboard glass, and

the remaining sets of copies are made in normal scanning mode (moving scanner).

Scanner motor (M3)


Scanner home position signal (PS1)

Image leading signal

SCFW SCFW

Scanner image leading edge signal 1 (PS3)

Scanning lamp (LA1)

INTR

Copy Start

Scanner image leading edge signal 2 (PS4)

Belt motor (M3)

LSTRSCFW SCFWSCRV

SCRV

SCRV

*1 Scanner fixed.*2 Scanner moving.

*1 *2 *1 *2

Cop

ier

RD

F



3-13



3-14

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) 3-15

Originals

RDF

1

2

Scanner

1

2

2 1

1

2

1

2 1

1

2

1

2

2 1 2 1

2

1

2

1) Originals are placed. 2) The Copy Start key is pressed. The 2nd original is picked up. The scanner moves to the center of the copyboard, and is locked in place by the scanner locking solenoid.

3) The RDF sends the image leading edge signal to the copier when the leading edge of the 2nd original moves right next to the scanner. In response, the copier turns on the registration clutch so that the original and the copy paper are matched. The 1st original is picked up.

4) The 2nd original is illuminated while it is moved over the scanner.

5) The 2nd original is stopped where stream reading has ended.

6) The scanner executes normal scanning to illuminate the remaining number of copies.

7) The scanner moves to the center of the copy-board, and is held in place by the scanner locking solenoid.

9) The 1st original is stopped where stream reading has ended. The scanner returns to home position.

10) The scanner executes normal scanning to illuminate the remaining number of originals.

11) The 1st original is delivered.

8) When the RDF has sent the image leading edge signal for the 1st original, the 1st original is moved over the scanner and illuminated.

b. Combination of Stream Reading and Normal Scanning (A4, 2 originals, multiple copies)

Figure 3-307



3-16

7. Scanner Motor (M3) Control Circuita. Outline

Figure 3-308 shows the circuit used to control the scanner motor, and the circuit hasthe following functions.

qTurning on and off the scanner motor.wControlling the direction of rotation of the scanner motor.eControlling the speed of rotation of the scanner motor.

b. Stopping the Rotation of the MotorWhen the scanner motor drive control signal (M3ON) goes ‘0’, the drive circuit turns

off so that the motor does not rotate.c. Moving the Scanner Forward

When the scanner motor drive control signal (M3ON) goes ‘1’ and the scannerforward signal (M3F/R) goes ‘0’, the drive circuit turns on so that the scanner motorrotates clockwise, thereby moving the scanner forward.

Figure 3-308

Scanner motor (M3)

Rotor

Hall IC

U

W

SCMCLK

V

Scanner motor driver PCBDC controller

PCB

Motor stop circuit

Motor drive circuit

Motor rotation speed

control circuit

J6328

J112B-5

J6326

J112B-7

J6327

J112B-6

J6329

J112B-4

5-8

4-9

3-10

1

J6322

J112B-11

M3PRL

M3F/R

M3ON

MSNCON

M3MD2

M3MD1

M3MD0

M3FS

CLK

J112B-12

Clock pulse generator



3-17

d. Moving the Scanner in ReverseWhen the scanner motor drive signal (M3ON) goes ‘1’ and the scanner forward

signal (M3F/R) goes ‘1’, the drive circuit turns on to rotate the scanner motor incounterclockwise direction, thereby moving the scanner in reverse.e. Controlling the Speed of Rotation of the Scanner Motor

The DC microprocessor on the DC controller PCB sends the scanner speed signal(M3FS) to the scanner motor driver PCB according to the selected reproduction ratio.

The revolution speed control circuit compares the scanner speed signal and theclock pulses (SCMCLK) from the scanner motor, and sends control signals to suit thedifference to the motor drive circuit.

The motor drive circuit turns on and off the power (while keeping the voltage thesame) at short intervals to control the speed of rotation.

Since the speed of rotation of the scanner motor is varied according to the selectedreproduction ratio, the reproduction ratio select signal (M3MD0, 1, 2) from the DCcontroller PCB is varied as shown in Table 3-303.

Table 3-303



3-18

M3MD2

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

M3MD1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

M3MD0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

One-sided copying

204~172

171~144

143~120

119~100

99~79

78~62

61~49

Scanner reverse

Figure 3-309

Copy Start key ON

Scanner forward signal

Scanner motor drive signal

Scanner speed control signal

Scanner stop signal

INTR SCFW SCRV

Scanner home position sensor


LSTR

*2

*1

*1 Brakes to slow down.*2 Brakes to stop.



3-19

IV. OTHERS

A. Original Size Detection

1. Outline of DetectionThe machine is equipped with auto paper selection and auto ratio selection

functions, which necessitate the identification of the size of originals.As many as four original detection circuits are mounted under the copyboard glass

(Figure 3-401). The outputs of these circuits are checked by the DC controller when thecopyboard cover is closed so as to identify the original as being A3, B4, A4, or B5.

An original detecting circuit consists of an LED which emits light against the originaland a phototransistor which checks the light reflected by the original for output to the DCcontroller.

Figure 3-401

A4

B5

A4R

B5R

A3

B5 A4 B5R A4R B4 A3

Phototransistor LEDPS5

Copyboard cover open/closed

sensor

Original detection circuit 2


Original detection signal 3




Copyboard cover detection signal 1

DC controller PCB





3-20

2. OperationThe DC controller PCB measures the outputs of the original detection circuits at

intervals of 0.2 sec until the Copy Start key is pressed or for 15 sec after the copyboardcover open/closed sensor (PS5) has turned on while the copyboard cover is beingclosed.

Figure 3-402

If an original exists over a sensor, the original detection circuit receives the lightreflected by the original so that the output of the detection circuit remains the sameregardless of the angle of the copyboard cover.

If no original exists over the sensor, on the other hand, the output of the detectioncircuit immediately after PS5 turns on is small. When the copyboard cover is fully closedthereafter, the light reflected by the detection circuit receives the light reflected by thecopyboard sheet, and the output will be larger.

Accordingly, the DC controller will assume the presence of an original if the output ofthe detection circuit remains the same, while assuming the absence of an original if theoutput changes.

This type of detection enables identification of the size of even a black original.

Reference:1. If the original is thick and, as a result, the copyboard cover will not fully close after

PS5 has turned ON, the level of the sensor output will not change regardless ofthe size of the original. If none of the levels (of the three sensors) does notchange, the DC controller identifies the size of the original by comparing themeasurement taken when PS5 has turned on against the slice level.

2. If the copyboard cover is opened (PS5 is off), the cassette containing themaximum size paper will be selected.

DC controller PCB

Out

putOriginal

detection circuit

PS5 ON

Original

Copyboard cover

30° (approx.)

(The thickness of the output arrow represents the size of the level.)

Out

put

PS5 ON

DC controller PCBO

utpu

t (c

onst

ant)

Out

put

(var

ied)



3-21

3. Size of OriginalsThe DC controller identifies the size of various originals with reference to

combinations of original detection signals (DSIZE0 through 3).

q AB Configuration

Table 3-401

w Inch Configuration

Table 3-402



3-22

DS2

Sensor 2

0

0

0

1

1

Sensor 1

0

0

1

0

1

Sensor 0

0

1

1

0

1

Size

Inch

None

LTRR

LGR

LTR

279.4mm ×431.8mm

(11" × 17")

DS1

Original detection signal

DS3

Sensor 3

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

DS2

Sensor 2

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

Sensor 1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

Sensor 0

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

Size

AB

Absent or,A5, A5R

B5R

B5

A4

A4R

B4

A3

DS1

Original detection signal

V. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY

Here, the copier is discussed in terms of its mechanical characteristics and operationand how to disassemble and assemble it.

Be sure to observe the following for disassembly/assembly work:

1. Disconnect the power plug for safety before starting disassembly/assembly work.2. Unless otherwise noted, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to

disassemble them.3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.4. One of the mounting screws of the rear cover is provided with a toothed washer to

protect against static electricity. Do not leave it out during assembly work.5. The screws used for grounding wires and varistors are provided with a toothed

washer to ensure electrical continuity. Do not leave them out during assembly work.6. As a rule, do not operate the machine with any of its parts removed.7. Before sliding out the duplexing unit or the fixing assembly, check to make sure that

the front door switch or the power switch is off.



3-23

!

A. Scanner Drive Assembly

1. Removing the Scanner Drive Motor1) Remove the RDF/copyboard cover.2) Remove the machine’s rear cover.3) Remove the three mounting screws each, and remove the RDF/copyboard cover.

The mounting screws used on the RDF/copyboard cover are longer than others.

4) Remove the rear upper cover.5) Remove the rear right cover.6) Remove the multifeeder assembly.7) Remove the five mounting screws q, and disconnect the two connectors w; then,

remove the RDF rear right mount e.

Figure 3-501

Figure 3-502

qw

e

q



3-24

Caution:

8) Remove the mounting screw r, and remove the RDF/copyboard cover detectionassembly t.

Figure 3-503

9) Remove the three mounting screws y, and disconnect the two connectors u; then,remove the scanner drive motor assembly i.

Figure 504

A drive belt is on the gear of the motor shaft; remove the motor while detaching thebelt.

The scanner drive motor assembly is fixed in position at the factory with a jigmaking sure that the tension of the belt of the motor assembly is as specified.When removing the scanner drive motor assembly, be sure to mark the edge of themotor assembly in advance.

y yui

t r



3-25

Caution:

Caution:

2. Routing the Scanner Drive Cable

Figure 3-505

3. Orienting the Heat Absorbing GlassBe sure to orient the heat absorbing glass whenever replacing the heat absorbing

glass.

White paint(rear)

(front)

Steel ball

Wind eight times.

Fix temporarily.

1

3

4

8

5

6

2

7

6

2



3-26

4. Removing the Scanner Drive Cable1) Remove the upper right cover, left cover, rear cover, and rear upper cover.2) Remove the copyboard glass.3) Remove the control panel.4) Remove the RDF rear right mount. (See p. 3-24.)5) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the scanner locking disc w.

Figure 3-506

6) Disconnect the three connectors of the potential control PCB, and disconnect theconnector of the service switch.

7) Remove the five mounting screws e, and disconnect the connector r; then, removethe scanner cooling fan t.

Figure 3-507

r e

t

w

q



3-27

8) Remove the two cable fixing screws (rear) y from the No. 1 mirror mount.

Figure 3-508

9) Remove the two cable fixing screws (front) from the No. 1 mirror mount.

Figure 3-509

10) Loosen the tension screw i to loosen the scanner cable.

Figure 3-510

11) Remove the scanner cable.

i

u

y



3-28

5. Adjusting the Tension of the Scanner Drive CableIf you have replaced the scanner drive cable, be sure to perform the following to

adjust the tension:1) Remove the five mounting screws, and remove the upper left cover.2) Loosen the fixing screw on the tension spring bracket.3) Turn the tension adjusting screw until the value is as follows:

• Turn the tension adjusting screw A so that the reading of the spring gauge is 200±50 g when the scanner cable is pulled about 10 mm at the center.

Figure 3-511

6. Positioning the MirrorIf you have replaced the scanner drive cable, be sure to adjust the position of the

mirror as follows:1) Move the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2/No. 3 mirror mount to the left.2) Set the mirror positioning tool (front, rear; FY9-3011) as shown.

Figure 3-512

A

A

10 mm

10 mm

(rear)

(front)

Mirr

or m

ount



3-29

3) Loosen the two screws on the metal clamps used to fix the scanner drive cable tothe No. 1 mirror mount.

Figure 3-513

4) Remove the tool.

7. Adjusting the Scanner Home PositionMake copies, and remove the control panel; then, check to make sure that the line

of section A of the electrode mount (front of the No. 1 mirror mount) is in section B of thehole in the glass support (front).

If not, change the value of ‘BRAKE_SC’ in service mode ( ) so that the lineof section A is in section B.

Figure 3-514

B

No. 1 mirror mount

Electrode mount (front)

Section A (left of wall)

Glass support(front)

Hole

]3]



3-30

8. Positioning the Scanner Locking Solenoid (SL1)• Making Adjustments

1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the multifeeder assembly.3) Adjust the stroke of the scanner locking solenoid once again so that it is as specified.

Figure 3-515


E-ring

Standard8.5 ±0.5 mm (from below clamp to top of solenoid)

Loosen these two screws to adjust once again.



3-31

B. Lens Drive Assembly

If you turn on the power supply without removing the lens metal fixing of the lensstage or move the lens or the lens stage without disconnecting the power plug, you candamage the gear of the output shaft.q Be sure to remove the lens metal fixing of the lens stage before connecting the

power plug when installing the machine.w Be sure to disconnect the power plug before moving the lens stage or the zoom lens

by hand.Further, avoid moving without care, and be sure to hold the area near the point ofengagement with the rail.

1. Removing the Lens Y Direction Drive Motor1) Remove the copyboard glass retainer, and remove the copyboard glass.2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the left.3) Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the lens hood w.

Figure 3-516

When installing the lens hood, fit the boss of the lens hood in the cut-off of the rail;then, hook at the rear while turning the lens hood clockwise.

qw



3-32

Caution:

4) Remove the two mounting screws e of the cable, and remove the two mountingscrews r; then, lift the lens Y direction drive motor together with the support t.

Figure 3-517

5) Disconnect the connector y, and remove the two mounting screws u; then, detachthe lens Y direction drive motor i from the support.

Figure 3-518

u

y

i

tr

e



3-33

2. Removing the Lens Stage Temporarily1) Remove the copyboard glass.2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the left of the scanner rail.

Be sure to push the center of the No. 1 mirror mount.

3) Remove the lens hood.4) Remove the mounting screw of the Y direction cable metal clamp; then, fix the end

of the Y direction cable temporarily in place.5) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the light-blocking belt retainer w (on

lens mount).

Figure 3-519

6) Remove the mounting screw e, and remove the light-blocking curtain 2 (front) rtogether with the holder. (Fix the light-blocking belt mount temporarily in place withtape to the lens stage.)

Figure 3-520

r

e

w

q



3-34

Caution:

7) Lift the lens stage t, and detach the bushing y from the rail u.

Figure 3-521

3. Installing the Light-Blocking Belt Mount1) Wind the light-blocking sheet w around the bobbin q while removing the slack; then,

turn the bobbing mount e clockwise two to three times so that the boss on thebottom of the bobbin mount is in the hole of the belt mount. Set the bobbin, and fixit in place with the mounting screw t.

Figure 3-522

q

w

e

r

t

t

y u



3-35

4. Removing the Lens X Direction Drive Motor1) Remove the lens stage.2) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the mounting screw w; then, remove the

motor mount e.

Figure 3-523

3) Remove the two mounting screws r; then, detach the lens X direction motor t fromthe motor mount.

Figure 3-524

r

t

q w e



3-36

5. Attaching the Lens X Direction Drive BeltFix the lens X direction drive motor q in place with the mounting screw w when it

has lowered on its own weight.

Figure 3-525

6. Routing the Light-Blocking Belt

q Light-blocking belt 1 e Light-blocking belt 3w Light-blocking belt 2 r Light-blocking belt 4

Figure 3-526

q

w

e

r

q

wOwn weight



3-37

7. Replacing the Light-Blocking Belt1) Fully wind the belt q on the bobbin in clockwise direction; then, fix it in place with

tape.

Figure 3-527

2) Fix the light-blocking belt in place on the lens mount.3) Turn the bobbing clockwise and counterclockwise in units of half turns; then, let it go

so that the spring inside the bobbin is freed.4) Turn the bobbin clockwise two to two-and-a-half times, and remove the tape and pull

out the end of the belt.5) Hook the end of the belt on the lens unit.

q

w

e



3-38


CHAPTER 4

IMAGE FORMATION SYSTEM

This chapter discusses the principles of how images are formed. It also explains the timing at whichthe various units involved in image formation are operated, and shows how they may bedisassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I. PROCESSES .....................................4-1A. Controlling the Drum Surface

Potential .......................................4-1B. Controlling the Intensity of the

Scanning Lamp .............................4-6C. Controlling the Primary/Transfer

Corona Current..............................4-11D. Controlling the Separation/Pre-

Transfer Corona Current ...............4-15E. Controlling the Blank Exposure

Lamp (LED) ...................................4-19F. Drum Heater Circuit.......................4-22G. Cleaning the Primary Charging

Wire ...............................................4-25H. Pre-Transfer/Transfer/Separation

Charging Wire Automatic Cleaning Mechanism.....................4-26

II. DRUM CLEANING ASSEMBLY /DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY ...............4-28A. Outline ...........................................4-28B. Detecting the Level of Toner and

Controlling the Supply Operation ..4-30C. Controlling the Developing

Bias/Roller Electrode.....................4-32

D. Detecting the Waste Toner Feeding Screw (locking)................4-38

III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......4-39A. Scanning Lamp Assembly.............4-39B. Standard White Plate ....................4-41C. Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit ...............4-43D. Blanking Exposure Lamp

Assembly .......................................4-44E. Photosensitive Drum .....................4-45F. Potential Sensor Assembly ...........4-48G. Primary Charging Assembly..........4-48H. Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly ..4-49I. Transfer/Separation Charging

Assembly .......................................4-49J. Charging Wire ...............................4-53K. Developing Assembly....................4-60L. Hopper Assembly ..........................4-66M. Drum Cleaner ................................4-67N. Separation Claw/Separation

Claw Drive Assembly ....................4-71O. Waste Toner Feeding Assembly....4-72

I. PROCESSES

A. Controlling the Drum Surface Potential

1. OutlineThe machine uses an electrostatographic method, and is constructed as shown in

Figure 4-101.The quality of copy images are mostly affected by the following:

q Changes in the sensitivity of the drum.w Changes in the degree of charging by the primary charging assembly.e Changes in the degree of exposure.

These changes are in turn brought about by changes in the site environment(temperature, humidity) or deterioration of or dirt on associated parts.

The machine is equipped with a drum surface potential control mechanism to ensurestable latent static images in the presence of these factors.

Figure 4-101

- -

----

--

---- - - - -

-

---

Pre-exposure lamp

++++

Photosensitive drum

Lampregulator

PCB

Potential measurement

PCB

Scanning lamp

Blanking exposure

Blade

Cleaning blade


Separation charging wire

Copy paper

Cleaning roller

Cleaning screw

High-voltage transformer

DC controller PCB

Dark area

Light area

Optical image


++++++++++

++++

++++++++++

++++

Potential sensor

Primary charging

Developing cylinder



4-1

2. Control MethodThe potential sensor inside the machine measures the dark area potential (VD) and

the light area potential (VL1), and the machine makes corrections based on themeasurements to enable a target value.

The light area potential (VL2) for developing bias is measured based on thecorrection conditions, and the machine uses the measurement to determine the DCcomponent of the developing bias.

Tables 4-101 and -102 show how many times the machine measures and correctspotential and when it initiates control.

Table 4-101 Measurement/Correction for Potential Control

Table 4-102 Timing of Potential Control



4-2

Correction Measurement

VD 8 (max.) 8 (max.)

VL1 8 (max.) 8 (max.)

VL2 0 1

Mode

Text mode

Photo mode

Timing

• Once every power-on.• Once while making the

first copy between 10and 60 min of power-on.

• Once while making thefirst copy after 60 min ofpower-on.

• Once while making thefirst copy in photo modeafter power-on.

Figure 4-102

a. Controlling the Primary Charging CurrentThe light area potential (VD) for the first time after power-on is measured by sending

a standard current (stored in ROM) to the primary charging assembly and using thepotential sensor.

The DC controller PCB compares the measurement of the drum surface potentialand the target potential; if there is a discrepancy, the primary charging level control signal(HVTPC) from the DC controller PCB is corrected, and the potential is measured onceagain.

If the measurement is not within the tolerance of the target value after eight tries,‘1’ is indicated to ‘PLMT’ (upper limit flag of primary current) in service mode (*1*;display mode).

b. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning LampThe light area potential (VL) is measured for the first time after power-on is measured

by applying a reference activation voltage (stored in ROM) on the scanning lamp.The scanning lamp illuminates the standard white plate, and the light reflected by it

is directed to the drum.The surface potential of the area on the drum exposed to the light is measured by

the potential sensor, and the measurement is sent to the DC controller PCB.The DC controller PCB compares the measurement against the target value; if there

is a discrepancy, the intensity adjustment signal (LINT) from the DC controller PCB iscorrected, and the potential is measured once again.

Copy Start keyON

Scanning lamp

Measurement by potential sensor

Primary charging

INTR CNTR1

VD VD VD VD VD VL1 VL1 VL1 VL1 VL1 VL2

Reference voltage Correction voltage Last current

Reference current

Correction current Last current

CNTR2

To SCFW or AER



4-3

Caution:

If the measurement dose not fall within the tolerance after eight tires, ‘1’ is indicatedto ‘LLMT’ (upper limit flag of lamp activation voltage) in service mode (*1*; displaymode).

c. Controlling the Developing BiasThe light area potential (VL2) for the developing bias is measured in terms of the

surface potential of the drum occurring when the scanning lamp is turned on based onthe last intensity adjustment signal generated during VL1 control.

The DC controller PCB uses the measurement to control the developing bias DClevel control signal (DEVDC) to control the DC bias applied by the high-voltagetransformer on the developing cylinder.

3. Potential Measurement CircuitFigure 4-103 is a cross sectional diagram of the potential sensor, and Figure 4-104

is a block diagram of the potential measurement circuit.The drive signal from the sensor drive circuit drives the chopper so that the electrode

of the sensor assembly can detect the drum surface potential.The measurement signal of the drum surface signal is amplified by the pre-amplifier

circuit, and is sent to the drum surface potential detection circuit.The drum surface potential detection circuit converts the AC signal to an AC signal,

and sends it to the level shift circuit through the 1/300 transformer circuit.The output signal (analog) of the level shift circuit is sent to the microprocessor on

the DC controller PCB.

a. Making Checksq LED1 Activation

LED1 is normally on when the main motor rotates.If it does not turn on, you may suspect a fault in the potential measurement unit.

Reference:When LED1 is on normally, the potential sensor is operating normally.

The sensor and the potential measurement PCB are adjusted to a high precision asa pair, and cannot be adjusted in the field. They are treated as a single entityservice part.



4-4

Caution:

Caution:

Figure 4-103 Sensor Cross Section

Figure 4-104

Chopper

Electrode

Piezoelectric oscillator

Potential sensor

LED1

Sensor drive circuit

Drum surface potential detection circuit

High-voltage generation/adjustment circuit

1/3 transformer circuit

Level shift circuit

Micro-processor

DC controller PCB

Potential measurement PCB

Pre-amplifier circuit

Sensor cover

Electrode

Chopper2.5 mm (approx.)

--

+-

-



4-5

B. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning Lamp

1. OutlineFigure 4-105 shows the circuit used to control the intensity of the scanning lamp, and

the circuit has the following functions:q Turning on and off the scanning lamp.w Controlling the intensity of the scanning lamp.

• Keeps the intensity to a specific level in spite of changes in the power supplyvoltage.

• Controls the intensity to suit changes in the sensitivity of the drum.• Controls the intensity to suit the setting of the Copy Density key.• Controls the intensity (AE control) to suit the density of the original.

e Checking the activation of the scanning lamp.

Figure 4-105

Q156

Micro-processor(master)

D/A converter

Q159

Error detection

circuit

12V

PWOFF

J111B-6

J111B-7

J111B-8

CVRON

LINT

LAON

J503-4

J503-2

J503-2

Lamp activation circuit

Power switchSW1

Thermal fuseTP2

Scanning lamp

J501-1

Arc circuit

Lamp regulator PCBDC controller PCB

HIM1

Differential amplification/phase controlpower voltage

circuit

J501-3



4-6

2. Operationa. Turning On and Off the Scanning Lamp

When LAON (scanning lamp activation signal) is ‘0’, the output of the differentialamplification/phase control circuit goes ‘0’, and the arc circuit remains off, depriving thescanning lamp (LA1) of power.

When LAON is ‘1’, on the other hand, the output of the differentialamplification/phase control circuit goes ‘1’, and the arc circuit turns on, supplying thescanning lamp (LA1) with power.

b. Controlling the Intensity of the Scanning LampThe intensity of the scanning lamp is controlled by controlling the voltage of power

supplied to the scanning lamp according to the intensity adjustment signal (LINT) fromthe DC controller PCB.

LINT varies the pulse duty between 10% and 57.6% according to the setting of theCopy Density key or the density of the original, sensitivity of the drum, and setting of theintensity control VR so that the effective value of the voltage of power to the scanninglamp will vary between 45 and 65 V (phase control).

Figure 4-106

c. Checking the Activation of the Scanning LampWhile the scanning lamp remains on, the activation detection circuit generates the

activation detection signal (CVRON) at all times. CVRON is sent to the error detectioncircuit on the DC controller PCB.

If the lamp activation signal (LAON) goes ‘0’ and the scanning lamp turns onbecause of a short in the activation circuit or the like, the DC controller PCB causesPWOFF to go ‘0’, thereby turning off the relay inside the power switch and, ultimately,turning off the power switch (SW1); this condition deprives the lamp regulator of ACpower.

3. Auto Exposure ControlThe machine is equipped with an auto exposure mechanism which automatically

controls the intensity of the scanning lamp to suit the density of the originals.When copies are made in auto exposure (AE) mode, you can obtain fogging-free

copies without having to adjust the copy density manually. The intensity of the lampcontrolled by the AE mechanism is indicated on the control panel.

AE mode may be executed on the copier side or the RDF side, the latter of which isused when originals are placed in the RDF. The copier’s AE mode is used, however,when manual feeding is selected.

Pulse duty: 10%

Pulse duty: 50%



4-7

a. AE Mode (CMAE) on the Copier’s SideDuring AE rotation (AER), the scanner is moved forward for 120 mm with the

scanning lamp on; the potential of the drum is then measured at four locations of thecopyboard (Figure 4-107) when the scanner is moved in reverse, and the measurementsare sent to the DC controller PCB.

The DC controller PCB computes the average based on these surface potentialmeasurements to determine the intensity of the scanner for copying.

Figure 4-107

b. AE Mode (RFAE) on the RDF SideThe RDF is equipped with an AE sensor in its original feeding path to measure the

density of originals while they are being moved.The AE sensor is a reflecting type sensor in which two LEDs illuminate the original

and a photodiode measures the reflected light (Figure 4-108).AE sensor 1 (S7) is used for left pick-up, while AE sensor 2 (S33) is used for right

pick-up (Figure 4-108).

Figure 4-108

AE sensor (S7) AE sensor 2 (S33)

4 3 2 1

30 30 30 30 mm

120 mm



4-8

The density at the five points shown in Figure 4-109 is measured, and the results aresent to the DC controller PCB, which in turn determines the intensity of the scanninglamp during copying. (The points of measurement differ between right pick-up and leftpick-up.)

Figure 4-110 shows changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp in relation to thedensity of originals.

If the density of a specific original is higher (darker) than the Test Sheet and lower(lighter) than a newspaper, the intensity of the scanning lamp varies between F5 and F9of copy density indication.

If it is lighter than the Test Sheet, the intensity will be an equivalent of F5; if it is darkerthan a newspaper, the intensity will be an equivalent of F9.

Figure 4-109 Points of Measurement on an Original

Figure 4-110

Test Sheet Newspaper

Lighter

F9 equivalent

F5 equivalent

Original density Darker

Sca

nnin

g la

mp

inte

nsity

about 100mm

25m

m

98m

m

L1 9 12 14.6 22.2 3 2 1

RDF feeding direction(b) Right Pick-Up

RDF feeding direction(a) Left Pick-Up

L2L2L2L2 15~20mm

L1: about 32 mm (1st)about 45 mm (2nd and subsequent; LTR)about 41 mm (2nd and subsequent; A4)about 30 mm (2nd and subsequent; B5)about 32 mm (2nd and subsequent; others)

L2: 2.4 mm (1st)4.8 mm (2nd and subsequent)



4-9

4. Making Checksa. Checking the Voltage at J111B-8 (LAON)

Check to make sure that the voltage between J111B-8 and J111B-5 (GND) on the DCcontroller PCB is about 5 V when the scanner is moving forward and 0 V during initialrotation, when the scanner is moving in reverse, and during post rotation.

b. Intensity/AE AdjustmentTable 4-103 shows items that may be adjusted on the scanning lamp intensity control

circuit.

Table 4-103



4-10

Service mode

LIGHT _ 5LIGHT 5P

GLEAM _ 5

AE _ SLOP]3]

]3]

]3]

Function

Optimumintensityadjustment forpotentialcontrol (copydensity at 5)

Optimumexposureadjustmentduring non-potentialcontrol (copydensity at 5)

AE slope

Adjustment

Intensity

Copy density

1V 5V Input

q

w

Intensity

Copy density1 5 9

q

w

Intensity

Copy density1 5 9

q

w

Remarks

q If the setting isincreased in servicemode, the intensityduring copying willincrease, making thecopy lighter.

w If the setting isdecreased in servicemode, the intensityduring copying willdecrease, making thecopy darker.

q If the setting isincreased in servicemode, the intensityduring copying willincrease, making thecopy lighter.

w If the setting isdecreased in servicemode, the intensityduring copying willdecrease, making thecopy darker.

q If the setting isincreased inadjustment mode, thecopy of a newspaperwill be darker.

w When the setting isdecreased inadjustment mode, thecopy of a newspaperwill be lighter.

C. Controlling the Primary/Transfer Corona Current

1. OutlineFigure 4-111 shows the circuit used to control the primary/transfer corona current,

and the circuit has the following functions:q Turning on and off the primary corona current.w Controlling the primary corona current to a specific level.e Turning on and off the transfer corona.r Controlling the transfer corona current to a fixed level.

2. Controlling the Primary Corona CurrentThe DC controller compares the drum surface potential VD obtained by the potential

detection circuit against the target value; and, if there is a discrepancy, the signal fromthe DC controller used to control the primary corona current is corrected.

The corrected signal is converted into an analog value (HVTPC signal) by the D/Aconverter circuit, and is sent to the high-voltage transformer, thereby controlling theprimary corona current.

The primary corona current output is turned on and off by DCON, and is controlledby the HVTPC control.

When HVTPC is 3 to 11 V, the primary corona current turns on; it turns off when thesignal is about 12 V or more.

a. When the Primary Corona Current Output Is OffHVTPC is about 12 VDCON is ‘0’

Variable width pulse oscillator circuit goes OFF.Comparator circuit goes OFF.

Drive circuit goes OFF.Primary high-voltage transformer goes OFF.



4-11

b. When the Primary Corona Current Output Is ONHVTPC is less than about 11 V.DCON is ‘1’.

Variable width pulse generator circuit goes ON.Comparator circuit goes ON.

Drive circuit turns on.Primary high-voltage transformer goes ON.

Figure 4-111

The above condition causes the high-voltage transformer to send high voltage suitedto the output of the primary charging level control signal (HVTPC) to the primary chargingassembly.

If an excess corona current flows because of changes in the environment, the returncurrent to the comparator circuit increases, and the output decreases; this condition willdecrease the corona current from the primary charging assembly, controlling it to aspecific level at all times.

In photo mode, the target value is lowered by about 80 V than the dark area potential(VD) used in normal copying mode. As such, potential control is executed while makingthe first copy in photo mode after power-on to control the primary corona current.

+--

+--

DC controller PCB

Q156

Micro-processor

D/A converter Switch

circuit

Variable width pulse oscillator

circuit

T502Drive circuit

Primary high-voltage transformer

Transfer high-voltage

HVTPC

HVTTC

DCON

Comparator circuit

HVT

T501

T502 Primary charging assembly

Photo-sensitive

drum


J202-6

J202-5

J202-1

J114A-5

J114A-6J114A-10

Variable width pulse oscillator

circuit

T501Drive circuit



4-12

3. Controlling the Transfer Corona CurrentHow well the toner image on the drum is transferred to copy paper is affected by

changes in the environment (temperature, humidity).To ensure a specific density in the presence of changes in the environment, the

machine is designed to vary the transfer current level in relation to the temperature andthe humidity measured by the environment sensor.

Figure 4-112

The transfer corona current output is turned on and off by the high-voltage DCremote signal (DCON). The output level of the transfer current, further, is controlled bythe transfer charging level control signal (HVTTC).

When HVTTC is about 3 V or more and less than 11 V, the output of the transfercorona current turns on; it turns off when the signal is about 12 V or more.

a. When the Transfer Corona Current Output is OFFHVTTC is about 12 V.DCON is ‘0’.

Comparator circuit goes OFF.Variable width pulse oscillator goes OFF.

Drive circuit goes OFF.Primary transformer goes OFF.

Humidity (%)

Tra

nsfe

r cu

rren

t (+

)



4-13

b. When the Transfer Corona Current Output Is ON.HVTTC is less than about 11 V.DCON is ‘1’.

Comparator circuit goes ON.Variable width pulse oscillator goes ON.

Drive circuit goes ON.Primary high-voltage transformer goes ON.

The above condition causes the high-voltage transformer to send high voltage suitedto the output of the transfer charging level control signal (HVTTC) to the transfer chargingassembly.

If an excess corona current flows from the transfer charging assembly because ofchanges in the environment or the like, the return signal to the comparison circuit willincrease and the output will decrease, causing the corona current from the transfercharging assembly to decrease and thereby controlling it to a specific level at all times.



4-14

D. Controlling the Separation/Pre-Transfer Corona Current

1. OutlineFigure 4-113 shows the circuit used to control the separation corona current and the

pre-transfer corona current, and the circuit has the following functions:q Turning on and off the separation/pre-transfer corona current.w Switching the separation corona current level.e Controlling the separation corona current to a specific level.r Switching the pre-transfer corona current level.t Controlling the re-transfer corona current to a specific level.

The DC component of the separation charging assembly and the pre-transfercharging assembly is controlled to a specific current by obtaining a sampling signal fromthe secondary side of the high-voltage transformer (HVT) with the aim of eliminating theeffects of changes in the environment on corona charging. (The AC transformer iscontrolled to a specific voltage.)

The separation corona current is varied to eliminate the effects of changes in theenvironment by measuring the surface potential of the drum and in relation to the outputof the environment sensor.

Figure 4-113

+--

+--

DC controller PCB

HVT.POST.AC

HVT.POST.DC

Q156

D/A

con

vert

er

ROED

J114A-7

DCON

J202-4

J114A-1

J202-10

J114A-10

J202-1

J114A-8

J202-3

J114A-9

J202-2

HVSCT

HVTOFFSwitching

circuitAC control

circuit

Constant current

control circuitDrive circuit

Drive circuit

(HVT)

Overcurrent detection

circuit

Switching circuit

Constant current control

circuitDrive circuit

DC transformerT302

DC transformerT402(positive power supply)

DC transformerT301 (negative power supply)

AC transformerT201

Photosensitive drum

Mic

ropr

oces

sor

(mas

ter)

Switching circuit

Switching circuit



4-15

Figure 4-114

The transfer corona current is varied in relation to the temperature and the humiditymeasured by the environment sensor to eliminate the effects of changes in theenvironment.

Figure 4-115

2. Turning On and Off the Separation/Pre-Transfer Corona CurrentThe separation/pre-transfer corona current is turned on and off when all outputs of

the HVTAC drive signal (HVP.POST.AC), roller electrode rive signal (ROED), and high-voltage DC drive signal (DCON) generated by the DC controller PCB go ‘1’.

Humidity (%)

Pre

-tra

nsfe

r cu

rren

t (-)

Temperature (°C)

Drum surface potential "high"

Drum surface potential "medium"

Drum surface potential "low"

Sep

arat

ion

curr

ent (

-)



4-16

3. Separation Corona Current (DC component)For the output of the separation corona current (DC component), DC current is varied

to suit the voltage level (3 to 11 V) of HVSCT.

Figure 4-116

4. Pre-Transfer Corona Current (DC component)The level of the pre-transfer corona current (DC component) is varied according to

the voltage level of HVP.POST.DC.

Figure 4-117

-330

0 3 11

Voltage level (V) of HVT.POST DC

Pre-transfer corona current (µA)

-500

1003 11

Voltage level (V) of HVSCT

Separation corona current (µA)



4-17

5. Controlling the DC Component of the Separation/Pre-Transfer Corona CurrentIf an overcurrent flows into the separation/pre-transfer charging assembly, the high-

voltage stop signal (HVTOFF) is generated to temporarily stop the corona current(DC/AC component) applied to the pre-transfer/separation charging assembly.

When HVOFF is generated, the copier continues to operate, and the application ofthe corona current will be resumed when the application current returns to normal.

If leakage occurs because of an overcurrent caused by a broken charging wire or thelike, and HVTOFF continues as a result, the application will not be resumed unless thecause is removed.

When the corona current applied to the transfer/separation charging assemblystops because of an overcurrent, separation jams tend to occur frequently.Since the control panel will not indicate any message, check the relevantmechanisms if separation jams are frequent.

*Output from the DC controller PCB (connector of signal name).

Table 4-104 Combinations of Transfer/Separation Signals



4-18

Switching signals Control signals

Signal* DCON HVT.POST.AC ACBTP ROED HVSTC HVT.POST.DCHVT output J114A-10 J114A-7 J114A-3 J114A-1 J114A-8 J114A-9

Pre-transfer ON ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘0’ — 3~11V

Pre-transfer OFF ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ — 2V

Separation ON ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘0’ 3~11V —

Separation OFF ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ 2V —

E. Controlling the Blanking Exposure Lamp (LED)

1. OutlineThe blanking exposure lamp is a LED array consisting of 134 LEDs.All 134 LEDs turns on when the blanking exposure lamp activation signal (BLKON)

generated by the DC controller goes ‘0’ while the drum is rotating but the original is notexposed, potential control is not on, and AE mode is off so as to prevent adhesion ofexcess toner to the photosensitive drum.

The six LEDs at the rear and the six LEDs at the front are turned on at all times.

2. Controlling the Activation in Reduce ModeWhen the original is exposed in Reduce mode, as many LEDs (rear) as suited to the

selected reproduction ratio are turned on to remove the image in the non-image area.Some LEDs at the front are also turned on at this time to suit the size of the copy

paper.

3. Controlling the Activation in Direct ModeWhen the original is exposed in Direct mode, as many LEDs as suited at both front

and rear are turned on to remove the image in the non-image area.When a default-size copy paper is used to make a default-size copy or in Direct

mode, a non-image width (Table 4-105) is created at both rear and front (standard frameerasing).

The non-image width may be set to 0 mm in service mode.

4. Controlling the Activation in Sheet Frame Erase ModeLEDs are turned on so as to prevent adhesion of toner in widths of about 7 mm

around the edges of the copy paper in sheet frame erase mode. The width remains thesame regardless of the selected reproduction ratio.

Reference:When using the multifeeder, you may specify a copy paper size or ‘free’: if youspecify a size, frame erasing will be executed to suit the size; if you select ‘free’, onthe other hand, frame erasing will be executed using the maximum size (297 × 432mm).



4-19

Figure 4-118

5. Controlling the Activation in Original Frame Erase ModeLEDs are turned on to prevent adhesion of toner over widths of about 2 mm around

the edges of the original for original frame erase mode.

Table 4-105

6. Controlling the Activation in Book Frame Erase ModeLEDs are turned on to prevent adhesion of toner in widths of about 2 mm around the

edges of the original in book erase mode.LEDs are also turned on to prevent adhesion of toner in widths of about 20 mm

(standard) along the middle of the paper. (The width may be adjusted to 20 ±10 mm inservice mode.)

Figure 4-1192 mm (approx.)

2 mm(approx.)

20 mm

7 mm (approx.)

7 mm (approx.)

7 mm (approx.)

2.75 mm

Feeding direction



4-20

Paper size

A4 horizontal, B5 horizontal,B4, A3, LTR horizontal

Other sizes

Non-image width

2.75 ± 2.3mm

3.0 ± 2.55mm

7. Controlling the Activation in Hole Image Erase ModeIn hole image erase mode, images of such holes as punched in the original are

erased by turning on LEDs to prevent adhesion of toner along the width.The width may be adjusted between 1 and 20 mm.

Figure 4-120

8. Controlling the Activation in AE ModeIn AE mode, the surface potential of the drum is measured so that the blank

exposure LEDs would have to be turned off.Since only parts of the photosensitive drum are used to measure the surface

potential, however, those LEDs that are over the area of measurement are turned withthe remaining LEDs kept on.

Figure 4-121

Photosensitive drum

Blank exposure lamp (LEDs)

Potential sensor

Feedingdirection

1 to 20 mm



4-21

F. Drum Heater Circuit

1. OutlineThe inside of the photosensitive drum is equipped with a drum heater (60 W), and

the heater is controlled so that the surface of the drum remains a specific temperature.The drum heater is supplied with AC power through a power switch (SW1), door

switch (SW2), and drum heater switch and by way of an AC driver.When the drum heater switch is ON and, in addition, the door switch (SW2) is ON,

AC power is supplied regardless of the state (ON/OFF) of the power switch. When thedrum heater switch (SW3) is OFF, on the other hand, AC power is supplied to the drumheater only if the power switch is OFF.

The drum heater drive circuit turns off when the drum heater drive signal (DHRD)generated by the DC controller PCB goes ‘0’, thereby supplying the drum heater withhalf-wave AC power.

If the drum heater drive signal (DHRD) generated by the DC controller PCB is ‘1’, onthe other hand, full-wave AC power is supplied to the drum heater.

The relationship between the state of the copier and the state (ON/OFF) of the drumheater circuit of the AC driver is as follows:

Table 4-106

The temperature of the drum is monitored at all times by a thermistor (TH) built intothe drum heater.

If the surface temperature of the drum falls below a specific value, the output of thecomparison circuit goes ‘1’, turning on the trigger circuit; as a result, the triac turns on toturn on the drum heater.

If the surface temperature of the drum is higher than a specific value, on the otherhand, the output of the comparison circuit goes ‘0’, turning off the drum heater.

Drum surface temperature: 42°CThermal fuse rated temperature: 76°C



4-22

State of copier

Power plug connected andpower switch OFF

During copying

During standby

Drum heater drive circuit

OFF (half-wave AC power)

ON (full-wave AC power)

Figure 4-122

+--

+12V

AC driver

Drum heater drive circuit

SW1Power

supply switch

SW3Drum heater switch

SW2

ACPower supply

Door switch

Drum heater

TP3

Triac

J01-1Drum heater controller PCB

Trigger circuit

Comparison circuit

ThermistorTH

J01-5

-6

DC controller PCB

Power supply

unit



4-23

2. Idle Rotation of the Photosensitive Drum and the Developing CylinderIn a high humidity environment, the photosensitive drum and the developing cylinder

tend to absorb moisture, leading to a lowered copy density and distorted images (aswhen the machine is turned on for the first time in the morning).

To prevent such a problem, if the surface temperature of the upper fixing roller is75°C or less, the photosensitive drum and the developing cylinder are rotated idly duringthe wait-up period.

Idle rotation is controlled in ether of three modes according to the vapor ratiodetected by an environment sensor as shown in Table 4-107.

Reference:The term vapor ratio refers to the amount of vapor (g) contained in 1 kg of air.

The control modes shown in Table 4-107 may be adjusted in service mode.

Table 4-107

Reference:The 100V machines are shipped with the drum heater switch (SW3) set to ON (idlerotation mode ON).



4-24

Vapor ratio

7 g/kg or less

7 to 12 g/kg

12 g/kg or more

Remarks

None

2 to 2.5 min

Up to 5 min

Idle rotation

None

Fixing roller 100°C through warm-up

Power-on through fixing warm-up

G. Cleaning the Primary Charging Wire

1. OutlineThe machine is equipped with an automatic cleaning mechanism for the charging

wire of the primary charging assembly which is executed when the following conditionsare met:• The surface temperature of the fixing roller at power-on is 100°C or less.• The automatic cleaning mechanism is executed in user mode. (p. 1-17)• Last rotation (LSTR) initiated every 2,000 copies ended. (If cleaning has been

executed under the foregoing two conditions, cleaning will be executed every 2,000copies thereafter.)

2. Automatic Cleaning MechanismIf the surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100°C or less at power-on, the primary

charging wire cleaner motor (M12) rotates clockwise to move the cleaner forward forabout 20 sec. The cleaner motor then rotates counterclockwise to move the cleaner inreverse for about 16 sec. (The machine is not equipped with a position sensor.)

The RAM on the DC controller PCB keeps track of the cleaning operations so thatcleaning is executed every 2,000 copies. (In the case of continuous copying, cleaningwill be executed when as many copies as set have been made.)

Figure 4-123


Wire

Feeding screw

DC controller PCB

Wire cleaner

(rear)

(front)

Primary charging wire cleaning motor (M12)

(PCLM) J103B-3.4

Primary charging wire cleaning motor drive command



4-25

H. Pre-Transfer/Transfer/Separation Charging Wire AutomaticCleaning Mechanism

The machine is equipped with an automatic cleaning mechanism for the chargingwire of the pre-transfer/transfer/separation charging assembly.

The cleaning mechanism for the pre-transfer/transfer/separation charging wire isexecuted under the conditions and the periods set for auto cleaning for the primarycharging wire.

Figure 4-124 (pre-transfer charging assembly)

(rear)

(front)

Wire cleaner

Wire

Pre-transfer charging wire

Feeding screw

Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor (M13)

DC controller PCB

Pre-

trans

fer c

harg

ing

clean

er m

otor

driv

e co

mm

and

(PT

RC

LM)

J1

03A

-9.1

0



4-26

Figure 4-125 (transfer/separation charging assembly)

Transfer/separation charging wire

Wire

Wire cleaner

Transfer/separation charging wire cleaner motor (M6)

Tran

sfer

/sep

arat

ion

char

ging

wi

re c

lean

er m

otor

driv

e co

mm

and

(TS

CLM

)

J10

8A-1

.19

(rear)

(front)

DC controller PCB



4-27

II. DRUM CLEANING ASSEMBLY/DEVELOPINGASSEMBLY

A. Outline

The developing assembly is operated by the drive of the main motor controlled bythe developing clutch (CL8).

The cleaning assembly is provided with the drive of the main motor through drumgears.

The toner inside the developing assembly is monitored by the toner level detectioncircuit, and toner is supplied by the hopper assembly when the level falls below a specificvalue. The toner inside the hopper assembly is monitored by the toner sensor (TS1), andthe Add Toner message will be indicated when the level of toner falls below a specificvalue. (Thereafter, copying will be forced off after making about 200 copies.)

The developing assembly is supplied with toner by the hopper assembly using thedrive of the hopper motor 1 (M11). The toner inside the hopper assembly is stirred by thehopper motor 2 (M10).

The toner scraped off by the cleaning blade is moved to the rear of the copier by afeeding screw inside the cleaner assembly; it is then forwarded through the waste tonerfeeding pipe for collection in the waste toner case.

The waste toner feeding assembly is equipped with a torque limiter. If the screwbecomes clogged with waste toner, the waste toner feeding screw detection circuit turnson to turn off the main motor (M1).



4-28

Figure 4-201

Hopper assembly

DC controller PCB

M1 Main motor

Waste toner case

Waste toner feeding pipe

Waste toner feeding screw

Waste toner feeding screw locked detection (MSW4)

MS4

Drum cleaning assembly

Cleaning blade

Photosensitive drum

TS 2

TS 1

Toner sensor

Developing clutch

Hopper motor 1

Hopper motor 2

Was

te to

ner

feed

ing

scre

w lo

cked

det

ectio

n (W

TF

L)

Dev

elop

ing

clut

ch d

rive

com

man

d (D

VLD

)

Dev

elop

ing

asse

mbl

y to

ner

leve

l sig

nal (

DT

EP

)

Hop

per

tone

r le

vel s

igna

l (T

EP

)

Hop

per

mot

or (

tone

r st

irrin

g) d

rive

com

man

d (M

10O

N)

Hop

per

tone

r (t

oner

sup

ply)

driv

e co

mm

and

(M11

ON

)

Developing assembly

M11

M10

CL8



4-29

B. Detecting the Level of Toner and Controlling the SupplyOperation

The toner inside the developing assembly is monitored by the toner sensor (TS2).When the toner inside the developing assembly falls below a specific level while thedeveloping clutch (CL8) remains on during copying, the developing assembly toner levelsignal ( ) goes ‘0’ and is communicated to the DC controller.

When the DC controller has detected the developing assembly toner level signal( ) for 0.3 sec or more, it sends the hopper motor (toner supply) drive signal(M11ON), causing the hopper to supply toner.

When the toner inside the developing assembly has reached a specific value and theDC controller PCB has detected the developing assembly toner level signal ( =1)for 0.7 sec or more, the DC controller PCB stops the hopper motor 1 (M11).

If the toner sensor (TS2) goes out of order for some reason or if a fault in the hopperprevents supply operation and, as a result, the DC controller detects the developingassembly toner level signal ( =0) for 120 sec or more, the DC controller will indicate‘E020’ and stop copying operation.

The level of toner inside the hopper is monitored by the hopper toner sensor ( )while the hopper motor 1 (M11) is operating to supply toner or while toner is being stirred.

When the toner inside the hopper falls below a specific level, the hopper leveldetection signal ( ) goes ‘0’. When the DC controller PCB has detected the signal for1 sec or more, it will indicate the Add Toner message on the control panel. At this time,the Copy Start key on the control panel will change to red.

Figure 4-202

Developing assembly toner level detection signal (DTEP)

Hopper toner level detection signal (TEP)

INTR

Hopper motor 1 (M11)


SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

*1 *2

*3

Add Tonermessage

Add Toner messageOFF

*1 Resumes supply operation when the developing assembly toner level detection signal = 0 has been detected for 0.3 sec or more.*2 Suspends supply operation when the developing assembly toner level detection signal

= 1 is detected for 0.7 sec.*3 Drives the hopper for 2.0 sec and then holds it for 1 sec, supplying toner by repeating this sequence.

Copy Start keyON

TEP

TS1

DTEP

DTEP

DTEP

DTEP



4-30

The RAM on the DC controller PCB keeps count of copies being made; when it hasdetected the hopper toner level detection signal ( =1) for 1 sec or more, it will assumethe presence of toner, thereby cleaning the counter and turning off the Add Tonermessage on the control panel.

Reference:The inside of both the developing assembly and the hopper assembly is eachequipped with a piezoelectric oscillator.In the absence of toner, the oscillator oscillates at several kHz, and the output ofthe sensor goes ‘0’. In the presence of toner, on the other hand, the weight of thetoner stops the oscillation, and the output of the sensor goes ‘1’.

Figure 4-203

If the developing assembly is not set inside the copier, do not install the developingassembly locking assembly. Otherwise, the toner collecting in the path from thehopper to the developing assembly can pour out because of the vibrations causedby inspection/repair work.

AMP

Piezoelectric oscillator

Integration circuit

OutputTEP

TEP



4-31

Caution:

C. Controlling the Developing Bias/Roller Electrode

1. OutlineDuring copying, both AC bias and DC bias are applied to the developing cylinder.

The DC bias is a voltage which is the sum of 100 V and VL2 measured by the potentialsensor before copying is started.

When the machine is not making copies, the degree of the DC bias is varied to suitthe surface potential of the drum to prevent adhesion of excess toner on thephotosensitive drum.

Figure 4-204

2. Control Timing

Table 4-201

Photosensitive drum

Developing cylinder

VDB

Dark area

Light area

BiasVDB = VL2 + 100 [V]

Toner



4-32

Bias

DCcomponent

AC component 1500 Vp-p,2700 Hz

Voltage

+600V

+600V

VL2+100 [V]

Period

CNTR1, 2

INTR, AER, LSTRduring copying

SCFW, SCRVduring copying

Description

To prevent adhesion of excess toner on thedrum. (The surface potential variesconstantly, and is measured by thepotential sensor at all times.)

To prevent adhesion of excess toner on thedrum.

To prevent fogging of the background.

To execute toner projection.

Surface Temperature of Fixing Roller 75°C or Less and Ambient Temperature 17°Cor More

Figure 4-205

Making 2nd and Subsequent Copies 10 Min or Less after Power-On and 60 Min orLater

Figure 4-206

Copy Start keyON

Main motor (M1)

AC bias

INTR SCFW LSTR STBY

: +600 VDC bias :

DC bias


AER SCRV SCFW SCRV

: Potential control value (VL2 + 100 V)

Power switchON

WMUP

Main motor (M1)

AC bias

INTR CNTR1 LSTR STBYCNTR2

: +600VDC bias

DC bias




4-33

Making First Copy 10 Min or More after Power-On and 60 Min or Later

Figure 4-207

Copy Start keyON

Main motor (M1)

AC bias

INTR

: +600VDC bias:

DC bias


: Potential control value (VL2 + 100 V)

CNTR1 CNTR2 AER SCRVSCFW SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY



4-34

3. Developing Bias Control CircuitThe circuit used to control the developing bias is provided with the following

functions:a. Turning on and off the AC biasb. Controlling the voltage level of the DC bias

q AC Bias OFF control developing bias remote signal ACBTP is ‘0’AC bias switch circuit goes OFF.

Drive circuit goes OFF.AC transformer T401 output is cut off.

The above condition deprives the developing cylinder of AC bias.The above condition stops the AC bias to the developing cylinder.

w AC bias ON control developing bias remote signal ACBTP is ‘1’Drive circuit goes ON.

AC bias switch circuit goes ON.The above condition causes the high-voltage transformer to increase the high-voltage transformer to 1500 Vp-p and supply it to the developing assembly.

Figure 4-208

DC controller PCB

Q156

(master)Micro-

processor

D/A converter

Switch circuit

Drive circuit

Switch circuit

Drive circuit

DC transformer T402

AC wave generation

AC transformer T401

High-voltage transformer (HVT) Voltage detection

Drum

J114A-3

J202-8

J114A-10

J202-1

J114A-1

J202-10

J114A-2

J202-9

ACBTP

DCBTP

ROED

DCBC

Developing cylinder

Roller electrode



4-35

e DC bias voltage level controlThe voltage of the DC bias is determined by the signal (DCBC) from the DCcontroller.• High-voltage DC remote signal (DCBTP) = 1• Roller bias remote signal (ROED) = 1• Developing DC control signal (DCBC) = 3 V or more or less than 12 VThe above condition turns on the AC bias switch circuit; when the output (DCBC)from the DC controller PCB increases, the output of DC bias will also increase.

Figure 4-209

4. Roller Electrode Bias Control CircuitThe circuit used to control the roller electrode bias is equipped with the following

functions:a. Turning on and off the roller electrode.

q Roller electrode ON signal• High-voltage DC remote signal (DCBTP) = 1

Roller bias signal (ROED) = 1Switch circuit goes ON

High-voltage transformer drive circuit goes ONDC transformer T402 goes ON

The above condition supplies the roller electrode with a bias of about 1000 V; theDC bias is not controlled to a specific voltage.

DC bias voltage level

DCBC signal input voltage (V)

03 11

600

(V)



4-36

w Turning off the roller electrode• High-voltage DC remote signal (DCBTP) is ‘0’ and roller bias signal (ROED) is

‘0’Switch circuit goes OFF.

High-voltage transformer drive circuit goes OFF.DC transformer T402 goes OFF.

The above condition deprives the roller electrode of bias.

* Output from the DC controller PCB (connector No.).

Table 4-202 Combination of Developing DC/Roller Electrode Bias Output Signals



4-37

Switching signal Control signal

Signal* DCBTP ACBTP ROED ACON DCBCHVT output J114A-10 J114A-3 J114A-1 J114A-7 J114A-2

DC bias ON ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘1’ ‘0’ 3~11V

DC bias OFF ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ 2V

Roller bias ON ‘1’ ‘0’ ‘1’ ‘0’ —

Roller bias OFF ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ ‘0’ —

D. Detecting the Waste Toner Feeding Screw (locking)

If the waste toner pipe becomes stopped up by waste toner inside it and, as a result,the rotation of the feeding screw is hindered, waste toner can start to pour out becauseof feeding faults.

To prevent such a problem, the machine is equipped with a feeding screw detectionmechanism.

The gear A (Figure 4-210) used to drive the waste toner feeding screw becomessubject to force in the axial direction, and slides along the shaft.

The movement of the gear A is monitored by the waste toner feeding screwdetecting switch (MS4). When MS4 is pushed by the gear A, the main motor (M1) willstop, and the DC controller will indicate ‘E013’ on the control panel.

Figure 4-210 (rear view)

Waste toner

Waste toner pipe

Waste toner feeding screw

Cleaning assembly waste toner feeding screw

Cleaning assembly

DC controller PCB

M1

Gear A

Was

te to

ner f

eedi

ng s

crew

det

ectin

g(W

TF

L) J

114B

-1, 2

Main motor

Waste toner feeding screw detection (MS4)

When the waste toner feeding screw becomes locked, the gear A will slide in the direction of the arrow.



4-38

III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY



1. Disconnect the power plug for safety before starting disassembly/assemblywork.

2. Unless otherwise noted, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used todisassemble them.

3. Identify the screws by type (length, diacmeter) and location.4. One of the mounting screws of the rear cover is provided with a toothed washer to



the front door switch or the power switch is off.8. Do NOT throw the toner into fire; it can explode.

A. Scanning Lamp Assembly

1. Removing the Scanning Lamp1) Remove the copyboard glass retainer, and remove the copyboard glass.2) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the center.

!

!



4-39

3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the reflecting shade w and thesupport plate e.

Figure 4-301

4) While pushing the electrode block at the rear toward the rear, remove the scanninglamp r.

Figure 4-302

1. Do not work if the surface of the scanning lamp is hot.2. Do not leave fingerprints on the surface of the scanning lamp.3. If the surface of the scanning lamp is soiled, dry wipe it.4. Do not leave fingerprints on the reflecting shade.5. Do not deform the reflecting shade.6. To install the lens hood, fit the boss of the lens hood in the cut-off of the rail at

the front, and then engage the hook at the rear while turning the lens hoodslightly clockwise.

r

q q

w e



4-40

Caution:

2. Removing the Thermal Fuse1) Remove the copyboard glass retainer, and remove the copyboard.2) Remove the control panel.3) Remove the scanning lamp.4) Move the No. 1 mirror mount to the right end.5) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the thermal fuse w.

Figure 4-303

B. Standard White Plate

1) Remove the RDF.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the copyboard glass right

retaining plate w.

Figure 4-304

q

w

q qw



4-41

4) Remove the two stepped screws e (M3x3), and remove the standard white coverr.

Figure 4-305

5) Remove the six mounting screws e, and remove the RDF mount cover r.6) Remove the two mounting screws t, and remove the rear top cover y.

Figure 4-306

e

e

r r

t t

y

e

e

r



4-42

7) Remove the control panel.8) Remove the two mounting screws u, and remove the standard white plate i.

Figure 4-307

C. Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit

1. Removing the Pre-Exposure Lamp Unit1) Open the front door, and slide out the hopper assembly; then, slide out the

fixing/feeding unit.2) Remove the process unit. (See p. 7-18.)3) Remove the primary charging assembly and the pre-transfer charging assembly.4) Remove the blanking exposure lamp assembly.5) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the blanking exposure assembly

rail stay w.

Figure 4-308

qq

w

u

u

i



4-43

6) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the two mounting screws w; then, removethe pre-exposure lamp unit e.

Figure 4-309

D. Blanking Exposure Lamp Assembly

1. Removing the Blanking Exposure Lamp Assembly1) Open the front door, and slide out the hopper assembly.2) Disconnect the two connectors q, and remove the mounting screw w; then, slide

out the blanking exposure lamp assembly e slowly.

Figure 4-310

When removing the blanking exposure lamp assembly, take care so as not todamage the photosensitive drum.

q

q

w

e

q w

e



4-44

Caution:

E. Photosensitive Drum

nn Points to Note When Handling the Photosensitive DrumThe machine uses an amorphous silicon drum, which will be subject to deterioration

if not oriented correctly (applicable to the process unit also). Keep the following in mindwhenever you need to handle the photosensitive drum:q If you have removed the process unit from the copier or removed the photosensitive

drum from the process unit, be sure to protect the photosensitive drum from light bywrapping it with the photosensitive drum protection sheet or six or more sheets of A3(11"×17") or larger copy paper.

w Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum near a window or in an areaexposed to direct rays of the sun.

e Do not work in an area where the temperature/humidity changes abruptly or subjectto a high/low temperature/humidity.

r Do not work in an area subject to dust, ammonium gas, or organic gas.The foregoing points apply equally to all types of photosensitive drums.

1. Removing the Drum Unit1) Open the front door, and slide out the hopper assembly.2) Remove the process unit. (See p. 7-18.)3) Remove the primary charging assembly and the pre-transfer charging assembly.4) Remove the blanking exposure lamp assembly.5) Remove the blanking exposure assembly rail stay.6) Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the gear plate w.

Figure 4-311

q

q

w



4-45

7) Remove the two mounting screws e, and remove the front side stay r.

Figure 4-312

8) Holding it as shown, remove the photosensitive drum t.

Figure 4-313

Remove the photosensitive drum while taking care not to damage it.You need not remove the bearing at the rear and the gear at the front of thephotosensitive drum.

t

ee

r



4-46

Caution:

2. Replacing the Drum Heater1) Remove the photosensitive drum from the process unit.2) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the flange w at the front.

Figure 4-314

Whenever you have removed the photosensitive drum, wrap it with six or moresheets of copy paper (A3/11"×17") or the drum protection sheet (stored near thewaste toner case) to protect it from soiling and damage.

3) Pull out the flange at the front, and disconnect the connector; then, remove the drumheater from the photosensitive drum.

3. Installing the Photosensitive DrumInstall the photosensitive drum by reversing the steps used to remove it. During the

work, be sure to take care, avoiding trapping of the cables (drum heater) and dirt ordamage (drum surface).

qw



4-47

Caution:

F. Potential Sensor Assembly

1. Removing the Potential Sensor Assembly1) Remove the blanking potential lamp assembly from the copier. (See p. 4-44.)

Keep in mind that the potential sensor assembly is an integrated part of theblanking exposure lamp assembly.

G. Primary Charging Assembly

1. Removing the Primary Charging Assembly1) Open the front door, and open the hopper assembly.2) Loosen the mounting screw q, and slide the fixing member w upward; then, fix the

fixing member in place.3) Disconnect the connector e, and remove the primary charging assembly r.

Figure 4-315

After installing the primary charging assembly, execute ‘wire cleaning’ in usermode. (You need not perform this step if the surface temperature of the upper fixingroller is 100°C or less, since wire cleaning will be executed automatically.)

q

w

e

r



4-48

Caution:

Caution:

H. Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly

1. Removing the Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly1) Open the front door, and slide out the hopper assembly.2) Remove the mounting screw q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove the

pre-transfer charging assembly e.

Figure 4-316

After installing the pre-transfer charging assembly, execute ‘wire cleaning’ in usermode. (You need not perform this step if the surface temperature of the upper fixingroller is 100°C or less, since wire cleaning will be executed automatically.)

I. Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly

1. Removing the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly1) Open the front door, and slide out the fixing/feeding unit.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the fixing guide w.

Figure 4-317

q

w

q we



4-49

Caution:

4) Disconnect the connector e, and slide out the transfer/separation chargingassembly r to the front; then, remove it by lifting it toward the left.

Figure 4-318

er

A

B



4-50

2. Installing the Transfer/Separation Charging AssemblyInstall the transfer/separation charging assembly by reversing the steps used to

remove it with the following in mind:1) Be sure to fit the four bosses q of the transfer/separation charging assembly in the

cut-off w of the frame of the fixing/feeding unit.2) Be sure to put the leaf spring e of the fixing/feeding unit into contact with the frame

of the transfer/separation charging assembly (when sliding it from the front).

Figure 4-319

Figure 4-320

Figure 4-321

w w

w

e

qq

qq



4-51

3) Be sure to use the mounting screw t when fixing the fixing guide plate r in place.

Figure 4-322

4) Be sure to execute ‘wire cleaning’ in user mode. (You need not perform this step ifthe surface temperature of the upper fixing roller is 100°C or less, since wire cleaningwill be executed automatically.)

t

r



4-52

J. Charging Wire

1. OutlineThe photosensitive drum is surrounded by three charging wires: primary, pre-

transfer, transfer/separation, each of which is 0.06 mm in diameter.

2. Removing the Wire Cleaner of the Primary Charging Assembly1) Pick the wire cleaner with fingers, and disengage the hook with a screwdriver.

Figure 4-323

3. Stringing the Charging WiresAs a rule, with the exception of the grid wire, all charging wires are strung in the same

way; here, the charging assembly is used to show the steps.1) Remove the shielding plate (left, right) of the charging assembly. To prevent

deformation (slack) of the charging assembly, be sure to remove the left and the rightshielding plates individually (i.e., do not loosen the mounting screws q of both platesat the same time).

Figure 4-324

q



4-53

2) Remove the wire cleaner.

For other charging assemblies, remove the two lids.

3) Free a length (about 5 cm) of wire from the charging reel, and form a loop at one end(2 mm dia.).

Reference:When forming a loop, you may wind the charging wire around a hex key once; then,turn the key three to four times, and twist the wire.

4) Cut the end (excess) of the twisted wire with a nipper.5) Hook the loop on the stud.

Figure 4-325

6) Hook the charging wire on the charging wire positioner at the rear; then, hook thewire on the charging wire tension spring as shown in Figure 4-326, and twist it.

Figure 4-326

Stud ReelCharging corona electrode

(front)Charging wire

(rear)



4-54

Caution:

7) Cut the excess charging wire with a nipper.8) Pick the end of the charging wire tensioning spring with tweezers, and hook it on the

charging electrode.

In the case of the transfer charging assembly, hook it on the pin at the front.

Figure 4-327

After stringing the wire, check to make sure that• It is not bent or twisted in the middle and its gold plating has not peeled.• It is in the V-groove of the charging wire positioner.

Figure 4-328 Primary Charging Wire

9) Install the cushion at the front of the charging wire. (This does not apply to theprimary charging assembly.)

10) Install the shielding plates (left, right).

For other charging assemblies, install the two lids.

(correct) (wrong)

Grid side

(correct) (wrong)



4-55

Caution:

Caution:

11) Install the wire cleaner. (At this time, be sure that the cleaner is oriented correctly.)12) Clean the charging wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

4. Stringing the Grid Wire of the Primary Charging Assembly1) Loosen the two mounting screws used to keep the left and the right shielding plates

in place.2) Loosen the three mounting screws used to keep the motor unit at the front in place.

Figure 4-329

3) Loosen the mounting screw, and move the grid in the direction shown in Figure 4-330; then, fix it in place temporarily.

Figure 4-330

4) Free a length (about 5 cm) of wire from the charging wire reel (0.1 mm dia.), and forma loop at the end (2 mm dia.).

Screw

Screws



4-56

Reference:To form a loop, wind the wiring wire around a hex key once; then, turn the hex keythree to four times, and twist the wire.

5) Cut the twisted charging wire (excess) with a nipper.6) Hook the loop on the stud A shown in Figure 4-331.7) After stringing it 31 runs, route it through section B, and give it a half turn; then, lead

it between the washer and the motor unit, and wind it around the mounting screwonce (clockwise), and fix it in place with a mounting screw.

Figure 4-331

8) Cut the excess charging wire with a nipper.9) Tighten the screw loosened in step 3).

Turn the screw until the tension of the grid wire is even.Pay attention to avoid deformation and slack; if necessary, try to tighten the mountingscrew on the left/right shielding plate at the front earlier.

10) Tighten the mounting screws loosened in steps 1) and 2).11) Wipe the grid wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.

q Check to make sure that the grid wire is not bent or twisted.w Check to make sure that the wire is strung at equal intervals (i.e., it is in the

groove of the block).

Stud A

Screw B



4-57

Caution:

5. Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire

Figure 4-332

Reference:The height (position) of the primary and the transfer charging wires may be adjustedby turning the screw behind the charging assembly. A full turn of the screw changesthe position of the charging wire by about 0.7 mm.



4-58

Charging assembly

Primary

Pre-transfer

Transfer

Separation

Tolerance

± 1mm

Nomechanism

± 2mm

± 2mm

Height of charging wire

16.2±0.5mm

14.9±0.5mm

10.2±0.5mm

9.5+1.0- 0 mm

7.5+1.5-0 mm

7.5+1.5- 0 mm A

B

C

D

6. Cleaning the Primary Charging Assembly Anti-Stray Sheet1) Open the front door.2) Remove the developing assembly.3) Remove the hopper assembly.4) Remove the process unit. (See p. 7-18.)5) Remove the two screws q, and remove the blanking exposure rail stay w.

Figure 4-333

6) Clean the primary charging assembly anti-stray sheet e.

Figure 4-334

e

qq

w



4-59

K. Developing Assembly

The machine’s developing assembly is not equipped with a developing cylinderprotection cover, requiring you to take care whenever you have removed thedeveloping assembly.If the developing assembly is not set inside the copier, be sure not to install thedeveloping assembly locking assembly. Otherwise, the toner collecting in the paththrough which toner is fed from the hopper to the developing assembly can start topour out because of the vibrations caused by inspection/repair work.

1. Removing the Developing Assembly from the Copier1) Open the multifeeder door; then, remove the mounting screw, and remove the door

stopper tape.2) Remove the mounting screw q, and push the developing assembly locking

assembly w in the direction of the arrow to remove.

Figure 4-335

3) Disconnect the connector e, and slide out the developing assembly r from thecopier.

Figure 4-336

e r

q

w



4-60

Caution:

2. Removing the Blade Unit1) Remove the developing assembly from the copier.2) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the developing assembly cover

w.

Figure 4-337

3) Place a newspaper on the floor or a desk, and empty the developing assembly oftoner.

4) Remove the two mounting screws e, and remove the blade unit r together with themounting plate.

Figure 4-338

The blade must be installed to a very high precision. Do not remove it on its own inthe field. (You must remove its mounting plate.)

3. Installing the BladeInstall the blade by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind:

• Force the blade mounting plate against the developing assembly housing, and fix itin place with two mounting screws.(Before installing the blade, place copy paper on the developing cylinder to protectthe cylinder.)

e er

q qw



4-61

Caution:

4. Removing the Developing Cylinder and the Magnetic Seal1) Remove the developing assembly from the copier.2) Remove the blade unit.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the gear unit together with the

gear unit w.

Figure 4-339

Exercise care, as the gear engaged with the screw becomes free when the gearunit is removed.

4) Remove the grip ring e mounted to the cylinder shaft at the rear; then, remove thegear r, parallel pin t, and butting roll y (one each).

Figure 4-340

e

r

t

y

qq w



4-62

Caution:

5) Remove the two mounting screws u, and remove the electrode plate.

Figure 4-341

6) Remove the mounting screw o, and remove the polarity positioning plate !0.

Figure 4-342

o

!0

u

i



4-63

7) Remove the grip ring !1 mounted to the cylinder shaft at the front, and remove thebutting roll !2.

Figure 4-343

8) Remove the two mounting screws !3, and remove the blade !4 together with themounting plate.

Figure 4-344

9) Remove the bearing !5 at the front and the rear, and remove the developing cylinder!6.

Figure 4-345

Do not leave fingerprints or oils on the surface of the developing cylinder.If any, dry wipe the surface with lint-free paper. (Do not use solvent.)

!5 !5!6

!3 !3!4

!1

!2



4-64

Caution:

5. Cleaning the Developing Assembly Anti-Stray Sheet1) Remove the developing assembly, and clean the developing assembly anti-stray

sheet q.

Figure 4-346

q



4-65

L. Hopper Assembly

1. Removing the Hopper Assembly from the Copier1) Remove the developing assembly from the copier. (See p. 4-60.)2) Slide out the hopper assembly to the front. (See p. 7-18.)3) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the hopper assembly w.

Figure 4-347

q

w



4-66

M.Drum Cleaner

1. Construction

Figure 4-348

2. Removing the Cleaning Blade1) Slide out the process unit from the copier. (See p. 7-18.)2) Disconnect the connector q on the AC line of the drum heater.3) Remove the four mounting screws w, and remove the cleaning blade assembly e.

Figure 4-349

ww e q

Cleaning blade

Separation claw



4-67

4) Remove the E-ring r, and remove the pressure spring t.

Figure 4-350

5) Loosen the five mounting screws y, and remove the cleaning blade from the bladesupport plate.

Figure 4-351

3. Installing the Cleaning BladeInstall the cleaning blade by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following

in mind:

1) Butt the cleaning blade q against the rear.

Figure 4-352

q

No gap.

Blade retaining plate

y

rt



4-68

2) Lightly tighten the five mounting screws w and stop turning them when resistance isfelt, thereby fixing the cleaning blade in place temporarily.

3) Turn the screws fully (20° to 30°) in the order shown in Figure 4-353.

Figure 4-353

After installing the cleaning blade, check to make sure that the edge of the blade isnot appreciably wavy. Be sure to clean the groove in which the blade of the bladesupport plate is mounted, as the presence of toner or the like can cause the bladeto become wavy.

4. Installing the Side Seal1) Install the side seal q as shown (both ends; be sure it will not extend over the inner

side of the cleaner housing).

Figure 4-354

q

q

w

we rt

Order of tightening



4-69

Caution:

5. Cleaning the Cleaner Side ScraperClean the cleaner side scraper when replacing the cleaning blade (every 500,000

copies).1) Remove the cleaning blade.2) Remove any paper lint collecting at the tip of the side scraper (gap A between

magnet roller and toner guide roller) with tweezers.3) Remove the toner collecting on the surface of the magnetic roller. (Scoop up with

copy paper shaped in the form of the letter U.)

Figure 4-355a

Figure 4-355b

Toner guide roller

4~8mm

Side scraper (front)Magnet roller

Waste toner to be remove .

(front)

30~

40m

m

A

Toner guide roller

4~8mm

Side scraper (rear)

Magnet roller

Waste toner to be removed

(rear)

30~

40m

m

A



4-70

4) Turn the magnet roller clockwise (viewing from the front).5) When a full coating has developed in the area from which toner was removed in step

3), repeat steps 3) through 5).

N. Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly

1. Removing from the Drum Unit1) Remove the process unit from the copier. (See p. 7-18.)

1. Take care not to bend the separation claw.2. Take care not to damage the photosensitive drum.

2) Remove the screw q, and remove the No. 2 insulating plate w.3) Remove the screw e, and remove the claw holder r.

Figure 4-356

e er

qw



4-71

Caution:

O. Waste Toner Feeding Assembly

1) Slide out the process unit and the fixing/feeding unit from the copier. (See p. 7-18.)2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the cleaner fan and the feeding fan. (See p. 7-32.)4) Remove the high-voltage transformer PCB.5) Remove the waste toner drive assembly together with the waste toner feeding

assembly.6) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the waste toner feeding screw

detection circuit w.

Figure 4-357

7) Remove the two mounting screws r, and remove the waste toner feeding assemblyt from the waste toner drive assembly.

Figure 4-358

r

t

q w



4-72


CHAPTER 5

PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

I. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM ............5-1A. Outline ...........................................5-1

II. CASSETTE PICK-UP .........................5-4A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-4B. Cassette Lifter Operation ..............5-6C. Identifying the Size of Copy

Paper in the Cassette....................5-8III. FRONT PAPER DECK ASSEMBLY......5-13

A. Outline ...........................................5-13B. Lifter Operation..............................5-16C. Detecting the Presence/Absence

of Paper in the Deck......................5-19D. High-Speed Pick-Up......................5-19

IV. MULTIFEEDER...................................5-20A. Pick-Up Operation .........................5-20B. Identifying the Size of Paper in

the Multifeeder...............................5-21C. Sequence of Pick-Up Operations

(multifeeder) ..................................5-22V. CONTROLLING THE

REGISTRATION CLUTCH .................5-23VI. MAKING TWO-SIDED/OVERLAY

COPIES ..............................................5-24A. Making Two-Sided/Overlay Copies

(1st side)........................................5-24

B. Making Two-Sided Copies (2nd side) ......................................5-26

C. Making Overlay Copies (2nd side) ......................................5-28

D. Reversal Delivery ..........................5-32E. Switching the Paper Size for Two-

Sided/Overlay/Reversal Delivery Copies ...........................................5-34

F. Re-Pick Up from the Holding Tray................................................5-37

G. Skipping Operation........................5-38VII. DETECTING JAMS ............................5-46

A. Outline ...........................................5-46VIII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......5-60

A. Multifeeder Assembly ....................5-61B. Front Paper Deck Assembly .........5-71C. Right Deck Pick-Up Assembly

(cassette holder)............................5-80D. Left Deck Pick-Up Assembly.........5-88E. Pick-Up Vertical Path Roller

Assembly .......................................5-92F. Registration Feeding Assembly.....5-93G. Feeding Assembly.........................5-96H. Holding Tray Assembly..................5-101I. Holding Tray Feeding Assembly ...5-118

This chapter explains the principles used from when copy paper is picked up to when a copy isdelivered in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing ofoperation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I. PICK-UP/FEEDING SYSTEM

A. Outline

The machine uses a center reference method, in which paper is moved along thecenter of the pick-up/feeding path with the aim of improving pick-up/feedingperformance.

The pick-up system consists of the front paper deck, cassettes, and multifeederassembly; in addition, the system includes the holding tray assembly and the holdingtray feeding assembly for making two-sided/overlay copies.

The feeding system has two feeding paths: for on-sided copies and for two-sided/overlay copies (through the holding tray assembly and the holding tray feedingassembly) The paths are separated by a delivery paper deflecting plate.

When making one-sided copies, the copy paper picked up from the cassette, frontpaper deck, or multifeeder, is controlled by the registration roller so that its leading edgematches the leading edge of the photosensitive drum; the paper is then moved throughthe transfer, separation, feeding, fixing, and delivery assemblies and then ultimately tothe copy tray.

When making two-sided/overlay copies, on the other hand, copy paper is stacked onthe holding tray after fixing on its first side; it is then picked up from the holding tray forfixing on its second side, and is sent through the holding tray feeding assembly and thento the copy tray through the same path as a one-sided copy.



5-1

As many as 17 sensors in total are used to monitor the movement of copy paper; seeFigure 5-101 for arrangement.

Table 5-101



5-2

Notation Name Notation Name

PS8 Holding tray feeding assembly 1 paper sensor PS24 Pick-up vertical path 0 paper sensor

PS9 Holding tray feeding assembly 2 paper sensor PS27 Pick-up vertical path 3 paper sensor

PS10 External delivery sensor PS30 Pick-up vertical path 4 paper sensor

PS12 Internal delivery sensor (reversing assembly) PS33 Pick-up vertical path 1 paper sensor

PS14 Holding tray registration paper sensor PS36 Pick-up vertical path 2 paper sensor

PS15 Holding tray inlet paper sensor PS47 Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor

PS17 Holding tray pick-up sensor PS49 Left deck outlet paper sensor

PS22 Multifeeder pick-up sensor PS52 Claw jam sensor

PS23 Registration paper sensor

Figure 5-101

Delivery paper deflecting plateFixing assemblyDelivery

assembly

Feeding assembly

Photo-sensitive

drum

Registration roller

Multifeeder

PS23

Holding try assembly

Copy tray

Holding try feeding assembly

Cassette 3

Cassette 4

Right deckLeft deck

PS22

PS33

PS24PS37

PS8

PS49PS39PS35

PS34

PS9PS17

PS14

PS12

PS10 PS47

PS52

PS36

PS27

PS25

PS28PS29

PS26

PS30

PS32PS31

PS15



5-3

II. CASSETTE PICK-UP

A. Pick-Up Operation

Figure 5-201 is a diagram showing the cassette pick-up control system.

Figure 5-201

J117A-15

J119A-7

J116B-7

DC

con

trol

ler

PC

B

CL15

PS33

PS24

CL18

Pick-up motor

J115A-4 Vertical path 0 feeding clutch drive signal (CL18D*)

Vertical path 1 feeding clutch drive signal (CL15D*)

Paper path 1 detection signal (PS33D)


J121B-10

J117B-2 CL11



J117B-4

J122A-6

J117A-2

J117A-4

J117A-7

J130B-2

SL11

CL10

CL13

PS27

PS26

PS25

Vertical path 3 detection signal (PS27D)

Cassette 3 pick-up solenoid drive signal (C3PURR*)

Cassette 3 pick-up clutch drive signal (C3PUCD*)

Cassette 3 lifter detection signal (C3LTP)


Cassette 3 paper detection signal (C3PD)

J130B-4

J130A-10

J130A-2

J130A-4

J130A-7

SL12

CL12

PS30

PS29PS28


Cassette 4 pick-up solenoid drive signal (C4PURR*)

Cassette 4 pick-up clutch drive signal (C4PUCD*)

Cassette 4 lifter detection signal (C4LTP)

Cassette 4 paper detection signal (C4PD)

M2



5-4

1. OutlineThe copy paper inside the cassette is held up by a lifter so that it remains in contact

with the pick-up roller.When the pick-up clutch (CL10/CL12) turns on, the pick-up roller starts to rotate to

feed copy paper. Thereafter, the pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL11/SL12) turns onand, as a result, the pick-up roller moves away from the surface of the paper.

The feeding roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that only one sheetof copy paper is moved to the feeding path; then, the copy paper is forwarded to theregistration roller by the vertical path roller.

The registration roller serves to make sure that the leading edge of the copy papermatches the leading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum.

2. Sequence of Pick-Up Operations• Cassette 3, A4, 2 Copies, Continuous

Figure 5-202

INTR

Copy Start keyON

Cassette 3 pick-up clutch (CL10)

Pick-up motor (M2)

Cassette 3 pick-up releasing solenoid (SL11)

Vertical path roller 0 paper sensor (PS24)


Registration roller paper sensor (PS23)

Registration roller clutch (CL9)

SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY



5-5

B. Cassette Lifter Operation

When the cassette is slid into the copier, pick-up roller moves down, and the light-blocking plate moves away from the lifter position sensor (PS31, PS34, PS25, PS28),turning on the lifter motor (M14, M15) and moving the lifter to move up. The lifter motorstops where the lifter position sensor (PS25, PS28) can detect the top surface of thestack of copy paper on the lifter.

When the cassette runs out of copy paper and the paper detecting lever moves awayfrom the paper sensor (PS26, PS29), the DC controller PCB indicates the Add Papermessage on the control panel.

When you hold the grip of the cassette, the light-blocking plate moves away from thecassette open/closed sensor 3/4 (PS50/51), and the condition causes the lifter to movedown.

Figure 5-203 (paper present)

Figure 5-204 (paper absent)

Lifter

Paper sensor Paper detecting lever


Copy paper

Lifter



5-6

Figure 5-205

M2

Copy paper

Lifter position sensor/ (PS25/PS28)

Paper sensor/ (PS26/PS29)

Paper detecting lever

Pick-up roller

Lifter

Separation roller

Feeding rollers

(M14/M15)

Pick-up roller

Pick-up motor

Cassette open/closed sensor (PS50/PS51)

M

Lifter position lever



5-7

C. Identifying the Size of Copy Paper in the Cassette

1. OutlineThe size of the copy paper inside the cassette is identified by the paper size sensor

mounted to the rear of the cassette holder.When the cassette is slid into the cassette holder, the paper size sensor is pushed

by the boss on the cassette and turns on, thereby enabling identification of the width andthe length of the copy paper.

The copier uses combinations of widths and lengths of copy paper to find out the sizeof the copy paper, and determines where to reverse the scanner and how to control theblanking exposure mechanism.

The boss used to push the paper size sensor operates in conjunction with the guideplate inside the cassette, and its position is set when the guide plate is set to suit thecopy paper.

2. Identifying the Size of Copy PaperThe copy paper length sensor consists of two photointerrupters, and the length is

identified with reference to combinations of the outputs of these two sensors.The paper width sensor, on the other hand, is a variable resistor, and the resistance

output of the sensor is used to identify the width of paper.Figure 5-206 shows the relationship between paper widths and variable resistor

outputs. You must register the correct basic settings whenever you have replaced theDC controller PCB or the sensor so that the relationship may be maintained. (SeeChapter 11 “Registering the Paper Width Basic Value.”)

Figure 5-206

A4/A3

A4R

STMT-R

STMT-R(139.7mm)

A4R(210mm)

A4(297mm)

Paper width

Var

iabl

e re

sist

or o

utpu

t



5-8

Figure 5-207

Length guide

Cassette

Width guide (front)

Width guide (rear)Paper width detecting VR

Paper length sensor unit



5-9

3. Markings on the Width Guide RailThe width guide rail found inside the cassette has paper size reference holes which

are identified by markings (A through M) as shown in Table 5-201.Refer to the markings when skew pick-up occurs (as reported by the user) to

determine whether the correct paper width is set. (This information is not disclosed to theuser.)

Table 5-201



5-10

Markings Paper Remarks

A STMT-RB A5-RC B5-RD KLGL-RE GLTR-RF G-LGL G3G A4-RH LGL/LTR-RI FLSC G2J B4/B5K G-LTR G1L 279.4 × 431.8mm G5

(11" × 17")/LTRM A3/A4

4. Paper SizeThe microprocessor on the DC controller PCB identifies the size of paper with

reference to inputs of paper length and according to the data shown in Table 5-202.The paper sizes in Table 5-203 are specified in service mode selected in relation to

each group.(The asterisk indicates the paper size specified at time of shipment.)

Table 5-202 Table 5-203



5-11

Paper lengthsensor

PS102/PS104

SZ 2

0

PS101/PS103

SZ 1

0

Signal

ON/OFF

A4

(G4)

(G1)

B5

STMT

A5

G-LTRR

K-LGLR

B5R

A5R

STMTR

PS102/PS104

SZ 2

0

PS101/PS103

SZ 1

1

—

—

—

—

LTRR

A4R

—

—

—

—

—

PS102/PS104

SZ 2

1

PS101/PS103

SZ 1

0

A3279.4 × 431.8(11" × 17")

—

B4

LGL

—

—

—

—

—

—

PS102/PS104

SZ 2

1

PS101/PS103

SZ 1

1

—

—

—

—

(G2)

(G3)

—

—

—

—

Paper width sensor

288.5

273.7

261.8

238.0

212.9

206.6

196.6

186.0

165.2

144.1

Group Size

G1 * G-LTRK-LGL

G2 * FOOLSCAPOFFICIOE-OFFIA-LGLA-OFFI

G3 * G-LGLFOLIOAUS-FLS

G5 * LTRA-LTR

• Papers Used for the Machine

Table 5-204

5. Registering Paper Width Basic ValueSee Chapter 11 (service mode *3*; 'C1-STMTR' through 'MF-A4' under ADJUST).



5-12

Paper Notation Size (vertical x horizontal in mm)

A3 A3 (297±1) × (420±1)

A4R A4R (210±1) × (297±1)

A4 A4 (297±1) × (210±1)

A5 A5 (210±1) × (148.5±1)

A5R A5R (148.5±1) × (210±1)

B4 B4 (257±1) × (364±1)

B5R B5R (182±1) × (257±1)

B5 B5 (257±1) × (182±1)

11" × 17" 11 × 17 (279±1) × (432±1)

LETTER-R LTRR (216±1) × (297±1)

LETTER LTR (297±1) × (216±1)

STATEMENT STMT (216±1) × (139.5±1)

STATEMENT R STMTR (139.5±1) × (216±1)

LEGAL LGL (216±1) × (356±1)

KOREAN LEGAL K-LGL (265±1) × (190±1)

KOREAN LEGAL R K-LGLR (190±1) × (265±1)

FOOLSCAP FLSC (216±1) × (330±1)

AUSTRALIAN FOOLSCAP A-FLS (206±1) × (337±1)

OFICIO OFI (216±1) × (317±1)

ECUADORAN OFICIO E-OFI (220±1) × (320±1)

BOLIVIA B-OFI OFICIO (216±1) × (355±1)

ARGENTINE LETTER A-LTR (280±1) × (220±1)

ARGENTINE LETTER-R A-LTRR (220±1) × (280±1)

GOVERNMENT LETTER G-LTR (267±1) × (203±1)

GOVERNMENT LETTER-R G-LTRR (203±1) × (267±1)

ARGENTINE LEGAL A-LGL (220±1) × (340±1)

GOVERNMENT LEGAL G-LGL (203±1) × (330±1)

FOLIO FOLI (210±1) × (330±1)

ARGENTINE OFICIO A-OFI (220±1) × (340±1)

III. FRONT PAPER DECK ASSEMBLY

A. Outline

The paper deck controls the operation of each load according to the signals from theDC controller PCB to execute pick-up/feeding operation.

The loads related to pick-up/feeding and lifter are driven by the pick-up motor.The service person is expected to register the new deck paper size in service mode

whenever the deck size has been changed.

Figure 5-301

DC

con

trol

ler

PC

B

J118B-10 Pick-up vertical path roller 1 drive clutch drive command (CL15D*)

J119A-7 Paper path 1 detection signal (PS33D)

J121A-15 Right deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid drive command (RDPURR*)

J116A-7 Right deck paper detection signa (RDPD)

J116A-4 Right deck lifter position sensor signal (RDLTP)

J116B-13 Right deck upper limit detection signal (RDEL)

J119A-4 Holding tray feeding assembly 1 pick-up detection signal (PS8D)

Left deck outlet paper sensor (LEXTPD*)

J121A-5

J122B-2 Left deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid drive command (LDPURR*)

J121A-10

J121A-7

J121B-2

J119B-11 Right deck lifter motor drive command (RDLMD)

J116B-2 Paper path 0 detection signal (PS24D)

J116A-2 Right deck pick-up clutch drive command (RDPUCD*)

Left deck pick-up clutch drive command (LDPUCD*)

Left deck paper detection signal (LDPD)

Left deck liter position sensor signal (LDLTP)

Left deck upper limit detection signal (LDEL)

Left lifter Right lifter

Copy paper Pick-up roller

Separation roller

Feeding roller

Holding tray feedingPS8

PS49

PS

35

PS

34

PS39

M19

SL4SL5

CL14

PS24

PS33

CL15M2

PS

37P

S31

PS

32

Pick-up motor

J121B-5

M18

Left deck lifter motor drive command (LDLMD)

J119B-9

CL16



5-13

1. Pick-Up OperationThe copy paper inside the deck is held up by a lifter so that it remains in contact with

the pick-up roller.When the deck pick-up clutch (CL14/CL16) turns on, the pick-up roller starts to rotate

to feed copy paper. Thereafter, the deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL4/SL5) turnson so that the pick-up roller moves away from the surface of the paper.

The feeding roller and the separation roller make sure that only one sheet of copypaper is fed to the feeding path; the copy paper is forwarded to the registration roller bythe work of the vertical path roller.

The registration roller controls the copy paper so that its leading edge matches theleading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum.



5-14

2. Sequence of Pick-Up Operationsa.Right Deck, A4, 2 Copies

Figure 5-302

b.Left Deck, A4, 2 Copies

Figure 5-303

INTR

Copy Start keyON

Left deck pick-up clutch (CL16)

Pick-up motor (M2)

Left deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL5)

Left deck pick-up sensor (PS49)


Vertical path roller 1 drive clutch (CL15)

SCFW SCFW SCRV LSTR STBYSCRV

INTR

Copy Start keyON

Right deck pick-up clutch (CL14)

Pick-up motor (M2)

Right deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL4)



Vertical path roller 1 drive clutch (CL15)

SCFW SCFW SCRV LSTR STBYSCRV



5-15

B. Lifter Operation

1. OperationWhen the deck is slid into the pedestal, the deck open/closed sensor (PS38/PS40)

turns on and, at the same time, the pick-up roller moves down and the light-blockingplate moves away from the deck lifter position sensor (PS31/PS34). This condition turnson the lifter drive motor (M18/M19), and lets the drive of the pick-up motor (M2) to thetake-up shaft; the lifter then starts to move up.

The lifter stops where the deck lifter position sensor (PS31/PS34) can check the topsurface of the copy paper.

The deck lifter limit sensor (PS37/PS39) is provided in consideration of such casesas when the lifter fails to stop moving up after the sensor arm has blocked the deck lifterposition sensor (PS31/PS34).

Upon reaching the limit, the lifter is held up by the work of a gear.When the deck is detached from the copier, the cable take-up gear disengages from

the gear, and the lifter starts to move down on its own weight.

Figure 5-304

M2

Lifter limit sensor (PS37/PS39)

Lifter position sensor(PS31/PS34) Paper detecting

lever

Pick-up roller

Lifter

Oil damper

Separation roller

Feeding rollers

Pick-up roller

Lifter limiter detecting lever

Copy paper

Pick-up motor

Deck open/closed sensor(PS38/PS40)

M18/M19

Deck lifter drive motor

Paper sensor (PS32/PS35)



5-16

Figure 5-305

Copy paper

Lifter

Deck

Separation roller

Feeding rollerPick-up rollerLifter detecting leverLifter position sensor (PS31/PS34)

: Pick-up roller moves up; the light-blocking plate of the lifter detecting lever lowers to block the lifter position sensor (PS31/PS34).

: Pick-up roller moves down; the light-blocking plate of the lifter detecting lever rises to leave away from the lifter position sensor (PS31/PS34).



5-17

2. Deck Limit DetectionWhen the lifter reaches the lifter position sensor (PS31/PS34), the deck lifter position

signal is sent to the microprocessor on the DC controller, causing the microprocessor tostop the deck lifter drive motor (M18/M19).

The deck limit sensor (PS37/PS39) is provided in consideration of such cases aswhen the motor fails to stop for some reason.

When the deck limit sensor (PS37/PS39) detects the deck, the deck limit signal issent to the limit detection circuit on the DC controller PCB. In response, the limitdetection circuit cuts off the deck drive signal coming from the microprocessor. (SeeFigure 5-306.)

Figure 5-306 Deck Limit Detection (2 cassettes + left/right deck)

Deck drive signal

DC controller PCB

PS31/PS34

M18/M19

PS37/PS39

Deck position sensor

Deck lifter drive motor

Deck limit sensor

Micro-processor Limit detection

circuit



5-18

C. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper in the Deck

1. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper in the DeckThe presence/absence of paper inside the deck is detected as follows by the deck

paper sensor (PS32/PS35).When the deck runs out of paper, the paper detecting lever leaves the paper sensor

(PS32/PS35), causing the DC controller PCB to assume the absence of paper.

Figure 5-307 (paper present)

Figure 5-308 (paper absent)

2. Detecting the Size of the DeckThe service person is expected to enter the deck size.

D. High-Speed Pick-Up

When pick-up occurs from the right deck, the pick-up motor (M2) rotates at a highspeed when picking up the first sheet so as to save on the first copy time; the period ofhigh-speed rotation is as follows:• After the first sheet has reached the pick-up vertical path sensor 0 (PS24) and until it

arches against the registration roller.The rate of high-speed rotation is about twice the speed of normal rotation.





5-19

IV. MULTIFEEDER

A. Pick-Up Operation

The presence/absence of paper in the multifeeder is detected by the multifeederpaper sensor (PS22).

When the multifeeder is selected as the source of paper and the Copy Start key ispressed with paper in the multifeeder, the multifeeder pick-up clutch (CL7) andmultifeeder pick-up relay solenoid (SL15) turn on to rotate the pick-up roller, feedingroller, separation roller, and holding roller.

Then, the multifeeder solenoid (SL10) turns on in pick-up direction to lower therotating pick-up roller to the copy paper, moving the topmost sheet of paper into themachine.

Each time a single sheet of paper has been picked up, the multifeeder pick-up rollersolenoid (SL10) turns on in release direction to move the pick-up roller away from thecopy paper; then, the multifeeder pick-up relay solenoid (SL15) turns off to move thepaper with the registration roller and the holding roller.

Figure 5-401

DC controller PCB

M2

CL7

SL15

SL10

Copy paper

Tray

Multifeeder pick-up solenoid

Pick-up roller

Feeding rollerHolding roller

To registration roller

Separation roller PS22

J115

B-1

3M

ultif

eede

r pi

ck-u

p so

leno

id d

rive

com

man

d(r

elea

se d

irect

ion;

SL1

0BD

)

J115

B-1

2M

ultif

eede

r pi

ck-u

p so

leno

id d

rive

com

man

d(p

ick-

up d

irect

ion;

SL1

0FD

)

J115

B-1

0M

ultif

eede

r pi

ck-u

p re

lay

sole

noid

driv

eco

mm

and

(MFR

LSD)

J115

B-2

J115

B-7

Mul

tifee

der

pape

r de

tect

ion

sign

al (

MF

S)

Mul

tifee

der

pick

-up

clut

ch d

rive

com

man

d (M

FPCD

)

Pick-up motor



5-20

B. Identifying the Size of Paper in the Multifeeder

When the user adjusts the slide guide of the multifeeder, the output of the variableresistor operating in conjunction with the slide guide is sent to the DC controller PCB,enabling the detection of the width of the copy paper.

The data on the width of the copy paper is used to determine how to control the lensand the blanking exposure mechanisms. The length of paper when the multifeeder isselected is identified in reference to the time during which the pre-registration papersensor (PS23) remains on.

You must enter the paper with basic value whenever you have replaced the variableresistor. (See Chapter 11 “Registering the Paper Width Basic Value.”)

Figure 5-402

DC controller PCB

Variable resistor

Slide guide (rear)

Slide guide (front)

Multifeeder tray

Mul

tifee

der

pape

r w

idth

det

ectio

n si

gnal

(MF

PW

)



5-21

C. Sequence of Pick-Up Operations (multifeeder)

Figure 5-403

INTR

Copy Start keyON

Multifeeder pick-up solenoid (release direction; SL10)

Multifeeder pick-up clutch (CL7)

Registration paper sensor (PS23)

Registration roller drive clutch (CL9)

Scanner motor (M3)

SCFW

Multifeeder pick-up solenoid (pick-up direction; SL10)

Multifeeder pick-up relay solenoid (SL15)

SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR

&'()Scanner motor reverse rotation (reverse direction)



5-22

V. CONTROLLING THE REGISTRATION CLUTCH

The registration clutch controls copy paper so that it matches the image on thephotosensitive drum at a specific position.

In non-binding mode, the registration clutch exerts control so that the leading edgeof copy paper matches the leading edge of the image.

In binding mode, control will be as shown in Figure 5-501 so as to create a leadingedge width on copies.

Figure 5-501

A B

/0D 5!"D 5

5or0 D 5

5&'D 5

D 5or0

!"D 5

D 5 D 5

5

()D 5

D 5

D 5

B

A

B

A

One-sided original to Two-

sided copy

Two-sided original to Two-

sided copy

Two-sided original to One-

sided copy

Page separation (one-sided copying)

Two-sided original to

Overlay copy

Page separation to Overly copying

Page separation to Two-sided

copy

One-sided original to

Overlay copy

Copying on 1st side

Copying on 2nd side

Copying on 1st side

Copying on 2nd side

Copying on 1st side

Copying on 2nd side

Copying on 1st side (left)

Coping on 2nd side (right)



Copying on 1st side

Copying on 2nd side

Copying on 1st side

Copying on 2nd side



B

B

B

B

B

A

B

B

B

B

B

B

B

0 to 20 mm; the diagrams assume a shift set to 5 mm.

Copy paper ahead of image on drum

Copy paper behind image on drum

Image on drumImage on drum

Copy paper Image area when copying on 1st side

Image area when copying on 2nd side

D Image area : Erase by blanking exposure lamp

Drum Drum

Copy paper Copy paper

Selected mode Copy paper control timing Shift (mm) Copy paper on copy tray

One-sided original to One-sided copy



5-23

VI. MAKING TWO-SIDED/OVERLAY COPIES

A. Making Two-Sided/Overlay Copies (1st side)

When copying on the first side in two-sided/overlay mode, the delivery deflectingplate is shifted by the delivery paper deflecting solenoid (SL2) to a special feeding path.

The paper deflecting plate shifts up when the registration clutch (CL9) turns on.After copying on the first side, the holding tray inlet roller (clockwise) feeds the copy

paper to the holding tray.Each time copy paper is fed to the holding tray, the holding tray swinging solenoid

(SL9) and the holding tray (X, Y) motor (M8, M9) operate to assist stacking of paper.(See pp. 5-36 and -37.)

When the first sheet is stacked on the holding tray, the holding tray re-pick up rolleris rotated to assist stacking. The holding tray is capable of holding as many as 50 sheets.

Figure 5-601

DC controller PCB

J108

A-7

Reg

istra

tion

pape

r det

ectio

n si

gnal

(RG

PD

)

J108

B-4

Fix

ing

asse

mbl

y ou

tlet p

aper

det

ectio

n s

igna

l (F

XD

EL)

J108

A-1

9F

ixin

g as

sem

bly

inle

t pap

er d

etec

tion

sign

al (

FX

CJS

)

J113

B-1

0H

oldi

ng tr

ay in

let p

aper

sen

sor

(PS

15D

)

J108

B-1

2D

eliv

ery

pape

r de

flect

ing

sole

noid

dr

ive

com

man

d (D

PD

SD

)J113

B-1

2In

tern

al p

aper

sig

nal (

IDP

D)

J113

A-7

Hol

ding

tray

forw

ard

clut

ch d

rive

com

man

d (H

TF

WC

D)

J113

A-6

Hol

ding

tray

rev

ersi

ng c

lutc

h dr

ive

com

man

d (H

TR

VC

D)

J113

A-5

Hol

ding

tray

re-

pick

up

rolle

r so

leno

id d

rive

com

man

d (H

TD

SD

)

SL2

M2

CL5

CL4Pick-up roller

PS12

PS47

PS52

PS15

PS23

SL6

Holding tray inlet roller

Holding tray assembly

Holding tray re-pick up rollerHolding tray feeding assembly



5-24

1. Sequence of Operations (two-sided/overlay copies; 1st side)

Figure 5-602

Power switchON

Pick-up motor (M2)

INTR SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR

$%+,: Motor CW rotation

: Motor CCW rotation

SCFW

Fixing assembly outlet paper sensor (PS47)

Internal delivery sensor (PS12)

Holding tray inlet paper sensor (PS15)

Holding tray forward clutch (CL5)

Holding tray (X) motor (M8)

Holding tray swinging solenoid (SL9)

Holding tray re-pick up roller solenoid (SL6)

Holding tray (X) home position sensor (PS21)

Delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid (SL2)

Holding tray (Y) motor (M9)

Holding tray (Y) home position sensor (PS20)

''(##Holding tray re-circulatinglever motor (M7)



5-25

B. Making Two-Sided Copies (2nd side)

When copying on the second side of a two-sided copy, pick-up occurs on the holdingtray.

When the Copy Start key is pressed, the bottommost sheet of the stack of copypaper on the holding tray is moved to the holding tray registration roller as the holdingtray separation clutch (CL6) and the holding tray re-pick up roller solenoid (SL6) turn onin response to the movement of the sheet.

The leading edge of the sheet butts against the holding tray registration roller, andthe sheet arches; then, it is set to the holding tray feeding assembly as soon as theholding tray registration clutch (CL3) turns on.

The copy paper is then sent to the registration roller through the holding tray feedingassembly.

Figure 5-603

J113

B-7

J113

B-1

1

J113

B-1

2

J113

A-1

0

J113

B-6

J113

B-8

J119

A-4

J113

A-5

J112

A-9

J108

A-7

J112

A-7

J119

A-7

Hol

ding

tray

reg

istr

atio

n cl

utch

driv

e co

mm

and

(HT

RG

CD

)

Hol

ding

tray

pic

k-up

det

ectio

n si

gnal

(P

S17

D)

Hol

ding

tray

feed

ing

asse

mbl

y 2

pape

r

dete

ctio

n si

gnal

(P

S9D

)

Hol

ding

tray

Y h

ome

posi

tion

sign

al (

HT

YH

P)

Hol

ding

tray

re-

circ

ulat

ing

bar

hom

e po

sitio

n

sign

al (H

TLP

D)

Hol

ding

tray

sep

arat

ion

clut

ch d

rive

com

man

d

(

HT

SP

CD

)H

oldi

ng tr

ay fe

edin

g as

sem

bly

1 pa

per

det

ectio

n si

gnal

(P

S8D

)

Reg

istr

atio

n pa

per

dete

ctio

n si

gnal

(R

GP

D)

Hol

ding

tray

feed

ing

1 cl

utch

driv

e co

mm

and

(H

TF

1CD

)

Pic

k-up

pat

h 1

pape

r de

tect

ion

sign

al

(PS

33D

)

Hol

ding

tray

re-

pick

rol

ler

sole

noid

driv

e

s

igna

l (H

TDSD

)

Hol

ding

tray

feed

ing

2 cl

utch

driv

e co

mm

and

(H

TF

1CD

)

PS23

PS33

Pick-up motor

PS8Holding tray

feeding assembly

PS19

PS9

Holding tray registration roller

CL3

J113

A-3

Hol

ding

tray

reg

istr

atio

n pa

per

dete

ctio

n si

gnal

(PS

14D

) M2

PS20

CL1

CL2

CL6

SL6

DC controller PCB

PS14PS17



5-26

1. Sequence of Operations (two-sided copying; 2nd side)

Figure 5-604

INTR

Copy Start keyON

Holding tray re-circulating bar home position sensor (OPS19)

Pick-up motor (M2)

Holding tray separation clutch (CL6)

SCFW SCFW SCRV LSTRSCRV

Holding tray weight solenoid (SL7)


Holding tray pick-up sensor (PS17)

Holding tray registration paper sensor (PS14)

Holding tray registration clutch (CL3)

Holding tray feeding assembly 2 paper sensor (PS9)




5-27

C. Making Overlay Copies (2nd side)

1. OutlineThe feeding path for copying on the second side of an overlay copy is formed when

the holding tray paper deflecting plate is shifted up by the holding tray paper deflectingplate solenoid (SL8).

When copying on the second side, pick-up occurs on the holding tray. Thebottommost sheet is picked up and sent to the holding tray inlet; then, the copy paper isswitched back, and forwarded to the holding tray registration roller.

Figure 5-605

CL5

CL4

SL6

M2

Holding tray re-pick up roller

CL6

SL8

PS14

PS17

Holding tray inlet rollerFeeding rollerHolding tray registration roller

Holding tray reversing registration roller

J113

A-5

J113

B-8

J113

A-7

J113

A-6

J113

A-3

J113

B-9

J113

B-1

1H

oldi

ng tr

ay p

ick-

up d

etec

tion

sign

al (

PS

17D

)

Hol

ding

tray

pap

er d

efle

ctin

g pl

ate

sole

noid

driv

e co

mm

and

(HT

PD

D)

Hol

ding

tray

reg

istr

atio

n pa

per

dete

ctio

n si

gnal

(P

S14

D)

Hol

ding

tray

rev

ersi

ng c

lutc

h dr

ive

com

man

d (H

TR

VC

D)

Hol

ding

tray

forw

ard

clut

ch d

rive

com

man

d (H

TF

WC

D)

Hol

ding

tray

sep

arat

ion

clut

ch d

rive

com

man

d (H

TS

PC

D)

Hol

ding

tray

re-

pick

up

rolle

r so

leno

id d

rive

com

man

d (H

TD

SD

)

DC controller PCB

Pick-up motor



5-28

2. Outline of Operationq After pick-up, the copy paper is moved upward by the holding tray paper deflecting

plate.

Figure 5-606

w As soon as the trailing edge of the copy paper leaves the holding tray paperdeflecting plate, the holding tray forward clutch (CL5) turns off to stop the copypaper.

Figure 5-607

PS14

Holding tray paper deflecting plate



5-29

e The holding tray reversing clutch (CL4) turns on, and the copy paper is reversed andforwarded to the holding tray registration roller.

Figure 5-608

r After reaching the holding tray registration roller, the copy paper is moved to theregistration roller through the holding tray feeding assembly.

Figure 5-609

PS14To holding tray feeding assembly

Holding tray registration roller



5-30

3. Sequence of Operations (overlay copying; 2nd side)

Figure 5-610

Copy Start keyON

Holding tray re-circulating bar home position sensor (PS19)

Pick-up motor (M2)


INTR SCFW SCRV LSTR

Holding tray weight solenoid (SL7)




Holding tray registration clutch (CL3)



Holding tray paper deflecting plate solenoid (SL8)

Holding tray forward clutch (CL5)


Holding tray reversing clutch (CL4)

SCFW SCRV



5-31

D. Reversal Delivery

The feeding path for reversed delivery is formed when the delivery deflecting plate isshifted up by the delivery deflecting plate solenoid (SL2).

The delivery deflecting plate shifts up as soon as the registration clutch (CL9) turnson, thereby moving the copy paper in the direction of the holding tray.

A specific period of time after the trailing edge of the copy paper has moved past thefixing assembly outlet sensor (PS47), the holding tray forward clutch (CL5) turns off and,at the same time, the holding tray reversing clutch (CL4) turns on.

This condition causes the roller inside the holding tray to rotate in reverse, movingthe copy paper in the direction of delivery. (See Figure 5-612.)

Figure 5-611 (clockwise rotation)

Figure 5-612 (counterclockwise rotation)

CL5

PS47

PS12

CL4

M2

CL5

PS47

PS12

CL4

SL2

M2

Pick-upmotor Holding tray

reversing clutch

Holding tray forward clutch

Holding tray inlet roller



5-32

1. Sequence of Reversal Delivery Operations

Figure 5-613

Copy Start keyON

Pick-up motor (M2)

INTR SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR

: Motor CW rotation

: Motor CCW rotation

SCFW




Holding tray forward clutch(CL5)

Holding tray (X) motor (M8)

Holding tray reversing clutch (CL4)

External paper delivery sensor (PS10)

Holding tray (X) homeposition sensor (PS21)

Delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid (SL2)

Holding tray (Y) motor (M9)

Holding tray (Y) home position sensor (PS20)



5-33

E. Switching the Paper Size for Two-Sided/Overlay/ReversalDelivery Copies

1. Movement of the Paper Size GuideWhen the Copy Start key is pressed in two-sided/overlay/reversal delivery mode, the

holding tray (X, Y) motor (M8, M9) starts to rotate clockwise, and the paper size guideplate moves in the direction of the arrow.

The motor (M8, M9) stops when the light-blocking plate of the paper size guide plateblocks the holding tray (X, Y) home position sensor (PS21, PS20).

The DC controller PCB sends pulses to the motor (M8, M9) according to the size ofcopy paper so that the motor rotates in reverse to move the paper size guide plate to suitthe selected copy size and keep it in wait for the arrival of copy paper.

While copying on the second side, the motor (M8, M9) remains at rest until copyingon the first side of the next copy starts.

Figure 5-614

DC controller PCB

M8 M9Holding tray Y motor

Holding tray X motor

(CW rotation)

(CCW rotation)

Paper size guide plate

PS20

Light-blocking plate

Trailing edge guide plate

Hol

ding

tray

(Y

) ho

me

posi

tion

sens

or (

HT

YH

P)

J113

A-1

0

Hol

ding

tray

(X

) ho

me

posi

tion

sens

or (

HT

XH

P)

J113

B-1

PS21



5-34

2. Movement of the Paper Jogging Plate and the Trailing Edge Guide PlateWhen copy paper arrives at the holding tray assembly, the paper jogging plate (X

direction) and the trailing edge guide plate (Y direction) operate to put the sheets inorder.

The paper jogging plate is opened by turning on and off the holding tray swingingsolenoid (SL9) on the paper size guide plate of the holding tray so as to put the edgesof the sheets flush, thereby preventing skew movement during re-pick up.

Figure 5-615

When copy paper reaches the holding tray assembly, the motor M9 rotates clockwiseand couterclockwise to operate the trailing edge guide plate to arrange the trailing edgeof the copy paper.

Figure 5-616

Clockwise

Counterclockwise

Trailing edge guide plate

Copy paper

ONSL9

Paper jogging plates

Side guide



5-35

3. Detecting the Presence/Absence of Copy PaperThe presence of copy paper on the holding tray is checked for re-pick up operation.When sheets have been stacked on the holding tray, the re-circulating lever is placed

on the topmost sheet of the stack by operating the holding tray re-circulating motor (M7).When the last sheet has been picked up, the re-circulating lever falls down to the

holding tray. This condition enables the holding tray re-circulating lever home positionsensor (PS19) to assume that the last sheet has been picked up, and the sensorgenerates the last copy detection signal (HPLPD).

Figure 5-617

Holding tray re-circulating motor (M7)

Copy paper

Re-circulating lever

Holding tray re-circulating lever home position sensor (PS19)



5-36

F. Re-Pick Up from the Holding Tray

Pick-up/separation takes place when the Copy Start key is pressed for copying onthe second side.

When the Copy Start key is pressed, the holding tray re-pick up solenoid (SL6) turnson to rotate the holding tray re-pick up roller, thereby feeding the copy paper in thedirection of the feeding roller/separation belt; at the same time, the holding tray weightsolenoid (SL7) turns on to lower the weight plate on the copy paper so as to assistfeeding of copy paper.

If double feeding occurs, i.e., if two or more sheets are being sent to the feedingroller/separation belt by the holding tray re-pick up roller, the separation belt serves topush the top sheet back to the holding tray.

Reference:The weight plate is lowered only when the first sheet is re-picked up and when thelast sheet is picked up.

Figure 5-618

Separation belt Weight plate

Feeding roller Copy paperHolding tray re-pick up roller



5-37

G. Skipping Operation

1. OutlineIn skipping mode, every other original is skipped when making two-sided copies of

one-sided originals with the aim of making full use of the space that occurs in the paperpath in the holding tray assembly and the holding tray feeding assembly (space notcovered by paper).

Figure 5-619

Skipping mode is executed automatically when the following conditions are met:• Two-sided copies are made of one-sided originals using the RDF.• The copy paper and the original are A4, B5, or LTR and they are fed horizontally.• Neither binding mode nor cover mode is selected.• Copy count is '2' or lower.

Originals

Original to be skipped

Photosensitive drum

Registration roller

Copy paperHolding tray feeding assembly

Space



5-38

2. Outline of OperationsThe sequence of operation is as follows:

a. Making 2 Copies of 4 Originals4th original, 2nd, 4th, 3rd, 2nd, 1st, 3rd, 1st original

b. Making 2 Copies of 5 Originals5th original, 3rd, 1st, 5th, 4th, 3rd, 2nd, 1st, 4th, 2nd original

c. Making 1 Copy of 4 Originals4th original, 2nd, 3rd, 1st original

d. Making 1 Copy of 5 Originals5th original, 3rd, 1st, 4th, 2nd original

Reference:Skipping mode may be disabled in user mode.



5-39



5-40


4321 Originals

Scanner

Fixing roller

Drum

Registration roller

Holding tray

34

21

4

34

21

12

43

4

2

12

43

4

34

21

24

4

34

21

4

2

23

14

24

4

2

23

14

4

43

12

43

43

24

2

2

43

2

43

1

4

43

4

41

32

2

2

43

2

41

32

4

21

2

21

4

23

14

43

2

21

23

14

43

43

2

1

2143

43

432

2143

43

432

1

21

4321

21

2143

43

RDF

1) The Copy Start key is pressed. (The originals move as in right pick-up operation of the RDF.)

2) The 4th original is picked up. 3) The 4th original is copied. The 3rd original is not copied (skipped), and is returned to the original tray of the RDF

4) The 2nd original is picked up.

6) The 4th original is picked up. 7) The 4th original is copied (for 2nd copy). 8) The 3rd original is picked up. 9) The 3rd original is copied on the back of 4th copy sheet picked up from the holding tray.

10) The 2nd original is picked up.

11) The 2nd original is copied (2nd copy). 12) The 1st original is picked up.13) The 1st original is copied on the back of the 2nd copy sheet picked up from the holding tray. The 4th original is

not copied (skipped), but is returned to the original tray of the RDF. (If making two copies each, repeats steps 6 through 13.)

15) The 3rd original is copied (2nd copy) on the back of the 4th copy sheet picked up from the holding tray. The 2nd original is not copied (skipped), but is returned to the original tray of the RDF.

16) The 1st original is picked up. 17) The 1st original is copied (2nd copy) on the back of the 2nd copy sheet picked up from the holding tray.

18) The operation ends.

14) The 3rd original is picked up.

5) The 2nd original is copied. The 1st original is not copied (skipped), but is returned to the original tray of the RDF. At this time, the machine assumes that there is an even number of originals. (If making one copy each, goes to step 14.)

3. Skipping Operation (odd number of originals)

Figure 5-620

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)5-42

45

321

Originals

Scanner

Fixing roller

Drum

Registration roller

Holding tray

45

5

45 23

5

3

23

5

51

3

1

51

3

45

3 3

45

1

45

1

4 3

1 5

34 23

1

1223

43

21

12

5

1

RDF

321

321

154

154

3

5

432

432

5

321

W55

1

W5

321

W5

3

321

5

W5

5

3

215

43W5

34

1

215

5

43W5

1

154

5

43W5

1

154

3

43W5 3

543

5

12

3

43W5

543

2143W5

432

5

3

5

W51

1

2143W5

432

5

3

51

432

1

3

5

3

4

215

3

1

W52143W5

2143W5

1) The Copy Start key is on. (The movement of originals is as in right pick-up of the RFD.)

2) The 5th original is picked up. 3) The 5th original is copied. The 4th original is not copied (skipped), but is returned to the original tray of the RDF.

4) The 3rd original is picked up.5) The 3rd original is copied. The 2nd original is not

copied (skipped), but is returned to the original tray of the RDF.

17) The 1st original is picked up. 18) The 1st original is copied (2nd copy). The 5th original is not copied (skipped), but is returned to the original tray of the RDF.

19) The 5th copy sheet picked up from the holding tray is moved through the delivery assembly, reversed, and discharged (2nd copy).

20) The 4th original is picked up.

6) The 1st original is picked up. 7) The 1st original is copied.8) The 5th copy sheet picked up from the holding tray is

moved through the delivery assembly and delivered. (If making one copy each, goes to step 20.)

9) The 5th original is picked up. 10) The 5th original is copied (2nd copy). (If making 2 copies each, repeats steps 9 through 19.)

11) The 4th original is picked up.

12) The 4h original is copied on the back of the 3rd copy sheet picked up from the holding tray, and the copy sheet is moved through the delivery assembly, reversed, and discharged.

13) The 3rd original is picked up. 14) The 3rd original is copied (2nd copy). 15) The 2nd original is picked up.

16) The 2nd original is copied on the back of the 1st copysheet picked up from the holding tray, and the copy sheet is moved through the delivery assembly, reversed, and discharged.

Figure 5-621

4. Skipping Operation (odd number of originals)


W52143W5

34

215

1

34

43W52143W5

43

1

2

543

1

W52143W5

12

543

12

2143

45

321

W52143W5

2143

21) The 4th original is copied on the back of the 3rd copy sheet picked up from the holding tray (2nd copy), and the copy sheet is moved through the delivery assembly, reversed, and discharged. The 3rd original is not copied (skipped), but is returned to the original tray of the RDF.

22) The 2nd original is picked up.23) The 2nd original is copied on the back of the 1st

copy sheet picked up from the holding tray (2nd copy), and the copy sheet is moved through the delivery assembly, reversed, and discharged.

24) The operation ends.

Figure 5-622

5. Reversal DeliveryReversal delivery is executed when making copies of an odd number of originals in

skipping mode and when reversal delivery is selected. In this mode, each copy is turnedover upon delivery so that the stack will be collated when on the copy tray.

a. If copies are made of an odd number of originals in reversal delivery and skippingmodes, they will be stacked as shown in Figure 5-623a.

Figure 5-623a

b. If copies are made of an odd number of originals in reversal delivery and skippingmodes, they will be stacked on the copy tray as shown in Figure 5-623b.

Figure 5-623b

231

231



5-45

VII. DETECTING JAMS

A. Outline

As many as 17 sensors are arrange as shown in Figure 5-701 to monitor themovement of copy paper.

The microprocessor reads in the signals coming from each of the sensors at suchtimes as programmed to identify the presence of a jam. When it finds a jam, it causes allsheets moving ahead of the jam to be discharged, and stops the machine.

The control panel will offer instructions on how to remove jams after the suspensionof operation.

Figure 5-701

Photo-sensitive

drum

Pre-transfer roller

Registration roller

Pick-up assembly functional coverage

Right deckLeft deck

Cassette 3

Cassette 4

PS27

PS36

PS24

PS33PS8

PS49

Holding tray feeding assembly

PS9PS17

PS14

Delivery paperdeflecting plate

Delivery assembly

PS10 PS47

Fixingassembly

Feeding assembly

Holding tray assembly

PS23

Multifeeder

Copy tray PS12PS15

PS30

PS52



5-46

Table 5-701

The microprocessor identifies any of the following conditions as the presence of a jam:

a. Copy paper is present at any of the sensors at power-on, at the end of wait-up, orduring standby.

b. Copy paper does not reach a specific sensor within a specific period of time (delayjam):1. Registration roller delay jam identified by the registration paper sensor (PS23)



5-47

Name

Holding trayfeeding assembly1 paper sensor

Holding trayfeeding assembly2 paper sensor

External deliv-ery sensor

Internal deliverysensor (revers-ing assembly)

Holding trayregistrationpaper sensor

Holding tray inletpaper sensor

Holding traypick-up sensor

Holing tray re-circulating barhome positionsensor

Registrationpaper sensor

Type of jam

Delay/stationary jams.



Stationaryjams.



Delay jams.

Paper onholding tray.


Notation

PS24

PS27

PS30

PS33

PS36

PS47

PS49

PS52

Notation

PS8

PS9

PS10

PS12

PS14

PS15

PS17

PS19

PS23

Name

Pick-up vertical0 paper sensor

Pick-up verticalpath 3 papersensor




Fixing assemblyoutlet papersensor

Left deck pick-up sensor

Claw jamsensor

Type of jam

Delay/station-ary jams.







Stationaryjams.

2. Pick-up vertical path feeding delay jam identified by the pick-up vertical path 1paper sensor (PS33)





7. Fixing feeding re-pick up delay jam by the fixing assembly outlet paper sensor(PS47)

8. Fixing assembly feeding re-pick up delay jam identified by the external deliverysensor (PS10)

9. Holding tray inlet delay jam identified by the holding tray inlet paper sensor(PS15)

10. Holding tray pick-up delay jam identified by the holding tray pick-up sensor(PS17)

11. Holding tray registration delay jam identified by the holding tray registration papersensor (PS14)

12. Holding tray feeding assembly 2 delay jam identified by the holding tray feedingassembly 2 paper sensor (PS9)

13. Holding tray feeding assembly 1 delay jam identified by the holding tray feedingassembly 1 paper sensor (PS8)

c. Copy paper does not move past a specific sensor within a specific period of time(stationary jam):1. Registration roller stationary jam identified by the registration paper sensor

(PS23)2. Pick-up vertical path feeding stationary jam identified by the pick-up vertical path

1 paper sensor (PS33)3. Pick-up vertical path feeding stationary jam identified by the pick-up vertical path



3 paper sensor (PS27)6. Pick-up vertical path feeding stationary jam by the pick-up vertical path 4 paper

sensor (PS30)7. Pick-up vertical path feeding stationary jam identified by the fixing assembly

outlet paper sensor (PS47)8. External delivery stationary jam identified by the external paper sensor (PS10)9. Internal delivery stationary jam identified by the internal delivery sensor (PS12)10. Holding tray inlet stationary jam identified by the holding tray inlet paper sensor

(PS15)11. Holding tray registration stationary jam identified by the holding tray registration

paper sensor (PS14)12. Holding try feeding assembly 2 stationary jam identified by the holding tray

feeding 2 paper sensor (PS9)13. Holding try feeding assembly 1 stationary jam identified by the holding tray

feeding assembly 1 paper sensor (PS8)14. Fixing assembly separation claw assembly stationary jam identified by the claw

jam sensor (PS52)



5-48

1. Registration Roller Delay Jam

Figure 5-702

2. Registration Roller Stationary Jam

Figure 5-703

Registration delay jam check


SCFW LSTR

Jam indicator

I

SCRV SCFW SCRV

INTR

Normal Error

Jam check

Main motor (M1)

I: Varies according to length of paper.

Jam check


Pick-up motor (M2)

Multifeeder pick-up clutch (CL7)

Copy Start keyON

Pick-up vertical path 1 sensor (PS33)





Left deck pick-up sensor (PS49)

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV

Jam indicator ON

0.4 sec

0.7 sec

0.9 sec

1.4 sec

1.7 sec

2.1 sec

1.7 sec

Normal Error



5-49

3. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding 0/1 Delay Jam

Figure 5-704

4. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding 0/1 Stationary Jam

Figure 5-705

Pick-up vertical path feeding jam check

Pick-up vertical path 1 paper sensor (PS33)

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)

PKUPR SCFW SCRV SCFW


Copy Start keyON

Normal Error

Jam indicator

I: Varies according to paper length.

I

Right deck/cassette 1 pick-up clutch (CL14)


Jam indicator

Normal

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)



Copy Start keyON

Error



5-50

5. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding 2 through 4 Delay Jam

Figure 5-706

6. Pick-Up Vertical Path Feeding 2 through 4 Stationary Jam

Figure 5-707

SCFW

Jam indicator

SCFW SCRV

Error

PKUPR

Pick-up vertical delay jam check


Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)



Copy Start keyON

Error

Error


I

I

INormal

Normal

Normal

SCFW

Jam indicator

SCFW SCRV

Error

PKUPR



Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)



Copy Start keyON

Normal



5-51

7. Fixing Assembly Outlet Delay Jam

Figure 5-708

8. Fixing Assembly Outlet Stationary Jam

Figure 5-709

Fixing assembly outlet delay jam check

SCFW LSTR

Jam indicator

SCRV SCFW SCRV

Error

Jam check

Main motor


Normal

I



SCFW LSTR

Jam indicator

SCRV SCFW SCRV

Error

Jam check

Main motor (M1)


Normal

1.1 sec



5-52

9. External Delivery Delay Jam

Figure 5-710

10. External Delivery Stationary Jam

Figure 5-711

External delivery delayjam check

Jam indicator

I

SCFW

Normal Error

Jam check

Main motor (M1)

External delivery sensor (PS10)

SCRV LSTR



Jam indicator

I

SCFW

Normal Error

Jam check

Main motor (M1)

External delivery paper sensor (PS10)

SCRV LSTR

I : For normal delivery, about 0.25 sec.: For reversal delivery, varies according to paper length.



5-53

11. Internal Delivery Delay Jam

Figure 5-712

12. Internal Delivery Stationary Jam

Figure 5-713

Internal delivery delayjam check

Jam indicatorSCFW

Error

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)


SCRV LSTR

Normal

I



Jam indicator

0.2 sec

SCFW

Normal Error

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)


SCRV LSTR



5-54

13. Holding Tray Inlet Delay Jam

Figure 5-714

14. Holding Tray Inlet Stationary Jam

Figure 5-715

Holding tray inlet delay jam check

Jam indicatorSCFW

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)

Holding tray inlet sensor (PS15)

LSTR

Normal

I

Error



Jam indicatorSCFW

Error

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)

Holding tray inlet sensor (PS15)

LSTR

Normal

0.2 sec



5-55

15. Holding Tray Re-Pick Up Delay Jam

Figure 5-716

16. Holding Tray Registration Delay Jam

Figure 5-717


Jam indicator ON

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)


Normal Error

Copy Start keyON

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW

I : In two-sided copying, 0.1 sec.: In overlay copying, varies according to paper length.

I


Jam indicator

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)


Normal Error

Copy Start keyON

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW



5-56

17. Holding Tray Registration Stationary Jam

Figure 5-718

18. Holding Tray Feeding 1/2 Delay Jam

Figure 5-719


Jam indicator ON

Jam check


Normal

Copy Star key ON

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW

Pick-up motor (M2)


Error

Holding tray registration delay jam check

Jam indicator ON

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)


Copy Start key ON

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV

I


Normal Error



5-57

19. Holding Tray Feeding 1/2 Stationary Jam

Figure 5-720

20. Left Deck Pick-Up Delay Jam

Figure 5-721


Jam indicator

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)

Left deck outlet paper sensor (PS49)

Normal Error

Copy Start keyON


Holding tray feeding 1/2 delay jam

Jam indicator ON

Jam check


Normal Error

Copy Start key ON

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW

I

Pick-up motor (M2)





5-58

21. Left Deck Pick-Up Stationary Jam

Figure 5-722

22. Fixing Separation Claw Assembly Stationary Jam

Figure 5-723


Jam indicator

0.15 sec or less

SCFW

Normal Error

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)

Claw jam sensor (PS52)

SCRV LSTR

Left deck pick-up delay jam check

Jam indicator ON

Jam check

Pick-up motor (M2)

Left deck outlet paper sensor (PS49)

Copy Start keyON


I




5-59

VIII. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY





3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.4. One of the mounting screws of the rear cover is provided with a toothed washer to



the front door switch or the power switch is off.8. CAUTION: Before disassembly or reassembly work, disconnect the accessory (if

an accessory is installed) and main body power cord(s).!

!



5-60

A. Multifeeder Assembly

1. Removing the Multifeeder Assembly1) Remove the right cover and the upper right cover, and disconnect the two

connectors q.

Figure 5-801

2) Open the multifeeder assembly, and pull on the grip to open the multifeeder door.Remove the door tape, and lift the multifeeder assembly to detach it from the hinge.

2. Removing the Pick-Up Roller1) Open the multifeeder paper guide.2) Remove the two stop rings q each (left, right), two shutters each w, and two rollers

e each.

Figure 5-802

q

qw

we

q



5-61

If you used the multifeeder (manual feeding) during machine installation or after along period of not using it, pick-up may fail. If such is the case, peel the protectionsheet from the sponge roller, and dry wipe the surface of the sponge roller.

3. Installing the Pick-Up RollerInstall the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in

mind:• The pick-up roller used at the front and that used at the rear are NOT interchangeable.• The collar on the pick-up roller to be used at the front is silver in color.

When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, be sure to orient it sothat the round marking w on the collar (silver) is toward the front of the copier.

q Pick-up rollerw Marking (collar)

Figure 5-803

q

w

Direction ofrotation

Collar (silver) Front (copier)



5-62

Caution:

• The collar on the pick-up roller to be used at the rear is gold in color.When installing the pick-up roller r to the pick-up assembly, be sure to orient it so

that the round marking t on the side of the roller and the round marking y on the collar(gold) are toward the rear.

r Pick-up rollert Marking (roller)y Marking (collar)

Figure 5-803a

4. Removing the Separation Roller1) Remove the multifeeder assembly.2) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the registration upper roller

assembly w.

Figure 5-804

q qw

r

ty


Collar (gold)(rear)



5-63

3) Remove the spring e at the front and the rear, and remove the mounting screw rat the front; then, pull out the positioning pin t, and remove the registration lowerroller assembly y.

Figure 5-805

4) Remove the two mounting screws u, and remove the separation roller support platei.

5) Remove the joint, and remove the separation roller o.

Take care when removing the separation roller, as the bushing at the front becomesdisengaged.

Figure 5-806

u

i o

e r ty



5-64

Caution:

The urethane sponge used on the roller is initially pink and changes to yellow overtime, accelerated by exposure to light (pink to orange, and then to yellow).The fact is common to all urethane sponge types, and will not affect its physicalperformance. Keep in mind that color difference, if any, does not indicate differentpart types.

Figure 5-806a

5. Removing the Feeding Roller1) Remove the multifeeder assembly.2) Remove the separation roller.3) Remove the pick-up roller from the front, and remove the stop ring.4) Remove the stop ring q at the front of the feeding roller assembly; then, remove the

feeding roller assembly e together with the timing belt w.

Figure 5-807

w

e

q

Urethane sponge



5-65

Caution:

6. Removing the Multifeeder Paper Sensor1) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the solenoid cover w. Remove the

mounting screw e, and remove the solenoid r together with the support plate.

Figure 5-808

2) Remove the two mounting screws t, and remove the grip y.

Figure 5-809

t

y

q w

e

r



5-66

3) Remove the ten mounting screws u, and remove the door sensor metal fixing iand the multifeeder cover o.

Figure 5-810

4) Remove the two mounting screws !0, and remove the lower cover !1.

Figure 5-811

5) Remove the two mounting screws !2, and remove the guide plate !3.

Figure 5-812

!2

!3

!0!1

u

u u

u

i

o



5-67

6) Remove the two mounting screws !4, and remove the sensor mount !5.7) Detach the sensor from the sensor mount.

Figure 5-813

7. Attaching the Side Guide Timing Belt in the Multifeeder AssemblyForce the rack plate of the multifeeder against section A (open state).Move the slide volume in the direction of B, and attach the timing belt to the pulley.

Figure 5-814

PulleyPulley

Timing beltRack plate

Section A

Side volume

B

!4

!5



5-68

8. Installing the Feeding Roller of the MultifeederWhen installing the pick-up roller q to the multifeeder pick-up assembly, be sure to

orient it so that the markings “5” e and the belt pulley face the front.

q Pick-up rollerw Belt pulleye Markings (roller)

Figure 5-815

9. Adjusting the Pressure of the Pick-Up/Feeding Roller of the MultifeederIf double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up, adjust the position of the

pressure spring of the separation roller.• If double feeding occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow A.• If pick-up failure occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow B.

Figure 5-816

BA

q

w

e

5

5

(front)



5-69

10. Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid of the MultifeederSlide the solenoid in the direction of A to adjust so that the gap between the shutter

q and the shutter plate w when the solenoid is pulled is 0.4 ±0.2 mm.

Figure 5-817

Figure 5-818

q w

0.4±

0.2m

m

0.4±

0.2m

m

A



5-70

B. Front Paper Deck Assembly

1. Removing the Paper Deck Assembly from the Copier1) Remove the left/right stopper q to the paper deck, and remove the paper deck.

Figure 5-820 (left of right deck)

Figure 5-820a (right of right deck)

q

q



5-71

2. Removing the Lifter Cable1) Remove the paper deck.2) Remove the two mounting screws q above, and loosen the two mounting screws w

on the side; then, remove the deck front cover e.3) Remove the two mounting screws r inside the deck, and remove the front and rear

guide plates t.

Figure 5-821

4) Mark the position of the latch assembly; then, remove the left and right mountingscrews y (7 in total), and remove the latch assembly u.

5) Remove the gear cover i from the front right.

Figure 5-822a (left)

y

u

w

w

r

t

q

e



5-72

Figure 5-822b (right)

6) Remove the mounting screw o at the front, and free the oil damper plate !0.

Figure 5-823

o !0

yy

u

i



5-73

7) Remove the E-ring !1 at the front; then, while sliding out the gear and the pulleycover toward the front, detach the end of the cable !2 from the pulley.

Figure 5-824

8) While holding the rear gear and the spring in place, remove the E-ring !3; then, whilesliding out the pulley cover toward the front, detach the cable !5 from the pulley cover!4.

9) Detach the end of the cable from the pulley.

Figure 5-825

!3

!4

!5

!1

!2



5-74

10) Remove the mounting screw !6 from the cable relay assembly at the front, andremove the stop !7.

Figure 5-826

11) Remove the mounting screw !8 from the cable relay assembly at the rear andremove the stop !9.

Figure 5-827

12) Remove the two mounting screws @0, and remove the grip assembly @1.

Figure 5-828

@0

@1

!8 !9

!6

!7



5-75

13) Remove the mounting screw @2, and remove the cable together with the mountingplate @3.

Figure 5-829 (front)

Figure 5-829a (rear)

If not done with care when setting the left compartment, the locking assembly of thegrip and the fixing assembly of the machine will interfere with each other, looseningthe fixing screw on the hook fixing plate and, ultimately, deforming the hook fixingplate.The deformation will hinder locking if the left compartment at the correct position,and will gradually shift it to the front, encouraging deformation even more andultimately leading to faulty registration and displacement of the left compartment.

@2@3

@2

@3



5-76

Caution:

Figure 5-829b

3. Changing the Deck Paper SizeThe deck paper size is changed by changing the position of the front, rear, and rear

left guide plates.

Reference:At time of shipment, the deck paper size is set to A4; if the user wants a non-A4size, change the size; otherwise, skip the steps that follow. (You need, however, toattach the A4 size label.)

1) Slide out the deck to the front until it stops.2) Remove the three mounting screws q on the guide plates (front, rear, rear left); then,

remove the three guide plates w.

Figure 5-830

q

q

q

w

w

w

(front)

(rear)



5-77

Hook fixing plate

Top plate(left)

3) While referring to the size markings on the deck base plate, front side plate, andguide plates, install the front, rear, and rear left guide plates w.

Figure 5-831

Make sure of the following about the front and rear guide plates:• They are perpendicular to the base of the deck.• They are parallel to the metal plates on the deck front and rear.

4) Place copy paper in the deck, and slide the deck in the machine.5) Enter the new deck paper size in the copier’s service mode (*5*).

LTR

B5

A4

AL

LTR

LTR

B5

B5

A4



5-78

Caution:

4. Adjusting the Deck RegistrationRemove the deck front cover, and loosen the two mounting screws q on the left and

the right of the deck; then, shift the latch assembly w to the front and rear until theposition is as indicated in Figure 5-833.

Figure 5-832a (left)

Figure 5-832b (right)

Figure 5-833

02

4

6

810

0±1.5mm

q

w

q

w



5-79

C. Right Deck Pick-Up Assembly (cassette holder)

1. Removing the Pick-Up Assembly from the Copier1) Slide out the paper deck and the cassette of the pick-up assembly which you want

to remove from the copier.2) Open the upper right door and the lower right door.

The pick-up assembly cannot be removed if you try to remove it without firstremoving the paper deck and the cassette because of the lifter.

3) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the connector cover w; then,disconnect the two connectors e.

4) Remove the two mounting screws r, and remove the pick-up assembly t.

Figure 5-834

2. Removing the Pick-Up Roller1) Remove the pick-up assembly.2) Remove the two stop rings q on the outside, and remove the pick-up roller w in the

direction of the arrow.

Figure 5-835

q

w

q w

e

rr

t



5-80

Caution:

n Orientation of the Pick-Up RollerInstall the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in

mind:• The pick-up roller used at the front and the rear are NOT interchangeable.• The collar of the pick-up roller at the front is gold in color.

When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, make sure that theround marking w on the side of the roller and the round marking e on the collar (gold)face the front of the machine.

Figure 5-836a

• The collar of the pick-up roller at the rear is silver in color. When installing the pick-uproller r to the pick-up assembly, make sure that the round marking t on the collar(silver) is toward the rear.

Figure 5-836b

r

t


Collar (silver) (rear)

q

we

Direction of rotation

Collar (gold)(front)



5-81

3. Removing the Feeding Roller1) Remove the pick-up assembly from the copier.2) Remove the screw w, and remove the feeding roller cover q.3) Remove the stop ring e from the front of the feeding roller.4) Remove the stop ring r and the pick-up roller t at the front; then, remove the

feeding roller u together with the timing belt y.

Figure 5-837

4. Removing the Separation Roller1) Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the feeding guide plate w; then,

remove the open/close guide e.

Figure 5-838

qw

e

q

w

e

r t y

u



5-82

2) Remove the two mounting screws r, and detach the separation roller assembly tfrom the joint.

Figure 5-839

3) Remove the separation roller y from the separation roller shaft mount.

Take care not to lose the pin on the roller.

Figure 5-840


y

r

t



5-83

Caution:

Caution:

5. Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation RollerIf double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up, adjust the position of the

pressure spring of the separation roller.• If double feeding occurs, move the spring in the direction of B.• If pick-up failure occurs, move the spring in the direction of A.

q Feeding roller e Pressure leverw Separation roller r Pressure spring

Figure 5-841

q

w

e

r

A

B



5-84

6. Orientation of the Separation RollerPay attention to the orientation of the separation roller whenever you are replacing it.

Figure 5-842

If the separation roller is installed in the wrong orientation, interference with theclamping washer can cause problems.

Wider groove Narrower groove

(front)

(rear)



5-85

Caution:

7. Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Cassette/Deck Pick-Up AssemblyWhen installing the feeding roller assembly q to the cassette/deck pick-up

assembly, make sure that the belt pulley w is toward the front of the copier.When installing the feeding roller e to the feeding roller shaft r, make sure that the

marking “5” t faces the front of the copier.

q Feeding roller assembly r Feeding roller shaftw Belt pulley t Marking (roller)e Feeding roller

Figure 5-843

8. Positioning the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid of the DeckAs shown in Figure 5-844, adjust the position of the solenoid so that the left end of

the right solenoid arm 2 is 57.2 ±0.5 mm from the center of the hole A in the solenoidmount.

Figure 5-844

A57.2±0.5mm

wq

r

5

5

e

t

(front)



5-86

9. Positioning the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid of the CassetteAs shown in Figure 5-845, adjust the position of the solenoid so that the distance

from the bottom of the pick-up assembly and the section A of the roller arm is 36 ±0.5mm. (Use two screws q.)

Figure 5-845

10. Adjusting the Registration of the CassetteLoosen the screw w shown in Figure 5-846, and adjust the position of the cassette

hook plate q. After making adjustments, enter the paper width basic value in servicedmode (*4*) as instructed in Chapter 11.

Figure 5-846

Figure 5-847

02

4

6

810

0±1.5mm

q

w

36±

0.5m

m

A

q



5-87

D. Left Deck Pick-Up Assembly

1. Removing the Pick-Up Assembly from the Copier1) Remove the left/right paper deck.2) Slide out the holding tray feeding assembly about 10 cm to the front.3) Remove the mounting screws q from the two positioning pins; then, remove the

positioning pins w, and remove the left deck pick-up assembly e.

Figure 5-848

When installing the left deck pick-up assembly, slide out the holding tray feedingassembly slightly to the front.Pay attention to the engagement of the gear.

2. Removing the Pick-Up Roller1) Remove the left deck pick-up assembly from the copier.2) Remove the stop ring q from the front and the rear; then, remove the pick-up roller

w.

Figure 5-849

wq

we q

q

w



5-88

Note:

n Orientation of the Pick-Up RollerInstall the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in

mind:• The pick-up rollers used at the front and the rear are NOT interchangeable.• The collar of the pick-up roller used at the front is gold.

When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, make sure that theround marking w on the side of the roller and the round marking e on the collar (gold)face the front.

Figure 5-850a

• The collar of the pick-up roller used at the rear is silver in color. When installing thepick-up roller r to the pick-up assembly, make sure that the round marking t on thecollar (silver) is toward the rear of the machine.

Figure 5-850b

r

t


Collar (silver) (rear)

q

we


Collar (gold)(front)



5-89

3. Removing the Feeding Roller1) Remove the left deck pick-up assembly from the copier.2) Remove the stop ring q.3) Remove the pick-up roller w at the front; then, remove the feeding roller r together

with the timing belt e.

Figure 5-851

4. Removing the Separation Roller1) Remove the left deck pick-up assembly from the copier.2) Remove the mounting screw q, and detach the separation roller assembly w from

the joint.

Figure 5-852

3) Remove the separation roller e from the separation roller shaft mount.

Take care not to lose the pin from the roller.

q w

q w e

r



5-90

Note:

Figure 5-853


5. Orientation of the Feeding Roller Assembly of the Left Deck Pick-Up AssemblyWhen orienting the feeding roller assembly q to the left pick-up assembly, make

sure that the belt pulley w is toward the front.When installing the feeding roller e to the feeding roller shaft r, make sure that the

marking “5” faces the front.

e



5-91

Note:

q Feeding roller assembly r Feeding roller shaftw Belt pulley t Marking (roller)e Feeding roller

Figure 5-854

E. Pick-Up Vertical Path Roller Assembly

1. Removing the Pick-Up Vertical Path Roller Assembly1) Open the upper right door and the lower right door.2) Remove the right deck pick-up assembly/cassette pick-up assembly.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector; then, remove

the pick-up vertical path roller assembly w.

Figure 5-855

q q

w

wq

r

5

5

e

t

(front)



5-92

F. Registration Feeding Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 5-856

2. Removing the Registration Feeding Assembly1) Open the front cover, and slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover, and remove the transfer/separation charging

assembly.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the right rail support plate w;

then, remove the registration feeding assembly pressure spring e.

Figure 5-857

q

w

e

Registration feeding assembly



5-93

4) Remove the E-ring r, and push in the spindle shaft t to remove.5) Disconnect the connector y, and remove the registration feeding assembly u from

the fixing/feeding unit.

Figure 5-858

3. Removing the Registration Roller (upper rubber roller)1) Loosen the two set screws q on the electromagnetic clutch at the rear.2) Remove the spring w, E-ring e, spacer r, bushing t, and bearing y.

Figure 5-859

qw erty

r

t

y

u



5-94

3) Remove the spring u, E-ring i, spacer o, bearing !0, and bushing !1 at the front.4) Remove the pre-transfer upper guide !2, and remove the registration roller (upper

rubber roller) !3.

Figure 5-860

u

i

!2

!3o

!0!1



5-95

G. Feeding Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 5-861

2. Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit1) Remove the front cover; then, open the hopper assembly, take out the power switch

assembly cover, and close the hopper assembly.2) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit.3) Remove the screw q (one each at left and right), and remove the fixing feeding unit

stopper w.

Figure 5-862 (left stopper)

qw

Feeding assembly



5-96

Figure 5-863 (right stopper)

4) Remove the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.

Keep in mind that the fixing/feeding unit weighs about 15 kg.

3. Removing the Feeding Belt1) Remove the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the E-ring q, spacer w, and bearing e at the front.

Figure 5-864

q

we

q

w



5-97

Caution:

4) Remove the E-ring e and the two mounting screws r at the rear.

Figure 5-865

5) Remove the E-ring t, gear y, and pin u at the rear.6) Remove the E-ring i and bearing o at the rear.

Figure 5-866

tyu

io

er



5-98

7) Remove the three harness retainers !0 and two edge saddles !1, and disconnect theconnector !2; then, remove the screw !3, and remove the cord guide !4.

Figure 5-867

8) Remove the two screws !5, and remove the handle support plate !6.

Figure 5-868

!5 !6

!0

!1 !2

!3

!4



5-99

9) Remove the two mounting screws !7 (2 each at front and rear), and remove thefeeding belt unit !8.


10) Remove the screw @0, and remove the feeding upper plate !9 at the front; then,remove the feeding belt @1 and the postcard belt @2.

Figure 5-870

@0

!9

@1

@2(front)

!7 !8



5-100

H. Holding Tray Assembly

1. Construction

q Holding tray inlet assembly r Re-pick up assemblyw Side guide plate t Re-pick up rollere Y direction guide plate

Figure 5-871a (cross section)

q Holding tray re-pick up roller (D-cutroller) solenoid (SL6)

w Holding tray reversing clutch (CL4)e Holding tray forward clutch (CL5)r Holding tray separation clutch (CL6)t Holding tray registration clutch (CL3)

Figure 5-871b (rear view)

q

we

r

t

q w e

r t



5-101

2. Removing the Holding Tray from the Copier1) Open the front cover.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Slide the holding tray assembly to the front and out of the copier.

3. Removing the Holding Tray Re-Pick Up Assembly1) Slide the holding tray assembly to the front and out of the copier.2) Remove the screw e (1 each), and remove the inlet assembly front upper cover q

and the inlet assembly rear cover w; then, remove the two screws t and disconnectthe two connectors y to remove the sided guide plate r.

Figure 5-872

3) Remove the three mounting screws u (front).


uu

q we

r

t

y



5-102

4) Remove the three mounting screws i (rear); while lifting the holding tray re-pick upassembly, disconnect the two connectors o, and remove the holding tray re-pick upassembly !0.

Figure 5-874 (rear)

4. Removing the Holding Tray Registration Paper Sensor1) Open the front cover.2) Slide the holding tray to the front and out of the copier.3) Remove the holding tray re-pick up assembly.4) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the registration paper sensor

assembly w.

Figure 5-875

q qw

i

i

o

!0



5-103

5. Removing the Re-Pick Up Roller1) Open the front cover.2) Slide out the holding tray assembly to the front.3) Remove the mounting screw q (1 each), and remove the two pick-up rollers w.

Figure 5-876

6. Removing the Holding Tray Driver PCB1) Open the front cover.2) Slide the holding tray assembly to the front and out of the copier.3) Turn over the holding tray assembly.4) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the holding tray driver PCB cover

w.

Figure 5-877

qw

q

w

w



5-104

5) Remove the two mounting screws, and disconnect the nine connectors r (J201,J202, J203, J204, J205, J207, J208, J209, J210); then, remove the holding try drierPCB t.

Figure 5-878

7. Removing the Holding Tray Y Motor1) Slide the holding tray to the front and out of the copier.2) Turn over the holding tray assembly.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the right rail w.

Figure 5-879

q

q

w

e

r t



5-105

4) Turn over the holding tray assembly.5) Remove the E-ring e, flange r, and belt t.

Figure 5-880

6) Remove the two mounting screws y; then, turn over the holding tray Y motorassembly u, and disconnect the connector.

Figure 5-881

7) Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the holding tray Y motor.

u

y

y

e

r

t



5-106

8. Removing the Y Motor Home Position Sensor1) Slide the holding tray assembly to the front and out of the copier.2) Remove the right rail, and turn over the holding tray assembly.3) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the Y motor home position sensor

assembly w.

Figure 5-882

9. Removing the Holding Tray Inlet Assembly1) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the inlet assembly front upper cover w.

Figure 5-883

q

w

qw



5-107

2) Remove the mounting screw e, and remove the inlet assembly rear upper cover r.

Figure 5-884

3) Remove the two mounting screws t, and remove the inlet assembly y.

Figure 5-885

t

t

y

e

r



5-108

10. Removing the Feeding Roller/Separation Belt Assembly1) Slide the holding tray assembly to the front.2) Remove the holding tray inlet assembly.3) Remove the mounting screw q.

Figure 5-886

4) While opening the left cover w, remove the feeding roller/separation belt assemblye.

Figure 5-887

w

e

q



5-109

11. Removing the Feeding Roller1) Remove the feeding roller/separation belt assembly.2) Remove the stop ring q and the bushing w at the front.

Figure 5-888

3) Remove the stop ring e, gear r, and bushing t at the rear.4) Remove the roller y from the feeding roller assembly.

Figure 5-889

e

rt

y

q

w



5-110

12. Removing the Separation Belt Assembly1) Remove the feeding roller/separation belt assembly.2) Remove the stop ring q and the bushing w at the front.

Figure 5-890

3) Lift the front of the separation belt assembly, and shift it to the rear; then, remove theseparation belt assembly.

4) Detach the belt from the separation belt assembly.

13. Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation Roller of the Holding trayTurn the separation roller adjusting roll so that the distance to the shaft is 32.7

±0.1 mm.

Figure 5-891

32.7±0.1mm

q

w



5-111

14. Positioning the Holding Tray Paper Deflecting Plate Drive SolenoidInstall the solenoid so that its stroke (distance between rubber silencer and solenoid

edge) is 5.0 ±0.3 mm.

Figure 5-892

15. Removing the Side Guide Plate Assembly1) Mark the position of the side guide plate with a pencil or the like. (See Figure 5-901.)2) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the two connectors; then,

remove the side guide plate assembly w.

Figure 5-893

q

q

w

5.0±0.3mm



5-112

16. Removing the Holding Tray X Motor1) Remove the side guide plate assembly.2) Remove the mounting screw, and remove the motor cover.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector; then, remove

the motor w.

Figure 5-894

17. Removing the Holding Tray Re-Circulating Motor1) Remove the side guide plate assembly.2) With the paper jogging guide plate fully open, mark the position of the paper jogging

guide plate assembly with a pencil or the like. (See Figure 5-900.)3) Remove the three mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then,

remove the rear guide plate assembly e.

Figure 5-895

q

q

w

e

q

w



5-113

4) Remove the mounting screw r, and remove the motor assembly t.

Figure 5-896

18. Removing the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Solenoid1) Remove the side guide plate.2) With the paper jogging guide plate fully open, mark the position of the paper jogging

guide plate assembly with a pencil or the like.3) Remove the three mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then,

remove the front guide plate assembly e.

Figure 5-897

q we q

r

t



5-114

4) Remove the mounting screw r, and remove the cover t.

Figure 4-898

5) Remove the two mounting screws y, two grip rings u, and spring pin i; then,remove the solenoid o.

Figure 5-899

y u

io

r

t



5-115

19. Installing the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Guide Plate AssemblyMark the position of the paper jogging guide plate assembly with a pencil or the like,

and install the plate in its initial position.

Figure 5-900

20. Installing the Holding Tray Assembly Side Guide Plate AssemblyMark the position of the side guide plate assembly with a scribe, and install it along

the marking.

Figure 5-901



5-116

21. Attaching the Timing Belt of the Holding Tray Assembly Paper Jogging GuidePlateButt the rack plate of the paper jogging guide plate against section A (open state),

and attach the timing belt to the pulley.

Figure 5-902

22. Positioning the Holding Tray Paper Jogging SolenoidWhen installing the solenoid, position it so that the stroke (distance between rubber

silencer and solenoid edge) is 1.5 ±0.3 mm.

Figure 5-903

1.5±0.3mm

A



5-117

I. Holding Tray Feeding Assembly

1. Removing the Holding Tray Feeding Assembly from the Copier1) Open the front cover, and slide out the holding tray feeding assembly to the front.2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the holding tray feeding

assembly front cover w.

Figure 5-904

3) Remove the five mounting screws e and two metal fixings r, and detach theholding tray feeding assembly t from the rail.

Figure 5-905

e

e

e

e

e

r r

t

q q

w



5-118

2. Removing the Sensor from the Holding Tray Feeding Assembly1) Open the front cover, and slide out the holding tray feeding assembly to the front.2) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the metal fixing w; then, remove the

holding tray feeding sensor cover e from under the holding tray feeding assembly.

Figure 5-906

Do not open the holding tray feeding assembly upper guide more than it opensfreely, or the stopper r will be damaged.

3) Remove the two mounting screws, and disconnect the connector; then, remove thesensor assembly from the holding tray feeding assembly.

When installing the holding tray feeding assembly sensor cover, be sure to fit thetwo springs into the bosses behind the holding tray feeding assembly upper guide.

q

we

r



5-119

Caution:

Caution:



5-120


CHAPTER 6

FIXING SYSTEM

I. OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS..............6-1A. Outline ...........................................6-1B. Fixing Drive Assembly...................6-3C. Controlling the Fixing

Temperature ..................................6-5D. Reciprocating Mechanism for

the Main Thermistor (TH1) ............6-10E. Reciprocating Mechanism for

the Upper Separation Claw ...........6-11

F. SSR Error Detection Circuit for the Fixing Heater ..........................6-12

G. Locking Operation (fixing/feeding unit) ........................6-14

H. Error Detection Circuit ...................6-15II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......6-18

A. Fixing Assembly ............................6-19B. Delivery Assembly.........................6-36

This chapter explains the principles used to fuse toner images to transfer medium in view of thefunctions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation to their timing of operation. It also shows howthese units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I. OUTLINE OF OPERATIONS

A. Outline

The upper roller, lower roller, and delivery roller of the fixing assembly are driven bythe main motor through clutches. (See Figure 6-101.)

The upper roller has two built-in heaters: after power-on, the sub heater is turned ononly during WMUP, and the main heater is turned on and off during WMUP and duringsubsequent periods for temperature control. (See Figure 6-103.)

The surface temperature of the upper roller is monitored by the main thermistor(TH1), and the DC controller PCB controls it so that it remains a specific temperature(target value).

The web used to clean the upper fixing roller is of a one-way clutch type, and isoperated by the fixing cleaning belt drive solenoid (SL14).

A message is indicated in service mode on the control panel when the fixing webdrive solenoid (SL14) has operated 250,000 times. The cumulative count of how manytimes the fixing web drive solenoid has operated can be checked in service mode (*6*;‘WEB’).

The cleaning belt detecting lever remains in direct contact with the cleaning belt, andshifts as the cleaning belt is taken up, causing the control panel to indicate 'E005' whenit blocks the sensor (PS11).

The delivery assembly is equipped with a delivery paper deflecting plate. In two-sided/overlay copying, the DC controller PCB generates the delivery flapper solenoiddrive signal to turn on the delivery flapper solenoid (SL2) so that the delivery flapperoperates to forward copy paper to the holding tray.

The drive of the fixing cleaning belt drive solenoid (SL14) is used to trigger theexternal delivery sensor (PS10).



6-1

SL14 Activation• twice for large-size copy•once for small-size copy

Reference:1. Heater

120 V model: 790 W (main) + 410 W (sub)220/240 V model: 1200 W (main)

2. Thermal switch: 240 ±10°C



6-2

B. Fixing Drive Assembly

If a jam occurs in the fixing/delivery assembly, the DC controller PCB generates thefixing drive stop signal to turn on the fixing drive stop solenoid (SL3), therebyimmediately stopping the fixing roller.

The cleaning belt used to clean the upper fixing roller is taken up by the cleaning belttake-up arm moving up and down in response to the activation of the fixing cleaning beltsolenoid (SL14).

The area where the fixing roller comes into contact with the cleaning belt guide ismade rather large so as to prevent offset.

The height of the fixing assembly inlet guide is varied by turning on and off the fixingassembly inlet guide drive solenoid (SL16) so as to facilitate feeding of copy paper.

The height is varied according to the following conditions, and the change is madewith reference to a height of about 130 mm (at start of copying and upon end of rotation):• High if the copy paper is B5R or longer (including B5R).• Low if the copy paper is shorter than the above.However, if 'free size' is selected for the multifeeder, the control will be as follows:• High at the start of copying.

When the first copy paper moves past the registration paper sensor (PS23), itslength is measured and the above control is executed.



6-3

Figure 6-101

Fixing drive solenoid

M1

Main motor

SL3Clutch

Fix

ing

driv

e st

op s

igna

l (F

XD

SD

)

Fix

ing

asse

mbl

y in

let g

uide

driv

e si

gnal

(F

XG

DS

D)

Fix

ing

clea

ning

bel

t driv

e so

leno

id d

rive

sign

al

(FC

BS

D)

Fixing cleaning belt drive solenoid(SL14)

Delivery flapper solenoid(SL2)

Ext

erna

l del

iver

y de

tect

ion

sign

al (

EX

DP

D)

Inte

rnal

del

iver

y pa

per

dete

ctio

n si

gnal

(ID

PD

)

Del

iver

y pa

per

defle

ctin

g pl

ate

sole

noid

driv

e si

gnal

(DP

DS

D)

PS10

Cleaning belt take-up arm

DC controller PCB

PS12

Fixing assembly inlet guide

SL16

Upper fixingroller

Lower fixing roller

Delivery paper deflecting plate

Drive solenoid

Fixing cleaning belt

To holding tray



6-4

C. Controlling the Fixing Temperature

The surface temperature of the machine's upper fixing roller is monitored by the mainthermistor (TH1); measurements are taken and communicated to the microprocessor onthe DC controller PCB.

The DC controller PCB uses these measurements to vary the main heater drivesignal (MHRD) and the sub heater drive signal (SHRD).

The sub thermistor (TH2) is mounted at the rear of the upper fixing roller to check foran abnormal increase in temperature.

Figure 6-102

Upper fixing roller

Fixing lower roller

PS47

Fix

ing

asse

mbl

y ou

tlet p

aper

det

ectio

n si

gnal

(F

XD

EL)

Fix

ing

asse

mbl

y in

let p

aper

det

ectio

n si

gnal

(F

XC

JS)

Cle

anin

g be

lt le

ngth

det

ectio

n si

gnal

(C

BO

P)

Mai

n th

erm

isto

r si

gnal

(T

H1)

Mai

n he

ater

driv

e si

gnal

(M

HR

D)

Sub

hea

ter

driv

e si

gnal

(S

HR

D)

Main thermistor (TH1)

AC power supply

TPI

Cleaning belt guide plate

Thermal switch

SSR

AC driver PCB

PS11

PS52

Sub

ther

mis

tor

sign

al (

TH

2)

DC controller PCB

Sub thermistor

(TH2)



6-5

The machine uses the six types of control shown in Tables 6-101 and -102 accordingto how much time has passed since power-on and the environmental conditions.

l 60 Min from Power-On and Surface Temperature of Fixing Roller 75°C or Less

Table 6-101

l 60 Min or More from Power-On

Table 6-102

In addition, the following types of control exist for special conditions:q Power Saving Mode

The following operation takes place when the Pre-Heat key is pressed; power-savingmode may be varied in user mode.

l Control Temperature during Pre-Heat

*Period between another press on the Pre-Heatkey and the start of STBY.

Table 6-103



6-6

Mode Internal Control temperaturetemperature Standby Copying

H mode 17°C or more 200°C 205°CM mode 12° to 17°C 210°C 212°CL mode 12°C or less 210°C 212°C

Mode Internal Control temperaturetemperature Standby Copying

H mode 17°C or more 200°C 205°CM mode 12° to 17°C 200°C 205°CL mode 12°C or less 200°C 205°C

Saving rate Control temperature* Delivery

–10% 180°C 50 sec

–25% 155°C 90 sec

–50% 110°C 155 sec

None 195°C 0 sec

w Copy Speed Down SequenceThe machine is designed to turn out 50 copies normally and 60 copies when making

one-sided copies of one original.To ensure good fixing, however, it uses a longer sheet-to-sheet distance, thereby

keeping the fixing temperature to a specific value when the surface temperature of thefixing roller is as shown in Table 6-104 as detected by the main thermistor (TH1).

Table 6-104



6-7

Down Condition 60 min after 60 min and latersequence power-on after power-on

50 cpm recovery 170°C 175°Cmode

40 cpm mode 165°C 170°C

35 cpm mode 160°C 165°C

Copying stop 155°C 160°C

Stream reading 180°C50 cpm mode

60 cpm stream reading 185°Cmode recovery mode

In down sequence, 40 cpm or 35 cpm mode is initiated to suit the surfacetemperature of the upper fixing roller.

Normal sequence will be initiated when the surface temperature of the upper fixingroller reaches a specific level (Table 6-104); however, once copying has beensuspended, WMUP sequence will be used until the surface temperature of the upperfixing roller reaches 195°C (as in auto start mode).

If any of the foregoing levels of surface temperature is detected during copyingoperation, the machine starts WMUP sequence while indicating the remaining numberof copies on the control panel. When the Copy Start key is pressed as in auto start orduring STBY, the remaining number of copies are made.

Figure 6-103

210°C

205°C

200°C

195°C

(205°C)

(195°C)

(210°C)

(200°C)

(212°C)

(205°C)

(210°C)

(200°C)

Mode H (17°C~)

Mode M, L (12°C~17°C, ~12°C)

Power switchSWON

WMUP

Main heater (H1)

Sub heater (H2)

Main motor (M1)

Wait indication

STBY

195°CAbout 20 sec after

end of CNTR2

INTR CNTR1 CNTR2 LSTR STBY INTR CNTR1 CNTR2 AERSCFWSCRWSCRFSCRV LSTR

Copy Start keyON

ON in green ON in orange



6-8

Figure 6-104

Main heater (H1)

Sub heater (H2)

Main motor (M1)

Pre-Heat indicator

STBY INTR CNTR1CNTR2 AERSCFWSCRVSCFWSCRVLSTR STBY

"# !"#

*1

60 min Copy Start key ON Pre-Heat key ONAuto shut-off ON

ON Flashing

210°C

205°C

200°C

195°C

180°C

155°C

110°C

10% saving

25% saving

50% saving

*1 : May be varied in service mode.

Mode H (17°C~)Mode M, L (12°C~17°C, ~12°C)



6-9

D. Reciprocating Mechanism for the Main Thermistor (TH1)

To prevent damage to the upper fixing roller by the main thermistor (TH1), the mainthermistor is designed to slide back and forth in the axial direction of the upper fixingroller over a distance of 12 mm.

The reciprocating cam is supplied with drive by the cleaning belt drive solenoid(SL14) through a one-way arm.

Figure 6-105

Upper fixing rollerReciprocating cam

One-way arm

Fixing assembly cleaning belt drive solenoid (SL14)

Thermistor (TH1)

12mm

Thermistor



6-10

E. Reciprocating Mechanism for the Upper Separation Claw

To prevent damage to the upper fixing roller by the upper separation claw, the upperseparation claw is slid back and forth in the axial direction of the upper fixing roller overa distance of 3 mm.

Figure 6-106

Upper fixing roller

Separation claw

Separationclaw

Reciprocating cam

Internal delivery roller

Main motor

M1

3mm



6-11

F. SSR Error Detection Circuit for the Fixing Heater

The machine’s safety circuit for the fixing heater SSR uses the following signals sentto the DC controller PCB:1. Fixing main heater drive signal (MHRD)2. Main heater ON detection signal (MHOND)

Figure 6-107 shows the main heater only, but the sub heater is controlled in the sameway.

Heater ONThe CPU causes the SSRON signal to go ‘0’, and the MHRD signal goes ‘1’ to turn

on the heater. At this time, the fixing assembly feeding unit detection signal (FFURLS),power switch ON detection signal (MSWD), and front door open detection signal (FDOD)are ‘0’.

Heater OFFThe CPU causes the SSRON signal to go ‘1’, and the MHRD signal goes ‘0’ to turn

off the heater.

SSR ErrorIf the main heater ON detection signal (MHOND) is ‘1’ when the CPU on the DC

controller PCB is not generating the fixing main heater drive signal (MHRD), i.e., gatearray detection q, or if the main heater ON detection signal (MHOND) is ‘0’ when theCPU on the DC controller PCB is generating the fixing main heater drive signal (MHRD),i.e., CPU detection w, the DC controller will identify an error in SSR and issue an Ecode.

To cut off the power to the AC circuit, the DC controller causes the power switch OFFsignal (PWOFF) to go ‘0’. When the power switch is turned off, the power to the heaterwill be cut off; however, since the power to the DC controller PCB is maintained for aspecific period of time, (see p. 7-9), the PWOFF signal is kept to prevent the relay insidethe power switch from turning on, thereby locking the power switch ON detection signal(MSWD) from the power supply PCB.

Since the machine’s main heater ON detection signal (MHOND) will go ‘1’ under thefollowing conditions, the SSRON signal is kept ‘0’ so as to prevent detecting an SSRerror wrongly:

1.When the fixing feeding unit is slid out (FFURLS=1).2.When the front door is opened (FDOD=1).3.When the power switch is turned off (MSWD=1).



6-12



6-13

Fig

ure

6-10

7

qw

Pow

er s

witc

hS

W1

Pow

er s

uppl

yP

CB

+12

VD

C c

ontr

olle

r P

CB

Gat

e ar

ray

Gat

e ar

ray

MH

ON

D

Q64

1

AC

driv

er P

CB

CP

U

PW

OF

F

FD

OD

MS

WA

PC

1F

FU

RLS

SS

RO

N

Q64

3

+5V

Mai

n he

ater

H1

Rec

tifie

r ci

rcui

t

Fro

nt d

oor

switc

hS

W2

G. Locking Operation (fixing/feeding unit)

If copy paper is trapped over the fixing/feeding unit and the holding tray unit whenthe machine is stopped because of a jam, i.e., if paper is over the internal delivery sensor(PS12), the main motor (M1) and the fixing/feeding unit locking solenoid (SL13) is turnedon for about 3 sec, thereby lowering the locking lever from the fixing/feeding unit to therear of the holding tray unit.

Because of the foregoing design, the holding tray unit will also slide out when thefixing/feeding unit is drawn out for removal of the jam, thereby preventing tearing thecopy paper over two units.

This locking mechanism is released during initial rotation of the main motor after jamremoval.

Figure 6-108

Fixing/feedingassembly

Holding trayassembly

Locking lever

Spring clutch

M1

Fixing/feeding unit locking solenoid drive signal J108B-2(FFULSD)

Main motor

Fixing/feeding unit locking solenoid (SL13)

DC

con

trol

ler

PC

B



6-14

H. Error Detection Circuit

1. OutlineFigure 6-109 is a block diagram showing the control circuit for the error detection

circuit, and the circuit has the following functions:a. Monitoring the activation of the scanning lamp (LA1).b. Monitoring the activation of the fixing heater (main, H1; sub, H2).c. Monitoring the rotation of each motor in normal mode and in stream reading mode.

Each function concentrates at the gate array on the DC controller PCB.The gate array detects the state of each appropriate load used for the detection of

an error, checks for the presence/absence of an error, and communicates the result tothe master CPU.

Figure 6-109

2. Scanning Lamp Error Activation Detection CircuitThe gate array receives the scanning lamp ON signal (CVRON) and the scanning

lamp ON detection signal (CVR ACTIVE). If the scanning lamp is on in the absence ofthe scanning lamp ON signal, the gate array will identify an error.

At this time, the gate array will communicate to the master CPU the wrong detectionand, at the same time, generates the power supply OFF signal.

LA1

H2H1

RFPS4

M3 M3

Lamp regulator

PCB

ACdriverPCB

Motorerror

detectionPCB

Gate array

MasterCPU

DC controller PCB



6-15

As a result, the relay inside the power supply switch will be supplied with power, thepower switch will be turned off, and the AC power supply will be cut off (error auto poweroff).

Figure 6-110

3. Fixing Heater Error Activation Detection CircuitThe gate array generates the fixing heater ON signal (SSR ON), and receives the

fixing heater ON detection signal (SSR ACTIVE). An error is identified if the fixing heateris on in the absence of the fixing heater ON signal.

At this time, the gate array communicates an error in the activation of the fixingheater to the master CPU and, at the same time, generates the power switch OFF signal.

In addition, the thermistor used to monitor the surface temperature of the fixing rollergenerates the error signal (FUSER TEMP ERROR) to the gate array. The gate array willalso turn off the power switch in response to an abnormal increase in the surfacetemperature of the fixing roller.

When the power supply switch OFF signal is generated, the relay inside the powerswitch is powered to turn off the power switch and the AC power supply.

If the fixing sub thermistor (TH2) detects an abnormal increase in temperature (230±10°C), the DC controller PCB indicates ‘E001’, and turns off the AC power supply.

The machine checks the fixing sub thermistor for a broken line, and indicates ‘E000’for about 5 sec if it finds an open circuit and cuts off the AC power supply.

Lamp regulator

MasterCPU

DC controller PCB

Gatearray

CVR

ACTIVE

LA1

Power switch OFF

Error

+12V

CVR ON



6-16

Figure 6-111

4. Motor Error Rotation Detection CircuitThe motor error rotation detection circuit checks for an error (suspension of rotation)

in relation to the scanner motor (M3), RDF belt motor, and scanner original leading edgesensor 2 (PS4).

In response to the motor error OFF detection signal (ENCODER ERROR), the gatearray resets the DC controller PCB.

Figure 6-112

RDF DC controller PCB

M3

M3

M3drivecircuit

M3drivecircuit

PS4To RDF

Detectioncircuit

Gatearray

ResettingIC

MasterCPU

ENCODERERROR

Resetting

Error

DC controller PCB

Gatearray

Overheatingdetected

H1

H1

H2

TH1

TH2

MasterCPU

ACdriverPCB

AC driver PCB

Timer

Main heater ONSub heater ON

MainSub

SSR ON

SSRACTIVE

FUSERTEMPERROR

100/120V

220/240V

Power supply switch OFF

Overheating open circuit

detection+12V

Sub thermistor

Main thermistor



6-17

II. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY









!



6-18

A. Fixing Assembly

1. Construction

q Fixing upper unit e Lower rollerw Upper roller

Figure 6-201

2. Locking Mechanism

Figure 6-202

Fulcrum

Locking arm

q

w

e



6-19

3. Removing the Fixing Cleaning Belt

Figure 6-203

1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the fixing upper cover w.

Figure 6-204

qw

Take-up roller Feeding roller



6-20

4) Remove the two mounting screws e used to hold the fixing cleaning belt assemblyin place, and open the fixing cleaning belt upper assembly r upward.

Figure 6-205

5) Remove the cleaning belt feeding roller t and the cleaning belt take-up roller y bypushing them toward the rear.

Figure 6-206

Be sure to remove the silicone oil collecting in the oil pan found under the cleaningbelt feeding roller.

ty

e

r



6-21

Caution:

4. Installing the Fixing Cleaning BeltInstall the fixing cleaning belt by reversing the steps used to remove it.

1) Wind the cleaning belt around the cleaning belt take-up roller q twice to three times.When installing it to the front, be sure that the arm guide plate w is on the outsideof the take-up roller.At this time, check to make sure that the area coming into contact with the roller is

impregnated with oil.

Figure 6-207

Check to make sure that the fixing cleaning belt is not wound askew or it is not slackor wrinkled.In addition, make sure that the direction of winding and the orientation are as shownin Figure 6-203.

2) After installing the fixing cleaning belt, move the one-way lever e in the direction ofthe arrow (Figure 6-208); then, turn it until all the slack has been removed from thefixing cleaning belt.

Figure 6-208

Be sure to reset the counter (*6*; ‘WEB’) to ‘0’ after replacing the fixing cleaningbelt.

e

qw



6-22

Caution:

Caution:

5. Removing the Upper Fixing Unit1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Remove the fixing upper cover.4) Open the fixing delivery assembly q.

Figure 6-209

5) Remove the two mounting screws w, and remove the flywheel mount e.

Figure 6-210

6) Remove the E-ring r, and remove the flywheel t.

Figure 6-211

r

t

w

e

q



6-23

7) Remove the fixing web, and clean the silicone oil pan. Remove the two mountingscrews y, remove the two harness retainers u, and disconnect the threeconnectors i.

Figure 6-212

8) Open the fixing upper unit o slightly, and remove it by lifting it to the left; then, placeit on a desk.

The silicone oil in the silicone oil pan can start to drip during the work; if possible,drain it in advance.

Figure 6-213

o

y u

i



6-24

Caution:

6. Removing the Fixing Heater1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding front cover.3) Open the fixing delivery assembly.4) Remove the flywheel.5) Remove the fixing upper cover, and remove the fixing web; then, clean the silicone

oil pan, and remove the fixing upper unit.6) Remove the faston q at the front of the heater (main heater, sub heater).7) Remove the mounting screw w, and remove the side electrode supply leaf spring e

at the front.8) Free the two cables r at the front of the heater from the wire saddles t.

Figure 6-214

9) Remove the two fastons y at the rear.

Figure 6-215

y

q

w

e

rt



6-25

10) Pull out the main heater and the sub heater from the fixing assembly to the front withcare not to damage them.

When opening the fixing upper unit during inspection/maintenance work, you couldcause the side plate of the upper fixing unit to push down the height adjustingsupport plate of the fixing assembly inlet guide, lowering the fixing assembly inletguide. Since such a condition will lead to jamming of copy paper, make sure not toopen the fixing assembly upper unit with force.



6-26

Caution:

7. Installing the Fixing HeaterInstall the heater by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in mind:

a. Do not touch the surface of the heater.b. Orient both heaters so that the sides with longer heater wires are toward the front.c. Install the main heater (790 W) to the right and the sub heater (410 W) to the left

when viewing from the front.d. While viewing from the rear of the copier, connect the faston on the right to the main

heater and the faston at the top to the sub heater.

8. Removing the Fixing Upper Roller1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover.3) Open the fixing/delivery assembly.4) Remove the flywheel.5) Remove the fixing upper cover, and remove the fixing cleaning belt; then, clean the

silicone oil pan, and remove the fixing upper unit.6) Remove the main heater and the sub heater.7) Remove the two mounting screws w used to hold the fixing cleaning belt assembly

q in place, and release the web.

Figure 6-216

8) Remove the two mounting screws e, and remove the heater holder r at the rear.

Figure 6-217

e

e r

qw w



6-27

9) Remove the two stoppers t (front, rear).

Figure 6-218 (rear)

Figure 6-218a (front)

10) While paying attention to the thermistor and the thermal switch, remove the upperroller unit y.

Figure 6-219

y

t

t



6-28

11) Remove the C-ring u and the gear i at the front.12) Remove the C-ring o and the gear !0 at the rear.13) Pull out the bearing !1 and the bushing !2 found at the rear to the front.14) Slide out the bearing !3 and the bushing !4 found at the front of the upper roller to

the front.

Figure 6-220

9. Installing the Upper Fixing RollerInstall the upper roller by reversing the steps used to remove it.

• Handling the Upper RollerIf possible, wrap the roller with copy paper so as to protect its surface from dirt andscratches.

• Installing the Upper Rollera. Orient it so that the side with a longer cut-off (section A in Figure 6-221) is toward the

rear.

Figure 6-221

b. Be sure to install the collars q w of the bushing in the correct order shown in Figure6-221a.

Figure 6-221a

q

w

(front)

(rear)

A

(front) (rear)

ui

o !0!1

!2

!3!4



6-29

10. Removing the Thermal Switch1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover.3) Remove the flywheel.4) Remove the fixing assembly upper cover and the stay cover.5) Remove the fixing web. Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the oil pan w.6) Remove the mounting screw e and faston r; then, remove the thermal switch

assembly holder t.7) Remove the four mounting screws y, and remove the thermal switch assembly.

Figure 6-222

8) Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the thermal switch.

11. Removing the Main Thermistor (TH1)1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover.3) Remove the fixing assembly upper cover.4) Remove the web.5) Remove the mounting screw q, and remove the oil pan w.

Figure 6-223

q w

q we rr

r rt y



6-30

6) Remove the mounting screw e, and shift the thermistor assembly r to the right toremove.

Figure 6-224

7) Remove the mounting screw t and two retaining screws y, and remove the mainthermistor u.

Figure 6-225

12. Removing the Lower Separation Claw Assembly1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover.3) Remove the flywheel.4) Remove the fixing assembly upper cover.5) Remove the fixing cleaning belt, clean the silicone oil pan; then, remove the fixing

assembly upper unit.6) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the lower separation claw

assembly 2 together with its support plate w.

Figure 6-226

q

q

w

t

yy u

e r



6-31

7) Remove the tension spring, and remove the lower separation claw assembly.

13. Removing the Lower Roller1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover.3) Remove the flywheel.4) Remove the fixing assembly upper cover and the fixing cleaning belt; then, remove

the silicone oil pan.5) Remove the upper roller assembly of the fixing assembly.6) Remove the lower separation claw support plate.7) Remove the lower roller q from the fixing assembly, remove the two E-rings w from

the lower roller, and remove the two bearings e.

Figure 6-227

14. Removing the Upper Separation Claw1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Open the fixing/delivery assembly, and release the spring q; then, remove the upper

separation claw w.

Figure 6-228

q w

q ww e e



6-32

15. Adjusting the Nip (tightening the pressure adjusting nut)The nip width is correct if it is as indicated in Table 6-201. Otherwise, turn the

pressure adjusting nut.

Figure 6-229

a and c represent points 10 mm from both ends of copy paper.

*Be sure both upper and lower rollers aresufficiently warm before taking measurements.

Table 6-201

a. Measuring the NipWait for 15 min after the copier finishes its warm-up period, and make 20 copies of

A4; then, perform the following to measure the nip:1) Place A3 paper, and select A3.2) Open the copyboard cover.3) Start service mode (*4*); using the >> key, select ‘NIP’ in nip measurement mode.4) Press the * key (user mode).

The machine will pick up paper, and will be ready for measurement.

Reference:The paper will be stopped halfway once; it will then be automatically discharged inabout 10 sec.

5) Measure the nip.

Feeding direction

c

aA

3 si

ze Center of copy paper

b



6-33

Caution:

Dimensions

b

| a – c |

Measurements*

7.3 ± 0.5 mm

0.5 mm or less

16. Adjusting the Fixing ClutchIf you have replaced any of its associated parts, adjust the fixing clutch by turning the

set screw e so that the gap between the 41T gear q and the control ring w is 0.1 to0.3 mm (equivalent of four sheets of 64 g/m2 plain paper).

Figure 6-230

qw

e



6-34

17. Removing the Sub Thermistor (TH2)1) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit from the copier.2) Remove the screw w, and remove the fixing assembly upper cover q; then, remove

the screw r, and remove the harness cover e.

Figure 6-231

3) Remove the screw y, and remove the sub thermistor unit t.

Figure 6-232

The sub thermistor cannot be replaced in the field. Replace it as part of the subthermistor unit t shown in Figure 6-232.

y t

t

q

e

w

r



6-35

Caution:

B. Delivery Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 6-233

2. Removing the Delivery Upper Guide (fixing/delivery assembly)1) Open the front door, and slide the fixing/feeding unit to the front and out of the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover.3) Remove the mounting screw q, and pull out the pin w; then, remove the delivery

upper guide e.

Figure 6-234

qwe

Delivery upper guide (fixing/delivery assembly)



6-36

3. Removing the Fixing/Feeding Assembly Locking Assembly1) Slide the fixing/feeding assembly unit to the front and out of the copier.2) Remove the two mounting screws q and E-ring w; then, disconnect the connector

e, and remove the fixing/feeding locking assembly r.

Figure 6-235

4. Removing the External Delivery Roller1) Slide the fixing/feeding assembly unit to the front and out of the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the delivery roller guide w.

Figure 6-236

q qw

q

w

e

r



6-37

4) Remove the fixing/feeding assembly locking assembly.5) Remove the two E-rings e, gear r, torque limiter t, and bushing y at the front.6) Remove the E-ring u and the bushing i at the rear, and remove the external

delivery roller o.


Figure 6-237a (rear)

u

i

e e

rt

yo



6-38

5. Removing the External Delivery Paper Sensor and the Internal Delivery PaperSensor

1) Remove the external delivery roller.2) Remove the two mounting screws q; then, remove the external delivery sensor

assembly and the internal delivery sensor assembly w.

Figure 6-238

6. Removing the Fixing Assembly Outlet Paper Sensor Assembly1) Slide the fixing/feeding unit to the front; then, remove the front over and the fixing

assembly upper unit. (See p. 6-23.)2) Remove the fixing assembly lower separation claw assembly. (See p. 6-31.)3) Remove the mounting screw q, and slide the fixing assembly outlet paper sensor

assembly w to the right; then, disconnect the connector e (J108), and remove thesensor.

Figure 6-239

qwe

q

w



6-39

7. Removing the Internal Delivery Assembly Roller1) Open the front door, and slide the fixing/feeding unit to the front and out of the copier.2) Remove the fixing/feeding assembly front cover.3) Remove the fixing assembly upper unit. (See p. 6-23.)4) Remove the fixing assembly lower separation claw assembly. (See p. 6-31.)5) Remove the E-ring q, gear w, and parallel pin e at the front.6) Remove the E-ring r and the bushing t.

Figure 6-240

7) Remove the E-ring y and the gear u at the rear.8) Remove the E-ring i and the bushing o.

Figure 6-241

9) Remove the fixing assembly outlet paper sensor assembly. (See p. 6-39.)10) Remove the internal delivery roller.

y u

i o

q

we

r t



6-40


CHAPTER 7

EXTERNALS/AUXILIARY MECHANISMS

I. CONTROL PANEL .............................7-1A. Outline ...........................................7-1B. Operation.......................................7-1

II. FANS ..................................................7-6III. POWER SUPPLY ...............................7-9

A. Outline of Power Supply................7-9B. Power Supply Circuit .....................7-10C. Date/Time Display Power Supply..7-12

IV. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......7-13A. External Covers.............................7-14B. Control Panel.................................7-22C. Door Switch Assembly ..................7-28D. Fan Unit .........................................7-30E. Removing the Counter Assembly..7-33F. Main Motor Assembly....................7-34G. Fixing/Waste Toner Drive

Assembly .......................................7-35

H. Main Drive Assembly (drum/developing) ....................................7-38

I. Vertical Path Drive Assembly ........7-40J. Pick-Up Drive Assembly................7-42K. Duplexing Drive (1) Assembly.......7-44L. Lifter Drive Assembly ....................7-46M. Cassette Pick-Up Drive

Assembly .......................................7-48N. Attaching the Drive Belt.................7-50O. DC Controller PCB ........................7-51P. DC Power Supply Assembly .........7-52Q. High-Voltage Transformer

Assembly .......................................7-53R. Power Supply Inlet Assembly........7-54

This chapter shows the copier's external parts, and explains the principles used for the copier'svarious control mechanisms in view of the functions of electrical and mechanical units and in relation totheir timing of operation. It also shows how these units may be disassembled/assembled and adjusted.

I. CONTROL PANEL

A. Outline

The machine’s control panel consists of the control panel controller PCB, 320 × 240-dot liquid crystal display panel unit, transparent touch panel, and key switch panel, andit has the following functions:q Data communicationw LCD processinge LCD contrast automatic and manual adjustmentr Touch switch inputt Key switch input

B. Operation

1. Data CommunicationThe control panel controller PCB communicates with the copier’s image processor

PCB through an interface unit to exchange data in serial mode.The communication is controlled by the microprocessor on the control panel

controller PCB.

Figure 7-101

LCD panel Input key, VR911, display LED

Control panel controller PCB

DC controller PCB

Displaymemory

LCD controller

Interfaceunit



7-1

2. LCD ProcessingThe microprocessor on the DC controller PCB sends commands to the LCD

controller according to instructions from its programs. In response, the LCD controllerinterprets and executes the commands. The LCD controller also turns on and off variousinstructions according to programs.

The LCD controller also serves to write display text codes into display RAM asnecessary; the display RAM data is then sent to the display panel in response to thetiming signals generated by the LCD controller.



7-2

Figure 7-102

LCD controller

PCB

Displaymemory

CPU

Row driver

Row driver

Row driver

Columndriver

Columndriver

Columndriver

Columndriver

LCD panel

Key control panel LED display

Touch panel

Control panel controller PCB

DC controller PCB



7-3

3. Automatic Control of LCD ContrastThe control panel controller PCB is equipped with a mechanism capable of

automatically adjusting the LCD contrast according to changes in temperature.A thermistor (TH911) is mounted on the control panel controller PCB to monitor the

temperature inside the control panel unit. The changes in the resistance of the thermistorcaused by changes in temperature are used to vary the voltage supplied to the LCDassembly to maintain a specific contrast of the LCD display at all times.

The LCD contrast remains constant free of the influence of ambient temperatureonce it is set by the contrast adjusting knob on the control panel.

Figure 7-103

If the temperature around the control panel rises, the resistance of the thermistor willlower, thereby increasing the voltage (Vo) supplied to the LCD unit.

If the temperature around the control panel lowers, on the other hand, the resistanceof the thermistor rises, thereby decreasing the voltage (Vo) supplied to the LCD unit.

OV

-24V

+5V

DC/DCConverter

LCD unit

Thermistor(TH911)

VR911

Vo

Vo: Voltage supplied to LCD unit



7-4

4. Touch Switch InputsThe keys on the touch panel and the control panel controller PCB are connected as

shown in Figure 7-102. The touch switch panel consists of a sheet of glass having a transparent conducting

membrane and a sheet of film with spacers in between; it shows a pattern consisting of15 rows and 20 columns.

When its surface is pressed with a finger, contact between the glass and the filmcauses electrical continuity, thereby connecting a pair of electrodes so that thecorresponding X/Y coordinates are obtained as in the case of a common key matrix.

In other words, the correspondence between key scan signals from the control panelcontroller circuit and the input signals to the control panel controller circuit enables thecontrol panel controller PCB to identify which key has been pressed.

Figure 7-104

Electrode

Electrode Spacer

Glass sheet

Film



7-5

II. FANS

The machine is equipped with six fans used to exhaust ozone, draw stray toner, andcool the inside.

Table 7-201 shows the function of each fan and the filter used and the orientation ofthe fan, while Table 7-203 shows when each fan turns on.

Figure 7-201

FM8

FM5FM7

FM6

FM3

FM2



7-6

Table 7-201

The following fans are controlled to two different speeds: full rotation and halfrotation. As shown in Figure 7-202, each circuit is switched between +24 and +12Vvoltages by the CPU on the DC controller PCB.

• Exhaust fan (FM2)• Feeding fan (FM6)• Cleaner fan (FM7)• Scanner cooling fan (FM8)When the FMFLL signal from the CPU goes ‘1’, +24 V will be supplied so that the fan

rotates at full speed; when the FMHLF signal goes ‘1’, on the other hand, +12 V will besupplied so that the fan rotates at half speed.

Figure 7-202

FM

CPU

FMFLL

FMHLF

+24v+12v

DC controller PCB

Fan



7-7

Notation

FM2

FM3

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

Name

Exhaust fan

Fixing assemblyheat exhaustfan

Developing fan

Feeding fan

Cleaner fan

Scanner coolingfan

Orientation

Blowing

Drawing

Drawing

Drawing

Drawing

Blowing

Filter

Ozone

Air, dust-proofing

Function

Discharges exhaust from each fanto the outside of the machine.

Prevents increases in temperatureinside the machine caused by thefixing heater. Exhausts silicone oilvapors.

Draws toner astray near thedeveloping assembly.

Keeps copy paper close to thefeeding belt.

Prevents increases in temperatureinside the machine.

Cooling the scanner, cooling theprimary charging assembly.



7-8

Pow

er s

witc

h O

N

Dev

elop

ing

fan

(FM

5)

Sca

nner

coo

ling

fan

(FM

8)

Fix

ing

heat

exh

aust

fan

(FM

3)

Exh

aust

fan

(FM

2)

Cle

aner

fan

(FM

7)

Fee

ding

fan

(FM

6)

WM

UP

INT

RC

NT

RLS

TR

WM

UPR

ST

BY

INT

RC

NT

RA

ER

SCFW

SC

RV

SC

FW

SC

RV

LST

RS

TB

Y

15 m

in

10 m

in10

min

Cop

y S

tart

key

ON

Pow

er s

witc

h O

FF

: P

ower

sw

itch

: H

alf-

spee

d ro

tatio

n

Fig

ure

7-20

3 S

eque

nce

of O

pera

tions

III. POWER SUPPLY

A. Outline of Power Supply

Figure 7-301 is a block diagram showing the distribution of each power supplies.

Figure 7-301

CB1

LF1 Drum heaterDrum heater control PCB

AC driver PCB

J303-1

-2

-3

M1

M2

M3

38VU

38VU

38VU

J305-1

-3

-5

-7

J311-5

HVT

24VU

24VR

5VR

12VU

RMT

24VR

24VH

MSW5

J304-2

-4

24VA2

24VA1

J308-1

-3

J309-1

-3

-5

24VA2

24VA1

38VU

J305-5

J305-7

J308-3

J308-5

5VR

12VU

24VA1

38VU

SW2

SW1SW3

J302-1 -3

J301-1

-3

-5

(a)

NO

(b)

NC

SW1 : Power switchSW2 : Front door switchSW3 : Drum heater switchSW4 : High-voltage multifeeder

door switch

DC power supply PCB

38 VU power supply circuit

24 VU power supply circuit

24 VR power supply circuit

24 VH power supply circuit

5 VR power supply circuit

12 VU powersupply circuit

24 VA1 power supply circuit

24 VA2 power supply circuit

RL401

Fixing heater

Scanning lampLamp regulator

Pick-up motorcontrol PCB

Pick-up motor control PCB

Scanner motorcontrol PCB

DC controllerPCB

Sorter

Sidepaperdeck

RDF



7-9

B. Power Supply Circuit

The machine’s DC power supply provides DC outputs: 38 VU, 24 VU, 24 VR, 24 VA1,24 VA2, 24 VH, 12 VU, and 5 VR.

The AC power supply consists of (a) an AC direct input line without a switch, (b) aninput line by way of a power supply switch SW1, (c) an input line by way of power switchSW1 and door switch SW2, providing the DC power supply with DC AC power throughthree channels.

When the power switch SW1 is turned on, each power supply circuit is provided withAC power to generate a DC output; the 5VR, 12VU, and 24VA1 power supply circuits arecontrolled so that the input lines are switched by the remote signal (RMT) from the DCcontroller PCB.

When the power switch SW1 is turned on, each power supply circuit is provided withpower through the line which leads through the power switch SW1 (line b), therebyturning on the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB; thereafter, the microprocessoron the DC controller PCB causes the remote signal RMT to go ‘1’ turning on the relayRL401 so that the AC input line will switch to the AC direct input line (a).

The 38VU, 24VU, 24VR, 24VA2, and 24VH circuits turn off when the power switchSW1 is turned off; other DC power circuits, however, remain on to continue to supply theDC controller PCB with DC power, thereby keeping the fans rotating for a specific periodof time (about 15 min); thereafter, the DC controller PCB causes the remote signal RMTto go ‘0’ to cut off the AC circuits, thereby automatically shutting off the AC inputs to theDC power supply circuits.

Check to make sure that the power plug is disconnected always before working onthe DC controller, as for replacement.



7-10

Caution:

Reference:The DC voltage tolerances are as follows:• +38VU +10%, –7%• +24VU +10%, –7%• +24VR ±2%• +24VA1 +10%, –20%• +24VA2 +10%, –7%• +24VH +10%, –7%• +5VR ±4%• +12VU +10%, –7%

However, the above assume that the AC input inaccuracy is ±10%.

Figure 7-302

Fan ON

Power plugconnected

Power switch ON

Power switch OFF

Power plug disconnected

15 minRemote signal (RTM)

38VU output timing

24VU output timing

24VR output timing

24VA1 output timing

24VA2 output timing

5VR output timing

12VU output timing

24VU1 output timing

24VU2 output timing



7-11

The power supply PCB is equipped with a fuse on its AC power input side and anovercurrent protection circuit in its DC circuit.

If an overcurrent flows because of a short circuit in the line or the like, the protectioncircuit turns on to turn off the output of the power supply unit. In such a case, disconnectthe copier's power plug, and remove the cause of activation before turning on the power.

The protection circuit may be reset by keeping the AC power supply of the powersupply unit off for about 30 sec before turning on the AC power supply.

If an overcurrent flows in the output of the power supply unit, the protection circuitwill normally turn on before the AC input fuse melts. Keep in mind that repeatedlyturning on and off the AC power supply of the power supply unit with a short circuitin the output of the power supply unit can melt the fuse of the AC input.

C. Date/Time Display Power Supply

The DC controller PCB is equipped with a lithium battery to back up the data whenthe power plug is disconnected.

The lithium battery is designed to last for about five years with the power plugdisconnected.

The date/time indication stops when its life ends, and the indication starts once againwhen the power plug is connected.

The lithium battery cannot be re-charged, requiring replacement (available as aservice part, which will last for five years starting at the point of use—it will not dischargeunless connected by its terminals).

Keep in mid that the back-up data will be lost when the battery comes to the end ofits life—enter the appropriate data after replacement.

Replace the lithium battery only with the one listed in the Parts Catalog.Use of another battery may present a risk of fire or explosion.The battery may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if mistreated.Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of it in fire. Keep the battery out of reachof children and discard any used battery promptly.



7-12

Caution:

Caution:!

IV. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY









!



7-13

A. External Covers

q Front door t Lower right cover (1)w Multifeeder door y Rear cover (4)e Upper right door (4) u Upper left cover (5)r Lower right door (2) i Lower left cover (7)

Figure 7-401

q Inside upper cover (2) r Power switch assembly cover (3)w Fixing/feeding assembly front cover (3) t Hopper covere Connector cover (1)

Figure 7-402

q

w

e

r

t

w

e

t

q

r

uy

i



7-14

Remove the covers as needed when cleaning, inspecting, or repairing the inside ofthe machine as follows; those covers that may be detached by merely removing theirmounting screws on their own are omitted from the discussions:

1. Removing the Front Door1) Open the front door, and remove the mounting screw w of the stopper tape q; then,

remove the two stoppers e.

Figure 7-403

2) Pull out the pin r.

Figure 7-404

r

q

w

e



7-15

3) Pull out the front door t by lifting it at an angle.

Figure 7-405

2. Removing the Inside Upper Cover1) Open the front door, and shift the fixing/feeding assembly lever; then, slide out the

fixing/feeding unit.2) Remove the three mounting screw q, and remove the inside upper cover w.

Figure 7-406

w

q

t



7-16

3. Removing the Fixing/Feeding Unit Front Cover1) Open the front door, and slide out the fixing/feeding unit.2) Remove the screw q of the releasing lever; then shift and remove the releasing

lever w while pushing the rear of the releasing lever locking shaft (closer to theinside of the fixing/feeding assembly).

3) Remove the mounting screw e, and remove the fixing knob r.4) Remove the three mounting screws t, and remove the fixing/feeding assembly front

cover y.

Figure 7-407

4. Removing the Rear Cover1) Remove the nine mounting screws q, and remove the rear cover w.

Figure 7-408

q q

q

w

q

q

qw

er

t

t

t

y



7-17

5. Sliding Out the Hopper Assembly1) Open the front door, and open the hopper cover q. Remove the three mounting

screws e; then, remove the three mounting screws w, and connector cover.Disconnect the connector, and slide out the hopper r to the front and turn it.

Figure 7-409

Check to make sure that the connector is connected before installing the hopperassembly.

6. Removing the Process Unit1) Open the front door.2) Remove the developing assembly. (See p. 4-60.)3) Remove the hopper assembly. (See p. 4-66.)4) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly, and place the drum protection sheet on the

registration roller assembly.5) Disconnect the four connectors q, and remove the two mounting screws w.

Figure 7-410

q

w w

qw er



7-18

Caution:

6) Insert the drum rotating tool e into the cut r in the drum shaft. Fix the drum inposition so that the drum will not rotate counterclockwise, and insert a screwdriverinto the center hole t of the drum rotating tool, and remove the drum fixing screw.

If you rotate the drum counterclockwise, the cleaning blade will be displaced inrelation to the drum, causing cleaning faults. Be sure to fix the drum in place beforeremoving the drum fixing screw.

Reference:If you merely want to release the hopper assembly without removing it, open themultifeeder door and the upper right door to allow for space in the front.

Figure 7-411

t

e

r Drum shaft



7-19

Caution:

7) Slide out the process unit y until it stops.

Figure 7-412

8) Hold the process unit as shown, and remove it.

Figure 4-413

Right hand

Left hand

y



7-20

7. Installing the Process UnitInstall the process unit by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in

mind:1) When placing the processing unit, be sure to align it along the guide plates q at the

front and the rear of the left rail.On the right rail side, be sure to place the process unit on the L-shaped stay.

Figure 7-414 (rail side)

2) After inserting the process unit into the copier, match the cut-in of the drum shaft andthe cut-in of the drum using the drum rotating tool e; then, insert the drum fixing toolt, and fit the mounting screw r into the center hole of the drum to fix it in place.

Figure 7-415

er t

q



7-21

B. Control Panel

1. Removing the Control Panel from the Copier1) Remove the mounting screw of the upper left cover and the two stepped screws

(M3x2) of the standard white cover.2) Open the RDF; then, remove the three mounting screws q and the three RDF catch

metal fixings w.

Figure 7-416

3) Remove the three screws e, and remove the upper right cover r.

Figure 7-417

e

r

w wq q



7-22

4) Remove the mounting screw t of the control panel.

Figure 7-418

5) Open the front door; then, remove the three mounting screws y and the connectorcover u, and disconnect the connector, and open the hopper i.

Figure 7-419

Check to make sure that the connector is connected before installing the hopperassembly.

ui y

t



7-23

Caution:

6) Shift the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever o from horizontal to verticalposition, and slide out the fixing/feeding assembly !0.

Figure 7-420

7) Remove the three mounting screws !1, and remove the inside upper cover !2; then,slide in the fixing/feeding assembly.

Figure 7-421

11 12

o

10



7-24

8) Remove the three mounting screws !3; then, remove the control panel, and turn itover.

Take care not to damage the surface of the control panel by the chassis of the copier.

Figure 7-422

9) Disconnect the three connectors (J911, J915, J955).

2. Removing the Control Panel PCB1) Remove the four mounting screws q, and shift the back cover w to the right to

remove.

Figure 7-423

q w

13



7-25

Caution:

3. Removing the Touch Panel1) Remove the five mounting screws q, and remove the center support plate w.

Figure 7-424

2) Remove the three flat cables e (J912, J913, J916) on the control panel CPU PCBl,and disconnect the connector r (J956) of the inverter PCB.

3) Remove the five mounting screws t, and remove the touch panel.

Figure 7-425

e

r t

ty

q

q qw



7-26

4. Removing the Control Panel Controller (CPU) PCB1) Remove the five mounting screws q; then, remove the control panel right support

plate w and the control panel controller (CPU PCB) e.

Figure 7-426

2) Remove the 13 mounting screws r, and remove the numeric keypad t.

Figure 7-427

r

t

q

q

we



7-27

C. Door Switch Assembly

1. Removing the Front Door Switch Assembly1) Open the front door.2) Remove the inside upper cover.3) Remove the control panel.4) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the door switch assembly w.

Figure 7-428

2. Removing the Multifeeder Door Switch Assembly1) Remove the front door, and remove the hopper assembly.2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the power supply switch

assembly cover w.

Figure 7-429

q

w

q w



7-28

3) Remove the three mounting screws e, and remove the multifeeder doorsensor/multifeeder door catch assembly r.

Figure 7-430

4) Remove the sensor from the multifeeder door sensor/multifeeder door catchassembly.

3. Installing the Drum Heater SwitchInstall the switch so that its right side is in ON position.

e

r



7-29

D. Fan Unit

1. Removing the Scanner Cooling Fan1) Open the front door, and remove the inside upper cover. (See p. 7-16.)2) Disconnect the three connectors (J1, J2, J3) of the potential control PCB, and

disconnect the connector w (J921) of the service switch PCB.3) Remove the four mounting screws e, and disconnect the connector r; then,

remove the scanner cooling fan unit t together with the potential control PCB.

Figure 7-431

2. Removing the Exhaust Fan1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove

the exhaust fan e.

Figure 7-432

q

w e

e

ee qw

r t



7-30

3. Removing the Fixing Heat Exhaust Fan1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the three mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then,

remove the fixing heat exhaust fan e.

Figure 7-433

4. Removing the Developing Fan1) Remove the rear cover.2) Disconnect the connector (J301) q of the high-voltage transferor PCB; then, remove

the three mounting screws w, and shift the high-voltage transformer assembly e.

Figure 7-434

q

w

e

q

q

w

e



7-31

3) Remove the two mounting screws r, and disconnect the connector t; then, removethe developing fan y.

Figure 7-435

5. Removing the Cleaner Fan1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the three mounting screws, and shift the high-voltage transformer PCB.3) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove

the developing fan assembly e.

Figure 7-436

q

w e

r

r

t

y



7-32

6. Removing the Feeding Fan1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the three mounting screws, and shift the high-voltage transformer PCB.3) Remove the cleaner fan.4) Remove the two mounting screws q, and disconnect the connector w; then, remove

the feeding fan e.

Figure 7-437

E. Removing the Counter Assembly

1) Open the front door, and remove the inside upper cover; then, remove the mountingscrews from the control panel.

2) Remove the mounting screw q, and disconnect the two connectors w; then, removethe counter assembly e together with the support plate.

Figure 7-438

qw

we

q

we



7-33

F. Main Motor Assembly

1. Removing the Main Motor1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the high-voltage PCB.3) Remove the spring q, and loosen the tension pulley; then, remove the four mounting

screws w, detach the belt from the end of the main motor, and remove the mainmotor e.

Figure 7-439

q w e



7-34

G. Fixing/Waste Toner Drive Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 7-440

2. Removing the Waste Toner Bottle1) Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the lower right cover; then, remove

the waste toner bottle toward the multifeeder.

3. Removing the Fixing/Waste Toner Drive Assembly1) Open the front door, and draw out the process unit, the fixing/feeding unit, and the

holding tray assembly about 10 cm from the copier.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the high-voltage transformer PCB.4) Remove the cleaner fan and the feeding fan.5) Remove the waste toner bottle.



7-35

6) Remove the spring q, and loosen the tension pulley w; then, detach the timing belte.

Figure 7-441

7) Remove the three mounting screws r, and disconnect the holding tray assemblydrawer connector t.

Figure 7-442

8) Remove the mounting screw y of the DC controller PCB, and disconnect the threeconnectors u (J113, J114, J115) and the two relay connectors i.

r t

q

w

e



7-36

Figure 7-443

9) Remove the four mounting screws o, and remove the fixing/waste toner driveassembly !0 together with the waste toner feeding assembly.

Waste toner will start to pour out of the end of the waste toner pipe when thefixing/waste toner drive assembly is removed. Be sure to stop up the end with a ballof paper to prevent it.

Figure 7-444

o o

o

10

y

u

i



7-37

Caution:

H. Main Drive Assembly (drum/developing)

1. Construction

Figure 7-445

2. Removing1) Open the front door, and slide out the process unit, fixing/feeding unit, and holding

tray assembly about 10 cm from the copier.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the high-voltage PCB and the high-voltage transformer assembly.4) Remove the waste toner bottle.5) Remove the cleaner fan, feeding fan, and developing fan.6) Remove the fixing/waste toner drive assembly.



7-38

7) Remove the three mounting screws q, and free the harness guide 1 w.

Figure 7-446

8) Remove the seven mounting screws e, and remove the main drive unit r.

Figure 7-447

e

e

r

q

w



7-39

I. Vertical Path Drive Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 7-448

2. Removing1) Remove the lower right cover.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the waste toner bottle.4) Remove the five mounting screws q, and remove the rear right grip assembly w.

Figure 7-449

q

w

q



7-40

5) Remove the three mounting screws e, and remove the waste toner bottle supportplate r.

Figure 7-450

6) Remove the two mounting screws t, and remove the harness guide 2 y.

Figure 7-451

t

y

e

e

r



7-41

7) Remove the four mounting screws u, and disconnect the two connectors i; then,remove the vertical path drive assembly o.

Figure 7-452

J. Pick-Up Drive Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 7-453

i

o

u

u



7-42

2. Removing1) Open the front door, and slide out the process unit, fixing/feeding unit, and holding

tray assembly about 10 cm from the copier.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the high-voltage transformer PCB and the high-voltage transformer

assembly.4) Remove the waste toner bottle.5) Remove the cleaner fan, feeding fan, and developing fan.6) Remove the fixing/waste toner drive assembly.7) Free the harness guide 1. (See Figure 7-446.)8) Detach the timing belt.9) Remove the two mounting screws q, and remove the deck relay drive assembly w.

Figure 7-454

q

w



7-43

10) Remove the eight mounting screws e, and disconnect the two connectors r; then,remove the pick-up drive assembly.

Figure 7-455

K. Duplexing Drive (1) Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 7-456

e

e

e

e

r



7-44

2. Removing1) Open the front door, and slide out the holding tray assembly about 10 cm from the

copier.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the DC controller PCB.4) Remove the spring q of the tensioner, and detach the timing belt.5) Remove the four mounting screws w, and remove the duplexing drive (1) assembly

e.

Figure 7-457

q

w

we



7-45

L. Lifter Drive Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 7-458

2. Removing1) Open the front door, and slide out the holding tray assembly 10 cm from the copier.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the waste toner bottle.4) Remove the rear right grip assembly.5) Remove the three mounting screws q, and remove the waste toner bottle support

plate w.

Figure 7-459

q

q

w



7-46

6) Disconnect the connector e, and remove the three screws r; then, remove the lifterdrive assembly t.

Figure 7-460

e

r

t



7-47

M.Cassette Pick-Up Drive Assembly

1. Construction

Figure 7-461

2. Removing1) Open the front door, and slide out the holding tray assembly about 10 cm from the

copier.2) Remove the rear cover.3) Remove the waste toner bottle.4) Remove the waste toner bottle support plate.5) Remove the rear right bottle support plate.6) Remove the DC controller PCB, and detach the timing belt.



7-48

7) Remove the two mounting screws q each of the paper width sensor of the cassettes3 and 4; then disconnect the connector w.

Figure 7-462

8) Remove the five mounting screws e, and remove the cassette pick-up driveassembly r.

Figure 7-463

e

e

e

r

q

w



7-49

N. Attaching the Drive Belt

Attach the drive belt on the gears and rollers as shown.

Figure 7-464

Make sure that the holding tray drive belt is on the roller under (inner side) the pick-up drive belt and the pick-up drive belt is on the roller above (outer side) the pick-up drive belt.

Registration feedingdrive belt

Drum drive beltMain motor

Fixing/waste tonerdrive belt

Pick-up motor Holding tray drive belt

Pick-up drive belt



7-50

Caution:

O. DC Controller PCB

1. Removing the DC Controller PCB1) Removing the rear cover.2) Disconnect the connector of the DC controller PCB.3) Remove the five mounting screws q used to fix the mounting plate in place, and

remove the DC controller PCB together with the mounting plate w.

Figure 7-465

The DC controller PCB is equipped with a built-in battery (BAT101). Keep thefollowing in mind, as shorting across its terminals will lead to overheating:

2. Points to Note When Replacing the DC Controller PCB• When sending the DC controller PCB to the workshop or the factory, put it in a

conducting bag intact with its mount. Use a conducting bag whose one side istransparent, and make sure that the face of the PCB shows through.

• After replacement, make necessary settings in service mode and user mode.• Record new service mode settings on the service label attached to the front door.

q

q

w



7-51

Caution:

P. DC Power Supply Assembly

1. Removing the DC Power Supply Assembly1) Remove the upper left cover and the lower left cover.2) Remove the nine mounting screws q, and remove the DC power supply protection

plate w.

Figure 7-466

3) Disconnect the nine connectors (J303, J304, J305, J306, J308, J309, J311, J312,AC relay connector).

4) Remove the two mounting screws e, and remove the DC power supply PCB rtogether with its mount.

Figure 7-467

e e

r

q

w



7-52

Q. High-Voltage Transformer Assembly

1. Removing the High-Voltage Transformer Assembly1) Remove the rear cover.2) Disconnect the four connectors q (J201, J202, J203, J301).3) Remove the three mounting screws w, and remove the PCB e.

Figure 7-468

4) Remove the two fastons r, and disconnect the connector t; then, remove the twomounting screws y, and remove the transformer assembly u.

Figure 7-469

rt

y

y

u

q w

w

e



7-53

R. Power Supply Inlet Assembly

1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the upper left cover and the lower left cover.3) Remove the four mounting screws q.4) Disconnect the four connectors w, and remove the power supply cord mount e.

Figure 7-470

q

qw

e



7-54


CHAPTER 8

PAPER DECK-A1

This chapter explains the basic operation of the Paper Deck-A1 in view of various functions. It alsodiscusses the relationship between the electrical system and the mechanical system, and provides anoutline of the timing at which each part operates.

Note that the Paper Deck-A1 is referred to as “side paper deck” so as to distinguish it from the copier'sfront paper deck.

I. SIDE PAPER DECK ...........................8-1A. Inputs to and Outputs from the

Side Deck Driver ...........................8-1B. Pick-Up ..........................................8-4C. Detection of Paper for the Deck....8-7D. Deck Lifter .....................................8-8E. Opening/Closing the Deck

(compartment) ...............................8-11F. Controlling the Deck Motor............8-13

II. DETECTING JAMS ............................8-17A. Outline ...........................................8-17

III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY......8-19A. External Covers.............................8-20B. Paper Deck....................................8-28C. Drive System .................................8-35D. Feeding System ............................8-44E. Electrical System...........................8-49

I. SIDE PAPER DECK

A. Inputs to and Outputs from the Side Deck Driver

1. Inputs to the Side Deck Driver (1/2)

Figure 8-101a


When the deck lifter is at the upper limit, '1'.(The light-blocking plate is at Q102.)

DLUL

J21-1-2-3

J107-11-10-9

+5VR

Q102

J3A-11-10-9

When the deck lifter is at power supply position, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at Q103.)

DPSP

J20-1-2-3

J109-3-2-1

+5VR

Q103

J8-3-2-1

When the deck is set in the copier, '1'.(The light-blocking plate is at Q104.)

DSET

J14-1-2-3

+5VR

Q104

J4-3-2-1

When the pick-up guide is open, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is not at Q105.)

DPUGO

J15-1-2-3

J108-5-4-3

+5VR

Q105

J3B-9-8-7

When Q106 has detected paper, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at Q106.)

DVPD

J16-1-2-3

+5VR

Q106

J3B-12-11-10

When Q107 has detected copy paper, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at Q107.)

DPPD

J17-1-2-3

J107-3-2-1

J107-8-7-6

J107-14-13-12

+5VR

Q107

J3A-3-2-1

When paper is absent in the deck, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is not at Q108.)

DPE

J19-1-2-3

+5VR

+5VR

Q108

J3A-8-7-6

J3A-14-13-12

When the lifter is at pick-up position, '1'.(When the light-blocking plate is at Q110.)

DLPD

J101-1-2-3

Q110

J108-8-7-6

Deck lifter upper limit sensor

Deck paper supply position sensor

Deck SET sensor

Deck pick-up guide OPEN sensor

Deck vertical path sensor

Deck pick-up sensor

Deck paper OUT sensor

Deck lifter position sensor



8-1

2. Inputs to the Side Deck Driver (2/2)

Figure 8-101b

J11-11

-13

-12

+5VR

+12VU.

+24VU. J9-1

-2

-3

Copier

Deck OPEN switch

Deck OPEN indication

SW100

LED100

J100-1

-2

-3

-4

J4B-4

-3

-2

-1

Deck OPEN detecting switch

SW102J22-1

-2

J4-6

-4

Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch

SW103J102-1

-2

J8-5

-4

OPEN switch PCBDOLON*

DOPD

DLLD

DOPN*

When the LED is ON, '0'.(The LEDs flash while the deck lifter motor is rotating.)

When the deck is open, '1'.(SW102 is not pressed.)

When the deck is at the lower limit, '1'.(When SW103 is not pressed.)

When SW101 is pressed to open the deck, '0'.

NO

NC

0VU

0VR

Power supply

+38VU

+5VR




8-2

3. Outputs from the Side Deck Driver (1/1)

Figure 8-102

M101DMON

DMFG

DMHS

Deck main motor

J2-1

-3

-5

-7

-9

-2

-4

J7-9

-7

-5

-3

-1

-8

-6

+5VR

+38VU

+12VU.

J1-1

-2

J5-1

-2


M102J24-1

-2

J105-1

-2

J108-2

-1

-10

-9

Deck lifter motorJ6-1

-2

See p. 8-13.

See p. 8-15.

Deck vertical path clutch

CL101

24VU

DVPCD* When '0', CL101 goes ON.

J12-1

-2

J3B-6

-5

Deck pick-up clutch

CL102

24VU

DPUCD* When '0', CL102 goes ON.

J13-1

-2

J3B-14

-13

When '0', SL101 goes ON.DPRSD*

24VU

Deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid

SL101J18-1

-2J107-5

-4J3A-5

-4

When '0', SL102 goes ON.DOPSD*

24VU

Deck OPEN solenoid SL102

J111-2-1

J103-2-1



8-3

B. Pick-Up

1. OutlineThe side paper deck (“deck” hereafter) is capable of accommodating 3,500 sheets of

copy paper at once (A4, LTR, B5; 80 g/m2), and picks up copy paper according to thecontrol signal from the copier’s DC controller PCB.

The lifter of the deck is driven by the deck lifter motor (M102), and copy paper is fedusing the drive of the deck main motor (M101).

2. Pick-Up OperationThe copy paper inside the deck is held up by a lifter and kept in place at a specific

position.When the Copy Start key is pressed and the deck pick-up clutch (CL102) turns on,

the drive of the deck main motor (M101) rotates the pick-up roller to pick up copy paper.At this time, the feeding roller and the separation roller serve to make sure that only

one sheet of copy paper is fed; thereafter, the deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid(SL101) turns on as soon as the deck paper sensor (Q107) detects copy paper, therebymoving the pick-up roller to move away from the surface of the copy paper.

The deck vertical path roller starts to rotate when the deck vertical path clutch(CL101) turns on. The copy paper is then sent to the copier’s registration roller and madeto arch (so that it will not move askew).

The registration roller controls the copy paper so that its leading edge matches theleading edge of the image on the photosensitive drum.



8-4

Figure 8-103

DC controller PCB


Q106

Q107

CL101

CL102

M101

SL101

Q105

Dec

k pi

ck-u

p pa

per

dete

ctio

n si

gnal

(DP

PD

)

Dec

k ve

rtic

al p

ath

pape

r de

tect

ion

sign

al(D

VP

D)

Dec

k pi

ck-u

p gu

ide

OP

EN

sig

nal

(DP

UG

O)

Dec

k ve

rtic

al p

ath

clut

ch d

rive

com

man

d(D

VP

CD

*)

Dec

k pi

ck-u

p cl

utch

driv

e co

mm

and

(DP

UC

D*)

Dec

k pi

ck-u

p ro

ller

rele

asin

g so

leno

id

driv

e co

mm

and

(DP

RS

D*)

Dec

k m

ain

mot

or d

rive

com

man

d



8-5

3. Sequence of Operations (deck pick-up)

Figure 8-104

INTR SCFW SCRV SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

Copy Start keyON

Deck main motor (M101)

Deck pick-up clutch (CL102)

Deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid (SL101)

Deck pick-up sensor (Q107)

Deck vertical path sensor (Q106)

Deck vertical path clutch (CL101)



8-6

C. Detection of Paper for the Deck

1. Detecting the Presence/Absence of PaperThe presence/absence of paper inside the deck is checked by the deck paper OUT

sensor (Q108). When the deck runs out of paper, and the paper detecting lever of thepick-up roller assembly leaves the deck paper OUT sensor, the copier’s control panelindicates the Add Paper message.

Figure 8-105a (paper present)

Figure 8-105b (paper absent)

2. Changing the Paper Size for the DeckTo change the paper size for the deck at time of machine installation or to comply

with the user’s request, shift the guide plate inside the deck to suit the copy paper, andenter the paper size in service mode (*5*; ‘SDK_SZ’).

Lifter

Deck paper OUT sensorPaper detecting lever

Deck paper OUT sensorPaper detecting lever

Copy paper

Lifter



8-7

D. Deck Lifter

1. Lifter OperationThe lifter of the deck is connected to the reel by means of a cable, and is driven by

the deck lifter motor (M102). The lifter is moved up and down by switching the directionof the rotation of the motor.

When the deck (compartment) is pushed into the copier, the deck OPEN switch(SW102) is pushed, and the lifter moves up. Then, the lifter stops when the deck lifterposition sensor (Q110) detects the top surface of the copy paper stacked on the lifter.

In consideration of such faults as when the deck fails to stop moving up after thesensor lever has blocked the deck lifter position sensor, a deck lifter upper limit sensor(Q102) is provided to prevent damage to the deck.

The lifter starts to move down when the deck OPEN switch (SW100) is pressed, andstops when it leaves the sensor lever of the deck paper supply position sensor (Q103),i.e., the falling edge of the sensor signal.

When copy paper has been supplied in this position, the lever of the deck papersupply position sensor is pushed, and the lifter moves farther down until the copy papermoves away from the sensor lever.

At this time, the lifter repeats moving down until the deck lifter lower limit switch(SW103) is pressed each time copy paper is supplied (maximum paper supply position).



8-8

Figure 8-106

M102

M101

Deck main motor

Copy paper

Deck pick-up roller

Lifter

Deck lifter motor

Deck OPEN detecting switch

(SW102)

Deck paper supply position sensor

(Q103)


(Q110)

Deck lifter cable

Deck lifter upper limit sensor

(Q102)Deck OPEN

switch (SW100)

Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch

(SW103)

Deck feed roller

Deck separationroller



8-9

2. Detecting the Level of the Stack in the Deck (compartment)The drive of the deck lifter motor (M102) is received by a coupling, and is transmitted

to the rack by means of a drive belt. The rack is equipped with a black belt which movesin conjunction with the movement of the rack within the indicator window in the deck frontcover.

When copy paper starts to run out and the lifter moves up to pick-up position, thearea of the black belt inside the display window increases and the level of copy paper(white area) starts to decrease, indicating the remaining level of copy paper.

Figure 8-107

M102

Black beltRack

Indicator window

Deck lifter motor

Deck front cover

Coupling

Drive beltLifter lowers, and paperlevel (white area) increases.



8-10

E. Opening/Closing the Deck (compartment)

1. Opening/Closing the DeckWhen the deck OPEN switch (SW100) is pressed, the deck lifter motor (M102) starts

to rotate and the lifter inside the deck starts to move down. The deck motor stops whenthe deck paper supply position sensor (Q103) detects the lowering lifter. At the sametime, the deck OPEN solenoid (SL102) turns on to release the locking, and the deck willpush out to the front several centimeters by the work of a spring.

When the deck (compartment) is slid into the copier, the deck OPEN detecting switch(SW102) is pushed, and the lifter moves up to pick-up position.

When the deck lifter motor rotates to open/close the deck, the Deck Open indicator(LED100) on the OPEN switch PCB starts to flash.

Figure 8-108

Deck lifter lower limit detection signal (DLLD)J8-5

J11-3

J2001A-1

Deck lifter motor drive commandJ6-1,2 J11 J2001A

M102

DCController

PCBSidedeckdriverPCB

Deck lifter

Deck lifter upper limit detection signal (DLUL)

Deck OPEN detection signal (DOPD)

Deck OPEN solenoid drive command (DOPSD*)

Deck OPEN signal (DOPN*)

Direction of OPEN

Deck OPEN indicator LED ON signal (DOLON*)

Q102

SW103

SL102

SW102

OPEN switch PCB

SW100

LED100

J100-1

-4

J3B-4

J3B-1

J3A-10

J4-5

J103-1

(compartment)

J11-5

J11-4

J11-6

J10-11

J2001B-6

J2001A-3

J2001A-7

J2001A-2



8-11

2. Sequence of Operations (deck opening/closing)

Figure 8-109

Flashing Flashing

Compartment open

OFF

Deck OPEN switch ON

Deck OPEN indicator (LED100)

Deck lifter motor (M102)

Deck paper supply position sensor (Q103)

Deck OPEN detecting switch (SW102)

Deck OPEN solenoid (SL102)

Deck lifter position sensor(Q110)

Deck lifter DOWN Deck lifter UP

Compartment SET

* *

* : Varies according to the level of the stack.

Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW103)



8-12

F. Controlling the Deck Motor

1. Controlling the Deck Main Motor (M101)The deck main motor is controlled by the copier’s DC controller; Figure 8-110 shows

the circuit used to drive the deck main motor, and the circuit has the following functions:q Turning on and off the deck main motor.w Switching the speed of rotation of the deck main motor.

a. Turning On and Off the MotorWhen the deck main motor drive signal (DMON) from the copier goes ‘1’, the motor

drive circuit turns on to rotate the motor at a specific speed. When the deck main motordrive signal (DMON) goes ‘0’, on the other hand, the motor drive circuit turns off to stopthe motor.

The copier’s DC controller monitors the speed of rotation of the motor in referenceto the deck main motor clock pulse signal (DMFG); if the pulse signal stops for a specificperiod (1.4 sec during initial rotation; 2.8 sec during normal copying), the DC controllerwill indicate ‘E043’ on the copier’s controller.

Figure 8-110

Deck main motor driver PCB

DCcontroller

PCB

SidedeckdriverPCB

Motor drive circuit

Deck main motor

M101

Encoder

-9

-7

J2-5

J7-5

-1

-3-9

Deck main motor drive command (DOMON)

Deck main motor clock pulse signal (DMFG)

J2001

A-11

B-9

SW1

(*)

*Deck main motor high-speed signal (DMHS)

J10-7



8-13

b. Switching the Speed of Rotation of the MotorSo as to accommodate future machines, the side deck driver PCB is equipped with

a DIP switch (SW1) for switching the pick-up feeding speed.When installing the deck to the copier, check to make sure that both bits of the DIP

switch are at ON (deck main motor high-speed signal DMHS=0); otherwise, the wrongpick-up/feeding speed will be selected, causing jams.



8-14

2. Controlling the Deck Lifter Motor (M102)The deck lifter motor control circuit is found on the side deck driver PCB. See Figure

8-111 for its block diagram.The combination circuit within the figure consists of various logic circuits, and the

deck lifter motor is rotated clockwise/counterclockwise based on combinations of thedeck lifter motor drive signal (DLMON*) and the deck lifter UP signal (DLUP*) from thecopier’s DC controller PCB.

If the deck lifter position sensor does not detect the lifter within 50 sec after the decklifter UP signal has been generated, the copier’s service mode (*1*; ‘LIFT’) indicates analarm. If an alarm is noted, remove the cause, and turn off and on the copier to reset.

q Conditions for Moving Up the Lifter• The deck (compartment) is closed, i.e., the deck OPEN detection signal (DOPD) is

‘0’.• The deck lifter upper limit detection signal (DLUL) is ‘0’ and, further, the deck lifter

position detection signal (DLPD) is ‘0’.• The deck lifter motor drive signal (DLMON*) is ‘0’.• The deck lifter UP signal (DLUP*) is ‘0’.As a result, the lifter starts to move up.

w Conditions for Moving Down the Lifter• The deck (compartment) is open, i.e., the deck OPEN detection signal (DOPD) is

‘1’.• The deck lifter lower limit detection signal (DLLD) is ‘0’ and, further, the deck lifter

position detection signal (DLPD) is ‘0’.• The deck lifter motor drive signal (DLMON*) is ‘0’.• The deck lifter UP signal (DLUP*) is ‘1’.As result, the lifter starts to move down.



8-15

Figure 8-111

M102

DC controller PCB

(Q156)CPU

(Q2001)Deckdriver

Combinationcircuit

Motor drive circuit

24VU 24VU 24VU

Deck lifter motor

Q102Deck lifter upper limit sensor

Q103Deck paper supply position sensor

Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch (SW103)

Deck OPEN switch (SW100)


Deck OPEN detecting switch (SW102)


Q110Deck lifter motor drive signal (DLMON*)

Deck lifter UP signal (DLUP*)

Deck paper supply position detection signal (DPSP)

Deck OPEN detection signal (DOPD)

Dec

k lif

ter

mot

or U

P d

rive

sign

al

Dec

k lif

ter

mot

or D

OW

N d

rive

sign

al

Deck OPEN signal (DOPN*)

Deck lifter upper limit detection signal(DLUL)

Deck OPEN detection signal (DLPD)

Deck lifter lower limit detection signal (DLLD)



8-16

II. DETECTING JAMS

A. Outline

The side paper deck is equipped with the two sensors shown in Figure 8-201 usedto check if copy paper is moving correctly.

The copier’s microprocessor reads in the signals from the sensors at such times asprogrammed in advance to identify a jam. When the copier’s microprocessor identifies ajam, it discharges all sheets moving ahead of the jam, and then stops the machine.Thereafter, the DC controller will show instructions on how to remove the jam on thecopier’s jam.

Figure 8-201

Table 8-201

Q106

Q107



8-17

Notation Name Function

Q106 Deck vertical path sensor Delay/stationary jam

Q107 Deck pick-up sensor Delay/stationary

The copier’s microprocessor identifies any of the following conditions as a jam:1. When copy paper is present at any of the sensors at power-on, end of wait-up,

or during standby.

2. Deck Pick-Up/Vertical Path Delay Jam

Figure 8-202

3. Deck Pick-Up/Vertical Path Stationary Jam

Figure 8-203

Copy Start keyON Jam indicator


Jam check


Deck vertical path sensor (Q106)

Deck main motor (M101)

Normal Error

I

I: Varies according to length of paper.

Deck pick-up/vertical path jam check

Copy Start keyON Jam indicator


Deck pick-up clutch (CL102)

Jam check


Deck vertical path sensor (Q106)Deck main motor (M101)

Normal Error



8-18

III. DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY


Be sure to observe the following for disassembly/assembly work:1. Disconnect the power plug for safety before starting disassembly/assembly

work.2. Unless otherwise noted, assemble the parts by reversing the steps used to

disassemble them.3. Identify the screws by type (length, diameter) and location.4. One of the mounting screws of the rear cover is provided with a toothed washer to




!



8-19

A. External Covers

Figure 8-300

q w e r t

y

ui

o

!0

!1



8-20

q Vertical path cover (front)w Vertical path unit covee Vertical path assembly opening/

closing gripr Vertical path cover (rear)t Rear cover

y Upper coveru Right coveri Front covero Compartment opening/closing switch!0 Upper front cover!1 Deck releasing grip

1. Removing the Front Cover1) Detach the deck from the copier, and push down the latch plate w of the

compartment with a finger to open the compartment.

Figure 8-301

2) Loosen the four screws e, and remove the front cover r of the deck toward thefront.

Figure 8-302

e

r

(rear)

q

w



8-21

When installing the front cover to the deck, make sure that the coupling for thepaper level indicator is correctly aligned.

Figure 8-303

Install the front cover so that the gap between the front cover and the upper frontcover is 3 ±1 mm.

Figure 8-303a

3±1mm

Upper front cover

Front cover

Aligned



8-22

Caution:

Caution:

If you inadvertently moved the paper level indicator drive belt behind the front coverafter removing the front cover, or if you have moved the deck lifter, move the decklifter to its lower limit, and move the drive belt by hand until it gives slight resistancein the direction of the arrow (Figure 8-304, increasing the white area) beforeinstalling the front cover. (If the deck is driven while there is a discrepancy betweenthe paper level indicator and the deck lifter, the drive system for the paper levelindicator can become damaged.)

Figure 8-304 (front view)

Indicator window

Deck front cover

Drive beltPaper level (white area) increasing



8-23

Caution:

2. Removing the Vertical Path Cover (rear)1) Remove the deck from the copier; then, remove the six screws q, and remove the

rear cover w.2) Holding the vertical path assembly opening/closing grip, open the deck vertical path

assembly.3) Remove the two screws e, and remove the vertical path cover (rear) r.

Figure 8-305

q

er

q

w

q



8-24

3. Removing the Right Cover1) Detach the deck from the copier, and push down the latch plate w of the

compartment q with a finger to open the compartment q.

Figure 8-306

3) Remove the three screws e, and shift the right cover r in the direction of the arrow(Figure 8-307) to remove.

Figure 8-307

e

r

(rear)

q

w



8-25

4. Removing the Upper Cover1) Remove the vertical path cover (rear). (See p. 8-24.)2) Push down the latch plate w of the compartment q to open the compartment.

Figure 8-308

3) Remove the three screws e, and disconnect the connector r; then, remove theupper front cover t.

Figure 8-309

e r t

(rear)

q

w



8-26

4) Close the deck vertical path assembly, and remove the two screws y; then, movethe upper cover u in the direction of the arrow (Figure 8-310).

Figure 8-310

y u



8-27

B. Paper Deck

1. Removing the Deck from the Copier1) To prevent deformation of the roll support plate q, place a stack of copy paper e

(about 8 cm high) on the floor to serve as the base for the deck w.

Figure 8-350

2) Remove the right cover. (See p. 8-25.)3) As shown, match the hole in the deck lower left stay and the hole in the

compartment, and insert a screwdriver r from inside the compartment to prevent thecompartment from closing.

Figure 8-351

rLower left stay

Compartment left end plate

8 cm

(ap

prox

.)

q

w

ee



8-28

4) Remove the four screws t, and remove the deck y from the deck mount u.

Figure 8-352

5) Holding the deck as shown (Figure 8-353), and place it on the stack of paperprepared in step 1).

Figure 8-353

i

(right side)(left side)t t

y

u



8-29

2. Removing the Compartment1) To prevent deformation of the roll support plate q, place a stack of copy paper e

(about 8 cm high) on the floor to serve as the base for the deck w.

Figure 8-354

2) Detach the deck from the copier, and push down the latch plate t of thecompartment r with a finger to open the compartment.

Figure 8-355

(rear)

r

t

8 cm

(ap

prox

.)

q

w

ee



8-30

3) Remove the screw y and the stopper plate u, and slide out the compartment i tothe front.

Figure 8-356

4) Remove the right cover. (See p. 8-25.)5) Remove the screw o of the harness guide, and disconnect the two connectors !0;

then, remove the three screws each of the compartment rails !1 left and right, andremove the compartment i by lifting it.

6) Place the compartment i on the stack of paper prepared in step 1).

Figure 8-357

o

i

!2

!0

!2

!1

(rear left of compartment)y

u

i



8-31

3. Changing the Deck Paper SizeIf you need to change the paper size for the paper deck to suit the user’s needs,

perform the following:1) Open the compartment of the paper deck, and remove all copy paper.2) If the lifter of the paper deck is up, turn on the copier, and push the sensor lever w

of the paper supply position sensor inside the compartment q so that the lifterlowers to the lower limit.

Figure 8-358

3) Remove the screw e, and fix the trailing edge guide plate r in position to suit thenew paper size.

4) Remove the screw t (1 each), and fix the left/right guide plate y to suit the newpaper size.

Figure 8-359

er t

y

qw



8-32

4. Adjusting the Deck RegistrationIf the left/right registration (standard, 0 ±1.5 mm) must be adjusted, perform the

following:1) Draw out the compartment, and fix the latch plate q of the deck opening solenoid

(SL102) using the two screws w. (At this time, refer to line e on the latch plate.)

Figure 8-360

(rear left of compartment)

q we



8-33

5. Positioning the RollIf the compartment cannot be opened/closed smoothly, requiring adjustment of the

roller position, perform the following:1) Remove the front cover. (See p. 8-21.)2) Slide out the compartment fully, and adjust the four mounting screws r on the roll

support plate e so that the roll q is about 3 mm from the floor w.

Figure 8-361

3 m

(ap

prox

.)

q w

e

r



8-34

C. Drive System

1. Removing the Deck Pick-Up Clutch (CL102)1) Remove the deck pick-up unit. (See p. 8-44.)2) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the E-ring w; then, remove the deck pick-

up clutch e.

Figure 8-400

2. Removing the Deck Vertical Path Clutch (CL101)1) Remove the vertical path cover (rear). (See p. 8-24.)2) Disconnect the connector q, and remove the E-ring w; then, remove the deck

vertical path clutch e.

Figure 8-401

q we

q

e w



8-35

3. Removing the Deck Main Motor (M101)1) Detach the deck from the copier; then, remove the six screws, and remove the rear

cover.2) Disconnect the two connectors q, and remove the four screws w, and remove the

deck main motor e. (At this time, take care not to damage the gear at the end of themotor spindle.)

Figure 8-402

q

w

e



8-36

4. Removing the Deck Lifter Motor (M102)1) Open the compartment of the deck; remove all copy paper, if any.2) Turn on the copier; if the lifter of the deck is up, push the sensor lever q of the paper

supply position inside the compartment with a finger. Stop the lifter w about 7 cmfrom the base of the compartment, and insert a hex wrench r into the hole of thelifter drive shaft e, and fix the lifter drive shaft e temporarily in place to prevent itfrom turning.

Figure 8-403 Figure 8-404

3) Remove the compartment from the deck. (See p. 8-30.)4) Disconnect the two connectors t, and remove the five screws y; then, remove the

deck lifter motor unit u.

Figure 8-405

ty

yu

7cm

(app

rox.

)

w

e r

q w



8-37

5. Removing the Lifter Cable (deck front)1) Open the compartment of the deck; remove all copy paper, if any.2) Remove the screw, and remove the trailing edge guide plate from inside the

compartment.3) Push the sensor lever q of the paper supply sensor inside the compartment with a

finger to lower the lifter until the holes (left-right) in the compartment side plate andthe holes (left/right) in the lifter match; then, insert two screwdrivers (to position thelifter).

Figure 8-406

4) Remove the front cover of the deck. (See p. 8-21.)5) Remove the four screws e, and remove the roll support plate r.

Figure 8-407

e

r

q

w



8-38

6) Remove the coupling shaft t and the E-ring y; then, remove the pulley cover u.7) Remove the two screws i and the cable fixing plate o; then, remove the lifter cable

!0 on the outside.8) Remove the two screws !1 and the cable fixing plate !2; then, remove the lifter cable

!3 on the inside.• To detach the lifter cable !3 on the inside from the pulley !4 on the inside, remove

the two set screws !6 on the pulley !5 on the outside, and remove the pulley inadvance.

Figure 8-408

t

y

u

!6 !0 !3

!1!2!5!4oi



8-39

6. Removing the Lifter Cable (deck rear)1) Open the compartment; remove all copy paper, if any.2) Remove the screw, and remove the rear edge guide plate inside the compartment.3) Push the sensor lever q of the paper supply position sensor inside the compartment

with a finger to lower the lifter until the holes (left/right) in the compartment side plateand the holes in the lifter (left/right) match; then, insert two screwdrivers w. (At thistime, try to keep the top face of the lifter along the line marked on the left side plateof the compartment to facilitate the work.)

Figure 8-409

Line marked q

w



8-40

4) Remove the compartment. (See p. 8-30.)5) Remove the screw e, and remove the sensor plate r; then, remove the screw t,

and remove the harness guide y.6) Disconnect the five connectors u, and remove the five screws i; then, remove the

metal plate o.

Figure 8-410

e

r

t u

u

y

i

i

i

o



8-41

7) Insert a hex wrench !1 in the hole of the lifter drive shaft !0 to keep the shaft fromturning.

If you fail to perform this step, the lifter cable will become slack when the lifter unitis removed.

Figure 8-411

8) Remove the five screws !2, and remove the lifter motor unit !3.

Figure 8-412

!2

!3

!2

!1!0



8-42

Caution:

7. Routing the Lifter Cable1) Check to make sure that the lifter drive shaft and the lifter are held in place with hex

wrenches and screwdrivers. (q an w of Figure 8-413)2) Fix the cable fixing plate in place on the lifter with two screws. (e of Figure 8-413)3) Hook the lifter cable on the pulley. (r of Figure 8-413)4) Hook the ball of the lifter cable on the lifter drive shaft; then, wind it about 1.5 times

along the groove of the pulley. At this time, be sure that the lifter cable is taut untilthe drivers have been lifted until they stop. (t of Figure 8-413)

5) While keeping the spatial relationship, fix the pulley in place to the lifter drive shaftwith two set screws. (y of Figure 8-413)

6) After fixing all pulleys that have been removed to the lifter drive shaft, measure thedistance (height) from the base plate of the compartment to the top face of the lifterto check that the lifter is level.

Figure 8-413

r

r

qw

e

e

t

t

e

y

y

e

(rear)



8-43

D. Feeding System

1. Removing the Deck Pick-Up Unit1) Remove the upper cover. (See p.8-26.)2) Disconnect the two connectors q, and remove the four screws w.3) Remove the deck pick-up unit e.

Figure 8-450

When installing the deck pick-up unit e, be sure to tighten the two screws shownin advance.

Figure 8-451

e

Screws

q w

w

e



8-44

Caution:

2. Removing the Deck Pick-Up Roller1) Remove the deck pick-up unit. (See p. 8-44.)2) Turn over the deck pick-up unit, and remove the resin ring q (1 each); then, remove

the deck pick-up roller w (1 each).

Figure 8-452

3. Orientation of the Deck Pick-Up RollerWhen installing the deck pick-up roller, check to make sure that the makings on the

roller and the side of the collar are as shown in Figure 8-453.

q Deck pick-up roller e Marking (roller)w Collar r Marking (collar)

Figure 8-453


(rear)q w

er

q

w



8-45

4. Removing the Deck Feeding Roller1) Remove the deck pick-up unit. (See p. 8-44.)2) Open the deck vertical path assembly, and turn over the deck pick-up unit.3) Remove the resin ring q, and remove the deck feeding roller w and the drive belt

e toward the front.

Figure 8-454

5. Orientation of the Deck Feeding RollerWhen installing the deck feeding roller q, make sure that the belt pulley w is toward

the front. When installing the feeding roller rubber to the feeding roller shaft, make surethat the marking “5” e faces the rear.

Figure 8-455

wq (front)

e

5

5

qw e



8-46

6. Removing the Deck Separation Roller1) Detach the deck from the copier, and remove the two screws q; then, remove the

separation roller support plate w.2) Remove the joint, and remove the deck separation roller e.

Figure 8-456

The urethane sponge used on the deck separation roller is initially pink andchanges to yellow over time, accelerated by exposure to light (pink to orange, andthen to yellow).The fact is common to all urethane sponge types, and will not affect its physicalperformance. Keep in mind that color difference, if any, does not indicate differentpart types.

Figure 8-456a

e

q

w



8-47

Caution:

7. Adjusting the Deck Separation Roller PressureIf double feeding or separation failure occurs when pick-up is from the side paper

deck, adjust the position of the pressure spring of the deck separation roller• If pick-up failure occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow A.• If double feeding occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow B.

Figure 8-457

8. Positioning the Deck Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (SL101)Before removing the deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid q from the support plate,

try to remember the position of the two fixing screws w on the solenoid with referenceto the scale on the support plate; or, mark the position on the support plate to identify theposition of the solenoid.

Be sure to fix the solenoid in its initial position whenever installing it on its own.

Figure 8-458

qw

A

B



8-48

E. Electrical System

1. Removing the Side Deck Driver PCB1) Detach the deck from the copier; then, remove the six screws, and remove the rear

cover.2) Disconnect the 10 connectors q, and remove the four screws w; then, remove the

deck driver PCB e.

Figure 8-500

2. Removing the OPEN Switch PCB1) Detach the deck from the copier, and push down the latch plate w of the

compartment q with a finger to open the compartment.

Figure 8-501

(rear)

q

w

q

w

e



8-49

2) Remove the three screws e, and disconnect the connector r; then, remove theupper front cover t.

Figure 8-502

3) Remove the two screws y, and remove the OPEN switch PCB u.

Figure 8-503

yu

e r t



8-50


CHAPTER 9

INSTALLATION

I. SELECTING THE SITE......................9-1II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING ........9-4

A. Unpacking......................................9-5B. Installing the Scanner....................9-7C. Installing the Fixing Assembly.......9-8D. Installing the AP Kit and the

Charging Assemblies ....................9-10E. Installing the Copy Tray.................9-16F. Checking the Developing

Assembly .......................................9-18G. Installing the Pick-Up Assembly....9-20H. Supplying Toner.............................9-22I. Connecting the RDF Connector ....9-26

J. Image/Function Checks and User Mode.....................................9-27

III. RELOCATING THE MACHINE...........9-31IV. INSTALLING THE CONTROL

CARD V ..............................................9-32V. INSTALLING THE COPY DATA

CONTROLLER-A1 .............................9-40A. Setting the Board...........................9-40B. Installing to the Copier ..................9-44C. Checking the Operation.................9-46

VI. INSTALLING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II....................9-56A. Installation to the Copier ...............9-56

This chapter introduces requirements for the site of installation, and shows how the copier may beinstalled using step-by-step instructions.

I. SELECTING THE SITE

Make sure of the following when selecting the site of installation; if possible, pay avisit to the user’s before delivery of the machine.1. The site must provide an exclusive power source (rating ±10%), enabling proper

grounding.2. The site must be 7.5° to 32.5°C/45.5° to 90.5°F in temperature and 5% to 85% RH

in humidity. Avoid areas near water faucets, water boiler, humidifier, or refrigerator.3. Avoid areas near a source of fire or subject to dust or ammonia gas; as necessary,

provide curtains to protect against direct rays of the sun.4. Be sure that the room is well ventilated; the amount of ozone generated by the

machine is of a level which is harmless to the health of the people working around it.Some, nevertheless, find the odor not pleasant when working long hours.

5. Be sure that none of the feet of the copier is off the floor. The machine must remainlevel at all times.

6. Keep the machine at least 10 cm/3.9 in away from the wall to allow ample space foroperation.



9-1

Figure 9-101

7. Keep the machine in a well ventilated area of the room, making sure that the exhaustof another machine, if any, will not be drawn into the machine.Do not place the machine near the air inlet of the room.

Figure 9-102

In general, the silicone gas (vapors of the silicone oil of the fixing assembly) fromthe copier soils the corona charging wire, making the life of the wire shorter. (Thisis most conspicuous in a low-humidity environment.)

Exhaust

Wrong 1

50cm/19.7in. min.

60cm/23.6in. min.

50cm/19.7in. min.

10cm/3.9in. min.



9-2

Note:

Figure 9-103

Wrong 2



9-3

Caution:

II. UNPACKING AND INSTALLING

When a piece of metal is brought in from a cold to a warm area, droplets of watertend to form on its surface. This phenomenon is known as condensation, and the use ofa copier subjected to condensation can turn out blank copies.

If you are installing a machine just brought in from a cold place, keep it withoutunpacking for at least one hour so that it becomes used to the room temperature.

A. Keep the following in mind when delivering the machine to the user by way ofstairs:1. Draw out the fixing/feeding unit, holding tray, and copy paper from the

machine, and deliver them separately. (If an RDF is installed, remove it also.)2. To lift the body, do not use the grips on the pick-up/delivery assembly; rather,

keep the hands at four bottom corners of the machine.B. If the environment has a relatively high humidity, image faults can occur,

requiring you to switch on the drum heater to prevent the problem.If the reading of ‘RHUM’ (inside humidity) in service mode (*1*) is 60% or more,turn on the drum heater (right of the switch pressed).

C. Shift up the two (front) adjusters on the bottom of the machine to check to makesure that they are released.Take care not to lose the adjusters. (They can be shaken out while the machineis being moved.)

D. Be sure to work in a group of three. In particular, when removing the pads, oneperson should be at the rear of the machine holding one grip and one at the frontholding one grip while one removes the pads and the base plate on each side.

E. Keep the following in mind when moving the machine:1. The grip to be used in the side (Figure) is kept on the side of the machine.2. Check to make sure it has been inserted fully before holding it and lifting the

machine. (It can slip out if not handled with care.)3. The machine weighs about 210 kg. Be sure to work in a group of four when

lifting it.

(front)

(rear)

Remove the cover.

*To remove, hold down the stopper.



9-4

A. Unpacking



9-5

Work

Unpack the copier, and remove theplastic sheets.

Insert the grip that comes with themachine into the front of the pick-upside.

Be sure to hold the stopper sothat it faces down; otherwise,it can slip off while lifting themachine.

Hold the grips on the pick-up side(front/rear), and lift the machineslightly to remove the two pads.Then, remove the cardboard sheet(base plate).

Hold the grips (front/rear) on thedelivery side, and lift the machineslightly to remove the two pads.Then, remove the cardboard sheets(base plates).

RemarksStep

1

2

3

4

Cardboard sheets (base plate)

Caution:

The machine weighs about 210 kg.



9-6

Work

Shift the two adjusters up (front), andcheck to make sure that they arereleased.

Remove the two slope plates out ofthe skid.

Turn over the slope plates; then,match the pin holes in the skid andthe pin holes in the slope plates, andinsert the pins (1 each).• Hold the grips (front/rear) of the

machine, and move the machinealong the slope plates to the floor.

Open the cardboard box that comeswith the machine, and take out theparts and materials.

Step

5

6

7

8

Remarks

Check to make sure that all attachments arefound in the box.

Adjusters

B. Installing the Scanner



9-7

Work

Remove the packing tape from themachine.

Open the RDF.

Remove the scanner fixing (packingtape). (Keep the fixing in store. Youmay need it when relocating themachine in the future.)

Step

1

2

3

Remarks

Remove the protective tape from the size indexand the protective sheet from the copyboardglass.

C. Installing the Fixing Assembly



9-8

Work

Open the front door.

Shift the fixing assembly releasinglever in the direction of the arrow(counterclockwise) to release thetransfer/separation chargingassembly. Then, slide out the fixingfeeding unit to the front.

Remove the tag and the separationreleasing block from thefixing/feeding assembly.

Be sure to remove any foreignmatter (glue from tape) fromthe feeding belt.

Remove the tag retaining tape, andopen the fixing/delivery assembly.

Step

1

2

3

4

Remarks

Separation claw releasing block

Tag

Fixing/feeding assembly

Releasing lever

Caution:

Fixing/delivery assembly

Tags



9-9

Work

Remove the two fixing assembly nipreleasing screws.

Close the fixing/delivery assembly.

Step

5

6

Remarks

Screw (rear)

Screw (front)

D. Installing the AP Kit and the Charging Assemblies



9-10

Work

Remove the screw from thereleasing lever of the fixing/feedingassembly. While pushing the rear(fixing/feeding assembly inside) ofthe releasing lever locking shaft,shift up the releasing lever toremove the releasing lever. Removethe screw, and remove the fixingknob; then, remove the threescrews, and remove thefixing/feeding assembly cover.

Remove the screw, and remove themetal fixing; then, disconnect theconnector. Holding the front and therear of the transfer/separationcharging assembly, pull theassembly to the front, and then pull itto the upper left to remove.Using alcohol, clean the transfer/separation charging assembly.Install the transfer/separationcharging assembly, connect theconnector.Install the metal fixing.

Be sure to keep the transfer/separation charging assemblyin contact with the transferguide, and take care not todamage the gut wire.Further, be sure that thecharging assembly is fully dry.

Step

1

2

Remarks

w

q

Metal fixing

Screw Connector

Fixing/feeding assembly cover

Releasing lever locking shaft (rear)

Fixing knob Screw

Screws ScrewScrewReleasing

lever

Caution:



9-11

Work

Install the fixing/feeding assemblyfront cover with three screws. Installthe fixing knob and the releasinglever; then, lock the lever in place(lever to the left).Slide the fixing/feeding assemblyinto the machine.

Open the multifeeder door and theupper right door, and remove thescrew from the door tape (doorstopper) of the front door (so that thefront door will not close the hopperwhen the hopper is opened.)

Remove the tag tape from thehopper assembly.

Open the hopper cover, and removethe three screws and the connectorcover.

Disconnect the connector, andrelease the hopper assembly.

Slide out the hopper assembly to thefront, and turn it 90° to the front right.

Step

3

4

5

6

7

8

Remarks

Hopper assembly Screw Hopper

cover

Screws

Connector cover



9-12

Work

Disconnect the connector, andloosen the screw; then, move thecharging assembly metal fixing inthe direction of the arrow (upperright), and fix it in place with a screw.Remove the primary chargingassembly.Using alcohol, clean the primarycharging assembly.

Disconnect the connector, andremove the screw. Then, slide outthe pre-transfer charging assembly.Using alcohol, clean the pre-transfercharging assembly.

Disconnect the four connectors, andremove the two screws. (You willremove the drum fixing screw in step12.)

Free the harness from the edgesaddle.

Connectors

ScrewScrewDrum fixing

screw

Screw Cleaner screw retainer

Connector

ScrewPrimary charging assembly

Connector

Caution:

Step

9

10

11

Remarks



9-13

Work

Insert the drum rotating tool into thecut-in of the drum shaft. While holdingthe rotating tool so as to prevent thedrum from rotating counterclockwise,remove the drum fixing screw and thedrum fixing (cut-in member).

1. If you let the drum to rotate coun-terclockwise, the cleaning bladewill not be in contact with thedrum correctly, causing cleaning faults. To prevent such faults, be sure to hold the drum in place before removing the drum fixingscrew.

2. Do not expose the photosensitivedrum to light for longer than 30min.

3. Do not ever expose the photo-sensitive drum to direct rays of the sun.

4. Whenever placing the photosen-sitive drum or the process unit outside the machine, be sure to cover it with six or more sheets ofcopy paper to protect it against light.

Slide out the fixing/feeding assemblywhile paying attention to the hopper.Place the drum protection sheet thatcomes with the machine to protectthe rubber roller of the registrationroller assembly and the drum.

Slide out the process unit to the front,and insert the drum rotating tool thatcomes with the machine in-to thefront of the drum shaft; while rotatingthe drum clockwise, check to makesure that the drum is free of damage.

Step

12

13

14

Remarks

Cut-inDrum shaft

Rotating tool

Caution:



9-14

Work

Slide the process unit into themachine; then, using the drumrotating tool, match the cut-in of thedrum shaft and the cut-in of thedrum. Thereafter, insert the drumfixing (cut-in member) to hold thedrum in place with the drum rotatingtool, and insert the screw in the toolto fix it in place.

Remove the drum protection sheetfrom the fixing/feeding assembly,and slide the fixing/feeding assemblyinto the machine.

Fix the process unit in place with twomounting screws, and connect thefour connectors.Slide the primary charging assemblyand the pre-transfer chargingassembly; then, fix them in place.Put the harness in the edge saddle.

Install the process unit front cover;then, close the hopper, and connectthe connector of the hopper.Install the connector covers (3screws), and close the front door.

Step

15

16

17

18

Remarks

1. Check to make sure that each chargingassembly is fully dry.

2. When inserting the pre-transfer chargingassembly, keep it in parallel to the processunit so as to avoid damage to the surfaceof the roller electrode.

3. Check to make sure that the one-way armof the pre-transfer assembly is securely onthe eccentric cam.

Cut-in

Screw

Rotating tool

Cut-in memberDrum shaft

Drum shaft cut-ins

Caution:



9-15

Work

Remove the two screws, andremove the cover from the lower rearright of the copier.You will be using the drum protectionsheet when servicing the processunit; remove dirt, if any, keep ittogether with the drum rotating toolnear the waste toner case (behindthe machine).(Keep the drum rotating tool in thehole of the grip found above thewaste toner case together with thetoner case cap.)

Do not roll the drum protectionsheet.

Install the lower rear right cover ofthe machine.

Step

19

20

Remarks

Waste toner case

Drum tool

Drum protection sheet

Caution:

E. Installing the Copy Tray

1. Replacing the Delivery GearIf you are not installing a stapler sorter or a sorter to the machine (i.e., if you will be

using the copy tray), you must replace the delivery gear with the gear (black) for the copytray.

If you are installing a stapler sorter or a sorter, on the other hand, be sure to checkthat the gear is positioned as shown in illustration 1 of the table, and skip the steps thatfollow.



9-16

Work

Open the front door, and slide outthe fixing/feeding assembly; then,remove the fixing knob, releasinglever, and fixing feeding cover.Remove the E-ring, and remove thedelivery gear (white) from themachine.

Replace the gear with the deliverygear (attached to the copy tray), andinstall the E-ring.

Be sure that the groove on thefemale side of the new gear andthe male side of the torque limiterare engaged.

Step

1

2

Remarks

Torque limiter E-ring

White gear (for sorter)

Torque limiter E-ring

Black gear (for tray)

Caution:

2. Replacing the Delivery Roller Leaf SpringWhen removing the stapler sorter or the sorter from the machine (i.e., to use the copy

tray), you must replace the two leaf springs of the delivery roller with leaf springs (weakerspring pressure) identified with a blue label.

When installing a stapler sorter or a sorter to the machine, check to find out if the twoleaf springs at the center are stronger than the two leaf springs on the sides; if so, do notperform the steps that follow.



9-17

Work

Remove the two screws, and removethe cover from the fixing/deliveryassembly.

Remove the screw, and remove thetwo leaf springs (w/ rolls) at the center;then, separate the leaf springs and theroll.

Fit the roll to the leaf spring that comeswith the machine, and install the leafspring to the fixing/delivery assembly.

Install the cover to the fixing/deliveryassembly (2 screws), and slide in thefixing/delivery assembly into themachine, and close the front door.

Step

1

2

3

4

Remarks

Screw

Screw

Screw

Screw

F. Checking the Developing Assembly



9-18

Work

Open the multifeeder tray.Open the multifeeder door, andremove the screw from the doortape.

Remove the screw, and slide thedeveloping assembly locking unit inthe direction of the arrow (rear) toremove.

Take the developing assembly out ofthe shipping box. Check the surfaceof the cylinder for scratches whileturning the developing cylinder gearby hand.

Holding the center (grip pocket) ofthe developing assembly, install it tothe machine.Connect the connector.

When installing the developingassembly, insert it from above sothat the developing cylinder willnot come into contact with themetal plate of the developingassembly mount.

Step

1

2

3

4

Remarks

Screw

Screw

Connector

Caution:



9-19

Work

Insert the developing assemblylocking unit from the right side (rear);when, it is horizontal, insert it to theleft side (front).Fix the developing assembly lockingunit with a screw.

Install the door tape of themultifeeder door with a screw.

Step

5

6

Remarks

Screw

G. Installing the Pick-Up Assembly

For the 4-cassette type, skip steps 3, 4, 5, 6,7, and 8.



9-20

Work

Open the multifeeder; then, holdingthe grip of the multifeeder, open themultifeeder door. Shift the lever inthe direction of the arrow, andremove the pick-up roller pressurereleasing spacer.

Slide the right deck/cassette halfwayout, and open the upper right coverand the lower right cover; then,remove the pick-up roller pressurereleasing spacer of the right deck(cassettes 3 and 4).(The illustration shows the paperdeck type.)

Reference:If the cassette is set, the spaceris locked in place and makesremoval difficult.

Step

1

2

Remarks

Spacer

Lever

Spacer

Spacers



9-21

Work

Slide out the right deck until it stops,and remove the right/left stopper up.

Lift the right deck off the machineand onto the floor.

Slide out the left deck halfway, andremove the pressure releasingspacer from the right deck side.

Push in the left deck.

Insert the right deck into themachine, and install the left/rightstopper.

Push in the right deck/cassette, andclose the upper right cover, lowerright cover, and multifeeder.

Step

3

4

5

6

7

8

Remarks

Stopper

Spacer

H. Supplying Toner



9-22

Work

Check to find out the orientation(left/right) of the toner bottle mouth.

Shake the toner bottle ten or moretimes vigorously.

Open the hopper cover, and fit theboss on the tip of the toner bottle in thegroove of the toner supply mouth.• The toner supply mouth and the

toner bottle lock into position.

Step

1

2

3

Remarks

Left Right

q w



9-23

Work

Holding the shutter (black) of themachine on the right side of the tonersupply mouth of the hopper, pull it tothe right.Keep pulling until the shutter stops.

Pull the shutter on the toner bottleside to the right.

Toner starts to fall from the tonerbottle to the hopper; tap lightly on thebottom of the toner bottle until alltoner has fallen.

Step

4

5

6

Remarks



9-24

Step

7

8

9

Remarks

Marking

Work

Holding the shutter of the tonerbottle, push it to the left until it stops.

Holding the shutter on the machine,push it to the left until it stops.

Push the shutter on the machine untilit is at ns indicated on the hopperassembly.• The toner bottle gets unlocked.



9-25

Work

Pull the toner bottle in the left upwarddirection, and remove it upward.

Close the hopper cover.

Step

10

11

Remarks

I. Connecting the RDF Connector



9-26

Work

Remove the face plate of the RDFconnector.

Insert the RDF connector (male) tothe connector (female) of themachine.

Step

1

2

Remarks

J. Image/Operation Checks and User Mode



9-27

Work

Connect the power plug to the poweroutlet, and insert the door switchactuator into the door switchassembly of the front door.

Slide out the holding tray and theholding tray feeding assembly, andcheck to make sure that the parts arenot damaged or soiled with foreignmatter.

Slide out the paper deck and thecassette to the front, and remove thepacking materials.

Set the side guide plate of eachcassette to the hole identified bymarking A (STMT-R).Then, remove the face sheet from thebacking paper, and attach it inreference to the front edge of the holeidentified by marking A while makingsure that the holes identified bymarkings D, F, H, K, and L are fullycovered.• Be sure that the entire sheet is in

firm contact.• Do not cover the hole identified by

marking A.

Do not perform this step if the useris using Inch-configured paper.

Turn on the power.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

Remarks

Be sure to remove all packing materials beforeturning on the power.

• Adjust the contrast of the control panel usingthe image contrast key for better viewing.(Advise the user how to use the key.)

• Check that the Add Paper indicator turns on.• Enter a number (keypad) to check that the

copy count display is correct. (Press theClear key thereafter.)

Caution:

AB

C

EGI

J

M

D

FH

K

L

Face sheet



9-28

Work

Adjust the size guide plate to suit theneeds of the user, and place copypaper in the cassette and the paperdeck.

Attach the appropriate stickers to thepaper size plate of the paper deckand the cassettes.

Slide the cassette and the paperdeck into the machine.

Insert the copy tray to the copier.

When the wait period ends, startservice mode. (Press the serviceswitch with a clip through the hole inthe inside upper left cover.)

Select ‘TONER-S’ (*4*), and pressthe user mode key *.

↓Check that ‘CHECK THEDEVELOPER’ is indicated.

↓After making sure that thedeveloping assembly is installed,press the OK key.

↓Press the user mode key *.

↓Toner is supplied (from hopper todevelop); (about 8 to 10 min).

↓↓

Press the Reset key twice to leaveservice mode.

Step

6

7

8

9

10

Remarks

• Close the front door so that the inside is freeof light.

• The mode lasts about 10 min (max.) tosupply toner from the hopper to thedeveloping assembly.

• Do NOT turn off the power while themachine is operating.



9-29

Work

Perform the following while toner isbeing supplied.

1. Remove the screw used to keepthe center of the right cover inplace, and install the original trayto the machine (right) with twostepped screws. (You will not beusing the removed screw.)

2. Attach the mode memory sheet tothe cover of the toner supplymouth.

Reference:If you find installing the originaltray difficult, loosen the twomounting screws and start over.

Attach the Manual Feed Instructionslabel to the manual feed tray of theRDF.

When the toner supply operation hasended, place the Test Sheet on thecopyboard, make copies, and checkthe copy images.At times, toner can fall from the drumseparation claws, soiling the initialten or so copies. (This phenomenonwill disappear as copies are made.)Check to make sure that pick-upfrom each source is normal.

Make two-sided/overlay copies.

Step

11

12

13

14

Remarks

• Check to make sure that no abnormal soundis heard.

• Check images of copies made at eachdefault ratio.

• Check to make sure that as many copies asset are made.

• If there is a difference in density between leftand right, adjust the height of the rear of theprimary charging wire to correct.

• Check to make sure that copying operation isnormal.

• Check to make sure that abnormal noise isnot heard.

• Check to make sure that paper feeding in theholding tray assembly is normal.

Label

Stepped screws

Original tray



9-30

Remarks

For service mode (*5*), see p. 11-246.

Step

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

Work

Set appropriate settings for thestandard mode to suit the needs ofthe user in user mode and servicemode (*5*). (Press the Reset keytwice to end service mode.)

Remove the door switch actuator, andinstall the door tape (door stopper);then, close the front door.

Clean up the area around themachine.

Move the machine to the site ofinstallation, and adjust the twoadjusters.

As necessary, turn ON the drumheater switch (by pushing it on theright side) to suit the environment.

Store away the grip after removing itfrom the front of the pick-up sideunder the grip of the rear of the pick-up side.Install the four covers (3 large, 1small) of the grip assembly.

As necessary, install the accessories(sorter, etc.) according to theirrespective Installation Procedure.

Fill out the Service Sheet.

III. RELOCATING THE MACHINE

If you must relocate the machine after installation by truck or other means oftransportation, perform the following steps:

A. Observe the following if you are using stairs when moving the machine into or outof the user’s:

1. Be sure to remove the fixing/feeding unit assembly, holding tray, and copy paper;and ship them separately from the machine. (If an RDF is installed, be sure todetach it also.)

2. When lifting the machine, do not use the grips on the pick-up assembly/deliveryassembly; rather, support it at the four corners of its bottom.

B. Check to make sure that the two adjusters (front) on the bottom of the machine arefacing up and released. The adjusters can slip out; take care not to lose them.

C. When moving the machine in and out of the site of installation, be sure to removethe Paper Deck-A1 (accessory).



9-31

Work

Make a copy in Direct.

Remove all copy paper from theleft/right paper deck and each cassette.

Turn off the power switch, anddisconnect the power plug from thepower outlet.

Fix the No. 2 mirror mount in place withthe locking plate from the left coverside.

Remove the developing assembly.

Tape the following in place so that theywill not be shaken out of place duringtransport: transfer charging assembly,fixing/feeding unit assembly releasinglever, holding tray assembly, andholding tray feeding assembly.

Tape the following in place: front door,hopper cover, each cassette, left/rightpaper deck cover, and machine rightdoor (upper/lower).

Place A3 copy paper on the copyboardglass, and tape the copyboard cover orthe RDF in place.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Checks

Check to make surethat the lens is withinlens hood.

Check to make surethat the No. 2 mirrormount will not move.

Ship the developingassembly separately.

Remarks

Caution:

IV. INSTALLING THE CONTROL CARD V

1) Open the RDF, and remove the three mounting screws q and three metal fixings w(catch for RDF).

Figure 9-401

2) Remove the three screws e at the front of the upper right cover of the machine.

Figure 9-402

e

w wq q



9-32

3) Remove the screw r from the control panel.

Figure 9-403

4) Open the front door, and open the hopper cover. Remove the three screws t andthe connector cover y; then, disconnect the connector and slide out the hopperassembly u to the front and rotate it.

Figure 9-404

5) Shift the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever i from vertical to horizontalposition, and slide out the fixing/feeding assembly o.

Figure 9-405

o

i

u t y

r



9-33

6) Remove the three screws !0, and remove the inside upper cover !1; then, slide inthe fixing/feeding assembly.

Figure 9-406

7) Remove the three screws !2; then, remove the control panel, and turn it over.

Take care not to damage the surface of the control panel by the chassis of themachine.

Figure 9-407

!2

!0 !1



9-34

Caution:

8) Remove the self-tapping screws !3, and shift the control panel PCB cover !4 about5 mm to the right to remove.

Figure 9-408

9) Remove the control card inlet face plate !5.

Figure 9-409

!5

!3!4!3



9-35

10) Remove the screw !6 from the face plate.

Figure 9-410

11) Place the sheet !7 over the hole in the control panel (display hole of the control card).

Figure 9-411

!7

!6



9-36

12) Remove the protective sheet from the display of the control card.13) Fix the control card in place with four screws !8. At this time, insert a card into the

control card, and fix the control card in place where the card can be slid in and outsmoothly.

Figure 9-412

Further, check to make sure that the connector !9 for the printer is centered over thehole.

Figure 9-413

!9

!8



9-37

14) Install the grounding wire @0 of the control card as shown in Figure 9-414.

Figure 9-414

15) Disconnect the shorting connector @1 shown in Figure 9-415.

Figure 9-415

16) Connect the 4P connector of the machine and the 4P connector of the control card.

Be sure to lead the harness through the harness retainer so that it will not come intocontact with the scanner cable or the drive pulley.

@1

@0



9-38

Caution:

17) Remove the protective sheet from the control panel plate of the control card.18) Install the control panel plate @2 of the control card to the control panel of the

machine.

Figure 9-416

19) Install the control panel to the machine.20) Install the hopper and the cover to the machine.

When installing the hopper assembly, check to make sure that the connector isconnected.

21) Turn on the machine, and check the operation of the control card.

@2



9-39

Caution:

V. INSTALLING THE COPY DATA CONTROLLER-A1

The Copy Data Controller-A1 is not available in certain sales areas.

A. Setting the Board

1) Remove the two screws, and remove the top cover.

Fig. 9-501

2) Set the DIP switch (SW1, SW5) on the Copy Data Controller-A1 according to theneeds of the user.

2-1) Set the DIP switch (SW1-4) according to the type of copier.2-2) If control by group is desired, set the DIP switch (SW5-2) according to the control

paper size.• To control AB-configuration paper (A3, A4, B4, B5), shift it to OFF.• To control inch-configuration paper (11 × 17, LTR, LGL, STMT), shift it to ON.

Screw ScrewTop cover



9-40

Note:

Set the DIP switch (SW5-4) to OFF if the user intends to use Control Card V or onlyuse remote control by the Copy Data Controller-A1, i.e., if the user wants no morethan such functions as ID input, control by paper size, control by toner color, controlby copying mode, and control by paper type.

Table 9-501



9-41

Note:

SW1

SW5

Bit

1~3

4

5

6

1

2

3

4

5, 6

Position

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

Description

Selects normal operation.

Selects IPC communication.

Selects serial communication.

Selects the use of a central controldevice.

Selects normal operation or remotecontrol using commercially availablemodems.

RAM clear.


For factory use.


Selects control of inch-configured(11 × 17, LTR, LGL, STMT) paper.

Selects AB-configured (A3, A4, B4,B5) paper.

Selects service mode operation.


Selects group control.

De-selects group control.

Reserved.

Remarks

If this model.

If existing machine.

Requires a Copy Data InterfaceBoard-B1.

Requires a commercially availablemodem and a Copy Data InterfaceBoard-B1 if remote control using com-mercially available modems is desired.

To select a size other than those onthe left, use service mode. See 10)under “C. Checking Operation.”

See Note.

2-3) If the user does not want control by group, set the DIP switch (SW5-4) to OFF.If you are connecting a Copy Data Interface Board-B1, Remote Diagnostic Unit-A1,or Copy Data Interface Board-A1, see A. “Setting the Board” in the appropriateInstallation Procedure.

Fig. 9-502

3) Set the jumper connectors (JA1, JA2, JB1, JB2) on the Copy Data Controller-A1according to the specifications of the user.

Fig. 9-503

a. If you are connecting a Remote Diagnostic Unit-A1 or a Copy Data InterfaceBoard-B1, i.e., if a Power Supply-A1 is necessary,

Fig. 9-504

JB1JB2

16 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

LED6LED5LED4

LED3LED2LED1

SW2

SW3

JB2

JB1

JA1

JA2

EP

RO

M

SR

AM

CPUIPCJC9

JC6JC5

JC8

J5

JB1JB2

JA2

JA1

16

16 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

LED6LED5LED4

LED3LED2LED1

SW2

SW3

JB2

JB1

JA1

JA2

EP

RO

M

SR

AM

CPUIPCJC9

JC6JC5

JC8

J5

16

SW116 16

SW5



9-42

b. If you are not connecting a Remote Diagnostic Unit-A1 or a Copy Data InterfaceBoard-B1, i.e., if a Power Supply-A1 is not necessary,

Fig. 9-505

4) If the user will be using a card reader, connect the card reader relay cable to theCopy Data Controller-A1 J4 (9p).

Fig. 9-506

J4

Card Reader-A1 relay cable

JA2

JA1



9-43

B. Installing to the Copier

Keep the following in mind when installing the Copy Data Controller-A1 to the copier:1. Observe the laws and regulations of the country.2. Make sure that the copier has been properly installed before starting the work.3. Make sure that the copier’s power plug is disconnected during the work.4. Identify the type of screw (length, diameter), and be sure to use the correct screws.5. Prepare settings data in advance on a computer at the service station. (This applies

only when remote control is desired.)

1) Remove the four screws, and remove the face plate from the copier’s rear cover.

Fig. 9-507

2) Remove the relay postheader from the cable, and connect it directly to the connectoron the copier’s DC controller PCB.

Fig. 9-508

Connector forCard Reader-A1(9P)

Connector forCopy DataController-A1(8P)

Screws

Face plate

Screws



9-44

3) If the user will be using a Card Reader-A1, connect the Card Reader-A1 relay cabledirectly to the connector on the copier’s DC controller PCB.(At this time, disconnect the relay postheader from the relay cable.)

4) Fix the Copy Data Controller-A1 to the copier’s rear cover with four screws.

Fig. 9-509

Screws Screws



9-45

C. Checking the Operation

1) If you are not connecting a Remote Diagnostic Unit-A1 or a Copy Data iterfaceBoard-B1, i.e., if a Power Supply-A1 is not necessary, go to step 4).Connect the connector of the Power Supply-A1 to the connector of the Copy DataController-A1 as indicated.(Make sure that the cord is in the groove of the board.)

Fig. 9-510

2) Connect the Power Supply-A1 to the power plug, and check that LED1 on the CopyData Controller-A1 turns on.

Fig. 9-511

16 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

LED6LED5LED4

LED3LED2LED1

SW2

SW3

JB2

JB1

JA1

JA2

EP

RO

M

SR

AM

CPUIPCJC9

JC6JC5

JC8

J5

16

LED1

Connector on the Copy Data Controller-A1

Connector of the Power Supply-A1Groove of the board



9-46

3) Turn on the copier’s main switch, and check that LED2 on the Copy Data Controller-A1 flashes.Make one copy, and check that LED3 flashes during copying operation.

Fig. 9-512

4) If you are connecting a Remote Diagnostic Unit-A1 or a Copy Data Interface Board-B1, i.e., if a Power Supply-A1 is necessary, go to step 5).Turn on the copier’s main switch, and check that LED1 turns on and LED2 flasheson the Copy Data Controller-A1.Make one copy, and check that LED3 flashes during copying operation.

Fig. 9-513

16 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

LED6LED5LED4

LED3LED2LED1

SW2

SW3

JB2

JB1

JA1

JA2

EP

RO

M

SR

AM

CPUIPCJC9

JC6JC5

JC8

J5

16

LED1 LED3LED2

16 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

LED6LED5LED4

LED3LED2LED1

SW2

SW3

JB2

JB1

JA1

JA2

EP

RO

M

SR

AM

CPUIPCJC9

JC6JC5

JC8

J5

16

LED2 LED3



9-47

5) If the user does not want group control, go to step 11).Set the mode of input, type of control, and paper size according to the needs of theuser.Shift the DIP switch (SW5-3) on the Copy Data Controller-A1 to ON.

Fig. 9-514

6) Connect the connector of the Ten Key Pad-A1 to the connector (J3) on the CopyData Controller-A1.

Fig. 9-515

Connector (J3)Connector of the Ten Key Pad-A1

16 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

LED6LED5LED4

LED3LED2LED1

SW2

SW3

JB2

JB1

JA1

JA2E

PR

OM

SR

AM

CPUIPCJC9

JC6JC5

JC8

J5

16

SW5-3

16



9-48

7) Push the switch (SW2) on the Copy Data Controller-A1 to enter service mode.

Fig. 9-516

8) Set the mode of input as follows:8-1) Select card or ID input using the Ten Key Pad-A1. (The default is card input.)8-2) To change from card input to ID input, operate as follows:

To change from ID to card* input, go to step 8-4).*You will need a Card Reader-A1.

appears.8-3) Press the w key, and press the key.

The display will show .

8-4) To change to card input, press the q key when the display shows ; then,press the key.

The display will show .

Table 9-502

1. Setting the DIP switch (SW5-4) on the Copy Data Controller-A1 to OFF de-selects group control, and the display will be as follows:

Fig. 9-517

2. If ID mode has been stored in the copier’s memory, you can use that ID for theCopy Data Controller-A1. To do so, operate as follows:

MANAGE=CARD

ENTMANAGE=ID

MANAGE=ID

ENT

MANAGE=CARD

SW2

16 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

LED6LED5LED4

LED3LED2LED1

SW2

SW3

JB2

JB1

JA1

JA2

EP

RO

M

SR

AM

CPUIPCJC9

JC6JC5

JC8

J5

16

Note:



9-49

Code12

Input modeCard

ID

nn Using an Existing IDa) Set the DIP switch (SW1) on the Copy Data Controller-A1 as indicated:

Table 9-503

b) Press the switch (SW4) on the Copy Data Controller-A1.LED5 turns on for a brief moment when the data has been drawn successfully.

c) LED5 flashes if the attempt to draw the data fails. Press the switch (SW4) onceagain, and check that LED5 turns on.The copier cannot deliver paper while data is being drawn.

d) Set the DIP switch (SW1) on the Copy Data Controller-A1 as follows. (LED5 shouldgo out.)

Table 9-504

Fig. 9-518

LED5

SW4SW1-1SW1-2SW1-3

16 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

LED6LED5LED4

LED3LED2LED1

SW2

SW3

JB2

JB1

JA1

JA2

16

LED1 LED2 LED3



9-50

SW1 Bit1, 2

3

PositionONOFF

SW1 Bit

1, 2, 3Position

OFF

9) Set the mode of control.9-1) Set the mode of control using the Ten Key Pad-A1.

Press / until the display shows .9-2) According to the type of copier and the specifications of the user, set the mode of

control as indicated. (The default is ‘1’.)

Table 9-505

9-3) To select ‘3’ as the mode of control, for example,1. The display shows . Since the default is ‘1’, change it to ‘3’.

Press the e key.A press on the C key clears the input, allowing you to try again.A press on the key cancels the operation.

2. When the display shows , press the key.3. The display shows , and the cursor flashes for a while to indicate that

formatting is under way. Then, the cursor stops flashing to indicate that ‘3’ hasbeen selected for the mode of control.

Setting a new mode of control clears such data as the unit price, upper limit, counterreading, and ID. Set them again as necessary.

FORMAT=3_

ENTFORMAT=3_

ESC

FORMAT=1

FORMAT=1



9-51

Note:

No.

1

2

3

No. of groups

3000

1000

1000

Paper size

5

5

5

Mode

—

one-sided/two-sided

mono/2-color/full-color

10) Set the control paper size.10-1) Use the DIP switch on the Copy Data Controller-A1 and the Ten Key Pad-A1 to

change the control paper size. If the default represents the control paper size, goto step 11).

10-2) Use the / key to scan through the paper sizes. (However, control paper size5 ‘OTH’ cannot be changed and is not displayed.)

EX1:1. The display shows .2. Press the key.3. The display shows .4. Press the key.5. The display shows .6. Press the key.7. The display shows .8. Press the key.9. The display shows .10.Press the key.11.The display shows .

EX2:To change B4 to LGL, control paper size 3,

1. Press the / key so that the display shows .2. Look for the value that represents LGL from Table 9-506 (conversion table);

press q e.3. The display shows .4. Press the key.5. The display shows to indicate the end of the operation.

1. You cannot make multiple paper size codes for SIZE1 through 4.2. The counter reading remains intact after changing the size.

SIZE 3 =LGL

ENT

SIZE 3 =13

SIZE 3 =B4

SIZE 2 =A4

SIZE 3 =B4

SIZE 4 =B5

SIZE 3 =B4

SIZE 2 =A4

SIZE 1 =A3



9-52

Note:

10-3) Study the conversion table for paper codes.

Table 9-506

11) Check the DIP switch settings.11-1) Shift the DIP switch (SW5-3) on the Copy Data Controller-A1 to OFF.11-2) Press the / key so that the display shows the setting of the DIP switch (SW1,

SW5) on the Copy Data Controller-A1.

Fig. 9-519

11-3) Check the setting of the DIP switch (SW1, SW5) on the Copy Data Controller-A1.(See Table 9-501.)If the setting is not correct, go to 3. “Setting the Board,” and make the correctsetting.If you are setting the Copy Data Interface Board-B1, Copy Data Interface Board-A1, or the Remote Diagnostic Unit-A1 as an option, see the appropriate InstallationProcedure.

S1 S5

SW1-1SW1-2

SW1-3SW1-4

SW1-5SW1-6

SW5-1SW5-2

SW5-3SW5-4

SW5-5SW5-6

: indicates that the bit is at ON.

: indicates that the bit is at OFF.



9-53

Size

B5

FOOLS

A4

B4

A3

U SMALL (US)

STMT

U LARGE (UL)

LTR

LGL

LDR (11 × 7)

A5

AFOOLS

A6

FOLIO

COMPUTER

U SMALL 2

Code

1

2

3

5

7

8

9

10

11

13

15

17

18

19

21

23

24

Code

25

26

27

28

29

33

35

36

37

38

39

41

48

49

50

51

52

Size

postcard (Jpn)

U LARGE 2

GLTR

10 × 8GLGL

KLGL

OFFICIO

EOFFICIO

AOFFICIO

BOFFICIO

ALT R

ALGL

12 × 18

B3

A2

17 × 22

18 × 24

11-4) Press the switch (SW2).

Fig. 9-520

11-5) Check that the Ten Key Pad-A1 shows the following, and disconnect the Ten KeyPad-A1.

Fig. 9-521

12) Attach the Switch Settings label to the top cover, and record the setting of eachswitch on the label.

Fig. 9-522

Screw

Top cover

Screw

Switch Settings label

SW2

16 SW4

SW1 ON SW5 ON

LED6LED5LED4

LED3LED2LED1

SW2

SW3

JB2

JB1

JA1

JA2

EP

RO

M

SR

AM

CPUIPCJC9

JC6JC5

JC8

J5

16

SW5-3

16



9-54

13) Fix the top cover with two screws. (At this time, make sure that the cable of the powersupply unit is fixed in place inside the Copy Data Controller-A1 and is not trapped bythe top cover.)

14) If you are connecting the Control Card Printer A-1, connect it to the connector (J4)of Copy Data Controller-A1. (As necessary, use a relay cable.)If off-line control is planned, connect it to the RS232C I/F connector of Copy DataController-A1.

Fig. 9-523

15) End the installation after making sure that no cable is outside of the Copy DataController-A1.Put the petty-pull at the lower right of the copier's rear.

Fig. 9-524

16) Hook the cable connected to the Copy Data Controller-A1 on the petty-pull.17) Make sure that no cable is trapped by the casters of the copier or the sorter.

Petty-pull

Copy Data Controller-A1

J4RS232C I/F connector



9-55

VI. INSTALLING THE REMOTE DIAGNOSTIC DEVICE II

The Remote Diagnostic Device II is not available in certain sales areas.

A. Installation to the Copier

Keep the following in mind when installing the RDD to the copier:

1. This accessory is to be installed by a qualified personal.2. Make sure the copier has been properly installed before starting the work.3. Keep the copier’s power cord disconnected during the work.4. Be sure to use the appropriate screws (length, diameter).5. Make sure the computer in the service station has been properly loaded with the

RDD’s settings data.

1) Remove the two screws w to detach the RDD’s top cover q.

Fig. 9-601

w

q w



9-56

Note:

Caution:

2) Connect the Power Supply Unit’s connector t to the RDD’s connector y as shown.

Fig. 9-602

3) Remove the two screws i, and detach the face cover u from the copier’s rearcover.

Fig. 9-603

u

i i

y

t



9-57

4) Connect the RDD’s cable to the connector J128 on the copier’s DC controller PCB.

Fig. 9-604

5) Fix the RDD in place on the copier’s rear cover with four screws !2; use the screwsthat come with the RDD.

Fig. 9-605

!2 !2

Connector(J128)



9-58

6) Remove the slack from the cable between the copier and the RDD; keep the excesscable to the RDD using the harness band !3.

Fig. 9-606

7) Shift bit 4 of the DIP switch 2 !4 to ON so that the communication mode between theRDD and the copier is IPC mode.

Fig. 9-607

8) If the ROM IC6 !5 is mounted on the RDD’s PCB, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 !6to ON; otherwise, shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 to OFF.

1. If the ROM (IC6; !5) is not mounted, you need not mount it.2. If you are mounting or replacing the ROM (IC6; !5) for upgrading the RDD, be

sure to shift bit 7 of the DIP switch 2 !6 to ON.

LED1 LED2 LED32

1

LED5LED6LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4SW3

6

1

BAT1

CN4

1

2

CN3 CN2

12

34

56

78

SW2

!4

!3



9-59

Note:

Fig. 9-608

9) Set the bits of the DIP switch 3 !7 on the RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table.

Fig. 9-609

Table 9-601

LED1 LED2 LED32

1

LED5LED6LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4SW3

6

1

BAT1

CN4

1

2

CN3 CN2

SW2

12

34

56

!7

LED1 LED2 LED32

1

LED5LED6LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4SW3

6

1

BAT1

CN4

1

2

CN3 CN2

12

34

56

78

SW2

15

!6



9-60

SwitchSW3-1SW3-2SW3-3

SW3-4

SW3-5

SW3-6

SettingAII

OFFONON

OFF

ONOFF

–

Description

selects push pulse for RDDcircuit configurationselscts dial pulse for RDD circuitconfigurationsets dial pulse speed to 20 PPSsets dial pulse speed to 10 PPSreserved

10) Fit the Power Supply Unit into the power plug, and check that LED 1 !8 (green) onthe RDD’s PCB comes on.

Fig. 9-610

11) Reset the RDD’s RAM.Set the bits on the DIP switch 2 !9 on the RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table, andpress the push switch 4 @0 to make sure that LED5 @1 (red) comes on.

Table 9-602

Fig. 9-611

LED1 LED2 LED32

1

LED5LED6LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4SW3

6

1

BAT1

CN4

1

2

CN3 CN2

12

34

56

78

SW2

20

!9

@1

LED1 LED2 LED32

1

LED5LED6LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4SW3

6

1

BAT1

CN4

1

2

CN3 CN2

SW2

!8



9-61

bits on SW2SW2-1SW2-2SW2-3SW2-4SW2-5SW2-6SW2-7SW2-8

SettingOFFOFFONONOFFOFFSee step 9).OFF

12) After making sure that LED5 @1 (red) has come on, set the bits on the DIP switch 2!9 on the RDD’s PCB as indicated in the table, and press the push switch 4 @0 tomake sure that LED5 @1 (red) goes out, indicating that the RAM has been reset.

Table 9-603

Fig. 9-612

13) Shift bit 6 of the DIP switch 2 @2 on the RDD’s PCB to OFF.

Fig. 9-613

LED1 LED2 LED32

1

LED5LED6LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4SW3

6

1

BAT1

CN4

1

2

CN3 CN2

12

34

56

78

SW2

@2

LED1 LED2 LED32

1

LED5LED6LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4SW3

6

1

BAT1

CN4

1

2

CN3 CN2

12

34

56

78

SW2

20

@1

!9



9-62

bits on SW2SW2-1SW2-2SW2-3SW2-4SW2-5SW2-6SW2-7SW2-8

SettingOFFOFFOFFONOFFONSee step 9).OFF

14) Connect the RDD to the telephone line.If you are connecting the RDD on its own, connect the modular jack cable to theRDD’s connector @3 (LINE).If you will be using the RDD’s extra circuit, connect the existing telephone or faxmachine to the RDD’s connector @4 (TEL), and connect the telephone circuit to theRDD’s connector @3 (LINE).

Fig. 9-614

15) Call up the service station, and request the RDD’s initial settings. (LED 4 @5 (red)starts to flash upon receipt.)

Fig. 9-615

16) Call up the service station to check if the initial settings have been successfullymade; if the attempt has failed, reset the RAM once again starting with step 11)through 13).

You must confirm that the RDD’s settings are correct by calling the service station.

LED1 LED2 LED32

1

LED5LED6LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4SW3

6

1

BAT1

CN4

1

2

CN3 CN2

SW2

@5

LED1 LED2 LED32

1

LED5LED6LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4SW3

6

1

BAT1

CN4

1

2

CN3 CN2

SW2

@4 @3



9-63

Important:

17) Check that you can place a telephone call from the RDD to the computer in theservice station.Press the push switch 4 @0. LED6 @7 (red) should come on; it will go out whentransmission ends successfully, or will start to flash if transmission fails.Retransmission is executed in response to a press on the push switch 4 @0 whileLED6 @6 is flashing.Transmission is canceled in response to a press on the push switch 1 @7 while LED6@6 is flashing.

Fig. 9-616

18) Check that the communications between the RDD and the copier are executednormally.Connect the copier’s power plug, and switch it on to make sure that LED 2 @8(orange) flashes.

Fig. 9-617

LED1 LED2 LED32

1

LED5LED6LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4SW3

6

1

BAT1

CN4

1

2

CN3 CN2

SW2

@8

LED1 LED2 LED32

1

LED5LED6LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4SW3

6

1

BAT1

CN4

1

2

CN3 CN2

SW2

@6

@0

@7



9-64

19) Press the copier’ COPY START key to make sure that LED3 @9 (pink) flashes eachtime a copy is delivered.

Fig. 9-618

20) Attach the Switch setting label #0, to the RDD’s top cover q; then, record the settingof each switch on the label.

Fig. 9-619

21) Fix the RDD’s top cover q in place using two screws w. (Make sure that the PowerUnit’s cable is fixed in place on the cable guide inside the RDD and is not trapped bythe top cover q.)

q

w

w

#0

LED1 LED2 LED32

1

LED5LED6LED4

IC6

SW1

SW4SW3

6

1

BAT1

CN4

1

2

CN3 CN2

SW2

@9



9-65



9-66


CHAPTER 10

MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS ...10-1II. CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES...10-2


III. SCHEDULED SERVICING TABLE ....10-4IV. SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART ...10-6


This chapter provides tables of periodically replaced parts and consumables/durables andscheduled servicing charts.

I. PERIODICALLY REPLACED PARTS

Some parts of the machine must be replaced on a periodical basis to maintain theperformance of the machine at a specific level regardless of the presence/absence ofdamage (when they fail, they will affect the performance to a significant degree).

Schedule the replacement so that it coincide with a scheduled service visit.

as of July 1997

Note: The above values are all estimates and are subject to change based on futuredata.

Table 10-101


CHAPTER 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION

10-1

No.

1

2

Parts name

Primary/pre-transfer/transfer/separation charging wire

Primary charging assembly gridwire

Part number

FY3-0030-000

FY3-0040-000

FY1-0883-000

Q’ty

AR

AR

AR

Life (copies)

250,000

250,000

500,000

Remarks

100V

120/230V

II. CONSUMABLES AND DURABLES

Some parts of the machine may need replacement once or more because of wear ordamage. Use the table as a reference, and replace them as needed.

A. Copier

as of July 1997

Table 10-201a



10-2

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

Parts name

Multifeeder pick-up roller

Multifeeder feeding roller

Multifeeder separation roller

Scanning lamp

Scanning lamp

Cleaner separation claw

Fixing cleaning belt

Delivery upper separation claw

Pick-up roller (paper deck,cassette)

Feeding roller (paper deck, cassette)

Separation roller (paper deck,cassette)

Duplexing pick-up crescent roller

Duplex upper separation belt

Duplexing feeding roller

Primary charging wire cleaner 1

Primary charging cleaner 2

Transfer charging wire cleaner

Separation charging wire cleaner

Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner

Pre-transfer charging assemblyscraperr

Upper fixing roller

Lower fixing roller

Parts number

FF5-1220-000

FF5-1221-000

FB2-7522-000

FB2-7545-000

FH7-3280-000

FH7-3282-000

FB2-6899-000

FA3-8908-000

FC1-0391-030

FF5-1220-000

FF5-1221-000

FB2-7695-000

FB2-7777-000

FC2-1532-000

FA5-5427-000

FC2-1533-000

FF2-3552-000

FF2-3551-000

FF2-3551-000

FF2-3552-000

FF5-3090-000

FF5-3090-000

FA4-1867-000

FB2-7200-000

FB2-7121-000

Q’ty

1

1

2

1

1

1

3

1

6

4

4

8

4

2

8

1

2

2

1

1

2

1

1

1

1

Life (copies)

120,000

120,000

120,000

120,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

500,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

500,000

Remarks

Front

Rear

100V/120V

220V/240V

Rear

Front

Table 10-201b

B. Paper Deck-A1

as of July 1997

* Exercise care during replacement; the pick-up roller of the side paper deck andthe pick-up roller of the machine must be oriented differently.

Table 10-201c

No.

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35



10-3

Parts name

Heat insulating bush (front,rear)

Fixing main thermistor (TH1)

Fixing sub thermistor (TH2)

Pick-up clutch (left deck, cassette)

Pick-up clutch (right deck, cassette 1)

Cleaning blade


Transfer/separation chargingassembly


Fixing thermal switch

Delivery lower separation claw

Developing cylinder

Developing assembly roll

Parts number

FB2-7239-000

FH7-7349-000

FG5-8812-000

FH7-5726-000

FH7-5729-000

FA4-1827-000

FG5-4378-030

FG5-4550-090

FG5-4377-050

FH7-7154-000

FA2-9037-000

FF5-3086-000

FB2-6933-000

Q’ty

2

1

1

3

1

1

1

1

1

1

2

1

2

Life (copies)

500,000

500,000

500,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

1,000,000

Remarks

Simultaneouslyw/ upper fixingroller.

Use both edges;500,000 for each.

No.

1

2

3

Parts name

Side paper deck pick-up roller*

Side paper deck feeding roller

Side paper deck separationroller

Parts number

FF5-1220-000

FF5-1221-000

FB2-7695-000

FB2-7777-000

Q’ty

1

1

2

1

Life (copies)

250,000

250,000

250,000

250,000

Remarks

Front

Rear

III. SCHEDULED SERVICING TABLE

1. As a rule, provide scheduled servicing every 250,000 copies.2. Check the Service Record before setting out on a visit, and take any parts likely

to need replacement.3. If you use alcohol to clean a charging wire, check to make sure it has fully dried

before installing it to the machine.



10-4

Caution:

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Work

Meet the person in charge.

Take notes of the counter reading.

Make test copies.

Clean the charging assemblies:• Charging wire• Grid wire• Shielding plate• Roller electrode

Clean the optical path:• Scanner reflecting plate• Scanner side reflecting plate• Lens• No. 1/2/3/4/5/6 mirror• Dust-proofing glass• Pre-exposure lamp sheet• Standard white plate• Heat absorbing glass

Check the waste toner case.

Checks

Check the generalcondition.

Check the faulty copies.

a. Density of imageb. Dirt on backgroundc. Clarity of charactersd. Leading edge margine. Fixing, registration,

back (for soiling)f. Counter operation

If the waste toner case ishalf full or more, disposeof the toner in a plasticbag; or, replace the wastetoner case.

Remarks

Standard: 4.5 ±1.5mm (Direct)

Dry wipe with lint-free paper; then,clean with alcohol.

Use a blowerbrush; if necessary,use alcohol.

Moist clothDry wipe.



10-5

No.

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

Work

Clean the transfer guide.• Transfer guide plate (upper,

lower)• Transfer/separation charging

guide rail

Check and clean the cleanerassembly:• Magnet roller (check)• Separation claw (clean)• Side scraper (check)

Clean the separation/feedingassembly:• Feeding belt

Clean the fixing/delivery assembly:• Guide• Separation claw (upper/lower)• Cleaning belt (check)

Provide scheduled servicing suitedto the number of copies made.

Clean the copyboard glass.

Make test copies.

Make sample copies.

Put sample copies in order, andtidy up the area around themachine.

Record the most recent counterreading.

Fill out the Service Sheet, andreport to the person in charge.

Checks

If the coating of toner onthe magnet roller is noteven,• Turn the magnet roller

in reverse to removepaper lint or the like.

• Remove the paper lintfrom the side scraperassembly.

Remarks

Remove thephotosensitivedrum from theprocess unit.

After cleaning,install the photo-sensitive drum.

SolventSolvent

Alcohol

IV. SCHEDULED SERVICING CHART

Do not use solvents or oils other than those specified.

A. Copier: Clean : Replace : Oil : Adjust : Inspect

Note 1: Take care not to touch the mirrors or the lenses.



10-6

Caution:

Unit

Opticalpath

Use alco-hol; then,apply oil.

Chargingassembly

Photosensitivedrum

Developingassembly

Part

No. 1/No. 6 mirror

Dust-proofing glass

Heat absorbing glass

Standard white plate

Reflecting shade(scanning lamp)

Scanner rail

Scanner cable

Charging wire (primary,pre-transfer, transfer,separation)

Grid wire (primary)

Shielding plate (eachcharging assembly)

Roller electrode wastetoner case (pre-transfercharging assembly)

Photosensitive rum

Anti-stray toner sheet(primary chargingassembly)

Developing cylinder

Developing roller

Anti-stray toner sheet(developing assembly)

Remarks

Use blower brush; forNo. 5 mirror, usemirror cleaning tool.

Use alcohol; then,apply lubricant.

Check and adjust iffor initial 250,000.

Use solvent.

at instal-lation

every250,000

every500,000

every750,000

every1,000,000

Intervals



10-7

Unit

Cleaner

Fixingassembly

Deliveryassembly

Waste tonercollectionassembly

Externals

Pick-upassembly

Feedingassembly

Holdingtray

Hopper

Part

Blade

Side scraper assembly

Separation claw

Inlet guide

Fixing web

Thermistor

Oil receptacle

Separation claw(upper/lower)

Waste toner

Copyboard glass

Ozone filter

Air filter (scannercooling fan)

Pick-up roller

Feeding roller

Separation roller

Transfer guide/roll

Registration roller(upper/lower)

Feeding belt

Feeding roller

Pick-up roller (crescent)

Upper separation belt

Separation lowerfeeding roller

Toner supply mouth

Toner receptacle

Remarks

*Replace edge.Apply toner.

Remove paper lint.

Take up duringinstallation.

Remove asnecessary.

at instal-lation

every250,000

every500,000

*

(upper)

every750,000

every1,000,000

(lower)

Intervals

B. Paper Deck-A1

: Clean : Replace : Oil : Adjust : Inspect



10-8

Unit

Pick-upassembly

Part

Pick-up roller

Feeding roller

Separation roller

Vertical path, roll

Remarksat instal-lation

every250,000

every500,000

every750,000

every1,000,000

Intervals


CHAPTER 11

TROUBLESHOOTING

I. MAINTENANCE ANDINSPECTION....................................11-3A. Image Adjustment Basic

Procedure....................................11-3B. Points to Note for Scheduled

Servicing......................................11-4II. STANDARDS/ADJUSTMENTS ........11-5

A. Image Adjustment .......................11-5B. Exposure System ........................11-11C. Image Formation System ............11-17D. Pick-Up/Feeding System.............11-24E. Fixing System..............................11-38F. Electrical System.........................11-42

III. IMAGE FAULTS................................11-64A. Initial Checks ...............................11-64B. Sample Image Faults ..................11-68C. Troubleshooting Image Faults.....11-69

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS .............................11-85A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions .....11-85

V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS......................................11-119A. Copy Paper Jams........................11-119B. Feeding Faults.............................11-126

VI. ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OF ELECTRICAL PARTS ................11-127

A. Sensors .......................................11-128B. Switches and Solenoids ..............11-132C. Motors and Fans .........................11-136D. Clutches ......................................11-138E. Lamps, Heaters, and

Photosensors ..............................11-140F. PCBs ...........................................11-142G. Paper Deck-A1 ............................11-144H. Variable Resistors (VR),

Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB..............11-148

VII. SERVICE MODE..............................11-159A. Outline .........................................11-159B. Using Service Mode ....................11-160C. Using Adjustment Mode and

Options Mode..............................11-160D. Display Mode ( ) ...............11-162E. I/O Display Mode ( ) .........11-179F. Adjustment Mode ( ) .........11-215G. Function Mode ( ) .............11-233H. Options Mode ( )...............11-244I. Counter Mode ( ) ..............11-253

VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS ...........................11-259A. Copier..........................................11-259B. RDF-D1 .......................................11-264C. Sorter...........................................11-266

]6]

]5]

]4]

]3]

]2]

]1]

This chapter provides tables of maintenance/inspection, standards/adjustments, and identification ofproblems (image fault/malfunction).


You will find troubleshooting steps organized in tables which are modified versionsof general flow charts. Study the following for an idea of how to consult them.

EX.AC power is absent.

n If you want to find out the cause (possible faulty part), see the column under “Cause.”In the case of “AC power is absent,” the power plug may be disconnected, the coversmay not be closed firmly, or the main power supply is absent.

n If you want to find out the action to take or the steps to correct a specific problem, gothrough the steps in order. Answer YES or NO to the questions under “Checks,” andtake the action indicated accordingly.

Guide to the Troubleshooting Table

Cause

Power plug

Covers

Power supply

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

Checks

Is the power plug connec-ted to the power outlet?

Are the front door and thedelivery cover closedfirmly?

Is the specified voltagepresent at the power outlet?

Is the specified voltagepresent between J1-1 andJ1-2? (J1 is found near thepower cord mount.)

Action

Connect the power plug.

Close the door and thecover.

The problem is not of themachine. Advise the user.

Go to step 6.

n When checking the voltage using a meter, you may come across such instructionsas “Measure the voltage between J109-1 (+) and J109-2 (–) on the DC controllerPCB.” Connect the positive probe of the meter to the terminal marked (+) and thenegative probe to the terminal marked (–).

Is the power plug connected to the

power outlet?


(Checks) (YES/NO) (Action)

NO1

(Steps)

Are the front door and the deliverydoor closed firmly?

Close the door or the cover.

NO2

Is the specifiedvoltage at the power

outlet?

The problem is not of the copier. Advise the user.

NO3

YES

YES

YES

Omitted.



11-2

I. MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTIONA. Image Adjustment Basic Procedure

n Non-AE, Copy Density at 5


Is there adifference in density

between frontand rear?

Is it low (light) at the rear?

Turn the adjusting screw at the rear of the primary charging assembly clockwise, and turn the adjusting screw at the front counterclockwise the same degree (1.5 mm max. each).

Make two to three copies of the Test Sheet.

Check the height of the charging wire.

Turn the adjusting screw at the rear of the primary charging assembly counterclockwise, and turn the adjusting screw at the front clockwise the same degree (1.5 mm max. each).

Turn off and then on the machine, and make a copy.

Note 1: If the difference still exists after turning the screw 1. 5 mm (each; a full turn causes a 0.7mm difference), check the charging assemblies, scanning lamp, and scanner for dirt.

Note 2: When turning the screw counterclockwise, take care so that the wire is not 7.5mm or less in height.

Check the copy paper and the transfer system.

Is the density of gray scale No. 1

too low (light)?

Clean the standard white plate, mirror, lens, dust-roofing glass, scanning lamp, reflecting plate, and heat absorbing glass.

Turn off and then on the machine, and make a copy.

Is 'VDM' 'VDT' ±10 V?

Is 'PLMT' '1'?

Is 'VL1M' 'VL1T'±10 V?

Is 'VL1M" 'VL1T'±10V?

Check the potential control system; if normal, replace the photosensitive drum.

Check the scanning lamp and the potential control system; if normal, replace the photosensitive drum.

Increase the value of 'VDT-SW'.

Turn off and on the machine, and make a copy.

Increase the value of 'LIGHT_5'.

Decrease the value of 'LIGHT_5'.

Is the densityof gray scale No. 10

proper?

Is the densityof gray scale No. 10

too high (dark)?

Execute AE adjustment. (See p. 11-36.)

<Pre-Checks> <Density slope> <Solid black>

NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

* 1 *

* 3 *

* 5 *

Clean the charging wire.

Make a copy.

B. Points to Note for Scheduled Servicing


Cleaning

Parts Tools/chemicals Remarks

Multifeeder tray, pick-up roller, feeding roller

Vertical path roller

Alcohol, lint-free paper


Cleaning

Cleaning


Pre-exposure lamp

Primary charging assembly, transfer/separation charging assembly, pre-transfer charging assembly

Dust-proofing glass


No. 4 through No. 6 mirrors

Roller electrode

Developing assembly mount

Registration roller

Moist cloth (Note)


Lint-free paper

Blower brush or lint-free paper


Cleaning

Dry wiping; then, using lint-free paper moistened with alcohol

Cleaning

Cleaning with blower brush; if necessary, using lint-free paper. For No. 5 mirror, use mirror cleaning tool

Dispose of toner collecting on roller electrode

Cleaning

Cleaning

Note: Make sure no droplets of water remain.

Parts

Copyboard glass

Tools/chemicals Remarks

CleaningAlcohol

Lens

Heat absorbing glass

Standard white plate

Reflecting plate

Blower brush

Lint-free paper

Lint-free paper

Blower brush

Cleaning

Dry wiping

Dry wiping

Cleaning

No. 1 through No. 3 mirrors

Blower brush or lint-free paper

Cleaning with blower brush; if necessary, lint-free paper


Separation claw

Upper roller, lower roller

Feeding assembly

Re-pick up assembly, refreshing roller

Re-pick up assembly, pick-up roller, registration roller

Solvent and lint-free paper

Cleaning oil, lint-free paper

Moist cloth (Note)


Paper guide Solvent, lint-free paper


Cleaning

Cleaning

Cleaning

Cleaning

Cleaning

Cleaning

Anti-stray toner (primary charging assembly)

Cleaning

Anti-stray toner sheet (developing assembly)

Cleaning

• Make thorough checks of the block (front, rear) for melting by leakage, deformation by heat, tears, andyellowing. If any fault is found, replace it.

• Be sure to check and clean the inner side as well as the outer side of the block (front, rear).• Do NOT use a cloth coated with metal powder for cleaning.• Do NOT use a moist cloth for cleaning. Use lint-free paper, and clean. (Be sure that the part is fully dry

before putting it back into the machine.• Try to finish all work (scheduled servicing/maintenance) within a specific period of time.

Caution:

II. STANDARDS/ADJUSTMENTS

A. Image Adjustment

1. Adjusting the Image Leading Edge MarginSelect ‘LE_BLANK’ in service mode ( ).Make adjustments so that the image leading edge margin is 4.5 ±1.5 mm when the

Test Sheet is copied in Direct.(unit: 0.1 mm)

Figure 11-201

2. Adjusting the Image Leading Edge Non-Image Width (registration)Select ‘REGIST’ in service mode ( ).Make adjustments so that the image leading edge margin is 4.5 ±1.5 mm when the

Test Sheet is copied in Direct.(unit: REGIST:0.1 mm)

Figure 11-202

4.5±1.5mm

]3]

4.5±1.5mm

]3]



11-5

3. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration (left/right front deck paper deck, cassette)Make adjustments by moving the horizontal registration adjusting plate of each

left/right paper deck/cassette so that the edge-to-edge distance between the copy imageand the copy paper is 0 ±1.5 mm.

Figure 11-203

a. Left/Right Front Paper Deck

Figure 11-204a

Figure 11-204b

Adjusting plate

Screw

Adjusting plateScrew

0±1.5mm

0246

8

10

(+)(-)



11-6

b. Cassette

Figure 11-205

3-1.Adjusting the Left/Right Registration (paper deck-A1)1) Make a copy of the Test Sheet, and check to make sure that the left/right registration

between copy image and paper deck is 0 ±1.5 mm or less.2) If the left/right registration is not as specified, adjust the position of the latch plate of

the deck opening solenoid by turning the two adjusting screws. (At this time, use thescale on the latch plate as a reference.)

Figure 11-205a (rear left of compartment)

ScrewsLatch plate Scale

Screw

AdjustingPlate



11-7

4. Adjusting the Left/Right Registration (holding tray position; 2nd side of two-sided/overlay copies)Loosen the two screws, and move the guide plate of the holding tray assembly so

that the edge-to-edge distance between the copy image and the copy paper is 0 ±2.0mm in Direct.

Figure 11-206

5. Adjusting the Left/Right MarginMake adjustments so that the image left/right margin is 2.75 ±2.5 mm when the Test

Sheet is copied in Direct.Be sure to adjust the left/right registration before making this adjustment.

a. Front Margin Adjustment (left margin)Select ‘F-BLANK’ in service mode ( ), and change the setting. Increasing the

setting increases the front margin.(unit: 0.1 mm)

b. Adjusting the Rear Margin (right margin)Select ‘R-BLANK’ in service mode ( ), and change the setting. Increasing the

setting increases the rear margin.(unit: 0.1 mm)

]3]

]3]

0±2.0mm

0246

8

10

(+)(-)



11-8

6. Executing AE Automatic Adjustment1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch actuator.2) Push the service mode switch over the cover.3) Select the following in service mode:

AE_ADJ:0 ← (]: START)(0: F5, 1:F9).

4) Place the Test Sheet on the copyboard, and close the copyboard cover.

Figure 11-207

5) Press the user mode key ] once.•The scanning lamp turns on, and auto adjustment is executed.

AE_ADJ: 1 ← (]: START)

Changes to ‘1’.

6) Place a newspaper on the copyboard, and close the copyboard cover.7) Press the user mode key ] once.

•The scanning lamp turns on, and automatic adjustment is executed.

AE_ADJ: 0 ← (]: START)

Changes to ‘0’.8) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

NA-3 Test Sheet

Butted.



11-9



11-10

7. Adjusting the AE SlopeAfter executing AE auto adjustment, make a copy of a newspaper (or a rather dark

original). If the copy is foggy or too light, perform the following:1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch

assembly.2) Press the service mode switch over the cover with a clip.3) Select ‘AE_SLOP’ in service mode ( ).4) Place a newspaper (or a relatively dark original) on the copyboard.5) Change the setting using the numeric keypad, and press the user mode key (]).

q If you decrease the setting in adjustment mode,→Copies of a newspaper will be lighter.

w If you increase the setting in adjustment mode,→Copies of a newspaper will be darker.

Note:You may press the Copy Start key to make copies.

6) Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.

]3]

B. Exposure System

1. Adjusting the Scanner Home PositionAfter making copies, remove the control panel, and check to make sure that the line

in section A on the electrode mount (front) of the No. 1 mirror mount is in section B ofthe hole of the glass support (front).

Otherwise, change the setting of ‘BRAKE_SC’ in service mode ( ) so that theline in section A is within section B.

Figure 11-208

B

No. 1 mirror mount

Electrode (front)

Section A of left of wall

Glass support(front)

Hole

]3]



11-11

2. Routing the Scanner Drive CableRoute the cable as indicated (q through i), and adjust the tension of the cable and

the position of the mirror.

Figure 11-209

Steel ball

Wind eight times.

Fix in place temporaily.

1

3

4

8

5

6

2

7

6

2



11-12

3. Orientation of the Heat Absorbing GlassWhen replacing the heat absorbing glass, make sure that the white paint marking is

toward the rear of the machine.

Figure 11-210

4. Adjusting the Tension of the Scanning Lamp Cable1) Remove the two mounting screws, and remove the left cover.2) Loosen the fixing screw on the tension spring bracket.3) Turn the tension adjusting screw so that the reading is as indicated.

•Turn the tension adjusting screw A so that the reading of the spring gauge is 200±50 g when the center of the scanner cable is pulled about 10 mm.

Figure 11-211

A

A

10 mm

10 mm

(rear)

(front)

Mirr

or m

ount

White paint

(rear)

(front)



11-13

5. Adjusting the Position of the MirrorYou must always adjust the position of the mirror whenever you have installed the

scanner drive cable.1) Move the No. 1 mirror mount and the No. 2/No. 3 mirror to the left.2) Set the mirror positioning tool (front, rear; FY9-3011) as shown.

Figure 11-212

Figure 11-213



11-14

6. Cleaning the Mirror (No. 5 mirror)1) Remove the copyboard glass.2) Remove the lens hood.3) Remove the mirror guide plate.4) Move the lens stage in the direction of Enlarge.5) Remove the screw, and remove the mirror cleaning tool.6) While butting the mirror cleaning tool q against the No. 5 mirror as shown, clean the

mirror by moving the tool in the direction of the arrow.At this time, be sure that your finger or the cleaning tool will not touch the No. 4mirror.

Figure 11-214

7. Routing the Light-Blocking Belt

q Light-blocking belt 1 e Light-blocking belt 3w Light-blocking belt 2 r Light-blocking belt 4

Figure 11-215

q

w

e

r

q



11-15

8. Routing the Lens X Direction Drive BeltFix the lens X direction drive motor q with the mounting screw w where the motor

has lowered on its own weight.

Figure 11-216

9. Adjusting the Position of the Scanner Locking Solenoid (SL1)1) Remove the rear cover.2) Remove the multifeeder assembly. (See Chapter 5.)3) Adjust the stroke of the scanner locking solenoid as indicated.

Figure 11-217

E-ring

Standards (10.5 ±0.5 mm; from bottom of clamp to top of solenoid)

Scanner locking solenoid

Loosen these two screws to adjust.

q

wOwn weight



11-16



11-17

C. Image Formation System

1. Grid Wire of the Primary Charging Assembly1) Loosen the two mounting screws used to fix the left /right shielding plate in place.2) Loosen the three mounting screws used to fix the motor unit in place at the front.

Figure 11-218

3) Loosen the mounting screw, and move the assembly in the direction indicated inFigure 11-219; then, fix it in place temporarily.

Figure 11-219

4) Free a length of charging wire (about 5 cm) from the charging wire reel (0.1mm dia.);then, form a loop at its end (2mm dia.)

Reference:To form a loop, wind the charging wire around a hex key three to four times, andtwist the charging wire.

5) Cut the twisted charging wire (excess) with a nipper.

Screw

Screws

6) Hook the loop on the stud A shown in Figure 11-220.

Figure 11-220

7) After routing the wire for 31 runs, lead it through section B, give it a 1/2 turn, lead itbetween washer and motor unit, wind it once around the mounting screw clockwise,and fix it in place with the mounting screw.

8) Cut the excess charging wire with a nipper.9) Tighten the mounting screw loosened in step 8).

Take care to avoid deformation (slack) of the charging assembly. Try to tighten themounting screw (front) on the shielding plate (left, right) earlier.

Stud A

Screw B



11-18

2. Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire

Table 11-201

Reference:You can adjust the height (position) of the primary, transfer/separation charging wireby turning the screw behind the charging assembly. A full turn changes the positionof the charging wire by about 0.7 mm.



11-19

Charging assembly

Primary

Pre-transfer

Transfer

Separation

Height of charging wire

7.5+1.5 -0mm

7.5+1.5 -0mm

9.5+1.0 -0mm

10.2±0.5mm

A:16.2±0.5mm B:14.9±0.5mm

A B

Tolerance

±1mm

No adjustingmechanism

±2mm

±2mm

3. Adjusting the Position of the Blanking Exposure Lamp1) Place the Test Sheet on the copyboard.2) Select A4 copy paper.3) Make a copy, and check that the left/right registration is correct.4) Make a copy in Direct.5) Check the image, and measure the non-image width shown in Figure 11-221.

Standard

(w/ standard frame erasing)Table 11-202

Figure 11-221

6) If the non-image width is not as specified, turn the adjusting screw to adjust theposition of the blanking exposure lamp assembly.

Figure 11-222

Adjusting screw

A

A

10 mm

10 mm

(rear)

Mirr

or m

ount



11-20

Paper

All sizes

Left/right non-image width (W1)

2.75 ± 2.5mm

4. Position of the Roller Electrode

Figure 11-223

5. Adjusting the Position of the Cleaning Assembly Side Seal

Be sure that the side seal does not protrude inside the cleaner housing.

Figure 11-224

Atta

chm

ent r

efer

ence

Side seal

Roller electrode

Scraper



11-21

6. Cleaning the Cleaner Side ScraperPerform the following steps whenever you have replaced the cleaning blade (every

500,000 copies).1) Remove the cleaning blade.2) Remove the paper lint collecting at the tip of the side scraper (gap A between

magnet roller and toner guide roller) with tweezers.3) Remove the toner coated on the surface of the magnet roller. (Shape copy paper into

the letter U, and scoop up the toner.)

Figure 11-225 (rear)

Figure 11-225a (front)

Toner guide roller

4~8mm

Side scraper (front)Magnet roller

Remove waste toner collecting here.

(front)

30~

40m

m

A

Toner guide roller

4~8mm

Side scraper (rear)

Magnet roller

Remove waste toner collecting here.

(rear)

30~

40m

m

A



11-22

4) Turn the magnet roller clockwise (viewing it from the front).5) When the area cleaned in step 3) has taken on a new coating, repeat steps 3)

through 5).



11-23

D. Pick-Up/Feeding System

1. Orientation of the Cassette/Front Paper Deck Pick-Up RollerInstall the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following in

mind:• The pick-up roller at the front and the one at the rear are not interchangeable.• The collar of the pick-up roller at the front is gold.

When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, make sure that theround marking w on the side of the roller and the round marking e on the collar(gold) face the front of the copier.

Figure 11-226

• The collar of the pick-up roller at the rear is silver. When installing the pick-up rollerr to the pick-up roller, make sure that the round marking t on the collar (silver)faces the rear.

Figure 11-226a

r

t


Collar (silver) Rear

q

we


Collar (gold)Front



11-24

2. Orientation of the Cassette/Front Paper Deck Separation RollerKeep the following in mind when replacing the separation roller.

Figure 11-227

3. Orientation of the Feeding Roller (cassette/front paper deck)When installing the feeding roller assembly q of the cassette/deck pick-up

assembly, be sure that the belt pulley w is toward the front.When installing the feeding roller e to the feeding roller shaft r, be sure that the

marking “5” t faces the front.

Figure 11-228

wq

r

5

5

e

t

Front

Wider groove Narrower groove

(front of copier)

(rear of copier)



11-25

4. Orientation of the Multifeeder Pick-Up Roller4-1Orientation of the Paper Deck-A1 Pick-Up Roller

Install the pick-up roller by reversing the steps used to remove it with the following inmind:• The pick-up roller at the front and the rear are not interchangeable.• The collar of the pick-up roller at the front is silver.

When installing the pick-up roller q to the pick-up assembly, be sure that the roundmarking w on the collar (silver) faces the front.

q Pick-up rollerw Marking (collar)

Figure 11-229

• The collar of the pick-up roller at the rear is gold.When installing the pick-up roller r to the pick-up assembly, make sure that theround marking t on the side of the roller and the round marking y on the collar(gold) face the rear.

r Pick-up rollert Marking (roller)y Marking (collar)

Figure 11-229a

r

ty


Collar (gold)Rear (copier)

q

w


Collar (silver) Front (copier)



11-26

5. Rotation of the Multifeeder Feeding RollerWhen installing the pick-up roller q to the multifeeder pick-up assembly, be sure that

the belt pulley w is toward the rear.When installing the feeding roller e to the feeding roller shaft r, make sure that the

marking “5” t faces the front.

Figure 11-230

5-1Orientation of the Paper Deck-A1 Feeding RollerWhen installing the feeding roller assembly q to the left deck pick-up assembly,

make sure that the belt pulley w is toward the front.When installing the feeding roller e to the feeding roller shaft r, make sure that the

marking “5” t faces the rear.

Figure 11-230a

5

5

wq

r

e

Front

e

wq

r

5

5

e

t

Front



11-27

6. Adjusting the Separation Roller Pressure of the Cassette/Front Paper DeckIf double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up, adjust the position of the

separation roller pressure spring.• If double feeding occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow B.• If pick-up failure occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow A.

q Feeding roller e Locking leverw Separation roller r Pressure spring

Figure 11-231

q

w

e

r

A

B



11-28

7. Adjusting the Separation Roller Pressure of the Holding TrayTurn the separation adjusting roll so that the shaft distance to the separation belt is

32.7 ±0.1 mm.

Figure 11-232

8. Pick-Up/Feeding Roller of the MultifeederIf double feeding or pick-up failure occurs during pick-up, adjust the position of the

pressure spring of the separation roller.• If double feeding occurs, move the spring in the direction of arrow A.• If pick-up failure occurs, move the spring in the direction of B.

Figure 11-233

BA

32.7±0.1mm



11-29

9. Adjusting the Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (cassette)Turn the screw to adjust so that the distance of the bottom edge of the A roller

support plate bushing from the bottom face of the pick-up unit of each holder is 36 ±0.5mm when the plunger of the pick-up roller releasing solenoid is pulled as shown.

Figure 11-234

36±

0.5

mm

A

q



11-30

9-1Adjusting the Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (front paperdeck)Adjust the position of the solenoid so that the left edge of the right solenoid arm 2 is

57.2 ±0.5 mm from the center of the solenoid mount as shown in Figure 11-226.

Figure 11-234a

9-2 Adjusting the Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (paper deck-A1)Before removing the deck pick-up roller releasing solenoid q from the support plate,

remember the position of the two fixing screws w on the solenoid with reference to thescale on the support plate. Or, mark the position of the solenoid on the support plate witha scribe.

If you are installing the solenoid on its own, be sure to fix it in its initial position.

Figure 11-234b

qw

A57.2±0.5mm



11-31

10. Adjusting the Position of the Pick-Up Roller Releasing Solenoid (multifeeder)Slide the solenoid in the direction of A so that the gap between the shutter q and

the shutter plate w is 0.4 ±0.2 mm when the solenoid is pulled.

Figure 11-235

Figure 11-235a

q w

0.4±

0.2m

m

0.4±

0.2m

m

A



11-32

11. Routing the Timing Belt of the Side Guide (multifeeder assembly)Butt the rack plate of the multifeeder against section A (open condition).Move the slide volume in the direction of B, and attach the timing belt on the pulley.

Figure 11-236

12. Adjusting the Position of the Solenoid (delivery paper deflecting platesolenoid)Fix the delivery paper deflecting plate solenoid temporarily in place with a mounting

screw; then, move down the lever q in the direction of arrow A, push the deliverydeflecting plate drive solenoid w B in the direction of arrow B, and tighten the mountingscrew e.

Figure 11-237

q we

B

A

Pulley

Timing belt

Rack plate PulleySection A

B

Slide volume



11-33

13. Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Deflecting Plate DriveSolenoidInstall the solenoid so that its stroke (end-to-end distance between rubber silencer

and solenoid) is 5.0 ±0.3 mm.

Figure 11-238

14. Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Assembly Side Guide PlateMark the position of the side guide plate with a pencil in advance, and install it with

reference to the marking.

Figure 11-239

5.0±0.3mm



11-34

15. Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging PlateMark the position of the holding tray paper jogging plate in advance, and install it with

reference to the marking.

Figure 11-240

16. Adjusting the Timing Belt of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Guide PlateButt the rack plate of the paper jogging guide plate against section A (open state).

Then, attach the timing belt to the pulley.

Figure 11-241

A



11-35

17. Adjusting the Position of the Holding Tray Paper Jogging Plate SolenoidInstall the solenoid so that its stroke (end-to-end distance between rubber silencer

and solenoid) is 1.5 ±0.3 mm.

Figure 11-242

18. Drive BeltRoute the drive belt on the pulley and the roller as shown.

Figure 11-243

Registration feedingdrive belt

Drum drive beltMain motor

Fixing/waste tonerdrive belt

1.5±0.3mm



11-36



11-37

Figure 11-244

Caution:When installing the holding drive belt, be sure to attach the holding tray drive belton the pulley at the bottom (inside when viewing form the rear) and to attach thepick-up drive belt on the pulley at the top (outside when viewing from the rear).

Pick-up motor Holding tray drive belt

Pick-up drive belt

E. Fixing System

1. Points to Note When Installing the Fixing Heater1) Do not touch the surface of the heater.2) For both heaters, install them with the side with the longer heater wire toward the

front.3) Install the main heater (790 W) on the right and the sub heater (410 W) on the left

(viewing from the front).4) Connect the heater wire on the right to the main heater and the one at the top to the

sub heater (when viewing from the rear).

2. Adjusting the Position of the Fixing Assembly Inlet Guide• Points to Note in the Fieldq For the position, see the diagram.w The “low” position is when the solenoid (SL16) is ON.e Make sure the difference in height of the inlet guide between front and rear is 0.5 mm

or less.r To adjust the height of the inlet guide, loosen the fixing screw on the height adjusting

support plate.t Make checks by removing the lower roller.



11-38

nHeight of the Fixing Inlet Guide(dimensions indicate center of inlet guide)

nHeight of the Fixing Inlet Guide(dimensions indicate center of inlet guide)

Figure 11-245

Caution:Do not loosen the mounting screw on the inlet guide mount. If you have removedthe inlet guide mount, you need to adjust the inlet guide plate.If you should have loosened it, be sure to adjust it to its initial position with referenceto the scale on the fixing assembly mount.

(front)Inlet guide

a b

a

b

(rear)

Fixing assembly bottom plate

a-b 0.5mm

Inlet guide

(lower roller)

(upper roller)

59.7mm+/-0.162.9mm+/-0.1high position



11-39



11-40

Dimensions

b

|a-c|

Measurement*

7.3±0.5mm

0.5 mm or less

3. Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip)The nip width must be as indicated in Table 11-203. Otherwise, adjust it by turning

the pressure adjusting nut.

Figure 11-246

Note:a and c represent points 10 mm from both ends of copy paper.

*Take measurements when both upperand lower rollers are adequately warm.

Table 11-203

a. Taking MeasurementsWait 15 min after the end of the machine’s warm-up period; then, make 20 A4 copiesbefore taking measurements.

1) Select A3.2) Open the copyboard cover.3) Start service mode ( ), and select ‘NIP’ (nip adjustment).4) Press the user mode key ].

• A3 copy paper is picked up and discharged as shown in Figure 11-246 ready formeasurement.

]4]

Feeding direction

c

a

A3

pape

r

Center of paper

b

Reference:The paper is discharged halfway out. It is then discharged in about 20 sec.

5) Measure the nip.

4. Adjusting the Fixing ClutchIf you have replaced any parts that make up the following, adjust the set screw e so

that the distance between 41T gear q and the control ring w is 0.1 to 0.3 mm (about 4sheets of plain paper 64 g/m2).

Figure 11-247

qw

e



11-41

F. Electrical System

1. When Replacing the DC Controller PCB1) Install the new DC controller PCB.2) Press the service mode switch with a clip over the cover.3) Select the following in service mode ( ):

‘RAM_INIT’:0 ← (]: START)4) Press the user mode key ].5) Execute AE adjustment.6) Enter the values indicated on the label attached behind the front door.7) Enter the settings suited to the user in service mode ( ).8) Press the Reset key twice.

2. Checking the Surface Potential Control System

a. OutlineIf an image fault occurs, try to find out whether the problem is in the latent image

formation block (including the photosensitive drum and the potential control system) orthe developing/transfer system, requiring a check on the surface potential. (You maycheck the surface potential in service mode.)

b. Disabling the Auto Control MechanismYou may disable the auto control mechanism to find out whether the corona current

control, lamp intensity control, or developing bias control is faulty or not (non-auto controlmode).

Further, as a temporary remedy, you may use non-auto control mode against a faultin the auto control mechanism.

In auto control mode, all outputs are set to default settings.q Steps

1) Select ‘PO_CONT’ in service mode ( ).2) Check to make sure that the indication on the display is as follows:

NIP : 0 ← (] : START)

PO_CONT : 0 ← (] : START)

Changes to ‘1’.

]4]

]5]

]4]



11-42



11-43

3) Press the user mode key ].• Non-auto control mode starts.

NIP : 0 ← (] : START)

PO_CONT : 1 ← (] : START)

4) Press the Reset key twice.

Caution:When non-auto control mode is executed, all control (corona current, intensity,developing bias) is set to default settings stored in ROM.

w Using Non-Auto Control ModeUse non-auto control mode to find out if a fault, if any, is on the input or the output

side of the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB.

c. Zero-Level CheckYou may use a zero-level check to find out whether the surface potential control

circuit is good or not.

Reference:In a zero-level check, a check is made to find out whether the microprocessoridentifies a 0V condition when the surface potential of the drum is 0 V.

Using a zero-level check, you can find out whether the microprocessor on the DCcontroller PCB or the measuring unit is good or not.

A zero-level check may be either of the following:Method 1 enables you to check the lever shift circuit on the DC controller, while

method 2 enables you to check the potential measurement circuit.



11-44

q Method 11) Turn off the power switch.2) Short J127-1 and -2 on the DC controller PCB, and disconnect J103.3) Set the door switch actuator into the door switch assembly, and turn on the power

switch.4) Start service mode ( ), and check that the indication of address P023 during

initial rotation (hexa decimal analog value) is between ‘0003’ and ‘0001B’.

If not between ‘0003’ and ‘0001B’, suspect a fault on the DC controller PCB.

5) Turn off the power switch, and remove the door switch actuator.6) Remove the jumper wire from the DC controller PCB.7) Connect the connector to J103 on the DC controller PCB.8) Turn on the power switch.

w Method 21) Turn off the power switch.2) Remove the blanking exposure lamp assembly.3) Connect the connector of the potential sensor.4) Set the potential sensor to the potential sensor checking electrode (FY9-3012).

Figure 11-248

Caution:When setting the checking electrode to the potential sensor, make sure that themagnet of the checking electrode will not touch the potential sensor cover.

]2]



11-45

Figure 11-249

Caution:Set the clip fully away from the sensor cover and the sensor window so that it willnever come into contact with them.

5) Connect the cable of the potential sensor checking electrode to the Support metalplate (GND) of the potential measurement PCB.

6) Insert the door switch actuator into the door assembly.7) Turn on the power switch.

Caution:Do not touch the potential sensor once you have turned on the power switch.

8) Start service mode ( ), and check to make sure that address P023 duringinitial rotation (hexadecimal analog value) is between ‘0003’ and ‘0001B’.

Reference:1. If the indication is as specified under method 1 and not as specified under

method 2.Suspect dirt on the sensor or a fault in the potential measurement unit.

2. If the indication is as specified under both method 1 and method 2,You may assume that the operation and signal path from the potential sensorunit and the microprocessor on the DC controller PCB are normal.

9) Turn off the power switch.10) Remove the potential sensor checking electrode.11) Install the blanking exposure lamp assembly.12) Turn on the power switch.

]2]

Cover



11-46

3. Checking the Potential System

11-47

Short J127-1 and -2 on the DC controller PCB with a jumper wire. Disconnect J103.

Select non-potential mode. ( * 4 * ; 'PO.CONT' '1')

Turn off the power switch.

Remove the jumper wire used to short J127-1 and -2 on the DC controller PCB. Connect J103.

Check to make sure that power is on the potential measurement PCB, and replace the potential measurement unit.

Turn off the power switch.

Turn on the power switch.

Select non-potential control mode. ( * 4 * .CONT' '1')

Measure the voltage during copying between J114A-6 (+) and A-13 (-) on the DC controller PCB.

Check the transfer charging assembly for leakage. Try changing the setting of 'FUZZY' in service mode ( * 5 * ). Try replacing copy paper.

Replace the DC controller PCB.

Select the activation voltage limiter of the scanning lamp( * 1 * ; 'LIMT').

Select potential control mode. ( * 4 * ; 'PO.CONT' '0')


Clean the standard white plate, mirror, lens, and dust-proofing glass; then, turn off and on the power switch.

Select non-potential control. ( * 4 * ; 'PO.CONT' '1')

START

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

(transfer output)(zero-level check)

End.


Start servicemode (* 4 * ). Is the indicationof address P023 during initial

rotation between'0003' and '001B'? Is the

actual measurement ofstep A and the reading of 'TC' in

service mode ±10%?

NO

<Transfer Output> <Scanning Lamp Output>

Has the image improved?

Is thetoner image on the

photosensitive drum beforetransfer normal?

A

Replace thehigh-voltage transformer. Is the problem corrected?

Is 'LIMT' '1'?

Is 'LIMT' '1'?

YES

YES

Measure the voltage during copying between J111B-7 (+) and B-8 (-) on the DC controller PCB.

B

Start service mode ( * 1 * ), and select 'TC' (transfer charging assembly current). Convert the reading (unit: µA) into its control voltage as shown in 4 "Potential Control Conversion Table."


11-48

Select potential control.( * 1 * ; 'PO.CONT' '0')

Measure the voltage during copying between J114A-2 and A-13 on the DC controller PCB. (step

Check the developing assembly for leakage.

Start service mode( * 1 * ). Select 'BIAS' (developing bias DC value). Convert the reading during copying (unit: V) into its control voltage according to 4 "Potential Control Conversion Table."

Measure the voltage between J114A-3 and A-13 on the DC controller PCB.

Is thedifference between

the actual value in step C andthe reading under 'BIAS'

in service mode ±10%?

YES

YES

(developing bias DC component)

(developing bias AC component)

Select the primary power supply limit notation. ( * 1 * ; 'PLMT')

Is 'PLMY' '1'?

Replace the photosensitive drum.

Select non-potential control. ( * 4 * ;'PO.CONT' '1')

END

Start service mode ( * 1 * ). Select 'PC' (primary charging assembly current). Convert the reading during copying (µA) into its control voltage according to 4 "Potential Control Conversion Table."


NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

Measure the voltage during copying between J114A-5 and A-13 on the DC controller PCB.

(primary output)

Is thedifference between the

actual value in step B and thereading of 'PC' ±10?

Replace the DC controller PCB.NO

A



Does thevoltage change to about

5 V while the scanneris moving forward

?

Replacethe high-voltage transformer.

Is the problemcorrected?

<Primary Output> <Developing Bias Output>

B

Select Direct mode and 'GLEAM-5' in service mode ( * 3 * ) .

YES

Does thevoltage vary between 0.5

and 4 V during copying accordingto the input of

'GLAM-5'?*


Check the lamp regulator or the scanning lamp.

Enter a value (minimum/maximum; within the specified range), and press the * user mode key; then, measure the voltage during copying.Ex.

GLAM-5 Reading34 → 2.8V139 → 3.9V

*

4. Potential Control System Conversion Table

Control (V)

3.00

3.05

3.10

3.15

3.20

3.25

3.30

3.35

3.40

3.45

3.50

3.55

3.60

3.65

3.70

3.75

3.80

3.85

3.90

3.95

4.00

4.05

4.10

4.15

4.20

4.25

4.30

4.35

4.40

4.45

4.50

4.55

4.60

Primary (µA)

1,400

1,391

1,382

1,373

1,365

1,356

1,347

1,338

1,330

1,321

1,312

1,303

1,295

1,286

1,277

1,268

1,260

1,251

1,242

1,233

1,225

1,216

1,207

1,198

1,190

1,181

1,172

1,163

1,155

1,146

1,137

1,128

1,120

Developing bias (V)

0

3

7

11

15

18

22

26

30

33

37

41

45

48

52

56

60

63

67

71

75

78

82

86

90

93

97

101

105

108

112

116

120

Pre-transfer (µA)

0

–2

–4

–6

–8

–10

–12

–14

–16

–18

–20

–22

–24

–26

–28

–30

–33

–35

–37

–39

–41

–43

–45

–47

–49

–51

–53

–55

–57

–59

–61

–63

–66

Transfer (µA)

440

437

434

431

429

426

426

420

418

415

412

409

407

404

401

398

396

393

390

387

385

382

379

376

374

371

368

365

363

360

357

354

352

Separation (µA)

100

96

92

88

85

81

77

73

70

66

62

58

55

51

47

43

40

36

32

28

25

21

17

13

10

6

2

–1

–5

–8

–12

–16

–20



11-49



11-50

Control (V)

4.65

4.70

4.75

4.80

4.85

4.90

4.95

5.00

5.05

5.10

5.15

5.20

5.25

5.30

5.35

5.40

5.45

5.50

5.55

5.60

5.65

5.70

5.75

5.80

5.85

5.90

5.95

6.00

6.05

6.10

6.15

6.20

6.25

6.30

Primary (µA)

1,111

1,102

1,093

1,085

1,076

1,067

1,058

1,050

1,041

1,032

1,023

1,015

1,006

997

938

980

971

962

953

945

936

927

918

910

901

892

883

875

866

857

848

840

831

822

Developing bias (V)

123

127

131

135

138

142

146

150

153

157

161

165

168

172

176

180

183

187

191

195

198

202

206

210

213

217

221

225

228

232

236

240

243

247

Pre-transfer (µA)

–68

–70

–72

–74

–76

–78

–80

–82

–84

–86

–88

–90

–92

–94

–96

–99

–101

–103

–105

–107

–109

–111

–113

–115

–117

–119

–121

–123

–125

–127

–129

–132

–134

–136

Transfer (µA)

349

346

343

341

338

335

332

330

327

324

321

319

316

313

310

308

305

302

299

297

294

291

288

286

283

280

277

275

272

269

266

264

261

258

Separation (µA)

–23

–27

–31

–35

–38

–42

–46

–50

–53

–57

–61

–65

–68

–72

–76

–80

–83

–87

–91

–95

–98

–102

–106

–110

–113

–117

–121

–125

–128

–132

–136

–140

–143

–147



11-51

Control (V)

6.35

6.40

6.45

6.50

6.55

6.60

6.65

6.70

6.75

6.80

6.85

6.90

6.95

7.00

7.05

7.10

7.15

7.20

7.25

7.30

7.35

7.40

7.45

7.50

7.55

7.60

7.65

7.70

7.75

7.80

7.85

7.90

7.95

8.00

Primary (µA)

813

805

796

787

778

770

761

752

743

735

726

717

708

700

691

682

673

665

656

647

638

630

621

612

603

595

586

577

568

560

551

542

533

525

Developing bias (V)

251

255

258

262

266

270

273

277

281

285

288

292

296

300

303

307

311

315

318

322

326

330

333

337

341

345

348

352

356

360

363

367

371

375

Pre-transfer (µA)

–138

–140

–142

–144

–146

–148

–150

–152

–154

–156

–158

–160

–162

–165

–167

–169

–171

–173

–175

–177

–179

–181

–183

–185

–187

–189

–191

–193

–195

–198

–200

–202

–204

–206

Transfer (µA)

255

253

250

247

244

242

239

236

233

231

228

225

222

220

217

214

211

209

204

203

200

198

195

192

189

187

184

181

178

176

173

170

167

165

Separation (µA)

–151

–155

–158

–162

–166

–170

–173

–177

–181

–185

–188

–192

–196

–200

–203

–207

–211

–215

–218

–222

–226

–230

–233

–237

–241

–245

–248

–252

–256

–260

–263

–267

–271

–275



11-52

Control (V)

8.05

8.10

8.15

8.20

8.25

8.30

8.35

8.40

8.45

8.50

8.55

8.60

8.65

8.70

8.75

8.80

8.85

8.90

8.95

9.00

9.05

9.10

9.15

9.20

9.25

9.30

9.35

9.40

9.45

9.50

9.55

9.60

9.65

9.70

Primary (µA)

516

507

498

490

481

472

463

455

446

437

428

420

411

402

393

385

376

367

358

350

341

332

323

315

306

297

288

280

271

262

253

245

236

227

Developing bias (V)

378

382

386

390

393

397

401

405

408

412

416

420

423

427

431

435

438

442

446

450

453

457

461

465

468

472

476

480

483

487

491

495

498

502

Pre-transfer (µA)

–208

–210

–212

–214

–216

–218

–220

–222

–224

–226

–228

–231

–233

–235

–237

–239

–241

–243

–245

–247

–249

–251

–253

–255

–257

–259

–261

–264

–266

–268

–270

–272

–274

–276

Transfer (µA)

162

159

156

154

151

148

145

143

140

137

134

132

129

126

123

121

118

115

112

110

107

104

101

99

96

93

90

88

85

82

79

77

74

71

Separation (µA)

–278

–282

–286

–290

–293

–297

–301

–305

–308

–312

–316

–320

–323

–327

–331

–335

–338

–342

–346

–350

–353

–357

–361

–365

–368

–372

–376

–380

–383

–387

–391

–395

–398

–402



11-53

Control (V)

9.75

9.80

9.85

9.90

9.95

10.00

10.05

10.10

10.15

10.20

10.25

10.30

10.35

10.40

10.45

10.50

10.55

10.60

10.65

10.70

10.75

10.80

10.85

10.90

10.95

11.00

Primary (µA)

218

210

201

192

183

175

166

157

148

140

131

122

113

105

96

87

78

70

61

52

43

35

26

17

8

0

Developing bias (V)

506

510

513

517

521

525

528

532

536

540

543

547

551

555

558

562

566

570

573

577

581

585

588

592

596

600

Pre-transfer (µA)

–278

–280

–282

–284

–286

–288

–290

–292

–294

–297

–299

–301

–303

–305

–307

–309

–311

–313

–315

–317

–319

–321

–323

–325

–327

–330

Transfer (µA)

68

66

63

60

57

55

52

49

46

44

41

38

35

33

30

27

24

22

19

16

13

11

8

5

2

0

Separation (µA)

–406

–410

–413

–417

–421

–425

–428

–432

–436

–440

–443

–447

–451

–455

–458

–462

–466

–470

–473

–477

–481

–485

–488

–492

–496

–500


5. Checking the Environment Sensor1) Start service mode ( ), and take notes of the readings of temperature and

humidity on the control panel display.Data A‘RTMP’ °C ......Data A1‘RHUM’ % ......Data A2

2) Press the Reset key twice, and turn off the power switch.3) Remove the environment sensor, and insert the environment sensor jig (FY9-3014)

in its place.4) Turn on the power switch, and leave the machine alone for 5 min.5) Start service mode ( ), and take notes of the readings of temperature and

humidity on the control panel display.Data B‘RTMP’ °C ......Data B1‘RHUM’ % ......Data B2

6) Compare data A and data B.• difference between data A1 and data B1 is 0 ±5• difference between data A2 and data B2 is 0 ±20

If the difference between data A and data B is not as specified, replace theenvironment sensor.

7) Press the Reset key twice, and turn off the power switch.8) Remove the environment sensor jig, and insert the environment sensor.9) Install all covers.

Caution:The environment sensor jig (FY9-3014) is adjusted to high precision at the factory.Be sure to keep it in an air-tight case with a drying agent for storage.

]1]

]1]



11-55

6. Checking the PhotointerruptersYou can check the machine’s photointerrupters either with a conventional meter or

the machine’s service mode.

a. Using a Tester1) Set the meter to the 30VDC range.2) Connect the – probe of the meter to GND on the DC controller PCB.3) Connect the + probe to the terminals (DC controller PCB) shown in the table.4) Make checks as instructed.

b. Using Service Mode1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator into the door switch

assembly.2) Press the service switch with a clip over the cover.3) Press , , and in sequence on the control panel.4) Using the keypad on the control panel, enter the address of each photointerrupter;

then, check the reading.

Caution:The machine’s motors may start to operate when you turn on or off the sensors;exercise extra caution.

]2]



11-56

Sensor

PS1

Scanner HP sensor

PS3

Scanner originalleading edge 2sensor

PS4

Scanner originalleading edge 2sensor

PS5

Copyboard coveropen/closed sensor

PS6

Lens XHP sensor

PS7

Lens YHP sensor

PS8

Holding tray feeding assembly1 paper sensor

PS9

Holding tray feeding assembly2 paper sensor

Connector No.

*2* address

J111A-2

P007-03

J111A-5

P107-6

J111A-8

P002-04

J112A-4

P007-02

J110A-8

P102-02

J110B-2

P102-03

J119A-4

P002-04

J113B-12

P002-03

Move thescanner byhand whilein standby.



Move thecopyboardcover byhand whilein standby.

Put paperover PS6while instandby.

Put paperover PS7while instandby.

Insert paperin thedetectingleverassembly ofPS8 whilein standby.


Checks

When the light-block-ing plate is at PS1.

When the light-block-ing plate is not at PS1.





When the cover isclosed.

When the cover isopened.

When paper is notover PS6.

When paper is overPS6.

When paper is notover PS7.

When paper is overPS7.

When paper isinserted.

When paper isremoved.



*2* notation

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

Voltage

5V

0V

5V

0V

0V

1V

5V

0V

0V

5V

0V

5V

5V

0V

5V

0V



11-57

Sensor

PS10

External deliverysensor

PS11

Fixing cleaningbelt lengthsensor

PS12

Internal deliverysensor

PS14

Holding tray registration papersensor

PS15

Holding tray inletpaper sensor

PS17

Holding tray pick-up sensor

Connector No.

*2* address

J108B-7

P005-04

J108A-13

P005-05

J108B-12

P005-02

113A-3

P005-07

J113B-10

P005-06

J113B-11

P005-09







Checks










When paper is notinserted.



*2* notation

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

Voltage

5V

0V

5V

0V

0V

5V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V



11-58

Sensor

PS19

Holding tray re-circulating barHP sensor

PS20

Holding tray YHPsensor

PS21

Holding tray XHPsensor

PS22

Multifeeder papersensor

PS23

Registrationpaper sensor

PS24

Pick-up verticalpath 0 sensor

Connector No.

*2* address

J113B-6

P005-10

J113A-10

P100-03

J113B-1

P100-02

J115B-7

P002-05

J108A-7

P002-02

J116B-2

P002-00


Move therear parti-tion plate byhand whilein standby.

Move theside guideby handwhile instandby.


Move thedetectinglever byhand whilein standby.


Checks



When the light-blocking plate is atPS20.

When the light-blocking plate isnot at PS20.









*2* notation

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

Voltage

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0



11-59

Sensor

PS25

Cassette 3 lifterposition sensor

PS26

Cassette 3 papersensor

PS27


PS28

Cassette 4 lifterposition sensor

PS29

Cassette 4 papersensor

PS30


PS31

Right deck lifterposition sensor

Connector No.

*2* address

J117A-4

P008-08

J117A-7

P008-06

J117B-4

P008-04

J130A-4

P008-09

J130B-7

P008-07

J130B-4

P008-05

J116A-4

P005-08








Checks















*2* notation

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

Voltage

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V



11-60

Sensor

PS32

Right deck papersensor

PS33


PS34

Left deck lifterposition sensor

PS35

Left deck papersensor

PS36


PS37

Right deck limitersensor

PS38

Right deckopen/closed sensor








Checks















*2* notation

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

—

—

1

0

Voltage

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

Connector No.

*2* address

J116A-7

P007-10

J119A-7

P007-12

J121A-7

P007-15

J121A-10

P007-11

J121B-10

P007-13

J116B-13

————

J116B-10

P007-04



11-61

Sensor

PS39

Left deck limitsensor

PS40

Left deckopen/closed sensor

PS41

Upper right doorsensor

PS42

Upper right doorsensor

PS46

Multifeeder doorsensor

PS47

Fixing assemblyoutlet papersensor

PS48

Scanner lockedsensor

Connector No.

*2* address

J121B-2

————

J116B-8

P007-04

J119B-4

P007-00

J119B-7

P007-01

J105A-9

P005-03

J108B-4

P005-08

J114A-14

P009-03








Checks















*2* notation

—

—

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

Voltage

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V



11-62

* Or, tape the detecting lever in place, and push in the fixing/feeding unit, holding tray,or holding tray feeding assembly into the machine.

** Or, put copy paper over the sensor to keep the light-receiving area from light.

Sensor

PS49

Left deck outletpaper sensor

PS50

Cassette 3open/closed sensor

PS51

Cassette 4open/closed sensor

PS52

Claw jam sensor

PS53

Fixing/feedingassembly unitsensor

Connector No.

*2* address

J121B-5

P009-04

J117B-7

P009-05

J130B-7

P009-06

J108A-19

P009-01

J108A-2

P005-01


Hold thegrip andmove thecassette 3.

Hold thegrip andmove thecassette 4.

Move thedetectinglever whilein standby.*

Move thereleasinglever of thefixing/feed-ing assem-bly by handwhile instandby.

Checks










When the light-blocking plate isnot at PS53. (unitset)

*2* notation

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

Voltage

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

5V

0V

0V

5V



11-63

7. Registering the Paper Width Basic Value ( ]]4]]; cassette/multifeeder)Perform the steps that follow whenever you have

• replaced the machine’s paper width detecting VR (including the multifeeder); or• adjusted the front/rear registration of the cassette.

For each cassette, 3 and 4, you must work on ‘STMTR’ and ‘A4R’; for themultifeeder, you must work on ‘A6R’, ‘A4R’, and ‘A4’.

a. Cassettes 3 and 4In the case of the cassette 3,

1) Start service mode (]4]), and select the 8th screen.2) Slide out the cassette 3, and set the paper width guide plate inside to STMTR; then,

slide the cassette into the machine.3) Press ‘C3_STMTR’ on the screen on the control panel.4) Press the ] key.

• Check to make sure that the value XXXX indicated under ‘C3_STMTR: XXX’ isthe same as ‘(XXX)’.

5) Slide out the cassette 3, and set the paper width guide plate inside the cassette toA4R; then, slide the cassette into the machine.

6) Press ‘C3_A4R’ on the screen on the control panel.7) Press the ] key.

• Check to make sure that the value YYY indicated under ‘C3_A4R: YYY’ is thesame as ‘(YYY)’.

b. MultifeederPerform the steps shown for the cassette 3 and 4; however, you must perform them

for A6R, A4R, and A4.

Figure 11-250

A6R (105mm)

Paper Guide

Guide



11-64

III. IMAGE FAULTS

A. Initial Checks

1. Checking the Site EnvironmentMake sure of the following:

a. The voltage of the power source is the rating ±10%. (The power plug must not bedisconnected at night.)

b. The machine is not near areas of high temperature/humidity (near water faucets,water boilers, humidifiers, and sources of fire), and it is not in a cold or dusty place.

c. The machine is not in a place exposed to ammonium gas.d. The machine is not exposed to direct rays of the sun. (Otherwise, provide curtains.)e. The room is well ventilated.f. The machine is kept level.

2. Checking the OriginalsCheck the originals to find out whether the problem is caused by the type of originalor the machine.

a. The copy density lever is best set to scale 5 ±1.b. Originals with a reddish background may not provide good contrast (red sheets,

slips, etc.).c. The density of originals at times affect the copy quality:

Reference:• If the original is a diazo copy or has an appreciable transparency, copies can be

mistaken for “foggy” copies.• If the original is made in light pencil, the copies can be mistaken for “light” copies.



11-65

3. Checking the Copyboard Cover, Copyboard Glass, and Standard White PlateCheck the copyboard cover, copyboard glass, and standard white plate for dirt and

scratches. If dirt is found, clean them with solution of mild detergent or alcohol; ifscratches are found, replace them.

4. Checking the Charging Assembliesa. Check each charging assembly for dirt and faults on its charging wire (scratches,

etc.).b. Clean the charging wire of each charging assembly. (If dirt cannot be removed,

replace it.)c. Check the height of the charging wire of each charging assembly.d. Check to make sure that each charging assembly is securely set.e. Check the charging wire spring for rusting.f. Check the anti-vibration rubber (each charging assembly, except primary charging

assembly) for displacement.

5. Checking the Developing Assemblya. Check to make sure that the rolls on both ends of the developing assembly are in

contact with the drum.b. Check to make sure that the surface of the developing cylinder is coated with an

even layer of toner.

6. Checking the Papera. Check to make sure that the paper is of a type recommended by Canon.b. Check to make sure that the paper is not moist.

Try copy paper fresh out of package.

7. Checking the Periodically Replaced PartsCheck the parts against the scheduled servicing chart and the periodically replaced

parts table; replace the parts accordingly.

8. OthersBringing in a machine from a cold to warm place (especially in winter for installation)

can cause condensation inside the machine, leading to various problems.

Reference:a.On the scanning system (glass, mirror, lens), it can cause light images.b.On the charging system, it can cause leakage.c. On the pick-up/feeding guide plate, it can cause feeding faults.

If condensation is noted, dry wipe the part or leave the machine powered for 60min.

Caution:If the copy has an uneven density (between front) or is too light or foggy, performthe “Image Adjustment Basic Procedure” before consulting the troubleshootingtables.



11-66



11-67

B. Sample Image Faults

not available



11-68



11-69

C. Troubleshooting Image Faults

1. The copy is too light (halftone only).

Cause

Scanner

Developingassembly

Developingassembly

Lamp regulator

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Perform the Image AdjustmentBasic Procedure. Is the problemcorrected?

Clean the standard white plate,mirror, lens, and dust-proofingglass. Is the problem corrected?

Are the rolls of the developingassembly in firm contact with thedrum during copying?

Is the developing cylinder coatedwith an even layer of toner?

Replace the lamp regulator. Is theproblem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

End.

End.

Check the developingassembly locking lever.

Check the developingassembly.

End.

Replace the DCcontroller PCB.

2. The copy is too light (including solid black).3. The copy is too light (entire face).

Cont’d



11-70

Cause

Transfer/separationchargingassembly

Copy paper

Checks


Turn off the power switch duringcopying, and open the front door.Is the toner image on the surfaceof the photosensitive drum beforetransfer more or less normal?

Is the charging wire of the transfercharging assembly hookedcorrectly and is its height correct?

Is the transfer/separationassembly set securely?

Set ‘FUZZY’ in service mode () to ‘1’, and make a copy. Is

the problem corrected?

Try fresh copy paper. Is theproblem corrected?

]5]

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

Action

End.

Go to step 7.

1. Hook the chargingwire correctly.

2. Adjust the height ofthe charging wire.

1. Clean the chargingwire.

2. Set the chargingassembly securely.

End. (The problem isdue to the environment.)

Set ‘FUZZY’ back to ‘0’,and perform thefollowing steps.

1. The paper may bemoist. Advise the useron the correct methodof storing paper.

2. Advise the user thatthe use of paper notrecommended byCanon may not bringthe best results.

Tran

sfer



11-71

Cause

Lowertransferguide/varistor

DC controllerPCB

Developingassembly

Pre-transferchargingassembly

Potentialcontrol,Photosensitivedrum

Developing biascontrol

Checks

Measure the resistance betweenthe PCBs (metal sections) of thelower transfer guide and thefeeding assembly. Is it 0 ?

Is the developing assembly setsecurely? Are the rolls of thedeveloping assembly in firm con-tact with the photosensitive drum?

Is the pre-transfer charging wirehooked correctly and is its heightcorrect?

Is the pre-transfer chargingassembly set correctly?

Turn off and then on the powerswitch, and check the readings of‘VD’ and ‘VL1’ in service mode (

). Are the readings of ‘VDM’and ‘VL1M’ the target value (VDT,VL1T) ±10V?

]1]

Step

7

8

9

10

11

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

1. Check to see if thetransfer guide shouldbe in contact with theside plate of thefeeding assembly(metal section).

2. Replace the varistor.

Check the high-voltagetransformer (HVT) andthe DC controller PCB.

Check the developingassembly locking unit.

1. Hook the chargingwire correctly.

2. Adjust the height ofthe charging wire.

1. Clean the chargingwire.

2. Set the chargingassembly securely.

Check the potentialcontrol system; if normal,replace thephotosensitive drum.

Check the developingbias control system.

Tran

sfer

Dev

elop

men

t

4. The copy has an uneven density (darker at front).5. The copy has an uneven density (lighter at front).



11-72

Cause

Primary charging wire

Developingassembly

Scanner

Pre-exposurelamp

Developingassembly

Chargingassembly, Copypaper

Checks


Are the developing rolls of thedeveloping assembly firmly in con-tact with the photosensitive drum?

Clean the scanning lamp,reflecting plate, side reflectingplate, mirror, lens, dust-proofingglass, and heat absorbing glass.Is the problem corrected?

Is the pre-exposure lamp flashingduring copying?


Step

1

2

3

4

5

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

Action

End.

Check the developingassembly locking unit.

End.

1. Replace the pre-exposure lamp.

2. Replace the DCcontroller PCB.

1. Clean the tip of theblade of thedeveloping assembly(dry wiping).

2. Clean the surface ofthe developingcylinder.

3. Check the toner insidethe developingassembly to see if it islevel.

1. Clean all chargingwires once again, andcheck their height.

2. Try replacing copypaper.

6. The copy is foggy. (overall)



11-73

Cause

LIGHT_5

Scanner

Cleaner assembly

Pre-exposurelamp, DCcontroller PCB

Developing roll

Developingcylinder

Lamp regulator

Potential controlsystem

DC controllerPCB

High-voltagetransformer,Developingassembly

Checks


Clean the scanning lamp,reflecting plate, side reflectingplate, mirror, lens, dust-proofingglass, and heat absorbing glass.Is the problem corrected?

Is the cleaning blade installedcorrectly?

Is the pre-exposure lamp flashingduring copying?

Are the developing rolls worn?

Replace the developing cylinder.Is the problem corrected?


Make the checks on p. 11-42. Isthe potential sensor normal?

Set the meter to the 30VDCrange, and measure the voltagebetween J111A-2 (DCBC) andJ114A-13 (GND) on the DCcontroller PCB.

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

Action

End.

End.

Install the cleaningblade.

1. Replace the pre-exposure lamp.


Replace the developingrolls.

Replace the developingcylinder.

End.



1. Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCBand the high-voltagetransformer; if normal,replace the high-voltage transformer.

2. Check the developingassembly.

7. The copy has vertical fogging.8. The copy has black lines (vertical, fuzzy, thick).



11-74

Cause

Primary chargingassembly

Scanner system

Pre-exposurelamp

Developingassembly

Fixing assem-bly, Cleanerassembly

Checks

Clean the charging wire, grid wire,and shielding plate. Is the problemcorrected?

Clean the scanning lamp,reflecting plate, side reflectingplate, lens, mirror, dust-proofingglass, and heat absorbing glass.Is the problem corrected?

Clean the pre-exposure lamp. Isthe problem corrected?


Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

Action

End.

End.

End.

Check and clean theedge of the blade of thedeveloping assembly.

Check the fixingassembly and thecleaner assembly.

9. The copy has black lines (vertical, fine).



11-75

Cause

Copyboardglass

Photosensitivedrum cleanerassembly

Photosensitivedrum

Developing system,Exposure system

Fixing assembly

Checks

Dese the problem occur only instream reading mode?

Press the Copy Start key, and turnoff the power switch when copypaper is in the feeding assembly.At this time, does the copy beforemoving through the fixingassembly have black lines?

Is paper or foreign matter trappedon the cleaning blade of thecleaner assembly?

Are there scratches on thecleaning blade? (Feel the edge ofthe cleaning blade with a finger tofind out.)

Are there scratches or black lineson the surface of thephotosensitive drum in theperipheral direction?

Are there scratches or black lineson the surface of the fixingassembly upper roller in theperipheral direction?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

Action

Check the copyboardglass for dirt andscratches at the pointwhere the scanner isfixed in position instream reading mode.

Go to step 6.

Remove the foreignmatter, and clean thecleaning blade and theoutside of the cleanerassembly.

Switch to the new side(edge). If both edgeshave scratches, find outthe cause.

Replace thephotosensitive drum. Ifscratches are found, findout the cause.

Check the developingsystem and theexposure system.

1. Replace the upperroller.

2. Check the take-upmechanism for thecleaning belt.

3. Check the reciprocat-ing mechanism of thethermistor and theseparation claw.

Check the inlet of thefixing assembly for dirt.

10. The copy has white spots (vertical).11. The copy has white lines (vertical).



11-76

Cause

Fixing assembly


Developingassembly

Copy paper

Photosensitivedrum

Checks

Press the Copy Start key whilekeeping the copyboard coveropen, and turn off the powerswitch while copy paper is movingthrough the feeding assembly. Atthis time, does the copy imagebefore moving through the fixingassembly have white spots orwhite lines?

Clean the charging wire, grid wire,and shielding plate of the primarycharging assembly. Is the problemcorrected?


Use fresh copy paper. Is theproblem corrected?

Are there scratches on the surfaceof the photosensitive drumcorresponding to the problem inthe copy image in the peripheraldirection?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

Action

1. Clean the inlet (upper,lower) of the fixingassembly.

2. Check the upper rollerof the fixing assembly.

3. Check the take-upmechanism (cleaning)for the web.

4. Clean the separationclaw.

Clean the partsthoroughly with alcohol.If the dirt cannot beremoved, replace thecharging wire.

Check the blade edge ofthe developing assemblyfor paper lint.

The copy paper may bemoist. Advise the useron the correct method ofstoring paper.

Be sure to find out thecause of the scratches,and then replace thephotosensitive drum.

Cont’d



11-77

Cause

Transfer/separationchargingassembly, Pre-transferchargingassembly

Blanking exposure lamp,DC controllerPCB

External light

Checks

Are the separation claws of thecleaner assembly in contact withcopy paper while the copy paperis being fed?

Are the blank exposure LEDs(lamp) corresponding to theproblem in the copy image ONwhile the scanner is movingforward?

Step

6

7

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

1. Clean the pre-transfercharging assemblyand thetransfer/separationcharging assembly. Ifthe dirt cannot beremoved, replace thecharging wire.

2. Try replacing the copypaper.

3. Select ‘FUZZY’ in ser-vice mode ( ),and set it to ‘3’.

Check the wiring fromthe blanking exposurelamp to the DC controllerPCB; if normal, replacethe DC controller PCB.

Check thephotosensitive drum tosee if it should not beexposed to external light.

]5]

12. The copy has white spots (horizontal).



11-78

Cause

Developingassembly

Drum

Copy paper

Scanner rail,Scanner cable

Charging wire,Photosensitivedrum

Checks

Is the problem noted at intervalsof about 52 mm?

Is the problem noted at intervalsof about 25 cm?


Does the problem occur at thesame location on all copies?

Are there scratches on the surfaceof the photosensitive drum?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

YES/NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

Action

1. Clean the developingrolls.

2. Dry wipe the surfaceof the developingcylinder.

3. If the surface of thedeveloping cylinderhave scratches,replace thedeveloping cylinder.

1. Clean the drum.2. If scratches are found,

replace the drum.

The copy paper may bemoist. Advise the useron the correct method ofsorting paper.

1. Check the scanner railfor foreign matter.

2. Adjust the scannercable.

Clean the chargingassembly.

Replace thephotosensitive drum.

13. The copy has a soiled back.



11-79

Cause

Developingassembly

Cleaner assembly

Fixing assembly

Delivery assembly

Checks

Turn off the power switch whilecopy paper is moving through thefeeding assembly. At this time, isthe back of the paper soiled?

Does the problem occur atintervals of about 52 mm?

Is the take-up mechanism of thefixing cleaning belt and thecleaning mechanism of the upperroller normal?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

Action

Go to step 3.

1. Clean the registrationroller.

2. Clean the transferguide.

3. Check the developingassembly for leakageof toner.

1. Clean the feedingassembly.

2. Check the cleanerassembly for leakageof toner.

1. Check the take-upmechanism of thecleaning belt.

2. Clean the upper rollerand the lower roller.

3. Clean the fixingassembly inlet guide.

Clean the delivery rollerand the separationclaws.

14. The copy has fixing faults.



11-80

Cause

Upper roller,Lower roller

Heater (H1, H2)

Lower rollerpressure

Copy paper

Upper fixing

Checks

Does the problem occur in verticaldirection?

Does the heater (H1, H2) turn onimmediately after power-on?

Is the lower roller pressure (nip)as specified?

Is the paper of a typerecommended by Canon?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

Check the upper rollerand the lower roller forscratches.

See “The heater fails toturn on.”

Adjust the lower rollerpressure.

Try paper recommendedby Canon. If the resultsare good, advise theuser to userecommended paper.

Check the upper rollerfor peeling.

Fix

ing

asse

mbl

y

15., 16., 17. The copy has displaced leading edge registration.



11-81

Cause

Original

Copy paper

Pick-up roller

Leading edgemargin

Registrationclutch,Registrationroller

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the original placed correctly?

Is the paper of a typerecommended by Canon?

Make copies using the paper deckand each of the cassettes. Is theproblem noted on all copies?

Has the pick-up roller reached itsaverage life?

Adjust the leading edge margin. Isthe problem corrected?

Set the meter to the 30DC range,and measure the voltage betweenJ108A-5 (+) and J108A-6 (–) onthe DC controller PCB. Does itchange from 24 to 0 Vinstantaneously while the scanneris moving forward?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

Action

Place it correctly.

Try recommended paper.If the results are good,advise the user to userecommended paper.

Go to step 4.

Check each pick-upsystem.

If wear is noted on thepick-up roller, replace it.

End.

1. Check the No. 1registration clutch.

2. Check the registrationroller for deformationand wear.


18. The copy is blurred and fuzzy.



11-82

Cause

Scanner drivecable

Scanner rail

Photosensitivedrum

Drum drivegear

Developinggear

Cleaner assembly gear

Drum drive system

Checks

Is the cable overlapping on thecable pulley while the scanner ismoving, or is the cable too slackor taut?

Move the No. 1 mirror mount byhand. Does it move smoothly?

Does the problem occur atintervals of about 25 cm?




Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

Action

1. Route the cable onceagain.

2. If cable is twisted orfrayed, replace it.

Clean the surface of thescanner rail with alcohol.Thereafter, apply a smallamount of lubricant.

1. Check the drum gear.2. Check the ends of the

drum (in contact withthe developing rolls)for scraches andprotrusions.

Check the drum drivegear.

Check the developingassembly.

Check the cleanerassembly.

Check the drum drivesystem.

19. The copy has horizontal fogging.

20. The copy has poor sharpness.



11-83

Cause

Scanning lamp,Lamp regulator

Scanner

Feeding assembly

Checks

Does the problem occur at thesame location on all copies madein Direct?

Does the scanning lamp flickerwhile the scanner is movingforward?

Make reduced copies, andcompare it against ones made inDirect. Are the positions of theproblem different?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

Action

Go to step 3.

Check the scanninglamp and the lampregulator.

Check the scanningsystem.

Check the feedingsystem.

Cause

Copyboardglass

Mirror

Scanner

Photosensitivedrum

Lens driveassembly

Checks

Is oil found on the copyboardglass?

Is the horizontal reproduction ratioin Direct mode as specified?

Clean the scanning lamp,reflecting plate, mirror, lens, dust-proofing glass, and heat absorbingglass. Is the problem corrected?

Replace the photosensitive drum.Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

Clean the copyboardglass.

Adjust the distancebetween No. 1 mirrorand No. 2 mirror.

End.

End.

Check the operation ofthe lens drive assembly.

21. The copy is blank.

22. The copy is solid black.



11-84

Cause


Developingassembly

DC controllerPCB

Scanning lamp

Connector

Potential controlsystem

Developing bias

Main motor(M1)

Checks

Is the primary charging assemblyset securely?

Is the charging wire or the gridwire broken?

Is the developing assembly in firmcontact with the drum?

Does the blanking exposure lampremain OFF while the scanner ismoving forward?

Does the scanning lamp remainON during copying?

Are the connectors of the PCBsconnected securely?

Is the control by the potentialsensor executed normally?

Is the contact of the developingbias firmly in place?

•Is the 1st copy blank halfway?•Is the 1st copy blank, does the2nd copy have displaced registra-tion, and does a stationary jamoccur in this condition?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Action

Set the chargingassembly.

String the charging wireand the grid wire newly.

Check the developingassembly locking lever.

Check the DC controllerPCB.

See “The scanning lampfails to turn ON.”

Connect them securely.

Replace the potentialmeasurement unit.

Fix it in place.

Replace the main motor(M1).

Cause Checks

Does the scanning lamp remainON during copying?

Step

1

YES/NO

NO

Action

See “The scanning lampfails to turn on.”

IV. TROUBLESHOOTING MALFUNCTIONS

A. Troubleshooting Malfunctions

Caution:Whenever installing/removing any sensor, pay attention to the orientation/positionof the spring used to lock down the detecting lever in position.

1. E000



11-85

Cause

Sub thermistor(TH2)

Main thermistor(TH1)

Thermistor

Thermistor

Checks

Clear ‘E000’. Turn off and then onthe power switch. Is ‘E000’indicated for about 5 sec, andthen does the power switch turnoff automatically?

Execute ‘ERROR’ in service mode( ) to clear ‘E000’. Check tomake sure that the fixingassembly is set securely. Turn offthe power switch, and disconnectthe power plug. Does the heaterof the fixing roller turn on whenthe power switch is turned on?

Caution:Keep in mind that repeating thisstep several times will cause thefixing temperature to riseabnormally, damaging the fixingroller and the separation claws.

Turn off the power switch, cool theupper fixing roller, and turn on thepower switch. Select the screenshowing ‘FTMP’ in service mode( ). Does the value of‘FTMP’ remain the same? (Afterthe check, be sure to turn off thepower switch.)

Is the thermistor in even contactwith the upper fixing roller?

Clean the contact area of the ther-mistor. Is the problem corrected?

]1]

]4]

Step

1

2

3

4

5

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

Action

Check the sub thermistor(TH2)

Replace the DCcontroller or the SSR.

Check the wiring fromJ108A on the DCcontroller PCB to thethermistor (TH1); ifnormal, replace thethermistor (TH1).

Install the thermistorcorrectly.

End.

Cont’d

2. E001



11-86

Cause

Environment


DC controllerPCB

Checks

Does the problem occur onlywhen the machine is turned on forthe first time in the morning?

Replace the thermistor. Is theproblem corrected?

Step

6

7

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

•Advise the user that thesite is out ofspecification.

•Advise the user not toturn on the machineuntil the room is warmenough.

End.


Cause

Thermistor(TH1/TH2)

DC controllerPCB

AC driver

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Execute ‘ERROR’ in service mode( ), and open the front doorand the delivery assembly to coolthe fixing roller. Is ‘E001’ indicatedimmediately after power-on whenthe power switch is turned on?

Turn off the power switch, andslide out the fixing feedingassembly. Disconnect the relayconnector J2757 from inside thefixing unit, and set the meter tothe 1KΩ range. Connect the probeto the terminal of the harness onthe thermistor side. Is the readingabout 0Ω at this time? (After thecheck, be sure to connect J2757.)

Replace the AC driver. Is theproblem corrected?

]4]

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

Action

Go to step 3.

Replace the thermistor.


End.

Check the wiring fromthe AC drive to the DCcontroller; if normal,replace the DC controllerPCB.

3. E0024. E003

5. E004



11-87

Cause



Environment


DC controller

Checks

Execute ‘ERROR’ in service mode( ), and turn on the poweronce again. Is either of thefollowing correct?•The fixing heater fails to turn on.•‘E002’ or ‘E003’ is indicated.

Is the contact of the connectorsJ108 and J2755, relay connectorJ2757, and the connector J2745inside the fixing assembly good?Further, is the wiring from thethermistor to the connector J108on the DC controller PCB good?

Is the thermistor in even contactwith the upper fixing roller?

Clean the contact area of the ther-mistor. Is the problem corrected?

Does the problem occur onlywhen the machine is turned on forthe first time in the morning?

Replace the thermistor. Is theproblem corrected?

]4]

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

Action

Go to the appropriatesection.

Connect them securely.

Install the thermistoronce again.

End.

•Advise the user that thesite is out ofspecification.

•Advise the user not toturn on the machineuntil the room is warmenough.

End.


Cause

Fixing heater

AC driver

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Execute ‘ERROR’ in service mode( ). Does the fixing heaterturn on immediately after power-on?


]4]

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

See “The fixing heaterfails to operate.”

End.


6. E005

7. E006

8. E010



11-88

Cause

Fixing cleaningbelt

Cleaning beltdetecting lever

Fixing/feedingunit

DC controllerPCB

Sensor

Checks

Is the web of the fixing assemblytaken up?

Is the position of the cleaning beltdetecting lever correct?

Is the fixing/feeding unit set in themachine correctly?

Is the voltage between J108A-13(+) and J108A-12 (–) on the DCcontroller PCB about 5 V? Is thecleaning belt length sensor (PS11)normal? (See the instructions onhow to check photointerrupters.)

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

Action

Replace the cleaningbelt.

Correct the position ofthe lever.

The connector at therear of the fixing/feedingunit may have poorcontact; make a check.


Replace the sensor.

Cause

DC controllerPCB

Main motor(M1)

Checks

Is the connector of the main motorconnected?

Does the voltage between J111B-4 (+) and J111B-1 (–) on the DCcontroller PCB change from 0 toabout 5 V when the Copy Startkey is pressed?

Replace the main motor. Is theproblem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

Connect the connector.


End.

Cause

Fixing/feedingconnector

Checks

Is the connector fixed in positioncorrectly? Is it securely connectedto the copier’s connector?

Step

1

YES/NO

NO

Action

Check the connector. Fixit firmly in position ifnecessary.

9. E013



11-89

Cause

Waste tonerfeeding screw(locked)

MSW4

DC controllerPCB

Harness of vertical pathroller driveclutch (CL15)

Checks

Is the waste toner feeding screwdrive gear pushing the wastetoner feeding screw lockeddetecting switch (SW4)?

Is the voltage between J114B-1(+) and J114B-2 (–) on the DCcontroller PCB about 5 V whenthe switch is pressed and about 0V when released?

Does the harness of the verticalpath roller drive clutch have anopen circuit?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

Action

The feeding screw insidethe waste toner pipe islocked for some reason.Remove the waste tonerpipe, and try turing thescrew by hand. If it canbe rotated easily, installit and see if the problemhas been corrected; otherwise, replace thewaste toner pipe, andremove the cause.

Replace MSW4.


Replace the clutch(SL15).

10. E015



11-90

Cause

Power supply(motor con-troller PCB isintegrated withpick-up motor)

DC controllerPCB

Pick-up motor(M2)

Checks

Set the meter to the 200VDCrange, and connect the + probe toJ612-3 and the – probe to J612-4on the DC controller PCB. Is thevoltage about 12 V?

Is the voltage between thefollowing pins on the DC controllerPCB as indicated?

(+) (–) Voltage

J114B-10 J114B-9 about 12 V

J114B-12 J114B-11 about 5 V

Connect the + probe to J114B-8and the – probe to GND on theDC controller PCB. Does thevoltage change to about 5 V assoon as the motor starts to rotate?

Replace the pick-up motor (M2).Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

Check the wiring fromthe DC power supplyPCB to the motorcontroller PCB; if normal,replace the DC powersupply PCB.

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe motor controllerPCB; if normal, replacethe DC controller PCB.

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe motor controllerPCB; if normal, replacethe DC controller PCB.

End.

11. E020



11-91

Cause

Hopper assembly sensor

Hopper

Connection(between hopper assembly anddevelopingassembly)

Toner sensor

DC controllerPCB

Connector(hopper assembly)

Outlet(hopperassembly)

Checks

Remove the upper cover of thedeveloping assembly. Is the devel-oping assembly almost overflow-ing with toner? (After the check,be sure to install the upper cover.)

Is the hopper full of toner?

Select ‘P002’ in service mode ( ). Is bit 10 (TEP) of themessage display ‘0’ (tonerabsent)?

Set ‘HPPR_MTR’ in service mode( ), and press the * key. Atthis time, does the hopper motorrotate for about 3 sec?

Install the developing assembly,and set the copy count to ‘20’.Select ‘P002’ in service mode (

). Does bit 9 (DTEP) on themessage display indicate ‘0’ (tonerpresent) during copying?

Is the connector disconnected?

Is the end of the outlet cover bent,limiting the amount of tonermoving from the hopper to thedeveloping assembly?

]2]

]4]

]2]

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

Action

Go to step 6.

Go to step 5.

Replace the hopperassembly sensor.

See “The hopper motorfails to operate.”

Check to make sure thatthe hopper assemblyand the developingassembly are connectedsecurely.

Replace the toner leveldetection PCB.


Connect the connector.

Replace the seal of theoutlet, and replace thehopper collars 1 and 2.

12. E030 (The total copy counter fails to turn on.)

13. E031 (The option counter has an open circuit.)



11-92

Cause

Option counter

Total copycounter

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Turn off the power switch, anddisconnect J104 from the DCcontroller. Set the meter to the ×1KΩ range, and measure theresistance between J104B-6 andJ104B-7. Is it about 500Ω?

Connect J104 to the DC controllerPCB, and turn on the powerswitch. Set the meter to the30VDC range, and measure thevoltage between J104B-6 (+) andJ104A-6 (–) on the DC controllerPCB. Does it change from about24 V to about 0 V and then toabout 24 V?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe total copy counter; ifnormal, replace the totalcopy counter.

Replace the total copycounter.


Cause

Total copycounter

Total copycounter

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Turn off the power switch, anddisconnect J104 from the DCcontroller. Set the meter to the ×1K range, and measure theresistance between J104B-2 andJ104B-1. Is it about 500 ?

Connect J104 to the DC controllerPCB, and turn on the powerswitch. Set the meter to the30VDC range, and measure thevoltage between J104B-2 (+) andJ104A-6 (–) on the DC controllerPCB. When the Copy Start key ispressed, does it change fromabout 24 V to about 0 V and thento 24 V?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe total copy counter; ifnormal, replace the totalcopy counter.

Replace the total copycounter.


14. E043 (Paper deck-A1)



Cause

Side deckdriver PCB

Deck mainmotor (M101)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is there electrical continuitybetween the following connectorson the side deck drive PCB?

Signal Connectors

38VU J5-1 Ö J9-1

0VU J5-2 Ö J9-3

DMFG J7-3 Ö J10-9

DMON J7-5 Ö J10-7

0VU J7-6 Ö J9-3

12VU J7-7 Ö J11-13

0VR J7-8 Ö J11-12

5VR J7-9 Ö J11-11

Replace the deck main motor(M101) of the paper deck-A1. Isthe problem corrected?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Replace the side deckdriver PCB.

End.

Check the harness fromthe DC controller PCB tothe motor; if normal,replace the DC controllerPCB.

15. E050

16. E051



11-94

Action

Replace the sensor(PS20).

Replace the holding trayY motor (M9).

End.


Cause

Holding tray Xhome positionsensor (PS21)

Holding tray Xmotor (M8)

Holding tray driver PCB

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the holding tray X homeposition sensor (PS21) normal?

Disconnect J209 from the holdingtray driver PCB. Is there electricalcontinuity between the followingpins on the motor side?

J209-1 and -2J209-5 and -6

Replace the holding tray driverPCB. Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action


Replace the holding trayX motor (M8).

End.


Cause

Holding tray Yhome positionsensor (PS20)

Holding tray Ymotor (M9)

Holding tray driver PCB

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the holding tray Y homeposition sensor (PS20) normal?

Disconnect J208 from the holdingtray driver PCB. Is there electricalcontinuity between the followingpins on the motor side?

J208-4 and -5J208-8 and -9

Replace the holding tray driverPCB. Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

17. E202 (The keys on the control panel are locked.)

18. E203

19. E204 (The keys on the control panel are locked.)



11-95

Cause

Scanner original leadingedge sensor1/2 (PS3/4)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Does the scanner move forwardwhen the Copy Start key ispressed?

Is the scanner original leadingedge sensor 1/2 (PS3/4) normal?(See the instructions on how tocheck the photointerrupters.)

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

See “The scanner failsto move forward.”

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB toPS3/4; if normal, replacePS3/4.


Cause

Scanner homeposition sensor

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the scanner at home positionwhen ‘E202’ is indicated?

Is the scanner home positionsensor (PS1) normal?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

Action


Replace the scannerhome position sensor.


Cause

Scanner homeposition sensor(PS1)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the scanner at home positionwhen E202 turns on?

Is the scanner home positionsensor (PS1) normal? (See theinstructions on how to checkphotointerrupters.)

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

See “The scanner failsto rotate.”

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller to PS1;if normal, replace thesensor PS1.


20. E210 (fault in lens X direction drive system)21. E212 (fault in lens Y direction drive system)

22. E213

23. E240



11-96

Cause

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Turn on and off the power switch.Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

YES/NO

YES

NO

Action

End.


Cause

Lens X homeposition sensor(PS6)

Lens Y homeposition sensor(PS7)

X direction beltsupport plate

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Does the lens move in X/Ydirection when the power switch isturned on?

Is the lens X/Y home positionsensor (PS6/7) normal? (See theinstructions on how to checkphotointerrupters.)

Is friction absent between the Xdirection drive belt and the beltsupport plate?

Replace the DC controller PCB. Isthe problem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

Action

See “The lens fails tomove.”

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB toPS6; if normal, replacePS6.

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB toPS7; if normal, replacePS7.

Replace the belt supportplate with one withspacers.

End.

Cause

Scanner lockingsolenoid (SL1)

Scanner lockedsensor (PS48)

Original leadingedge sensor 2(PS4)

Checks

Try stream reading. Is the scannerlocked at the center of thecopyboard?

Is the scanner locked sensornormal?

Is the original leading edge sensor2 normal?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

Action

Check the wiring up tothe scanner locking sole-noid and the connectors;if normal, adjust theposition of the solenoidor replace the solenoid.

Replace the scannerlocked sensor.

Replace the originalleading edge sensor 2.

24. E243

25. E710/E711

26. E712

27. E713



11-97

Cause

Malfunction

Connector

Sorter controllerPCB

DC controllerPCB

Checks


Is the connector (J703) connectingthe sorter and the copier securelyconnected?

Replace the sorter controller PCB.Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

Action

End.


End.


Cause

DC controllerPCB

Control panelPCB

Checks


Replace the control panel PCB. Isthe problem corrected?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

Action

End.


End.

Cause

Malfunction

Connector

RDF controllerPCB

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Turn off and then on the powerswitch. Is the problem corrected?

Is the connector (J772) connectingthe RDF and the machinesecurely connected?

Replace the RDF controller PCB.Is the problem corrected?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

Action

End.


End.


Cause

Malfunction

DC controllerPCB

Checks


Step

1

YES/NO

YES

NO

Action

End.


28. E800

29. E802



11-98

Cause

Malfunction

J716

Power switch(SW1)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Turn off and then on the powerswitch. Is the problem corrected?

Is the relay connector J716 underthe power switch (SW1)connected securely?

Set the meter to the × 1Ω range.Disconnect the relay connectorJ716, and connect the probe ofthe meter to the connectorterminal on the power switch side.Is the voltage about 30Ω?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

Action

End.

Connect it securely.

Replace the powerswitch (SW1).

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe power switch (SW1);if normal, replace the DCcontroller PCB.

Cause

Malfunction

DC controllerPCB

Power supplyunit

Checks

Turn off and on the power switch.Is the problem corrected?

Replace the DC controller PCB. Isthe problem corrected?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

End.

End.

Check the wiring andelectrical continuity fromthe DC controller to thepower switch (SW1); ifnormal, replace the DCcontroller PCB.

30. AC power is absent.



11-99

Cause

Power plug

Power source

Circuit breaker(CB1)

Power supplycord, Line filter(LF1)

Front door

Front doorswitch (SW2)

Front doorswitch (SW2)

Wiring

Power supplyswitch (SW1)

Wiring

Checks

Is the power plug connected to thepower outlet?

Is the rated AC voltage present atthe power source?

Is the rated voltage presentbetween J301-1 and J301-5,between J301-3 and J301-5, andbetween J302-1 and J302-3?(J301 and J302 are in the powersupply unit.)

Press the button on the circuitbreaker (CB1). Is AC powersupplied?

Replace the power cord and theline filter (LF1). Is AC powersupplied?

Is the front door closed securely?

Is the front door switch (SW2)firmly pressed when the front dooris closed?

Remove the door switch, andconnect the probe of the meter todoor switches 1 and 2 or 3 and 4;is the resistance 0Ω when theactuator is pressed and ∞Ω whenreleased?

Is the wiring connected to the doorswitch normal?

Connect the probes of the meterto both terminals of the powerswitch (SW1). Is the resistance 0Ω when the switch is turned onand ∞Ω when turned off?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

Action


The problem is not themachine’s. Advise theuser.

End.

End.

End.

Check the wiring of theAC power line, andcheck the connectors forpoor contact.

Close the front door.

Adjust the position of theswitch (SW2).

Replace the door switch.

Connect it correctly.

Replace the powerswitch.

Check the wiring of theAC power supply line.Check the connectors forpoor contact.

31. DC power supply is absent.



11-100

Cause

AC power supply

Wiring, DC load

DC power supply PCB

Checks

Is the specified voltage presentbetween J301-1 and J301-5,between J301-3 and J301-5, andbetween J302-1 and J302-3?(J301 and J302 are in the DCpower supply unit.)

Has the fuse (FU51, FU1) on theDC power supply blown?

Turn off the power switch, and dis-connect the power plug. About 1min thereafter, connect the powerpug. Is DC power present whenthe power switch is turned on?

Turn off the power switch, anddisconnect all connectors from theDC power supply PCB (J303,J304, J305, J306, J308, J309,J311). Turn on the power switch,and measure the voltage betweenthe terminals shown. Is it asindicated?

However, the above assumes thatthe inaccuracy of the AC input is±10%.

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

Action

See “AC power isabsent.”

Remove the cause, andreplace the fuse.

End.

Turn off the powerswitch, connect one ofthe disconnected con-nectors, and turn on thepower. Repeat this for allconnectors to find theone which activates theprotection circuit. Checkthe wiring and DC loadsfrom that connector.

Replace the DC powersupply PCB.

Connector

J303

J304

J305

J306

J308

J309

J311

Pin

12324135711351312

Output

38VU38VU38VU24VR24VU24VU24VR5VR12VU24VU24VU24VA38VU24VU24VU224VA238VU

Remarks

+10%,-7%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%

±2%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%

±2%±4%

+10%,-7%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%

+10%,-20%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%+10%,-7%

32. Pick-up fails. (deck pick-up; front paper deck + cassette)



11-101

Cause

Upper rightdoor, Lower rightdoor

Lifter

Pick-up roller

Belt

Drive belt,Gear, Coupling

DC controllerPCB output

Deck pick-upclutch (CL14,right deck;Cl16, left deck)

Checks

Are the upper right door and thelower right door closed securely?

Slide out the deck from themachine. Does the lifter movedown? Set the deck. Is the soundof the lifter moving up heard?

Does the pick-up roller rotate?

Is the belt used to transmit driveto the pick-up roller attachedcorrectly?

Is the drive from the pick-up motortransmitted to the pick-upassembly through the drive belt,gear, and coupling?

Set the meter to the 30VDCrange. Does the voltage betweenJ116A-2/J121A-5 and GNDchange from 24 to 0 V when theCopy Start key is pressed?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

Close the door securely.

See “The lifter fails tomove up.”

If the roller is soiled,clean it with alcohol. Ifdeformation by wear isnoted, replace it.

Attach the belt correctly.

Check the drive belt,gear, and coupling.


Check the wiring up tothe clutch; if normal,replace the clutch.

33. The deck lifter fails to move up. (front paper deck + cassette)



11-102

Cause

Deck

Lifter cable

Spring, Lever

Pick-up motor(M2)

DC controllerPCB, Deckopen/closedsensor (PS38,right deck;PS40, left deck)

Lifter positionsensor (PS32,right deck;PS40, left deck)

Deck lifter drivemotor (M18,right deck; M19,left deck)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the deck set correctly?

Is the lifter cable routed correctly?

Push down the pick-up rollerreleasing lever with a finger. Doesthe pick-up roller move down?

Does the pick-up motor (M2)rotate?

Set the meter to the 12VDCrange. Does the voltage betweenJ116B-8/J121A-2 and GND (–) onthe DC controller PCB changefrom about 0 to 5 V when the deckis closed?

Set the meter to the 12VDCrange. Is the voltage betweenJ116A-7/4 (+) and GND (–) asindicated when the deck isopened/closed?

when closed, 0 Vwhen opened, 5 V

Set the meter to the 30VDCrange. Does the voltage betweenJ119B-9 (left)/11(right) (+) andGND (–) on the DC controller PCBchange from 0 to 24 V when thedeck is slid into the machine?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

Action

Set the deck correctly.

Route the cablecorrectly.

Remove the pick-upassembly, and check thespring and the lever.

Go to step 6.


Check the wiring up tothe sensor; if normal,replace the sensor.

Check the lever and thewiring; if normal, replacethe sensor.

Check the wiring up tothe deck lifer drivemotor; if normal, replacethe clutch.


34. Pick-up fails. (cassette pick-up)



11-103

Cause

Drive gear

Upper right door,Lower right door

Locking spring

Vertical pathroller 0 clutch(CL18), Vertical pathroller 1 clutch(CL15), Vertical pathroller 2 clutch(CL17), Vertical pathroller 3 clutch(CL11), Vertical pathroller 4 clutch(CL13)

Registrationroller, Drive clutch

Pick-up assembly

Checks

Slide in and out the cassette. Isthe sound of the lifter falling andthe lifter motor turning heard?

Is the drive belt attachedcorrectly?

Are the upper right door and thelower right door fully closed?

Are the upper right door and thelower right door keeping thevertical path rollers 0, 1, 2, 3, and4 in place?

Open the upper right door and thelower right door, and insert ascrewdriver into the door switch.Do the vertical path rollers 0, 1, 2,3, and 4 rotate when the CopyStart key is pressed?

Is the leading edge of the copypaper as far as the registrationroller assembly?

Open the upper right door and thelower right door, and insert ascrewdriver into the door switch.Does the feeding/separation rollerrotate when the Copy Start key ispressed?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

Action



Close the doors.

Check the spring usedfor locking.

Check the wiring; if nor-mal, replace the clutch.

See “The registrationroller fails to rotate.”

Go to step 9.

Cont’d



11-104

Cause

Pick-up clutch

DC controllerPCB

Sensor

Pick-up assembly

Checks

Set the meter to the 30VDCrange, and connect the probes ofthe meter to the connectors on theDC controller shown. Does thevoltage change from 24 to 0 Vwhen the Copy Start key ispressed?

Find out which sensor found the jamusing ‘B-JAM’ in service mode (

). Is the sensor normal?]

4]

Step

8

9

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

Action

Check the wiring; ifnormal, replace thecorresponding clutch.


Check the wiring and thelever; if normal, replacethe sensor.

Remove the pick-upassembly, and check thespring.

Cassette Clutch + –

3 CL10 J117A-2 GND

4 CL12 J130A-2 GND

35. The lifter fails to move up. (cassette)



11-105

Cause

Cassette sizedetecting switch

Gear, Lever

Latch assembly(cassette)

Spring, Lever

Lifter positionsensor

Cassette 3 liftermotor (M14),Cassette 4 liftermotor (M15)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the size of the cassetteindicated on the message display?

Slide out the cassette, and moveup the lifter by hand. Does it movesmoothly?

Is the movement of the latchassembly of the grip on thecassette normal?

Push up the pick-up rollerreleasing lever with a finger. Doesthe pick-up roller move down?

Is the lifter sensor (PS25, PS28)normal?

Connect the connectors, and turnon the power switch. Set themeter to the 30VDC range, andconnect the – probe to GND, andthe + probe to the following. Doesthe voltage change from about 0to 24 V when the cassette is slidin?

M14:J119A-9M15:J119A-11

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Check the cassette sizedetecting switch.

Remove the pick-upassembly, and check thegear and the lever.

Install the latchassembly correctly.

Remove the pick-upassembly, and check thespring and the lever.


Remove the pick-upassembly, and check thegear; if normal, replacethe motor.


36. Pick-up fails. (multifeeder)



11-106

Cause

Pick-up roller,Pick-up/feedingroller,Separationroller

Belt, Gear,Coupling

DC controllerPCB

Multifeederpick-up clutch(CL7)

Multifeederpick-up solenoid (SL10)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the orientation of the pick-uproller, pick-up/feeding roller, andseparation roller correct?

Is the drive from the main motortransmitted to the multifeeder pick-up assembly through the belt,gear, and coupling?

Is the leading edge of the copypaper as far as the registrationroller?

Set the meter to the 30VDCrange, and connect the probe ofthe meter to J115B-1 (+) andJ115B-2 (–) on the DC controllerPCB; then, select the multifeeder.Does the voltage change from 24to 0 V when the Copy Start key ispressed?

Connect the probes of the meterto J115B-11 (+) and J115B-12 (–)on the DC controller PCB. Doesthe voltage change from about 0 Vto 24 V and then to 0 V when theCopy Start key is pressed?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

Action

Install the rollerscorrectly.

Check the belt, gear,and coupling.

See “The registrationroller fails to rotate.”


Replace the multifeederpick-up clutch (CL7).

Replace the multifeederpick-up solenoid (SL10).


37. The vertical path roller fails to rotate.

38. The registration roller fails to rotate.



11-107

Cause

Belt, Gear,Coupling

Registrationpaper sensor(PS23)

Registrationroller driveclutch (CL9)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the drive from the main motor(M1) transmitted to the registrationroller through the belt, gear, andcoupling?

Is the registration paper sensor(PS23) normal?

Connect the – probe of the meterto GND and the + probe to J108A-5. Does the voltage change fromabout 24 to 0 V as soon as theregistration roller starts to rotate?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Install the belt, gear, andcoupling correctly.


Replace the clutch(CL9).


Cause

Belt, Gear,Coupling

Vertical pathroller clutch

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the drive from the pick-up motor(M2) transmitted to each verticalpath roller through the belt, gear,and coupling?

Connect the – probe of the testerto GND and the + probe to the ter-minal indicated. Does the voltagechange from about 24 to 0 V assoon as the roller starts to rotate?

Vertical path 0 drive clutch (CL18) J115A-4

Vertical path 1 drive clutch (CL15) J117A-15

Vertical path 2 drive clutch (CL17) J121B-8



Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Install the belt, gear, andcoupling correctly.

Replace the appropriateclutch.


39. The scanner fails to move forward.

40. The scanner fails to move in reverse.



11-108

Cause

Cable

Scanner path

Scanner motor(M3)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the scanner drive cable routedcorrectly?

Is the scanner rail free of dirt?Does the scanner move smoothlywhen pushed by hand?

Set the meter to the 12VDCrange, and connect the probes ofthe meter to the terminals shown.Does the voltage change whenthe Copy Start key is pressed?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action


Is the surface of thescanner rail soiled? Isthere foreign object thatcomes into contact withthe scanner. Asnecessary, clean,lubricate, or correct.Reference:

If the surface of the railis soiled, clean it withalcohol, and apply asmall amount oflubricant.

Replace the scanner.motor.

Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe scanner motor; ifnormal, replace the DCcontroller

+ – Voltage

M3ON J112B-6 J112B-3 about 0 to 5 V

M3F/R J112B-7 J112B-3 about 0 to about 5 to 0 V

Cause

DC controllerPCB

Scanner motor(M3)

Checks

Does the scanner move forward?

Set the meter to the 12 VDCrange. Does the voltage betweenJ112B-7 (+) and J112B-3 (–) onthe scanner controller PCBchange to about 5 V when thescanner stops moving forward?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

Action



Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe scanner motor; ifnormal, replace thescanner motor.

41. The blanking exposure lamp fails to turn on.

42. The pre-exposure lamp fails to turn on.



11-109

Cause

DC controllerPCB


DC controllerPCB

Checks

Remove the blanking exposurelamp, and connect the connector.Select ‘BLANK’ in service mode( ). Does the blankingexposure lamp turn on when theuser mode key is pressed?

Replace the blanking exposurelamp. Does the new lamp turn oncorrectly?

]4]

Step

1

2

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

Action


End.


Cause

DC controllerPCB

Pre-exposurelamp PCB

Checks

Set the meter to the 30VDCrange. Does the voltage betweenJ103B-2 (–) and GND changefrom 24 to 0 V when the CopyStart key is pressed?

Step

1

YES/NO

NO

YES

Action


Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe pre-exposure lampPCB; if normal, replacethe pre-exposure lamp.

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

43. The scanning lamp fails to turn on.



11-110

Cause

Connector

Lamp (LA1)

Thermal fuse(FU1)

Lamp (LA1)

DC controllerPCB

Lamp regulator(LR1)

Wiring

Checks

Select ‘SCAN LAMP’ in servicemode ( ). Does the scannerlamp remain on for 3 sec whenthe user mode key is pressed?

Is the scanning lamp (LA1)installed correctly?

Disconnect the power plug fromthe power outlet, and remove thethermal fuse. Is there electricalcontinuity between both terminalsof the thermal fuse?

Set the meter to the Ω×1 range,and disconnect the connector J4.Does the index of the meter swingwhen the probes of the meter areconnected to both terminals of thelamp?

Set the meter to the 12VDCrange, and measure the voltagebetween J111B-8 (+) and J111B-5(–) on the DC controller PCB.Does it change from about 5 to 0V when the Copy Start key ispressed?


]4]

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

Action

The connector may havepoor contact. Check theconnector.

Disconnect the powerplug, and install the lampcorrectly.

Replace the thermalfuse.

Caution:The lamp may haveturned on wrongly, thefuse may be installedwrongly, or the coolingfan may be malfunc-tioning. Make checks.

Replace the lamp.


End.

1. Check the ACharness from thepower supply switchto the lamp regulator.

2. Check the DCharness from the DCcontroller PCB to thelamp regulator.

44. The hopper motor (M10) fails to operate.



11-111

Cause

Toner leveldetection circuit

DC controllerPCB

J770, J719

Checks

Execute ‘HPPR_MTR’ in servicemode ( ). Does the hoppermotor rotate?

Does bit 10 of ‘P002’ in servicemode ( ) indicate ‘0’ (tonerabsent)?

When the hopper motor is turnedon by executing ‘HPPR-MTR’ inservice mode ( ), does thevoltage between J105A-1 (+) andJ105A-2 (–) on the DC controllerPCB change from 24 to about 0V?

Is the connection of relay connec-tors J770 and J719 secure?

]4]

]4]

]4]

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

Action

Go to step 3.

If there is toner in thedeveloping assembly,replace the tonerdetection PCB.


Connect the connectorscorrectly.

45. The hopper motor (M11) fails to operate.

46. The drum heater fails to operate.



11-112

Cause

Toner leveldetection PCB

DC controllerPCB

J770, J720

Checks

Does the hopper motor rotatewhen ‘HPPR_MTR’ is executed inservice mode ( )?

Does bit 10 of ‘P002’ in servicemode ( ) indicate '0' (tonerabsent)?

When the hopper motor is turnedby executing ‘HPPR-MTR’ inservice mode ( ), does thevoltage between J105A-3 (+) andJ105A-4 (–) on the DC controllerPCB change to about 0 V?

Is the connection of the relay con-nectors J770 and J720 secure?

]4]

]2]

]4]

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

Action

Go to step 3.

If there is toner in thedeveloping assembly,replace the toner leveldetection PCB.


Connect the connectorssecurely.

Cause

DC controllerPCB

J7

AC driver

Drum heater(H3)

Drum heatercontroller PCB

Checks

Open the front door, and releasethe fixing/feeding assembly. Is theend of the drum warm? (Do NOTtouch the surface of the drum.)

Set the meter to the 12VDCrange, and connect the probes ofthe DC controller PCB to J120B-2(+) and J120B-1 (–) on the DCcontroller PCB. Does the voltagebetween terminals change to 5 Vduring copying and to 0 V duringstandby?

Is the relay connector J7connected securely?


Remove the drum, and set themeter to the Ω×1 range. Does theindex of the meter swing when itsprobes are connected to bothterminals of the heater?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

YES/NO

YES

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

Action

The drum heater isoperating normally.


Connect the connectorsecurely.

End.

Replace the drumheater.

Replace the drum heatercontroller PCB.

47. The lens fails to move.



11-113

Cause

Rail

Drive belt

DC power supply

DC controllerPCB

Lens motor(M4, M5)

Checks

Turn off the power switch, anddisconnect the power plug fromthe power outlet. Does the lensmove smoothly when the pulley ofthe lens motor is moved by hand?

Is the drive belt attachedcorrectly?

Set the meter to the 30VDCrange, and connect the probes tothe connectors J305-1 (+) andJ305-2 (–) on the DC controllerPCB. Is there 24 VU (DC)?

Set the meter to the 200 range,and connect the probes of themeter to the connectors of thelens motor indicated; is theresistance between connectors asindicated?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Check the rail for foreignmatter and dirt. Clean,as necessary.


See “DC power isabsent.”


Replace the lens motor.

MotorX motor

(M4)

Y motor(M5)

+J110A-1J110A-4J110A-1J110A-2J110A-4J110A-5J110A-10J110A-13J110A-10J110A-11J110A-13J110A-14

–J110A-2J110A-5J110A-3J110A-3J110A-3J110A-3J110A-11J110A-14J110A-12J110A-12J110A-12J110A-12

Resistance

about 135

about 48

about 135

about 48

48. The Add Toner indicator fails to turn on.

49. The Add Toner indicator fails to turn off.



11-114

Cause

Toner sensor(hopper assembly), DC controllerPCB

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is there toner in the hopperassembly?

Select ‘P002’ in service mode( ). Move the toner aroundthe toner sensor (TS1) to exposethe sensor. Does bit 10 on themessage display indicate ‘0’ (tonerabsent)?

Open the upper cover of thedeveloping assembly. Is the tonerlevel sensor blocked by toner?

]2]

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

Action

Go to step 3.

1. Replace the tonersensor (TS1).



2. Replace the controlpanel.

End.

Cause

Toner

Toner sensor(TS1)

DC controllerPCB/Controlpanel

Checks

Is there toner at the rear of thehopper assembly?

Select ‘P002’ in service mode ( ). At this time, does bit 10on the message display indicate‘0’ (toner absent)?

]2]

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

The level of toner insidethe hopper is notenough. Supply toner.

Replace the tonersensor (TS1) of thehopper assembly.


2. Replace the controlpanel.

50. The Set Control Card message fails to turn off.

51. The Set Control Card message fails to turn off.

52. Jams occur at the fixing assembly inlet.

53. The Add Paper message fails to turn off.



11-115

Cause

CC-V

Control panel

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Can copies be made withoutsetting a control card?

Replace the control panel. Is themessage indicated?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

Check the connector ofthe CC-V for a shortcircuit.

End.


Cause

Control card

DC controllerPCB

CC-V

Checks

Is the control card insertedcorrectly?

Can copies be made?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

Action



Replace the CC-V.

Cause

Coupling (fixingassembly wastetoner driveassembly)

Checks

Is the parallel pin groove of thecoupling chafed so that thecoupling does not movesmoothly?

Step

1

YES/NO

YES

Action

Apply lubricant to thecoupling contact area ofthe fixing assemblywaste toner driveassembly.

Cause

Cassette pick-up assembly

Checks

Does the gear of the lifter motor orthe cassette pick-up assemblyhave a missing tooth?

Step

1

YES/NO

YES

Action

Using a jig, install thelifer motor correctly. Or,replace the lifter motorand the cassette pick-upassembly at the sametime.

54. The fixing heater fails to operate.



11-116

Cause

Thermal switch(TP1)

Fixing heater(H1, H2)

AC driver PCB

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Slide out the fixing assembly, andconnect the probes of the tester toboth terminals of the thermalswitch (TP1). Is there electricalcontinuity?

Slide out the fixing assembly, andconnect probes of the meter toboth terminals of the fixing heater(H1, H2). Is there electricalcontinuity?

Is the voltage between theconnectors on the DC controllerPCB indicated in the table 5 V?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

Action

Replace the thermalswitch.

Replace the fixingheater.

Replace the AC driverPCB.


Heater

Main heater (H1)

Sub heater (H2)

(+)

J102B-5

J102B-3

(–)

J102B-1

J102B-1

55. Pick-up fails. (paper deck-A1)



11-117

Cause

Upper rightdoor, Lower rightdoor

Lifter

Deck pick-uproller

Belt

Drive belt,Gear, Coupling

DC controllerPCB

Deck pick-up/vertical pathclutch (CL102,pick-up; CL101,vertical path)

Checks

Are the upper right door and thelower right door closed firmly?

Slide out the compartment fromthe deck. Does the lifter movedown? Further, is the sound of thelifter moving up heard when thecompartment is set?

Does the pick-up roller rotate?

Is the belt used to transmit thedrive to the pick-up roll attachedcorrectly?

Is the drive from the deck mainmotor transmitted to the pick-upassembly through the drive belt,gear, and coupling?

Set the meter to the 30VDCrange. Does the voltage betweenJ2001A-9/J2001A-10 and GNDchange from 24 to 0 V when theCopy Start key is pressed?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

Close the doors.


If the roller is soiled,clean it with alcohol. Ifdeformation by wear isfound, replace the roller.


Check the drive belt,gear, and coupling.

Replace the DC controlPCB.

Check the wiring to theclutch; if normal, replacethe clutch.

56. The deck lifter fails to move up. (paper deck-A1)



11-118

Cause

Paper deck-A1

Lifter cable

Spring, Lever

Deck liftermotor (M102)

DC controllerPCB

Deck opendetecting switch(SW102)

Deck lifter position sensor(Q110)

DC controllerPCB

Checks

Is the deck set correctly?

Is the lifter cable routed correctly?

Push up the pick-up rollerreleasing lever with a finger. Doesthe pick-up roller move down?

Does the deck lifter motor rotate?

Set the meter to the 12VDCrange. Does the voltage between2001A-3 and GND (–) on the DCcontroller PCB change from about0 to 5 V when the deck is closed?

Set the meter to the 12VDCrange. Does the voltage betweenJ2001A-4 (+) and GND (–) on theDC controller PCB change asfollows?

when the deck is closed, 0 Vwhen the deck is opened, 5 V

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

Set the deck correctly.


Remove the pick-upassembly, and check thespring lever.

Go to step 6.


Check the wiring to theswitch; if normal, replacethe switch.



V. TROUBLESHOOTING FEEDING PROBLEMS

A. Copy Paper Jams

Jams in the machine tend to occur in any of the following blocks:q Pick-up assemblyw Separation/feeding assemblye Fixing/delivery assemblyr Drum cleaner assemblyt Holding tray assemblyy Feeding assembly

The troubleshooting procedures, therefore, are organized according to location.You can check the location and the type of jam using ‘B_JAM’ in service mode

( ; eight most recent jams).

Figure 11-501

#

e

t

q

r

y

w

]1]



11-119

1. Pick-Up Assembly



11-120

Cause

Pick-upassembly

DC controllerPCB, Pick-upclutch

Pick-up roller

Guide plate

Checks

Is the copy paper curled or wavy?

Try Canon-recommended paper.Is the problem corrected?

Is the pick-up roller of the selectedcassette, deck, or multifeederrotating during copying?

Is the pick-up roller deformed orworn?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

Action

Replace the paper.Advise the user on thecorrect method of storingpaper.

Advise the user on thecorrect method of storingpaper.

See the relevant section.

Replace the pick-uproller.

Check the guide platefor deformation.

2. Separation/Feeding Assembly



11-121

Cause

Copy paper

Registrationroller

Registrationclutch

Transfer/separationchargingassembly

Copy paper

Separation claw(cleanerassembly)

Feeding belt

Feeding fan

Checks

Is the leading edge of copy paperpast the registration roller?

Is the coupling of the registrationroller engaged correctly?

Is the registration roller worn,deformed, or soiled?

Is the roller retaining spring onboth ends of the registration rollerinstalled correctly?

Does the registration clutchoperating normally?

Is the transfer/separation chargingassembly set correctly?

Are there burrs on the paper guideof the transfer/separation chargingassembly?


Is the separation claw under thecleaner assembly damaged?

Are the two feeding belts movingnormally?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

YES/NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

YES

YES

YES

NO

YES

Action

Go to step 5.

Set the fixing/feedingunit correctly.

If dirt is found, clean itwith alcohol; if wear ordeformation is found,replace the part.

Set it correctly.

Check the transfer guidefor foreign matter anddeformation.

Check the registrationclutch.

Check thetransfer/separationcharging assembly.

Remove the burrs.

Advise the user to userecommended paper.

Replace the separationclaw.

Check the belt and thepulley.

Check the feeding fan tosee if it is operatingnormally.

3. Fixing/Delivery Assembly

4. Fixing/Delivery Assembly (reversed delivery)

Cause

Deliveryassemblyseparation claw

Upper/lowerroller

Paper guide

Nip

Cleaning belt

Sensor lever

Deliverysensor

Delivery paperdeflecting plate

Delivery rollerdrive assembly

Leading edgemargin



11-122

Checks

Is the separation claw worn ordeformed?

Is the upper/lower roller deformedor damaged?

Is the paper guide soiled withtoner?

Is the height of the paper guidecorrect?


Is the cleaning belt taken upcorrectly?

Does each sensor lever movesmoothly?

Are the external delivery sensor(PS10) and the fixing assemblyoutlet sensor (PS47) normal?

Is the delivery paper deflectingplate oriented in the direction ofdelivery?

Does the delivery roller movesmoothly?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

YES/NO

YES

YES

YES

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

YES

Action

1. Replace theseparation claw.

2. If dirt is found, cleanthe part with solvent.

Replace the roller.

Clean it with solvent.

Adjust the height.

Adjust the nip.

Check the fixing cleanerassembly.

Adjust so that the levermoves smoothly.

Replace the sensor.

Orient the paperdeflecting plate correctly.

Check the delivery rollerdrive assembly.

Check to make sure thatthe leading edge ofcopies has a margin.

Fix

ing

asse

mbl

y

Cause

Internal deliverysensor (PS12)

Delivery paperdeflecting platesolenoid (SL2)

Holding tray for-ward clutch (CL5)

Holding tray revers-ing clutch (CL4)

Checks

Is the internal delivery sensor(PS12) normal?

Does the delivery paper deflectingplate operate normally?

Does the holding tray inlet rollerrotate initially?

Does the holding tray inlet rollerrotate at the correct timing?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Action

Replace the sensor.

Adjust the position of thedelivery paper deflectingsolenoid, or replace it.

Replace the holding trayforward clutch (CL5).

Replace the holding trayreversing clutch (CL4).

Del

iver

y as

sem

bly

5. Cleaning Assembly

6. Holding Tray Assembly (two-sided/overlay copying, 1st side)



11-123

Cause

Transfer/separation chargingassembly, Pre-transfer charg-ing assembly

Separation claw(cleanerassembly)

Copy paper

High-voltagetransformer, DCcontroller PCB

Checks

Are the transfer/separation charg-ing assembly and the pre-transfercharging assembly set securely?

Is the height of the charging wireas specified?

Is the separation claw under thecleaner assembly damaged?


Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

NO

NO

YES

YES

NO

Action

Set the transfer/separa-tion charging assemblysecurely.

Adjust the height of thecharging wire.

Replace the separationclaw.

Advise the user to userecommended paper.

1. Check the high-voltage transformer.

2. Check the DCcontroller PCB.

Cause

Holding trayinlet papersensor (PS15)

Checks

Perform steps 1 through 3 under4. “Fixing Delivery Assembly.” Isthe problem corrected?

Is the holding tray inlet papersensor (PS15) normal?

Step

1

2

YES/NO

YES

NO

Action

End.


7. Holding Tray Assembly (re-pick up)

8. Holding Tray Assembly (overlay, re-pick up)



11-124

Cause

Holding trayseparationclutch (CL6)

Holding tray re-pick up rollersolenoid (SL6)

Holding traypick-up sensor(PS17)

Holding trayregistrationclutch (CL3)

Holding trayregistrationsensor (PS14)

Holding trayweight solenoid(SL7)

Checks

Is the holding tray separationclutch (CL6) normal?

Is the holding tray re-pick up trayrotating?

Is the holding tray pick-up sensor(PS17) normal?

Is the holding tray registrationclutch (CL3) normal?

Is the holding tray registrationsensor (PS14) normal?

Is the holding tray weight plateoperating?

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

NO

Action


Replace the solenoid(SL6).





Cause

Holding traypaper deflectingplate

Holding traypaper deflectingplate solenoid(SL8)

Holding trayreversing clutch(CL4)

Checks

Perform the steps under 7.“Holding Tray.” Is the problemcorrected?

Is there deformation or scratcheson the holding tray paperdeflecting plate?

Does the holding tray paperdeflecting plate operate at thecorrect timing?

Does the roller rotation reverse atthe correct timing?

Step

1

2

3

4

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

NO

Action

End.

Replace the paperdeflecting plate.


Check the wiring fromthe DC controller PCB tothe holding trayreversing clutch (CL4); ifnormal, replace theclutch (CL4).

9. Holding Tray Feeding Assembly



11-125

Cause

Holding trayfeeding clutch(CL1), Holdingtray feedingclutch (CL2)

Holding trayfeeding assem-bly 1 papersensor (PS8),Holding trayfeeding assem-bly 2 papersensor (PS9)

Checks

Is the holding tray feedingassembly set correctly?

Does the paper move correctlyinside the holding tray feedingassembly?

Are the holding tray feedingassembly 1 paper sensor (PS8)and the holding tray feedingassembly 2 paper sensor (PS9)normal?

Step

1

2

3

YES/NO

NO

NO

NO

Action

Set it correctly.

Replace the clutch (CL1or CL2).

Replace the sensor (PS8or PS9).

B. Feeding Faults

1. Double Feeding

2. Wrinkles

Checks

Turn off the machine while copypaper is moving through thefeeding assembly. At this time, isthe copy paper wrinkled or is itmoving askew?



Is the paper guide soiled withtoner?

Is the height of the paper guidecorrect?




11-126

Cause

Separationroller

Spring

Checks

Is the separation roller deformedor worn?

Step

1

YES/NO

YES

NO

Action

Replace the separationroller.

Replace the spring usedto pull the separationroller.

Cause

Pick-upassembly

Copy paper

Paper guide

Lower roller

Upper/lowerroller

Step

1

2

3

4

5

6

YES/NO

YES

YES

NO

YES

NO

NO

NO

Action

Check the pick-upassembly. Check theregistration roller.

The paper may be moist.Advise the user on thecorrect method of storage.

Advise the user to useCanon-recommendedpaper.

Clean the guide withsolvent.

Adjust the height of thepaper guide.

Adjust it.

Try replacing the upperand lower rollers oneafter the other.

Fix

ing

asse

mbl

y



11-127

VI. ARRANGEMENT AND FUNCTIONS OFELECTRICAL PARTS



11-128

A. Sensors

Figure 11-601

PS3PS1

PS4

PS7

PS48PS5

SVR1

PS22

PS30PS25

PS28PS29

SV2

SV1SVR3

SVR2

PS6

PS23

PS11

PS53PS12

PS52PS47

PS10

PS21

PS8

PS33

PS17PS14

PS19

PS9PS15

PS51

PS41

PS42

PS24

PS26

PS20

PS36

PS50

PS46



11-129

Table 11-601

Symbol

Q

Name

Photointerrupter

Variable resistor

Notation

PS1PS3PS4PS5PS6PS7PS8PS9

PS10PS11PS12PS14PS15PS17PS19PS20PS21PS22PS23PS24PS25PS26PS27PS28PS29PS30PS33PS36PS41PS42PS46PS47PS48PS50PS51PS52PS53

SV1SV2

SVR1SVR2SVR3

Function

Scanner home position detectionScanner original leading edge 1 detectionScanner original leading edge 2 detectionCopyboard cover open/closed detectionLens X home position detectionLens Y home position detectionHolding tray feeding assembly 1 paper detectionHolding tray feeding assembly 2 paper detectionExternal delivery detectionFixing cleaning belt length detectionInternal delivery detectionHolding tray registration paper detectionHolding tray inlet paper detectionHolding tray pick-up detectionHolding tray re-circulating bar home position detectionHolding tray Y home position detectionHolding tray X home position detectionMultifeeder pick-up detectionRegistration paper detectionPick-up vertical path 0 paper detectionCassette 3 lifter detectionCassette 3 paper detectionPick-up vertical path 3 paper detectionCassette 4 lifter detectionCassette 4 paper detectionPick-up vertical path 4 paper detectionPick-up vertical path 1 paper detectionPick-up vertical path 2 paper detectionUpper right door open detectionLower right door open detectionMultifeeder door open detectionFixing assembly outlet paper detectionScanner locked detectionCassette 3 open/closed detectionCassette 4 open/closed detectionClaw jam detectionFixing/feeding unit detection

Cassette 3 paper length detectionCassette 4 paper length detectionMultifeeder paper width detectionCassette 3 paper width detectionCassette 4 paper width detection

Figure 11-602

PS37

PS39PS34

PS35PS40

PS49

PS32PS31

PS38



11-130



11-131

Table 11-602

Symbol

Q

Name

Photointerrupter

Notation

PS31

PS32

PS34

PS35

PS37

PS38

PS39

PS40

PS49

Function

Right deck lifter position detection

Right deck paper detection

Left deck lifter position detection

Left deck paper detection

Right deck lifter limit detection

Right deck open/closed detection

Left deck lifter limit detection

Left deck open/closed detection

Left deck pick-up assembly outlet paper detection



11-132

B. Swithes and Solenoids

Figure 11-603

SL1

MSW4

SL6SL3

SL11

SL12

SL10

SL14

SL7SL8

SL9

SL2 SW2SW3

MSW5

SL13

SL15

SW1



11-133

Symbol

S L

Name

Solenoid

Microswitch/switch

Notation

SL1

SL2

SL3

SL6

SL7

SL8

SL9

SL10

SL11

SL12

SL13

SL14

SL15

SL16

MSW4

MSW5

SW1

SW2

SW3

Function

Scanner locking

Delivery paper deflecting plate drive

Fixing drive

Holding tray re-pick up roller (D-cut roller) drive

Holding tray weight drive

Holding tray paper deflecting plate drive

Holding tray swinging

Multifeeder pick-up

Cassette 3 pick-up roller release

Cassette 4 pick-up roller release

Fixing/feeding unit locking

Fixing cleaning belt drive

Multifeeder pick-up relay

Fixing assembly inlet guide drive

Waste toner feeding screw locked detection

Multifeeder door switch

Power switch

Door switch

Drum heater switch

Table 11-603

Figure 11-604

SL4

SL5



11-134



11-135

Table 11-604

Symbol

S L

Name

Solenoid

Notation

SL4

SL5

Function

Right deck pick-up roller release

Left deck pick-up roller release



11-136

C. Motors and Fans

Figure 11-605

M3

M4M5

M7

M2

M12

M10

M6

M9

M14M8

M15

M13

FM8

FM7

FM6

FM3

M1 M11

FM5

FM2



11-137

Table 11-605

Symbol

M

Name

Fan

Motor

Notation

FM2

FM3

FM5

FM6

FM7

FM8

M1

M2

M3

M4

M5

M6

M7

M8

M9

M10

M11

M12

M13

M14

M15

Function

Exhaust fan

Fixing heat discharge fan

Developing fan

Feeding fan

Cleaner fan

Scanner cooling fan

Main motor

Pick-up motor

Scanner motor

Lens X motor

Lens Y motor

Transfer/separation charging wire cleaning motor

Holding tray re-circulating bar motor

Holding ray X motor

Holding tray Y motor

Hopper motor (toner supply)

Hopper motor (toner stirring)

Primary charging wire cleaning motor

Pre-transfer charging wire cleaning motor





11-138

D. Clutches

Figure 11-606

Table 11-606

CL8CL7

CL18

CL9

CL15

CL17

CL11

CL13

CL2CL5

CL6

CL1

CL10

CL4

CL3

CL12

Symbol

CL

Name

Clutch

Notation

CL1CL2CL3CL4CL5CL6CL7CL8CL9CL10CL11CL12CL13CL15CL17CL18

Function

Holding tray feeding 1Holding tray feeding 2Holding tray registrationHolding tray reversalHolding tray forwardHolding tray separationMultifeeder pick-up DevelopingRegist roller driveCassette 3 pick-upVertical path roller 3 driveCassette 4 pick-upVertical path roller 4 driveVertical path roller 1 driveVertical path roller 2 driveVertical path roller 0 drive



11-139

Figure 11-607

Table 11-607

CL14

M18CL16

M19

Symbol

CL

M

Name

Motor

Clutch

Notation

M18

M19

CL14

CL16

Function

Right deck lifter drive

Left deck lifter drive

Right deck pick-up

Left deck pick-up

E. Lamps, Heaters, and Photosensors

Figure 11-608

DS3DS2

LA1DS1 H3

TP3

MFSVRLA2

TS2

VZ1

CNT2CNT1

TP2TH1

TH2

TP1

H2

H1

THHUM1

LF1CB1

TH

TS1



11-140

Table 11-608



11-141

Symbol

L F

CNT

C B

Name

Circuit breaker

Counter

Photosensor

Heater

Lamp

Line filter

Variable resistor

Thermistor

Environmentsensor

Toner sensor

Varistor

Thermal switch

Thermal fuse

Notation

CB1

CNT1

CNT2

DS1

DS2

DS2

H1

H2

H3

LA1

LA2

LF1

MFSVR

TH1

TH2

TH

THHUM1

TS1

TS2

VZ1

TP1

TP2

TP3

Function

Circuit breaker

Total copy counter

Accessories copy counter

Original size 1 detection



Fixing main heater

Fixing sub heater

Drum heater

Scanning lamp

Pre-exposure lamp

Noise filter

Multifeeder paper width detecting VR

Fixing heater main thermistor

Fixing heater sub thermistor

Drum heater thermistor

Temperature humidity sensor(internal temperature sensor)

Hopper toner sensor

Developing assembly toner sensor

Varistor

Fixing heater thermal switch

Scanning lamp thermal fuse

Drum heater thermal fuse



11-142

F. PCBs

Figure 11-609

t

!1

q

!0

!2

y

u!3i

r

e

w

o



11-143

Table 11-609

Ref.

qwertyuio!0!1!2!3

Name

DC controller PCBControl panel CPU PCBControl panel key PCBFL inverter PCBHVT PCBHolding tray control PCPotential control PCBAccessories copy counter PCBDrum heater controller PCBAC driver PCBLamp regulator PCBDC power supply PCBService switch PCB

Function

Sequence controlControl panel controlControl panel key input, LED indicationControl panel back-light lamp power supplyHigh-voltage outputHolding tray sensor, solenoid, clutch controlPhotosensitive drum surface potential controlAccessories copy counter signal relayDrum heater controlAC circuit controlScanning lamp controlDC power supplyService mode switching



11-144

G. Paper Deck-A11. Sensors and Switches

Figure 11-610a (paper deck-A1)

SW102

Q107

Q104

Q106

Q110Q108

Q102Q103

SW100

Q105

SW103



11-145

Table 11-610a (paper deck-A1)

Symbol

Q

Name

Photointerrupter

SwitchesMicroswitch

Notation

Q102Q103Q104Q105Q106Q107Q108Q110

SW100SW102SW103

Function

Deck lifter upper limit detectionDeck paper supply position detectionDeck set detectionDeck pick-up guide open detectionDeck vertical path paper detectionDeck pick-up paper detectionDeck paper absent detectionDeck lifter position detection

Deck open switchDeck open detecting switchDeck lifter lower limit detecting switch



11-146

2. Motors, Clutches, Solenoids, and PCBs

Figure 11-610b (paper deck-A1)

M102

q

w

SL101

CL101

CL102

M101

SL102

Table 11-610b (paper deck-A1)



11-147

Symbol

S L

CL

M

Name

Motor

Clutch

Solenoid

PCB

Notation

M101M102

CL101CL102

SL101SL102

qw

Function

Deck main motorDeck lifter motor

Deck vertical path clutchDeck pick-up clutch

Deck pick-up roller releasing solenoidDeck open solenoid

Side deck driver PCBOpen switch PCB



11-148

H. Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), andCheck Pins by PCB

Of the VRs, LEDs, and check pins used in the machine, those needed to service themachine in the field are discussed.

Caution:1.Some LEDs are dimly lit because of leakage current even when off; this is a

normal condition and should be kept in mind.

2. VRs that may be used in the field............

VRs that must not be used in the field.....

Caution:Those VRs and check pins not discussed herein are for use at the factory, requiringspecial tools and high precision. Do not touch them in the field.

1. DC Controller PCB

Figure 11-611

J101

J102

J103

J104

J105

J106

J107J108J109 J110J111J112

J113

J114

J115

J116

J117 J118 J119 J121 J122

J123

J125

J126

J128

J129

SW101

B12 B1 B9 B15B1 B1 B1 B20 B10 B1

1 2A1 A12 A1 A9 A20 A1 A1 A10

12 1

1 2

8 1 9 1

A15 A1 A8 A1

B1 B15 B1 B8

A13A1

B1 B13 B1 B15 B1 B12

A15 A1 A12 A1

A1 B9

A9 B1

A1 B11

A11 B1A1 B8

A8 B1A1 B10

A10 B1A1 B9

A9 B11

8

B1 A14

B14 A1B1 A15

B15 A1B1 A13

B13 A1B1 A14

B14 A1

A1 A15

J127

VR101

1 2

B1

B12

A12

A1

J2001

1 2

J20021

3

J1271 2



11-149

SW101-2

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

AB (4R4E)

200%

A4→A3, B5→B4

A4→B4

B4→A3, B5→A4

100%

A3→B4, A4→B5

B4→A4

A3→A4, B4→B5

50%

Ratio

200.0%

141.1%

122.4%

115.4%

100.0%

86.5%

81.6%

70.7%

50.0%

SW101-2

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

SW101-3

—

—

—

—

Voltage

100V

230V

230V

120V

Size (vertical)

AB

AB/Inch

A

Inch

Inch (4R3E)

200%

LTR→11"×17"

LGL→11"×17"

100%

LGL→LTR

LGL→11"×17"

11"×17"→LTR

50%

Ratio

200.0%

129.4%

121.4%

100.0%

78.6%

73.3%

64.7%

50.0%

Table 11-611

Caution:DIP SW 101-3 on the DC controller is for use at the factory only; do not touch it.Otherwise, the machine may malfunction.

Table 11-612

Table 11-613



11-150

Table 11-614

Table 11-615

Table 11-616

A (2R2E)

200%

A4→A3

100%

A3→A4

50%

Ratio

200.0%

141.4%

100.0%

70.7%

50.0%

AB/Inch (4R4E)

200%

A4/LTR→A3, B5→B4

A4/LTR→B4

B4→A3, B5→A4/LTR

100%

A3→B4, A4/LTR→B5

B4→A4/LTR

A3→A4/LTR, B4→B5

50%

Ratio

200.0%

141.4%

122.4%

115.4%

100.0%

86.5%

81.6%

70.7%

50.0%

Connector

J123

J125

J126

J129

Description

For factory

For factory

For factory

For factory



11-151

2. AC Driver PCB

Figure 11-612

3. DC Power Supply PCB

Figure 11-613

J301

J302

J303

J304

J305

J306

J308J309

J3115

14

12

1

8

1

6

1

5

1

5

1

1

4

1

3

J6431 2J644

1 2

1 9J642

J6452 1

J6414 1



11-152

4. Control CPU PCB

Figure 11-614

J913

J912

J916

J915J911J923

J919J9201 16 1 15

B10 B1

A1 A10

1 91 2

14

1

18

1

18

1



11-153

5. Holding Tray Driver PCB

Figure 11-615

J201J202

J203

J204

J205

J206J207J208J209

J210

1 4 B13 B1 1 5

A1 A13 1

13

1

10

3

16 1 9 1 7 1 3 1



11-154

6. Potential Measurement PCB

Figure 11-616

Table 11-617

Table 11-618

J3 J1 J2

VR2

LED1

1 4 1 5 1 4

VR1

VR

VR1

VR2

Description

For factory

For factory

LED

LED1

Description

ON while drum surfacepotential is beingmeasured.



11-155

7. HVT1 PCB

Figure 11-617

Table 11-619

J301

J403

J203

J201 J202

1 3

1 104 1

1

5

VR201

1

2

VR

VR201

Description

For factory



11-156

8. HVT2 PCB

Figure 11-618

9. Inverter PCB

Figure 11-619

J956J9552

1

1

4

T502

T501

J501

J404

J402

J401

2

1



11-157

10. Lamp Regulator PCB

Figure 11-620

11. Counter PCB

Figure 11-621

Table 11-620

J651

1 25

J631

2

ON

SW931

J503

5

1

1 6

J501

SW931-1

0

1

0

1

SW931-2

0

0

1

1

Description

Assumes that the sub counter is not connected.

Assumes that the sub counter is a small-size copy counter.

Assumes that the sub counter is a two-sided copy counter.

Assumes that the sub counter is a large-size copy counter.



11-158

12. Side Deck Driver (paper deck-A1)

Figure 11-622

J6

J3 J7

J8 SW1

J5 J9

J10

J11

J4J103

1 2B14 B1

A1 A14

1 9

1

1 3

11

1

13

1

1

6

1 2

1

6 2

VII. SERVICE MODE

A. Outline

The machine’s service mode is divided into the following six:

Table 11-701

Each mode has sub menus as explained on the pages that follow, and may bechecked on the message display.

Reference:When you have selected a mode, you will find a specific page reference number inthe upper right corner of the display.



11-159

Item

*1**2**3**4**5**6*

Display

DISPLAY

I/O DISPLAY

ADJUST

FUNCTION

OPTION

COUNTER

Mode

Display mode

I/O mode

Adjustment mode

Function mode

Options mode

Counter mode



11-160

B. Using Service Mode

1) Open the front door, and insert the door switch actuator. If you want to make checkswhile making copies (I/O display mode), set the appropriate copying mode.

2) Press the service mode switch with a hex key.• The machine starts service mode and indicates ‘$’ in the upper right corner of the

message display.3) Enter the number of the mode (See table 11-701.) you want for checks or

adjustments using the key and the keypad; for example, , , and .4) Using the or key, select the appropriate screen.5) Make checks or adjustments.

• To store any input data, press the user mode key ( ).6) End service mode.

• Press the Reset key ( ) once to leave the current mode.• Press the Reset key twice to end service mode.• Service mode ends when you turn off the power switch or disconnect the power

plug. (It will not end, however, when you open the front door or the pick-up door.)

C. Using Adjustment Mode and Options Mode

In adjustment mode and options mode, the options made on the control panel arestored in the RAM on the control PCB so that they drive the machine as if they weremade on the variable resistor and switches.

Table 11-702 is the label attached behind the machine's front door.Each machine is adjusted at the factory, and the adjustment values are recorded on

this label.If you replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized the RAM, you must enter the

values recorded on the label in the RAM on the control PCB. By the same token, youmust record any new values you entered in the field on this label.

]

]3]]

Table 11-702



11-161

LIGHT_5

LIGHT_5P

AE_SLOP

GLEAM_5

BRAKE_SC

REGIST

LE_BLANK

F_BLANK

R_BLANK

TE_BLANK

PRIMARY

BIAS

PRETRANS

TRN_1

TRN_DUP

TRN_OVL

SEP_1

SEP_DUP

SEP_OVL

C1_STMTR

C1_A4R

C2_STMTR

C2_A4R

C3_STMTR

C3_A4R

C4_STMTR

C4_A4R

MF_A6R

MF_A4R

MF_A4

BOOK_ERA

ATM

DOC_ST

P_INT_RVL

RFAE_F5L

REAE_F9L

RFAE_F5R

RFAE_F9R

LA_LCKPS

LA_SPEED

RF_LENSY

11×17PSZ

LGL_PSZ

LTR_PSZ

LTRR_PSZ

STMT_PSZ

A3_PSZ

A4_PSZ

A4R_PSZ

A5_PSZ

B4_PSZ

B5_PSZ

B5R_PSZ

TYP TYP



11-162

Item

FTMP

RTMP

RHUM

LMP1

LMP2

WIRE

PLMT

LLMT

Description

Indicates the surface temperature (output of thermistorTH1) of the fixing roller.

Indicates the machine internal temperature (output oftemperature sensor on DC controller PCB).

Indicates the machine internal humidity (output ofhumidity sensor on DC controller PCB).

Indicates the activation voltage of the scanning lamp(100/120V model).

Indicates the activation voltage of the scanning lamp(230V model).

Indicates a value other than ‘0’ if the primary, pre-transfer, or transfer/separation charging wire cleanerstops at a point other than home position. The cleanercan at times return to home position when wirecleaning is executed in user mode.

Indicates ‘1’ during current control of the primarycharging assembly or when the current has reachedthe upper or the lower limit.

Indicates ‘1’ when the activation voltage of thescanning lamp has reached the upper limit; ‘2’ when ithas reached the lower limit.

Remarks

Unit:°C

Unit: V

Unit: V

1: error0: normal

0: normal1: error2: error

D. Display Mode ( )

Using the or key, select the appropriate screen.

Screen 1-1

]1]

1/9

•For LMP1 and LMP2, the activation control voltage value is indicated even whenthe scanning lamp is off.

If a value other than ‘0’ is indicated for ‘WIRE’ because of an error in the chargingcleaner, be sure to execute ‘wire cleaning’ in user mode.If the wire cleaner motor and the wire cleaner unit are normal, executing wirecleaning turns on the cleaner unit and stops it at home position, clearing theindication to ‘0’.(Unless you execute wire cleaning, the associated operation is prohibited and themachine will not be reset even when the machine is turned off and on.)



11-163

Item

LIFT

Description

Indicates ‘1’ if the lifter position sensor does not turn onwithin 8 sec after the UP command for the lifter (paperdeck/cassette) has been issued.Order of Indication• Paper Deck Typeright deck, left deck, cassette 3, cassette 4, side paperdeck (if installed)

Remarks

Resetting is byturning OFF andON the powerswitch.

Caution:

Screen 1-2



11-164

Item

DPOT

VAE

VL1T

VL1M

VL2M

VDT

VDM

Description

Indicates the surface potential of the drum.

Indicates the average surface potential during AEmeasurement.

Indicates the VL1 (light area potential) target value.

Indicates the VL1 (light area potential) measuredvalue.

Indicates the VL2 (developing bias light area potential)measured value.

Indicates the VD (dark area potential) target value.

Indicates the VD (dark area potential) measuredvalue.

Remarks

Unit: V

Unit: V

Unit: V

Unit: V

Unit: V

Unit: V

Unit: V

2/9

Screen 1-3

• Indicates ‘0’ when the HVT unit turns off.



11-165

3/9

Item

PC

GRID

PTC

TC

SC

BIAS

Description

Indicates the current value of the primary chargingassembly.

Indicates the grid current value of the primarycharging assembly.

Indicates the current value of the pre-transfer chargingassembly.

Indicates the current value of the transfer chargingassembly.

Indicates the current value of the separation chargingassembly.

Indicates the DC value of the developing bias.

Remarks

Screen 1-4



11-166

4/9

Item

DCMET-1

DCMET-2

DCMET-3

DCMET-4

Description

Indicates the output of the original size sensor 1.




Remarks

Screen 1-5

*1: No data is used to represent alarm in the machine.*2: For ‘B-ER’, the four bits to the right of 1–3 remain ‘0000’, and no E code is indicated.*3: For ‘B-JAM’, JAM associated with the RDF is limited to ‘0700’. For details, see the next screen (DF-

JAM).



11-167

5/9

Item

B-JAM0

B-JAM3

B-JAM6

B-ALRM *1

B-ER1 *2

B-ER2 *2

B-ER3 *2

A

B

Description

Indicates the locations of the most recent and the sec-ond most recent jams that occurred in the machine.

Indicates the locations of the third, fourth, and fifthmost recent jams that occurred in the machine.

Indicates the sixth, seventh, and eighth most recentjams that occurred in the machine.

Not used.

Indicates the most recent self diagnosis code for themachine (excluding RDF).

Indicates the second most recent self diagnosis codefor the machine (excluding RDF).

Indicates the third most recent self diagnosis code forthe machine (excluding RDF).

Indicates a type of E002 (temperature of fixing rollerfails to reach specific value within specific time).

Indicates the type of thermistor that detected E001(temperature of fixing roller exceeded specific value).

Remarks

See Table 11-703.*3

See Table 11-703.

See Table 11-703.

1: 70° to 100°C2: 100° to 150°C

1: main thermistor(TH1)

2: sub thermistor(TH2)

Screen 1-6

*1: The four bits to the right of ‘DF-ERR’ and ‘S-ERR’ remain ‘0000’ (no change).*2: For example, if ‘E480’ is detected,

DF-ERR: 8000 0000The ‘4’ of ‘E480’ represents the RDF, and is omitted in DF-ERR notation.‘E400’ cannot be indicated.

*3: For example, if ‘E530’ is detected,S-ERR: 3000 0000‘5’ of ‘E530’ represents the sorter, and is omitted in S-ERR notation.‘E500’ cannot be indicated.



11-168

Item

DF-JAM

S-JAM

DF-ERR *1

S-ERR *1

DF-ALM

S-ALM

Description

Indicates the location of the jam (in RDF).

Indicates the location of the jam (sorter).

Indicates the results of self diagnosis (RDF). *2

Indicates the result of self diagnosis (sorter). *3

Indicates the nature of the alarm (RDF).

Indicates the nature of the alarm (sorter).

Remarks

See Tables 11-708through -710.

See Table 11-704.

See Table 11-707.

See Tables 11-705and -706.

6/9

Higher-Order 2 Digits Lower-Order 2 Digits

To Reset, Open the front door,remove the jam, and close thefront door.*1: The location of a double feeding jam (lower-order 2 digits) is indicated as ‘00’ only

(01, 02, and so on are not used).*2: Indicates a jam in RDF stream reading; for a jam in left pick-up, check under ‘RF-

JAM’.*3: Applicable only to power-on jam.*4: Applicable only to power-on and initial rotation jams.

Table 11-703

Sorter Jam Code

Table 11-704



11-169

Code

01

02

03

04 *1

05

06

07 *2

Code

01

02

03

04

05

06

07

08

09

0A

0B

0C

0D

0E

0F

10

11

12

Notation

PS24

PS33

PS36

PS27

PS30

PS17

PS14

PS8

PS9

PS23

PS15

PS47

PS10

PS49

PS12 (*3)

PS52 (*4)

Q107

Q106

Sensor

Pick-up vertical path 0





Holding tray pick-up

Holding tray registration

Holding tray feeding assembly 1

Holding tray feeding assembly 2

Registration

Holding tray inlet

Fixing assembly outlet

External delivery

Left deck pick-up assembly

Internal delivery

Fixing claw jam

Side paper deck pick-up assembly

Side paper deck vertical path

Jam type

Delay jam

Stationary jam

Power-on jam

Double feeding jam

Timing jam

Sorter jam

RDF jam

Code

03

04

07

08

09

0A

Description

Feeding delay jam

Feeding stationary jam

Power-on jam

Door open jam (copy paper being fed)

Door open jam (during stapling)

Bin outside sensor jam

Sorter Alarm Code

Tray

Table 11-705

Stapler

Table 11-706



11-170

Code

02

Type

Overstacking

Resetting

Remove all sheets from the bins.

Code

01

02

03

05

06

07

09

0A

Type

Stapling down

Staple jam

Stapler safetymechanism ON

Stapler over capacity

Stapler capacity full

Paper size mixed

Bin inside paper

Staple absent

Resetting

Run a self check.

Open the front door, remove all staple jams, andclose the front door.

Open the front door, remove all jams, and close thefront door.





Set a new cartridge.

RDF Alarm Code

Table 11-707



11-171

Code

01

03

05

11

12

13

14

15

21

Type

Re-circulating lever idleswing

Pick-up/separationfailure

Original overriding paperstopper plate

Change in number oforiginals after jamrecovery

Wrong number oforiginals

Original pulled out

Wrong original size

Mixed original sizedetected in imagecomposition mode

Operation mode error

RDF

Stops

Stops

Stops

Stops

Counts up to100 sheets,and stops

Stops

Stops

Stops

Stops

Resetting

Turn on and off the original sensor(S1).

Turn on and off the original sensor(S1).

Turn on and off the original sensor(S1), and open and close the RDF.

Turning on and off the original sensor(S1).

Turns on and off the original sensor(S1), and open and close the RDF.




Turns on and off the original sensor(S1).

RDF Jam CodeRDF-D1

Table 11-708



11-172

Type

Original leftbehind

Original pulledout

Original pulledout

Lever idlerotation

Left pick-uptrailing edgeskew

Left pick-upfault

Left pick-updelay

Registrationdelay

Left pick-upskew

Left pick-upstationary

Right pick-updelay

Right registra-tion delay

Right registra-tion delay

Right pick-upstationary

Right pick-upleading edgeskew

Right pick-uptrailing edgeskew

Rig

ht/le

ft pi

ck-u

pLe

ft pi

ck-u

p

Sensor

S5

S1, S2

S15, S27

S29, S30

S3, S4

S3

S3

S2, S3

S3, S4

S3

S15

S16, S17

S17, S20

S17

S15, S16

S15, S16

Chronological sequence

The belt motor (M3) rotates in reverse. S5 detectsan original.

Pick-up motor (M1) turns on. S2 does not detect anoriginal for a specific period of time. S1 does notdetect an original.

The pick-up motor (M1) and the pick-up clutch (CL1)turn on. S15 does not detect an original for a specificperiod of time. S27 does not detect an original.

The re-circulating bar swings idly without cominginto contact with an original.

Left pick-up is executed. The original left S3 and S4with a discrepancy of 8 mm in timing.

Edge feeding is executed. The entire originalleaves S3.

The pick-up motor (M1) turns on. The original is fed foran equivalent of 500 mm. S3 does not detect the original.

S2 detects an original. The original is fed for anequivalent of 60 mm. S3 does not detect the original.

Left pick-up is executed. TS3 and S4 detect theoriginal with a discrepancy of 10 mm in timing.

S3 detects an original for an equivalent of 660 mmor more.

The pick-up motor (M1) turns on. The original is fed for anequivalent of 500 mm. S15 does not detect the original.

S16 detects an original. The original is fed for anequivalent of 160 mm. S17 does not detect the original.

S17 detects an original. The original is fed for anequivalent of 130 mm. S20 does not detect an original.


Right pick-up is executed. S15 and S16 detect theoriginal with a discrepancy of 15 mm or more intiming.

Right pick-up is executed. The original leaves S15and S16 with a discrepancy of 15 mm or more intiming.

Code

19

21

66

03

11

13

22

23

24

31

61

62

63

64

65

71

Rig

ht p

ick-

up

RDF-D1

If E402, E43, E406, and E408 are detected in sequence, an error will not be identified,as each has merely been detected no more than once.

Table 11-709



11-173

Type

Manual feed pick-up stationary

Manual feedpick-up delay

Manual feed pick-up stationary

Manual feeddelivery stationary

Manual feeddeliverystationary

Manual feed orig-inal left behind

Reversal lead-ing edge skew

Reversal origi-nal left behind

Reversal pick-up delay

Reversal pick-upleading edge skew

Reversal pick-up stationary

Reversaldelay

Reversalstationary

Streamreading

Errordetection

Man

ual f

eed

Rev

ersa

l

Sensor

S32

S20

S20

S20

S19, S20

S5

S3, S4

S3

S3, S5

S3, S4

S3

S5

S5

S20

S17


The feeding motor (M8) turns on. The original does notleave S32 after it has been fed an equivalent of 1000 mm.

The feeding motor (M8) turns on. The original is fed anequivalent of 1000 mm. S20 does not detect the original.


The belt motor (M3) turns on. The original is fed for an equiv-alent of 532 mm or more. S20 does not detect an original.

S20 detects an original. The original is fed for anequivalent of “length in feeding direction × 1.5” mmor more. The original does not leave S19.

The belt motor (M3) rotates in reverse. S5 detectsan original.

Reversal starts. S3 and S4 detect an original with adiscrepancy of 10 mm or more in timing.

Reversal starts. S3 detects paper.

Reversal starts. The paper is fed for an equivalentof 163 mm from S5. S3 does not detect paper.

Reversal starts. S3 and S4 detect an original with adiscrepancy of 10 mm or more.

Reversal starts. The original is fed for an equivalent of “lengthin feeding direction × 1.5” mm. The original does not leave S3.

The belt motor (M3) turns on. The original is fed for anequivalent of 115 mm. S5 does not detect the original.

S3 detects an original for an equivalent of “length infeeding direction × 1.5” mm or more.

• In stream reading, the speed of the belt motor (M3)when the leading edge of the original is at imageexposure start position is below a specific value.

• In stream reading, the copier sends a command foran outside control speed for the belt motor (M3).

• In stream reading, the point of edge feeding from thepre-registration sensor is within a specific range.

Any of the conditions for E402, E403, E406, or E408 is detected.Note: For each code, the first and the second faults are treatedas a jam; the third and the subsequent faults are treated aserrors. This is to prevent issuing an error in response to thewrong placement of an original. The count returns to ‘0’ whenthe power is turned off and then on again.

Code

91

92

A1

A2

A3

A4

15

51

52

53

54

14

41

F4H

FEH

RDF-D1

Table 11-710



11-174

Type

Delivery delay

Deliverystationary

RDF open

Pick-up signalerror

Initial originalleft behind

Size error

Stream reading error

Errordetection

Del

iver

yO

ther

s

Sensor

S5, S6

S6

S31

S13, S14,S23, S24,

S20

S17


S5 detects an original. The original is fed for anequivalent of 218 mm or more. S6 does not detectan original.

S6 detects an original for an equivalent of “length infeeding direction × 1.5” mm or more.

The RDF is identified as being open.

The right or left cover is identified as being openedduring operation.

The copier sends a command for pick-up when theRDF is not ready.

A large-size original is detected in reduced pagecomposition mode.

• In stream reading, the speed of the belt motor(M3) when the leading edge of the original is atimage exposure start position is below a specificvalue.

• In stream reading, the copier sends a commandfor an outside control speed for the belt motor(M3).

• In stream reading, the edge feeding stop positionfrom the pre-registration sensor is outside aspecific range.

Any of the conditions for E402, E403, E406, orE408 is detected.Note: For each code, from the first to the thirdfaults are treated as a jam; the fourth and thesubsequent faults are treated as errors. This is toprevent issuing an error in response to the wrongplacement of an original. The count returns to ‘0’when the power is turned off and then on again.

Code

25

26

E2

E3

E4

E6

F4H

FEH

Screen 1-7

70:Finnish80:Italian90:NorwegianA0:PortugueseB0:SpanishC0:Swedish

Guide to Version

00. 00. 01. 01.

R&D numberVersion number

Language*

Model (for Canon: 01)

*Language10:Japanese20:English

30:French40:German50:Danish

(20:North America; 21:UK)



11-175

7/9

Item

Q161

Q160

Q156

Q140

Q937

DF

SORT

Description

Indicates the version of the ROM (Q161) on thecontroller PCB.



Indicates the version of the ROM (Q140) on the DCcontroller PCB.

Indicates the version of the ROM (Q937) on thecontrol panel PCB.

Indicates the version of the ROM (IC2) on the RDFcontroller PCB.

Indicates the version of the ROM (Q937) on thesorter controller PCB.

Remarks

See “Guide to Version.”







Screen 1-8

Row number (00 to 19; in hexadecimal)

*1: On the touch panel,

XX. XX

Column number (00 to 15; in hexadecimal)



11-176

Item

KEY-CHK

DF-SIZE

DOC-SIZE

DOC-STS1

DOC-STS2

Description

Indicates the code of the key pressed on the controlpanel. *1

Indicates the size of the original detected by theRDF.

Indicates the size of the original detected by theoriginal size sensor of the copier.

Indicates the output (0/1) of the original size sensorof the copier. *2

Indicates the output (0/1) of the original size sensorof the copier. *2

Remarks

See Table 11-711.

8/9

Table 11-711

*2: Corresponding original size sensor.DOC,STSI: X X X X

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓1 0 3 2

Original detection circuit 2Original detection circuit 3





11-177

Notation

00. 0F

01. 0F

02. 0F

03. 0F

04. 0F

Key

Reset

Stop

Start

1

4

Notation

05. 0F

06. 0F

07. 0F

08. 0F

09. 0F

Key

7

Clear

2

5

8

Notation

0A. 0F

0B. 0F

0C. 0F

0D. 0F

0E. 0F

Key

0

3

6

9

ID

Notation

0F. 0F

10. 0F

11. 0F

12. 0F

Key

Pre-heat

Interrupt

User Mode

Guide

Screen 1-9



11-178

Item

MULTI

CST-1

CST-2

CST-3

CST-4

Description

Indicates the paper size sensor output and the widthof the copy paper set in the multifeeder.WIDE : paper width sensor output (analog)SW : paper length sensor output (0/1)SIZE : paper width (mm)

Indicates the paper size sensor output and the widthof the copy paper set in the cassette 1.WIDE : paper width sensor output (analog)SW : paper length sensor output (0/1)SIZE : paper width (mm)

Indicates the paper size sensor output and the widthof the copy paper set in the cassette 2.WIDE : paper width sensor output (analog)SW : paper sensor output (0/1)SIZE : paper width (mm)

Indicates the paper size sensor output and the widthof the copy paper set in the cassette 3.WIDE : paper width sensor output (analog)SW : paper width sensor output (0/1)SIZE : paper width (mm)

Indicates the paper width size sensor output and thewidth of the copy paper set in cassette 4.WIDE : paper width sensor output (analog)SW : paper length sensor output (0/1)SIZE : paper width (mm)

Remarks

100V model only.

100V model only.

9/9

E. I/O Display Mode ( )

Using the keypad, select the appropriate screen.The display indicates the state of the input and output ports.

Screen 2-1

Convert the bit data into hexadecimal data when making in terms of analog data (forexample, address P023 photosensitive drum potential signal).

]2]



11-179



11-180

Description

Pick-up motor drive signal

Drum motor drive signal

Developing fan drive signal

Developing clutch drivesignal

Holding tray feeding 1 clutchdrive signal

Scanner locking solenoiddrive signal

Multifeeder pick-up rollerclutch drive signal

Multifeeder pick-up solenoiddrive signal

Vertical path roller 0 driveclutch drive signal

Right deck pick-up clutchdrive signal

Left deck pick-up clutchdrive signal

Right deck lifter drive motordrive signal (paper decktype only)

Left deck lifter drive motordrive signal (paper decktype only)

Vertical path roller 1 driveclutch drive signal

Vertical path roller 2 driveclutch rive signal

Right deck pick-up rollerreleasing solenoid drivesignal

Address

P000-00

P000-01

P000-02

P000-03

P000-04

P000-05

P000-06

P000-07

P000-08

P000-09

P000-10

P000-11

P000-12

P000-13

P000-14

P000-15

Signal

M2ON

M1ON

FM5D

DEVCD

HTF1CD

SLCKSD

MFPCD

SL10BDSL10FD

CL18D

RDPUCD

LDPUCD

RDLMD

LDLMD

CL15D

CL17D

RDPURR

Jack

J114B-8

J111B-4

J115A-1

J112A-2

J112A-7

J114A-12

J115B-2

J115B-12

J115A-4

J116A-2

J121A-2

J119B-11

J119B-9

J117A-15

J121B-8

J116A-10

Remarks

0: ON

0: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

Notation

M02

M01

FM05

CL08

CL01

SL01

CL07

SL10

CL18

CL14

CL16

M18

M19

CL15

CL17

SL04



11-181

Description

Holding tray paper deflectingsolenoid drive signal

Holding tray weight solenoiddrive signal

Holding tray D-cut (pick-up)roller solenoid drive signal

Fixing assembly inlet guidedrive signal

Holding tray swing solenoiddrive signal

Cassette 3 lifter motor drivesignal

Cassette 4 lifter motor drivesignal

Cassette 3 pick-up clutchdrive signal

Cassette 4 pick-up clutchdrive signal

Pick-up vertical path roller 3drive clutch

Pick-up vertical path roller 4drive clutch drive signal

Cassette 3 pick-up rollerreleasing solenoid drivesignal

Cassette 4 pick-up rollerreleasing solenoid drivesignal

Fixing assembly inlet guidedrive signal

Wire cleaning motor HPsignal

Size detection drive

Address

P001-00

P001-01

P001-02

P001-03

P001-04

P001-05

P001-06

P001-07

P001-08

P001-09

P001-10

P001-11

P001-12

P001-13

P001-14

P001-15

Signal

HTPDD

HTWSD

HTDSD

FXGDSD

HTJSD

C3LMD

C4LMD

C3PUCD

C4PUCD

CL11D

CL13D

C3PURR

C4PURR

FXGUSD

Jack

J113B-9

J113A-4

J113A-5

J108B-15

J113B-5

J119A-9

J119A-11

J117A-2

J130A-2

J117B-2

J130B-2

J122A-6

J130A-10

J108B-14

—

J110B-4/-7/-10

Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

Notation

SL08

SL07

SL06

SL16

SL09

M14

M15

CL10

CL12

CL11

CL13

SL11

SL12

SL16



11-182

Description

Pick-up vertical path 0 paperdetection signal

Stream reading homeposition detection signal

Registration paper detectionsignal

Holding tray feeding assem-bly 2 paper detection signal

Holding tray feeding assem-bly 1 paper detection signal

Multifeeder paper detectionsignal

Fixing sub heater ONdetection signal

Fixing main heater ONdetection signal

Waste toner feeding screwlocked detection signal

Developing assembly tonerlevel signal

Hopper toner level signal

Original size 1 detectionsignal

Original size 2 detectionsignal

Original size 3 A detectionsignal

Original size 3 B detectionsignal

Not used

Address

P002-00

P002-01

P002-02

P002-03

P002-04

P002-05

P002-06

P002-07

P002-08

P002-09

P002-10

P002-11

P002-12

P002-13

P002-14

P002-15

Signal

PS24D

SCDP2

RGPD

PS9D

PS8D

MFS

SHOND

MHOND

WTFL

DTEP

TEP

DSZ1

DSZ2

DSZ3A

DSZ3B

Jack

J116B-7

J111A-8

J108A-7

J113B-12

J119A-4

J115B-7

J102B-4

J102B-6

J114B-1

J106B-8

J105A-6

J110B-5

J110B-8

J110B-12

J110B-11

Remarks

1: paper present

0: home position

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

0: toner absent

0: toner absent

0: original present

0: original present

0: original present

0: original present

Notation

PS24

PS04

PS23

PS09

PS08

PS22

H2

H1

MSW4

TS2

TS1

DS1

DS2

DS3

DS3



11-183

Description

Left deck pick-up roll releas-ing solenoid drive signal

CC-X count signal

High-voltage output enablesignal

Control card V drive signal

Feeding fan/cleaner fandrive signal (half speed)

Feeding fan/cleaner fandrive signal (full speed)

Fixing heat delivery/discharge drive signal (halfspeed)

Discharge/drive signal (fullspeed)

Potential sensor power-onsignal

Multifeeder pick-up relaysolenoid drive signal

Developing bias AC outputsignal

Roller electrode bias outputsignal

Pre-transfer/separation ACoutput signal

Scanning lamp ON signal

Fixing main heater drivesignal

Fixing sub heater drivesignal

Address

P003-00

P003-01

P003-02

P003-03

P003-04

P003-05

P003-06

P003-07

P003-08

P003-09

P003-10

P003-11

P003-12

P003-13

P003-14

P003-15

Signal

LDPURR

CCXNTD

HVTRMT

CCNTD

FM6D

FM6D

FM2DFM3D

FM2D

POT-S-ON

MFRLSD

BIASAC

PSTBIAS

PSTACSPAC

LAON

MHRD

SHRD

Jack

J121A-13

J123-6

J114A-10

J106B-1

J109-1/J114B-3

J109-1/J114B-3

J118B-7J104A-1

J118B-7

J103B-8

J115B-10

J114A-3

J114A-1

J114A-7

J114A-8

J102B-5

J102B-3

Remarks

1: ON

1: count up

0: ON

1: count up

1: half speed

1: full speed

1: half speed

1: full speed

1: ON

1: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

Notation

SL05

CCX10

HVT

CCV

FM06/07

FM06/07

FM02FM03

FM02

POT

SL15

HVT

HVT

HVT

LA1

H1

H2



11-184

Description

Scanner motor brake signal

Scanner motor forwardsignal

Scanner motor drive signal

Scanner motor (currentcontrol) current limiter

Scanner motor mode 1signal



Blanking exposure powersupply (0 V) signal

Control panel LCD back-lightsignal

Control panel CPU resetsignal

Internal signal (watch dog)

Power switch OFF signal

FT prohibit signal

Not used

Internal signal (tray X shiftstart)

Internal signal (tray Y shiftstart)

Address

P004-00

P004-01

P004-02

P004-03

P004-04

P004-05

P004-06

P004-07

P004-08

P004-09

P004-10

P004-11

P004-12

P004-13

P004-14

P004-15

Signal

M03BK

M03FW

M03ON

M03CL

M03MD0

M03MD1

M03MD2

B0V

LCDGHT

OPRST

PWOFF

PWOFF

Jack

J112B-5

J112B-7

J112B-6

J112B-4

J112B-10

J112B-9

J112B-8

J103A-8

J105B-11

J105B-5

J104A-8

J112B-1

Remarks

1: ON

0: forward1: reverse

0: ON

1: ON

0: ON

1: ON

0: reset

1: ON

1: ON

Notation

M03

M03

M03

M03

M03

M03

M03

LED2

LCD

OPEPANE

SW01

M3



11-185

Description

Front door open detectionsignal

Fixing/feeding unit detectionsignal

Internal delivery signal

Multifeeder door opendetection signal

External delivery signal

Fixing cleaning belt lengthdetection signal

Holding tray inlet paperdetection signal

Holding tray registrationpaper detection signal

Fixing assembly outlet paperdetection signal

Holding tray pick-up paperdetection signal

Holding tray re-circulatingbar home position signal

Hopper connector detection

Holding tray unit detectionsignal

Power switch ON detectionsignal

Control card detection signal

Internal signal (encodererror detection)

Address

P005-00

P005-01

P005-02

P005-03

P005-04

P005-05

P005-06

P005-07

P005-08

P005-09

P005-10

P005-11

P005-12

P005-13

P005-14

P005-15

Signal

FDOD

FFUCNT

IDPD

MFDC

EXDPD

CBOP

PS15D

PS14D

FXDEL

PS17D

HTLPD

HTCNT

SW1ON

CCNNT

Jack

J104A-3

J108A-2

J108B-12

J105A-9

J108B-7

J108A-13

J113B-10

J113A-3

J108B-4

J113B-11

J113B-6

J105A-4

J113A-14

J102A-6

J106B-2

Remarks

1: open

0: connected

0: paper present

1: closed0: open

1: paper present

1: belt absent

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

0: home position

0:disconnected

0: connected

0: ON

1: card present

1: error

Notation

SW03

PS53

PS12

PS46

PS10

PS11

PS15

PS14

PS47

PS17

PS19

HT

SW1

CCV



11-186

Description

Hopper motor (toner stirring)drive signal

Pre-exposure LED ONsignal

Hopper motor (toner supply)drive signal

Drum heater full-wave/half-wave switching signal

Total copy counter drivesignal

Accessory copy counterdrive signal

Scanner cooling fan drivesignal (half speed)

Scanner cooling fan drivesignal (full speed)

Fixing drive solenoid drivesignal

Fixing cleaning belt drivesignal

Delivery paper deflectingplate solenoid drive signal

Holding tray re-circulatinglever motor drive signal

Holding tray registrationclutch drive signal

Holding tray separationclutch drive signal

Holding tray forward clutchdrive signal

Holding tray reversing clutchdrive signal

Address

P006-00

P006-01

P006-02

P006-03

P006-04

P006-05

P006-06

P006-07

P006-08

P006-09

P006-10

P006-11

P006-12

P006-13

P006-14

P006-15

Signal

M10ON

PEXP

M11ON

DHRD

TCNTD

OPCNTD

FM8D

FM8D

FXDSD

SL14

DPDSD

M7ON

HTRGCD

HTSPCD

HTFWCD

HTRVCD

Jack

J105A-3J105A-4

J103B-2

J105A-1J105A-2

J102B-2

J104B-2

J104B-6

J104A-5

J104A-5

J108B-18

J108A-11

J108B-10

J113A-9

J113B-7

J113B-8

J113A-7

J113A-6

Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: half wave0: full wave

1: count up

1: count up

1: half speed

1: full speed

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

Notation

M11

LED1

M10

H3

CNT1

CNT2

FM08

FM08

SL03

SL14

SL02

M07

CL03

CL06

CL05

CL04



11-187

Description

Upper right door opendetection signal

Lower right door opendetection signal

Copyboard cover closedsignal

Scanner home position signal

Right deck open/closeddetection signal

Left deck open/closed detection signal

Cassette 1 paper length 0signal




Right deck paper detectionsignal

Left deck paper detectionsignal



Right deck lifter position sensor signal

Left deck lifter position sensor signal

Address

P007-00

P007-01

P007-02

P007-03

P007-04

P007-05

P007-06

P007-07

P007-08

P007-09

P007-10

P007-11

P007-12

P007-13

P007-14

P007-15

Signal

RUPDOP

RLWDOP

CBCC

SCHP

RDEOP

LDEOP

C1PL0

C1PL1

C2PL0

C2PL1

RDPD

LDPD

PS33D

PS36D

RDLTP

LDLTP

Jack

J119B-4

J119B-7

J112A-4

J111A-2

J116B-10

J121A-2

J122A-5

J122A-6

J122B-5

J122B-6

J116A-7

J121A-10

J119A-7

J121B-10

J116A-4

J121A-7

Remarks

1: closed0: open

1: closed0: open

1: closed0: open

1: home position

1: closed0: open

1: closed0: open

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: pick-upposition

1: pick-upposition

Notation

PS41

PS42

PS05

PS01

PS38

PS40

SV3

SV3

SV4

SV4

PS32

PS35

PS33

PS36

PS31

PS34



11-188

Description







Cassette 3 paper detectionsignal

Cassette 4 paper detectionsignal

Cassette 3 lifter positionsensor signal

Cassette 4 lifter positionsensor signal

Internal signal (fixingassembly temperature errordetection)

Internal signal (CVR errordetection)

Internal signal (SSR errordetection)

Internal signal (power supplyswitch open circuitdetection)

Internal signal (total copycounter open circuitdetection)

Internal signal (accessorycounter open circuitdetection)

Address

P008-00

P008-01

P008-02

P008-03

P008-04

P008-05

P008-06

P008-07

P008-08

P008-09

P008-10

P008-11

P008-12

P008-13

P008-14

P008-15

Signal

C3PL0

C3PL1

C4PL0

C4PL1

PS27D

PS30D

C3PD

C4PD

C3LTP

C4LTP

Jack

J122A-1

J122A-2

J122B-1

J122B-2

J117B-4

J130B-4

J117A-7

J130A-7

J117A-4

J130A-4

Remarks

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: paper present

1: pick-up position

1: pick-up position

Notation

SV1

SV1

SV2

SV2

PS27

PS30

PS26

PS29

PS25

PS28



11-189

Description

Holding tray feeding unitdetection signal

Fixing claw jam detectionsignal

Service switch detectionsignal

Scanner locked detectionsignal

Left deck pick-up outletpaper detection signal

Cassette 3 open/closeddetection

Cassette 4 open/closeddetection

Sub thermistor errordetection signal

Address

P009-00

P009-01

P009-02

P009-03

P009-04

P009-05

P009-06

P009-07

Signal

HTFCNT

FXCJS

SSWON

SCLK

LEXTPD

C3SS

C4SS

Jack

J119A-2

J108A-19

J106B-5

J114A-14

J121B-5

J117B-7

J130B-7

J108A-9

Remarks

0: connected

1: paper present

1: ON

1: locked

1: paper present

1: open 0: closed

1: open0: closed

1: error

Notation

HT

PS52

SSW1

PS48

PS49

PS50

PS51

TH2

Description

Not used

Holding tray feeding 2 clutchdrive signal

Fixing/feeding unit lockingsolenoid drive signal

Power supply unit internalrelay drive signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

P010-00

P010-01

P010-02

P010-03

P010-04

P010-05

P010-06

P010-07

Signal

HTF2CD

FFULSD

RL401D

Jack

J112A-9

J108B-2

J102A-5

Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

Notation

CL02

SL13

RL401



11-190

Description

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Multifeeder pick-up solenoiddrive signal

Internal signal (clock)

Not used

Pick-up motor brake signal

Address

P011-00

P011-01

P011-02

P011-03

P011-04

P011-05

P011-06

P011-07

Signal

SL10D

M02BLK

Jack

J115B-13

J114B-5

Remarks

1: ON

1: brake ON

Notation

SL10

M02

Description

Internal signal (digit)




Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

P012-00

P012-01

P012-02

P012-03

P012-04

P012-05

P012-06

P012-07

Signal Jack

J125-1

J125-2

J125-3

J125-4

RemarksNotation

Description

Internal signal (key return)








Address

P017-00

P017-01

P017-02

P017-03

P017-04

P017-05

P017-06

P017-07

Signal Jack

J125-5

J125-6

J125-7

J125-8

J125-9

J125-10

J125-11

J125-12

RemarksNotation



11-191

Description

Multifeeder paper widthsignal (analog)

Cassette 1 paper widthsignal


Photosensitive drumpotential signal (analog)



Not used

Address

P020

P021

P022

P023

P024

P025

P026

Signal

C1PW

C2PW

POT

C3PW

C4PW

Jack

J115B-4

J130B-10

J130A-12

J103B-9

J117B-10

J117A-12

RemarksNotation

SVR1

SVR4

SVR5

SVR2

SVR3



11-192

RDF-D1 (1/6)

Description

Solenoid 2 drive signal

Clutch 1 drive signal




Solenoid 1 drive signal(released)


Solenoid over drive signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Stopper motor (M7)excitation A signal

Stopper motor (M7)excitation B signal

Stopper motor (M7) drivesignal

AE sensor dischargingsignal

Edge detection signal

Cooling fan (M9) drive signal

Re-circulating motor (M4)drive signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

P027-00

P027-01

P027-02

P027-03

P027-04

P027-05

P027-06

P027-07

P028-00

P028-01

P028-02

P028-03

P028-04

P028-05

P028-06

P028-07

P029-00

P029-01

P029-02

P029-03

P029-04

P029-05

P029-06

P029-07

Signal

SL2D

CL1D

SL4D

SL6D

SL5D

SL1RD

SL1AD

EDGO

M9D

RCMD

Jack Remarks

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: OFF

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

1: ON

0: ON

0: ON

Notation

RDF-D1 (2/6)



11-193

Address

P030-00

P030-01

P030-02

P030-03

P030-04

P030-05

P030-06

P030-07

P031-00

P031-01

P031-02

P031-03

P031-04

P031-05

P031-06

P031-07

P032-00

P032-01

P032-02

P032-03

P032-04

P032-05

P032-06

P032-07

Description

Edge detection signal (S20)

Registration detection signal(S3)

Belt motor clock detectionsignal (S11)

Pick-up motor clockdetection signal (S9)

Pre-registration detectionsignal (S17)

Not used

Not used

Not used

D/A converter serial signal

D/A converter load signal

Reversing motor (M2) mode 0 signal

Reversing motor (M2) mode 1 signal

D/A converter serialcommunication clock signal

Delivery motor clockdetection signal (S12)

Not used

Not used

Internal signal (sensorsensitivity switch signal 2)

Internal signal (sensorsensitivity switch signal 1)

Reversing motor (M2) drive signal

Belt motor clock detectionsignal (S11)

Feeding motor clockdetecting signal (S22)

Pick-up motor (M1) CW rotation signal

Pick-up motor (M1) rotationspeed control signal

Pick-up motor (M1) CCWrotation signal

Signal

EDG

RG1

BTLK

PCLK

RGF

DLCLK

BTLK

FDCLK

Jack Remarks

0: paperpresent

0: paperdetection

Alternatesbetween 0 and 1.


0: paperdetection


0: ON



1: CW rotation

1: ON

1: CCW rotation

Notation

RDF-D1 (3/6)



11-194

Address

P036-00

P036-01

P036-02

P036-03

P036-04

P036-05

P036-06

P036-07

P037-00

P037-01

P037-02

P037-03

P037-04

P037-05

P037-06

P037-07

P038-00

P038-01

P038-02

P038-03

P038-04

P038-05

P038-06

P038-07

Description

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

DIP switch 1–5 detectionsignal



Right cover open/closeddetection signal (S23/S24)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Push switch 1 detectionsignal



Left cover open/closeddetection signal (S13/S14)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Re-circulating lever holddetection signal

RDF open detection signal(S31)

Manual feed et detectionsignal (S32)

Sub try detection signal(S28)

Signal

RCVF

LCVF

RFOS

MFST

TYP

Jack Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: closed

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: closed

0: hold

1: closed

1: paperdetection

1: closed

Notation

RDF-D1 (4/6)



11-195

Address

P039-00

P039-01

P039-02

P039-03

P039-04

P039-05

P039-06

P039-07

P040-00

P040-01

P040-02

P040-03

P040-04

P040-05

P040-06

P040-07

P041-00

P041-01

P041-02

P041-03

P041-04

P041-05

P041-06

P041-07

Description

Re-circulating leverdetection signal 2 (S30)

Re-circulating leverdetection signal (S29)

Pick-up roller home positiondetection signal 1 (S8)

Skew detection signal 2(S16)

Paper pick-up signal 2 (S15)

Power drop monitor signal

Stopper home positionsensor (S26)

Tray position detectionsignal (S25)

Not used

Original set LED ON signal

LED1 ON signal

LED2 ON signal

LED3 ON signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Matrix digit 0 signal




Matrix common 0 signal




Signal

RSC2

RSC1

PRHP1

SKW2

PDP2

SPHP

TRY

Jack Remarks

0: flag absent

0: flag absent

1: homepresent

1: paperdetection

1: paperdetection

1: low

1: homeposition

1: down

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

Notation

RDF-D1 (5/6)



11-196

Address

P042-00

P042-01

P042-02

P042-03

P042-04

P042-05

P042-06

P042-07

P043-00

P043-01

P043-02

P043-03

P043-04

P043-05

P043-06

P043-07

P048

P049

P050

P051

P052

P053

P054

P055

Description

A/D demultiplexer select signal 1



Encoder FV conversionadjustment signal

Feeding motor (M8) drivesignal

Feeding motor (CW) rotationsignal

Feeding motor mode 1 signal

Feeding motor mode 2 signal

Skew detection signal 1 (S4)

Manual feed registrationdetection signal (S19)

Original detection signal 1(S1)

Original detection signal 2(S27)

Pick-up detection signal 1(S2)

Reversal detection signal(S5)

Delivery detection signal(S6)

Power drop monitor signal(internal)

Belt motor current controlDA signal

Reversing motor currentcontrol DA signal

AE sensor LED (O) DA signal

AE sensor LED (G) DA signal

AE sensor LED offset DA signal

Original sensor (S1) DA signal

Registration sensor (S3) DA signal

Skew sensor (S4) DA signal

Signal

SKW1

MFRG

DOD1

DOD2

PDP1

TRS

DER

Jack Remarks

0: ON

1: CW rotation

0: paperdetection

0: paperdetection

1: paperdetection

1: paperdetection

1: paperdetection

1: paperdetection

1: paperpresent

1: down

Hexadecimal(4 digits)

Notation

RDF-D1 (6/6)



11-197

Address

P056

P057

P058

P059

P060

Description

Image leading edge sensor(S20) DA signal

Manual feed set sensor(S32) DA signal

Original sensor 2 (S27) DAsignal

Not used

Original detection VA resistance (VR1)

Signal Jack Remarks

Hexadecimal (4 digits)


Notation

Stapler Sorter-E2 (1/8)



11-198

Description

Feeding motor (M1) controlsignal

Push bar drive motor (M7)rotation control signal

Not used

Push bar drive motor (M7)drive signal

Guide bar motor (M8) pulsesignal 1




Reference wall drive motor(M6) control signal 1

Reference wall drive motor(M6) control signal 2

Non-sort paper detectionsignal (PI3)

Reference wall home position signal (PI13)

Sort paper detection signal(PI4)

Guide bar home positionsignal (PI16)

Multi guide drive motor control signal 1 (M5)

Multi guide drive motor control signal 1 (M5)

Address

P062-00

P062-01

P062-02

P062-03

P062-04

P062-05

P062-06

P062-07

P063-00

P063-01

P063-02

P063-03

P063-04

P063-05

P063-06

P063-07

Signal

FDPWM

GBMA

GBMB

GBMA

GBMB

GWMA

GWMB

NSPEXT

GWHP

SPEXT

GBHP

MGMA

MGMB

Jack Remarks

1: ON

1: UP

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: paper detection

1: home position

1: paper present

1: home position

1: ON

1: ON

Notation




11-199

Description

D/A converter serial signal

Not used

Feeding motor (M1) speedcontrol signal

D/A converter load signal

D/A converter serialcommunication clock signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Feeding motor (M1) CWrotation

Feeding motor (M1) CCWrotation

Stapler unit claw releasingsolenoid (SL5) drive signal

Paper path switchingsolenoid (SL1) drive signal

Paper retaining solenoid(SL3) drive signal

Stapler unit position clawreleasing solenoid (SL5)drive signal

Stapler motor (M2) CCWrotation signal

Stapler motor (M2) CW rotation signal

Address

P064-00

P064-01

P064-02

P064-03

P064-04

P064-05

P064-06

P064-07

P065-00

P065-01

P065-02

P065-03

P065-04

P065-05

P065-06

P065-07

Signal

FDMVC

FDMCCW

FDMCCW

MHRSLD

PSLD

PHSLD

HDRSLD

SPMCCW

SPMCW

Jack Remarks

1: speed control

0: load

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

Notation




11-200

Description

Bin shift motor (M9) drivesignal

Stapler until swing motor(M4) rotation signal

Stapler unit swing motor(M4) drive signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Stapler unit shift home position signal (S2)

Logic voltage monitor signal

Not used

Bin paper sensor 2 analoginput signal (S7)

Stapler paper sensor analoginput signal

Bin paper sensor analoginput signal (S4)

Feeding motor current analog input signal

Feeding motor speed controlanalog input signal

Matrix digit output signal 0





Matrix SEG output signal 0



Address

P066-00

P066-01

P066-02

P066-03

P066-04

P066-05

P066-06

P066-07

P067-00

P067-01

P067-02

P067-03

P067-04

P067-05

P067-06

P067-07

P071-00

P071-01

P071-02

P071-03

P071-04

P071-05

P071-06

P071-07

Signal

MVHP

Jack Remarks

1: UP

1: ON

1: ON

1: home position

0: down

At input, alternatesbetween 1 and 0.





Notation




11-201

Description

Matrix COM input signal 0





Gear switching solenoid(SL4) drive signal

Not used

All solenoids drive signal

Stapling home position signal (Q1)

Reference wall HP detectionsignal (PI13)

Stapler unit swing HP detection signal (PI9)

Multi guide HP detection signal (PI12)

Stapler unit swing prohibitposition signal (MSW2)

Stapler unit orientation position 2 signal (S1)

Stapler unit orientation position 1 signal (S1)

Paper retaining signal (PI11)

Not used

Multi guide drivemotor/reference wall drivemotor drive signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

P072-00

P072-01

P072-02

P072-03

P072-04

P072-05

P072-06

P072-07

P073-00

P073-01

P073-02

P073-03

P073-04

P073-05

P073-06

P073-07

P074-00

P074-01

P074-02

P074-03

P074-04

P074-05

P074-06

P074-07

Signal

GCSLD

SPL-HP

GWHP

SWHP

MGHP

SGSTPP

HLD2

HLD1

PHS

Jack Remarks

1: ON

1: all ON

1: home position

1: home position

1: home position

1: home position

1: stapleenabled

1: front signal

1: 2, rear 1staple

1: retainingposition

1: ON

Notation




11-202

Description

Stapling position LED4 ONsignal


Add Staple LED ON signal



Front access key LED ONsignal


Staple key LED ON signal

DIP switch 1-4 detection signal




Joint signal (PI1)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

P075-00

P075-01

P075-02

P075-03

P075-04

P075-05

P075-06

P075-07

P076-00

P076-01

P076-02

P076-03

P076-04

P076-05

P076-06

P076-07

Signal Jack

JNTS

Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: connectedto copier

Notation



11-203


Description





Front door open signal(MSW3)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Staple mode key check signal

Stapler unit set detectionsignal

Staple absent (SW1) signal

Stapler safety detection signal (MSW1)

Stapler unit swing positionsignal (PI10)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Front access key check signal

Shift down key check signal

Bin home position signal(PI18)

PCB check signal

Front door open internal signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

P077-00

P077-01

P077-02

P077-03

P077-04

P077-05

P077-06

P077-07

P078-00

P078-01

P078-02

P078-03

P078-04

P078-05

P078-06

P078-07

P079-00

P079-01

P079-02

P079-03

P079-04

P079-05

P079-06

P079-07

Signal

DROPN

HKEPN

SFTYSW

SWGP

BHP

DROPN

Jack Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: closed

1: ON

1: stapler unitpresent

1: stapleabsent

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: home position

0: S-order PCB

1: door closed

Notation



11-204


Description

Staple Start key check signal

Shift up key check signal

Feeding guide home posi-tion detection signal (PI6)

Bin paper detection signal(PI7)

Feeding guide UP signal(PI2)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Controller PCB LED1 ONsignal

Controller PCB LED2 ONsignal

Not used

Bin paper sensor 2 (S7) A/Dinput

Stapler internal paper sensor (S5) A/D input

Bin internal sensor (S4) A/Dinput

Feeding motor current (M1)A/D input

Feeding motor speed control(M1) A/D input

Stapler internal paper sensor (S5) D/A output

Swing motor current (M4)D/A output

Staple unit shift motor current (M3) D/A output

Address

P080-00

P080-01

P080-02

P080-03

P080-04

P080-05

P080-06

P080-07

P081-00

P081-01

P081-02

P081-03

P081-04

P081-05

P081-06

P081-07

P083-00~07

P084-00~07

P085-00~07

P086-00~07

P087-00~07

P088-00~07

P089-00~07

P090-00~07

Signal Jack Remarks

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: paper present

1: UP

1: ON

1: ON


Notation



11-205


Description

Bin shift motor current (M9)D/A output

Guide bar drive motor current (M8) D/A output

Bin paper light adjustment(S4) D/A output

Push bar drive motor current(M7)

Bin paper sensor 2 lightadjustment (S7) D/A output

Address

P091-00~07

P092-00~07

P093-00~07

P094-00~07

P095-00~07

Remarks

Hexadecimal(4 digits)

JackSignalNotation



11-206

Sorter-G1 (1/3)

Remarks

1: open

0: paperpresent

1: paper present

1: power down

0: connector off

0: connector off

0: connector off

0: connector off

JackSignal

SOP

BPD

Notation

MS1

PT1

Description

Joint signal (MS1)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Bin paper sensor

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not sued

Not used

Not used

Bin paper sensor

24V detection

Bin HP sensor connectordetection

Lead cam sensor connectordetection

Bin shift clock sensor connector detection

Guide bar HP sensor connector detection

Not used

Not used

Address

P062-00

P062-01

P062-02

P062-03

P062-04

P062-05

P062-06

P062-07

P063-00

P063-01

P063-02

P063-03

P063-04

P063-05

P063-06

P063-07

P064-00

P064-01

P064-02

P064-03

P064-04

P064-05

P064-06

P064-07

Sorter-G1 (2/3)



11-207

Remarks

1: HP

1: HP

1: HP

1: ON

0: ON

1: brake

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

1: ON

0: UP

Description

Feeding motor clock sensor

Bin shift motor clock sensor

Lead cam sensor

Bin HP sensor

Guide bar HP sensor

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not sued

Not used

Guide bar swing motor pulsesignal 0

Guide bar swing motor pulsesignal 1

Feeding motor clock sensor

Not used

Bin shift motor clock sensor

Guide bar swing motor control signal

Feeding motor PWM signal

Feeding motor brake signal

Bin shift motor PWM signal

Bin shift motor drive singal

Paper path switchingsolenoid drive signal

Not used

Paper retaining plate solenoid drive signal

Bin shift motor UP signal

Address

P065-00

P065-01

P065-02

P065-03

P065-04

P065-05

P065-06

P065-07

P066-00

P066-01

P066-02

P066-03

P066-04

P066-05

P066-06

P066-07

P067-00

P067-01

P067-02

P067-03

P067-04

P067-05

P067-06

P067-07

Signal

FMCLK

BMCLK

LCHP

BHP

SGBHP

GBMA

GBMB

FMCLK

BMCLK

GBMON

FMD

PSLD

PHSLD

BMUP

JackNotation

PI6

PI9

PI2

PI3

PI7

M3

M3

PI6

PI9

M1

M1

M2

M2

SL2

SL3

M2

Sorter-G1 (3/3)



11-208

Remarks

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: open

0: open

1: paper present

1: paper present

Description

DIP switch SW1

DIP switch SW2

DIP switch SW3

DIP switch SW4

Push switch SW2

Push switch SW3

Not used

Not used

Bin paper sensor D/A output 0








Joint sensor

Door sensor

Not used

Not used

Sort sensor

Non sort sensor

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

P068-00

P068-01

P068-02

P068-03

P068-04

P068-05

P068-06

P068-07

P069-00

P069-01

P069-02

P069-03

P069-04

P069-05

P069-06

P069-07

P070-00

P070-01

P070-02

P070-03

P070-04

P070-05

P070-06

P070-07

Hereafter

Signal JackNotation



11-209

Description

Primary charging wire cleaning motor drive signal

Pre-transfer charging wirecleaning motor drive signal

Transfer/separation chargingwire cleaning motor drivesignal

Primary charging wire cleaner HP signal

Not used

Address

P097-00P097-01

P097-02P097-03

P097-04P097-05

P097-06

P097-07

Signal

PCLM

PTRCLM

TSCLM

PCLHP

Jack

J103B-3J103B-4

J103A-1J103A-2

J108B-19J108A-1

Remarks

1/0: CW rotation0/1: CCW rotation



1: HP

Notation

M12

M13

M06

Description

Not used

Pre-transfer charging wirecleaner home position signal

Transfer/separation chargingwire cleaner home positionsignal

Not used

Holding tray Y motor holdsignal

Holding tray Y motor (phaseA) signal

Holding tray Y motor (phaseB) signal

Holding tray X motor holdsignal

Address

P098-00

P098-01

P098-02

P098-03

P098-04

P098-05

P098-06

P098-07

Signal

PTCLHP

TSCLHP

M08HLD

M08A

M08B

M09HLD

Jack

J113A-12

J113A-13

J113A-11

J113B-3

Remarks

1: HP

1: HP

Notation

M08

M08

M08

M09



11-210

Description

Holding tray X motor (phaseA) signal

Holding tray X motor (phaseB) signal

Holding tray Y homeposition signal

Holding tray X homeposition signal

Lens X motor hold signal

Lens X motor (phase A) signal

CVR PWM signal

Not used

Address

P100-00

P100-01

P100-02

P100-03

P100-04

P100-05

P100-06

P100-07

Signal

M09A

M09B

HTXHP

HTYHP

M04ACMM04BCM

M04A

Jack

J113B-2

J113B-4

J113A-10

J113B-1

J110A-3J110A-6

J110A-1J110A-2

J111B-7

Remarks

1: HP

Notation

M09

M09

PS20

PS21

M04

M04

Description

Lens X motor (phase B) signal

Lens Y motor hold signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

P101-00

P101-01

P101-02

P101-03

P101-04

P101-05

P101-06

P101-07

Signal

M04B

M05ACMM05BCM

Jack

J110A-4J110A-5

J110A-12J110A-15

RemarksNotation

M04

M05



11-211

Description

Lens Y motor (phase A) signal

Lens Y motor (phase B) signal

Lens X home position signal

Lens Y home position signal

Internal signal (lens Xoperation complete)

Internal signal (lens Yoperation complete)

Internal signal (holding trayX operation complete)

Internal signal (holding trayY operation complete)

Address

P102-00

P102-01

P102-02

P102-03

P102-04

P102-05

P102-06

P102-07

Signal

M05A

M05B

LXHP

LYHP

Jack

J110A-10J110A-11

J110A-13J110A-14

J110A-8

J110B-2

Remarks

1: HP

1: HP

Notation

M05

M05

PS06

PS07

Description

Not used

Not used

Internal signal (holding trayX shift start)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

P104-00

P104-01

P104-02

P104-03

P104-04

P104-05

P104-06

P104-07

Signal Jack RemarksNotation

Description

Internal signal(Holding tray Y shift start)

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Not used

Address

P105-00

P105-01

P105-02

P105-03

P105-04

P105-05

P105-06

P105-07




11-212

Description

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Digit 0 input

Address

P118-00

P118-01

P118-02

P118-03

P118-04

P118-05

P118-06

P118-07


Description

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Digit 1 input

Address

P119-00

P119-01

P119-02

P119-03

P119-04

P119-05

P119-06

P119-07


Description

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Digit 2 input

Address

P120-00

P120-01

P120-02

P120-03

P120-04

P120-05

P120-06

P120-07


Note: P122 through P124 are ports in the paper deck-A1.



11-213

Description

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Digit 3 input

Address

P121-00

P121-01

P121-02

P121-03

P121-04

P121-05

P121-06

P121-07


Description

Deck lifter UP signal

Deck lifter motor drive signal

Deck open LED ON signal

Deck pick-up roller releasingsolenoid drive signal

Deck pick-up clutch drivesignal

Deck vertical path clutchdrive signal

Deck main motor drive signal

Deck main motor double-speed signal

Address

P122-00

P122-01

P122-02

P122-03

P122-04

P122-05

P122-06

P122-07

Signal

DLUP

DLMON

DOLON

DPRSD

DPUCD

DVPCD

DMON

DMDS

Jack

J2001A-5

J2001A-6

J2001A-7

J2001A-8

J2001A-9

J2001A-10

J2001A-11

J2001A-12

Remarks

1: UP

1: ON

1: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: ON

0: doublespeed

Notation

M102

M102

LED100

SL101

CL102

CL101

M101

M101

Description

Deck pick-up guide opendetection signal

Deck set detection

Deck main motor drivedetection signal

Deck pick-up clutch opencircuit detection

Deck lifter lower limit detection signal

Deck open signal

Deck open detection signal

Deck lifter position detectionsignal

Address

P123-00

P123-01

P123-02

P123-03

P123-04

P123-05

P123-06

P123-07

Signal

DPUGO

DSET

DMDT

DPCDT

DLLD

DOPN

DOPD

DLPD

Jack

J2001B-7

J2001B-8

N.C

N.C

J2001A-1

J2001A-2

J2001A-3

J2001A-4

Remarks

0: open

0: open

0: ON

1: open circuit

1: lower limit

0: ON

0: open

1: pick-upposition

Notation

Q105

Q104

M101

CL102

SW103

SW100

SW102

Q110



11-214

Description

Deck paper supply positiondetection signal

Deck paper absent detectionsignal

Deck pick-up paperdetection signal

Deck vertical path paperdetection signal

Deck main motor brake signal

Not used

Deck open solenoid drivesignal

Not used

Address

P124-00

P124-01

P124-02

P124-03

P124-04

P124-05

P124-06

P124-07

Signal

DPSP

DPE

DPPD

DVPD

DMBRK

DOPSD

Jack

J2001B-1

J2001B-2

J2001B-3

J2001B-4

J2001B-5

J2001B-6

Remarks

1→0: papersupplyposition

1: paperpresent

1: paperdetection

1: paperdetection

1: brake

0: ON

Notation

Q103

Q108

Q107

Q106

M101

SL102

F. Adjustment Mode ( )

Using the or key, select the appropriate screen.Press the appropriate item to select. (The selected item is highlighted.)Enter a value, and press the OK key to store. Make a check by pressing the user

mode key.

Screen 3-1

]3]



11-215

1/17

Item

LIGHT-5

LIGHT-5P

AE-SLOP

GLEAM-5

Description

Use it to adjust the reference activationvoltage for the scanning lamp usedduring copying.

Use it to adjust the reference activationvoltage for the scanning lamp usedduring copying in photo mode.

Use it to adjust the intensity used whencopying a newspaper original in AEmode.

Use it to adjust the degree of optimumexposure.

Settings

–35~35

–35~35

0~1023

53~139

Remarks

A higher settingdecreases the copydensity.


A higher settingincreases the density ofthe copies of anewspaper original.


Screen 3-2



11-216

2/17

Item

BRAKE-SC

REGIST

Description

Use it to adjust the degree of brakingused when the scanner is moving inreverse.

Use it to adjust the leading edge marginused during copying (registration).

Settings

0~100

–100~100

Remarks

A higher settingincreases the degree ofbraking.

A higher setting delaysthe timing at which theregistration roller turnson (decreasing theleading edge margin).Unit: 0.1 mm

Screen 3-3



11-217

3/17

Item

LE-BLANK

F-BLANK

R-BLANK

TE-BLANK

Description

Use it to adjust the leading edge non-image width (blanking exposureactivation period).

Use it to adjust the front margin (blankexposure lamp activation period).

Use it to increase the rear margin (blankexposure lamp activation period).

Use it to adjust the trailing edge non-image width (blank exposure activationperiod).

Settings

–100~100

–100~100

–100~100

–100~100

Remarks

A higher settingincreases the leadingedge non-image width.

A higher settingincreases the frontmargin.

A higher settingdecreases the rearmargin.

A higher settingdecreases the trailingedge non-image width.

Screen 3-4



11-218

4/17

Item

PRIMARY

BIAS

PRE-TRANS

Description

Use it to adjust the application voltagecorrection value for the primary chargingassembly. (It is pre-adjusted at thefactory; enter the value recorded on theservice label if you have replaced theDC controller PCB.)

Use it to adjust the developing assemblybias. (It is pre-adjusted at the factory;enter the value recorded on the servicelabel if you have replaced the DCcontroller PCB.)

Use it to adjust the current for the pre-transfer charging assembly. (It is pre-adjusted at the factory; enter the valuerecorded on the label if you havereplaced the DC controller PCB.)

Settings

0~1023

Label value ±34

Label value ±200

Remarks

Screen 3-5



11-219

5/17

Item

TRN-1

TRN-DUP

TRN-OVL

Description

Use it to adjust the current (1st side) forthe transfer charging assembly. (It is pre-adjusted at the factory; enter thevalue recorded on the service label ifyou have replaced the DC controllerPCB.)

Use it to adjust the current (2nd side oftwo-sided) for the transfer chargingassembly. (It is pre-adjusted at thefactory; enter the value recorded on theservice label if you have replaced theDC controller PCB.)

Use it to adjust the current (2nd side ofoverlay) for the transfer chargingassembly. (It is pre-adjusted at thefactory; enter the value recorded on theservice label if you have replaced theDC controller PCB.)

Settings

Label value ±100

Label value ±100

Label value ±100

Remarks

Screen 3-6



11-220

6/17

Item

SEP-1

SEP-DUP

SEP-OVL

Description

Use it to adjust the current (1st side) forthe separation charging assembly. (It ispre-adjusted at the factory; enter thevalue recorded on the service label ifyou have replaced the DC controllerPCB.)

Use it to adjust the current (2nd side oftwo-sided) for the separation chargingassembly. (It is pre-adjusted at thefactory; enter the value recorded on theservice label if you have replaced theDC controller PCB.)

Use it to adjust the current (2nd side ofoverlay) for the separation chargingassembly. (It is pre-adjusted at thefactory; enter the value on the servicelabel if you have replaced the DCcontroller PCB.)

Settings

Label value ±200

Label value ±200

Label value ±200

Remarks

Screen 3-7



11-221

7/17

Item

C1-STMTR

C1-A4R

C2-STMTR

C2-A4R

Description

Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paperwidth basic value (STMTR) for thecassette 1.

Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paperwidth basic value (A4R) for the cassette1.


Use it to fine adjust or enter the paperwidth basic value (A4R) for the cassette2.

Settings

000~255

000~255

000~255

000~255

Remarks

100V model only.

100V model only.

100V model only.

100V model only.

Screen 3-8



11-222

8/17

Item

C3-STMTR

C3-A4R

C4-STMTR

C4-A4R

Description

Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paperwidth basic value (STMR) for thecassette 3.




Settings

000~255

000~255

000~255

000~255

Remarks

Screen 3-9



11-223

9/17

Item

MF-A6R

MF-A4R

MF-A4

Description

Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paperwidth basic value (A6R) for themultifeeder.

Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paperwidth basic value (A4R) for themultifeeder.

Use it to fine-adjust or enter the paperwidth basic value (A4) for the multifeeder.

Settings

000~255

000~255

000~255

Remarks

Screen 3-10



11-224

10/17

Item

BOOK-ERA

ATM

Description

Use it to adjust the width for book frameerasing.

Use it to select an operating environ-ment in relation to atmospheric pressure.0: 1 to 0.75 atm (up to altitude of 2500 m)1: 0.75 to 0.70 atm (up to altitude of 2500

to 3000 m)2: 0.70 to 0.65 atm (up to altitude of from

3000 to 3500 m)

Settings

10~30

0~2

Remarks

Unit:1 mmA higher settingincreases the margin.

A low atmosphericpressure tends tocause leakage; lowerthe target potential forpotential control.

Screen 3-11

* Used to adjust sheet-to-sheet distance for reduced image composition usingthe RDF (pp. 5-32 to -35 of the RDF-D1 Service Manual). The adjustments thatmay be made on the RDF may be made using the copier: a press on the DIPswitch for the RDF corresponds to a change in the settings in service mode.



11-225

11/17

Item

DOC-ST

P-INTRVL*

Description

Us it to adjust the original stop positionfor the RDF.The RDF will switch position for left,right, and manual feed pick-upmechanisms.

Use it to adjust the original-to-originaldistance for the RDF (2-on-1 mode).The RDF will switch position for left andright pick-up mechanisms.

Settings

–1023~1023

–1023~1023

Remarks

Unit:0.5 mmThe effective range isbetween –10 and +10,beyond which nochange occurs.

Unit:0.5 mmThe effective range isbetween –10 and +10,beyond which nochange occurs.

Screen 3-12



11-226

12/17

Item

RFAE-F5L

RFAE-F9L

RFAE-F5R

RFAE-F9R

Description

Use it to adjust the RDF scanning lampreference activation voltage (left pick-upin AE mode).

Use it to adjust the RDF newspaperoriginal intensity (left pick-up in AEmode).

Use it to adjust the RDF scanning lampreference activation voltage (right pick-up in AE mode).

Use it to adjust the RDF newspaperoriginal intensity (right pick-up in AEmode).

Settings

–1023~1023

–1023~1023

–1023~1023

–1023~1023

Remarks

A higher setting makesthe slope gentle.

A higher setting makesthe slope steep.

A higher setting makesthe slope gentle.

A higher setting makesthe slope steep.

Caution:Keep the following in mind when using ‘DOC-ST’, ‘P-INTRVL’, and ‘LA-SPEED’:1. These items operate on the memory settings of the RDF controller PCB. You

need not enter the settings if you merely initialized the copier's RAM, since theyare retained by the RDF.

2. The items are used to change the memory settings of the RDF controller PCB,and will not directly feed settings to the memory on the RDF controller PCB; theoperation will be as follows:

<Operation 1>

If you enter ‘5’ for ‘DOC-ST’ in place of the existing ‘2’, 5 – 2 = +3, shifting theoriginal stop position by +3.

<Operation 2>

If you enter ‘7’ for ‘P-INTRVL’ in place of the existing ‘5’, –7 – (–5) = –2, changingthe sheet-to-sheet distance by –2.

3. These items relate to SW1 on the RDF controller PCB; pick-up and deliverysettings will be by the user mode key (*) on the copier's control panel.



11-227

NEW OLD

Screen 3-13



11-228

13/17

Item

LA-LCKPS

LA-SPEED

RF-LENSY

Description

Use it to adjust the image leading edgefor the RDF-D1 (stream reading mode).

Use it to adjust the original feedingspeed in stream reading mode.

Use it to adjust the offset in the lens Ydirection in right pick-up mode of theRDF-D1 (adjusting the displacement ofthe lens reference position in right pick-up mode in relation to left pick-upmode).

Settings

2300~2500

–1023~1023

–50~50

Remarks

A higher settingadvances the timing atwhich registration turnson, thereby increasingthe margin.

A higher settingincreases the speed,thereby contracting theimage. about ±3 mm(total of 6 mm)

A higher settingincreases the margin instream reading mode(shifting the copyimage to the rear).Unit:0.1 mm

Screen 3-14



11-229

14/17

Item

11 × 17PSZ

LGL_PSZ

LTR_PSZ

Description

Use it to fine-adjust the paper joggingguide plate swing (duplexing unit) foreach paper size.

Use the item if pick-up faults occuror paper moves askew when pick-up is from the duplexing unit or intwo-sided/overlay copying.

Settings

–10~+10

Remarks

1 step = 0.183 mm × 2For each step, thechange will affect bothfront and rear paperjogging plates so that asingle step results in achange of 0.367 mm.(A negative valuedecreases the swingdistance.)

Screen 3-15



11-230

15/17

Item

LTRR_PSZ

STMT_PSZ

Description



Settings

–10~+10

Remarks


Screen 3-16



11-231

16/17

Item

A3_PSZ

A4_PSZ

A4R_PSZ

A5_PSZ

Description



Settings

–10~+10

Remarks


Screen 3-17



11-232

17/17

Item

B4_PSZ

B5_PSZ

B5R_PSZ

Description



Settings

–10~+10

Remarks


G. Function Mode ( )

Using the or key, select the appropriate item.Press the appropriate item to select. (The selected item is highlighted.)A press on the user mode key (*) will execute the selected item.Check to make sure that the machine is in standby before executing any item.

Screen 4-1

The display will indicate the message “Check the Developer” in response to apress on the * key. If the developing assembly has been installed, press the OKkey on the touch panel, and then press the * key.

]4]



11-233

1/11

Item

TONER-S

Description

Use it to supply toner during machine installation.The duration of supply will be indicated in seconds;normally, it takes 7 to 9 min (420 sec to 540 sec).Check that the developing assembly is set correctlyand locked in position before pressing OK to start.

Remarks

The operation will stopautomatically.

Screen 4-2



11-234

2/11

Item

ERROR

Description

Use it to initialize E000, E001, E002, E003, E005,E013, E020, jam history, error history, sorter jam,RDF jam, or alarm history.However, initializing E000 or the like will notinitialize the jam history.

Remarks

Screen 4-3

* The Start key (red),Start key (green),Energy Saver (Pre-Heat) key,Interrupt key,Additonal Functions (User Mode) key,Guide keyand pilot lamp will turn on and off in sequence.



11-235

3/11

Item

DISP-LED

LCD-CHK

SCANLAMP

Description

Use it to turn on the LEDs on the control panel.*

Use it to turn on the LCD on the control panel. (TheLCD back-light will turn off for 3 sec and then willturn on.)

Use it to turn on the scanning lamp. (At this time,the scanner cooling fan will also operate.)

Remarks

The lamp remains onfor 3 sec.

Screen 4-4



11-236

4/11

Item

BLANK

PRE-EXP

HPPR-MTR

BK-ROT

Description

Use it to turn on the blanking exposure lamp.

Use it to turn on the pre-exposure LED.

Use it to turn on the hopper motor. (M10 and M11rotate at the same time.)

Use it to turn on the developing cylinder.

Remarks

The lamp will remainon for 3 sec.

The LED will remain onfor 3 sec.

The motor operates for3 sec.

The cylinder operatesfor about 2 min.

Screen 4-5



11-237

5/11

Item

AE-ADJ

Description

Use it to execute density measurement levelautomatic adjustment for AE mode.If ‘0’ is indicated, set an F5 original.If ‘1’ is indicated, set an F9 original.

Remarks

Screen 4-6



11-238

6/11

Item

NIP

PO-CONT

Description

Use it to execute nip automatic measurement for thefixing roller.A solid black image will automatically be made andstopped at the fixing roller; it will automatically bedischarged in 20 sec.

Use it to turn on and off potential control.

Remarks

See p. 11-40.

1: OFF0: ON

Screen 4-7

* Slide out each cassette, and adjust the paper width guide plate inside thecassette to the appropriate size; then, slide in the cassette. Thereafter, selectthe item on the screen to execute.



11-239

7/11

Item

C1-STMTR

C1-A4R

C2-STMTR

C2-A4R

Description

Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paperwidth reference point 1 (STMTR) for the cassette 1.

Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paperwidth reference point 2 (A4R) for the cassette 2.



Remarks

100V model only.

100V model only.

100V model only.

100V model only.

Screen 4-8




11-240

8/11

Item

C3-STMTR

C3-A4R

C4-STMTR

C4-A4R

Description





Remarks

Screen 4-9


Figure 11-701

A4/A3

A4R

STMT-R

STMT-R(139.7mm)

A4R(210mm)

A4(297mm)

Paper width

(reference)

Var

iabl

e re

sist

or o

utpu

t



11-241

9/11

Item

MF-A6R

MF-A4R

MF-A4

Description

Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paperwidth reference point 1 (A6R) for the multifeeder.

Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paperwidth reference point 2 (A4R) for the multifeeder.

Use it to execute automatic adjustment of paperwidth reference point 3 (A4) for the multifeeder.

Remarks

Caution:The “A6R” width is one of the basic values to be used when the paper widthdetecting VR is replaced for the multifeeder; however, note that the size label doesnot have a notation indicating “A6R”, and you will not feel a click on the width guide.Keep in mind that A6R is A4 paper folded in fourths, and its width is 105 mm.

Screen 4-10

* The screen continues to indicate ‘0’ even after you have executed ‘START’. Tofind out whether the item is being executed or not, refer to LEDs 1, 2, and 3 onthe RDF controller PCB (flashing in sequence or simultaneously).



11-242

10/11

Item

RFSKEW

RF-AE

RFSE-INT

S-BCLN

Description

Use it to execute skew adjustment of the RDF.

Use it to execute automatic adjustment of the AEsensor for the RDF.

Use it to initialize the sensor of the RDF.

Use it to clean the separation belt of the RDF.

Remarks

*

Screen 4-11



11-243

11/11

Item

RAM-INIT

Description

Use it to initialize the RAM on the DC controllerPCB.

Remarks

After initialization, thescreen changes to theCopying Standardscreen.

H. Options Mode ( )

Using the or key, select the appropriate screen.Press the appropriate item to select. (The selected item will be highlighted.)Enter the appropriate value using the keypad.Use user mode to set/cancel each mode.

Screen 5-1

]5]



11-244

1/9

Item

SHUT-OFF

DENS-ID

SIZE-DET

COIN-SET

Description

Use it to turn on or off the auto shut-off function.

Use it to change the copy density notation.

Use it to turn on or off the size detection function.

Use it to change the notation for the control cardindicated on the control panel between coin or copycard.

Remarks

1: OFF0: ON

0: 9 steps1: 17 steps

1: OFF0: ON

0: control card1: coin2: copy card

Screen 5-2



11-245

2/9

Item

DK-SZ-R

DK-SZ-L

SDK-SZ

COPY-LIM

CALL-SW

Description

Use it to change the paper size for the right deck.

Use it to change the paper size for the left deck.

Use it to change the paper size for the paper deck-A1.

Use it to change the upper limit (number of copies;between 1 and 999).

1. You may select any available space in the current mode.2. Use ‘CALL SW’ under ‘OPTION’ in service mode (*5*);

initially, ‘0’.0 : Do not use for call function (all for mode memory).1–9 : Use for call function as selected (copy mode

storage).3. A mode may be “called” back as in mode memory.

(No storage occurs in a jam, alarm, interrupt, or startafter interruption state.)<If the setting is ‘3’,>7 of mode memory: copying mode used initially.8 of mode memory: copying mode used immediately

thereafter.9 of mode memory: copying mode used second

immediately thereafter.1–6 of mode memory: used as regular mode memory

functions.

Remarks

0: A41: LTR2: B5

0: A41: LTR2: B5

0: A41: LTR2: B5

Screen 5-3



11-246

3/9

Item

M-NOTATI

Description

Use it to change the paper size choices for themultifeeder.

Remarks

Screen 5-4



11-247

4/9

Item

U-NOTATI

AE-SW

DOC-F-SW

DF-SIZE

Description

Use it to change the notation for the universalcassette.0: U1, U2, U3, U51: paper size selected by CST-GRP

Use it to select the RDF’s AE or the copier’s AE.(Normally, the RDF’s AE is used when the RDF is inuse; select the copier’s AE if the RDF’s AE fails forsome reason.)Note: Stream reading is not executed if the RDF’s

AE is disabled.

Use it to turn on and off stream reading.

Use it to enable or disable detection for auto paperselection for a mix of AB and Inch originals (detec-tion for a AB/Inch mix; e.g., A4 and LTR originals).

Remarks

1: Copier0: RDF

0: stream reading on1: stream reading off

0: disable1: enable

Screen 5-5



11-248

5/9

Item

CST-GRP1

CST-GRP2

CST-GRP3

CST-GRP4

Description

Use it to select the paper notation if universalcassette notation (U-NOTARI) is set to ‘1’.0: G LTR (indicated as LTR)1: K LGL (indicated as U)

Use it to select the paper notation if universalcassette notation (U-NOTARI) is set to ‘1’.0: FLSC (indicated as FLSC)1: OFI (indicated as OFI)2: E-OFI (indicated as OFI)3: A-LGL (indicated as LGL)4: S-OFI (indicated as OFI)

Use it to select the paper notation if universalcassette notation (U-NOTARI) is set to ‘1’.0: G LGL (indicated as LGL)1: FOLI (indicated as FOLI)2: A FLS (indicated as FLSC)

Use it to select the paper notation if universalcassette notation (U-NOTGARI) is set to ‘1’.0: LTR (indicated as LTR)1: A LTR (indicated as LTR)

Remarks

Screen 5-6



11-249

6/9

Item

FUZZY

VDT-SW

CPMKP-SW

OHP_TEMP

Description

Use it to control (fuzzy) the current applied to thepre-transfer, transfer, and separation chargingassembly to suit the ambient temperature; or, to pro-hibit it and select one of three environment settings.

Use it to switch the dark area target potential (VDT)if the solid black on copies is too light.

Use it to turn on or off the sequence used to lowerthe copying speed to maintain fixing in low-temperature conditions.

Use it to lower the fixing temperature.

Remarks

0: fuzzy control ON1: if image is light

because of highhumidity

2: if average humidity3: if cleaner separation

claw and copy papercome into contactbecause of lowhumidity

press ‘0’, ‘1’, ‘2’, or ‘3’on the keypad, andpress the “ * ” key.

–2: make lighter–1: make somewhat

lighter0: default+1: make somewhat

darker+2: make darker

0: ON1: OFF

0: normal control1: normal control –5°C2: normal control –10°C3: normal control –15°C4: normal control –20°C

Screen 5-7



11-250

7/9

Item

IDL-SW

IDL-MODE

TSPLY-SW

AL_DISP

Description

Use it to enable or disable idle rotation mode toprevent distorted images in high humidity conditionsor if the images are too light, say in the morning.

Use it to switch idle rotation mode when the poweris turned on while the surface temperature of thefixing roller is 75°C or less.Even under normal operating conditions, set it to ‘1’or ‘2’ if the humidity increases at night to causeimage faults.

Use it to switch the toner supply sequence by thehumidity sensor.

Use it to enable or disable messages (always oronly when in service mode; Add Fixing CleaningBelt and Waste Toner Full).

Remarks

0: OFF (no idle rotation)1: ON (control at IDL-

MODE setting)

0: auto control by dataof humidity sensor

1: 2-min idle rotation2: 5-min idle rotation

0: toner supply motorcontrol by humiditydata

Medium to low humidity:2 sec ON1 sec OFF

High humidity:4 sec ON2 sec OFF

1: 2 sec ON, 1 secOFF

0: only in service mode1: always

Screen 5-8



11-251

8/9

Item

F-POT-SW

F-POT-D

F-HUM-SW

F-HUM-D

Description

Enter ‘1’ if transfer/separation faults occur becauseof a fault in the sensor.Use it as a temporary remedy until replacement ofthe potential sensor.

Use it together with ‘F-POT-SW’ (0 changed to 1).0: if image ratio of originals (text) is low1: if image ratio of originals (photo) is high2: not used usually, but re-transfer (white spot at 50

mm along leading edge) occurs.The degree of separation current is highest at ‘0’and lowest at ‘2’.

Enter ‘1’ if the environment sensor is faulty. (Controlis with reference to the input in ‘F-HUM-D’ insteadof the output of the humidity sensor.)Use it as a temporary remedy until replacement ofthe environment sensor.

Enter an approximate humidity of the site (between30% and 99%).

Remarks

Factory default : 35

Screen 5-9



11-252

9/9

Item

SCAN_SEL

2SIDE_SL

M-LENGTH

PO-CNTMD

Description

Use it to enable or disable the original sizedetection function for the RDF.ON: If the selected mode does not require detection

of original size (APS, AMS, frame erasing,etc.), correction is made when assuming anoriginal size considering the paper size and theselected ratio.

Use it to specify two-sided mode as the standardmode (one-sided to two-sided). If '0' is selected, thenotation "two-sided" will not be indicated unless'initialize standard mode' is selected in user mode.

Use it to register a non-default size for themultifeeder.

Note:Copies may be made only when the sorter isnot installed. (Otherwise, a sorter jam willoccur because of a paper length not suitedto the sorter.)

Use it to enable or disable potential control for thefirst copying operation at power-on, after 10 min,and after 60 min.

Remarks

0: OFF1: ON

0: OFF1: ON

432 to 600 mm

0: ON1: OFF

I. Counter Mode ( )

Using the or key, select the appropriate screen.Press the appropriate counter mode (to highlight), and press the C key on the control

panel while holding down the service switch, the counter will return to '00000000'.

Screen 6-1

]6]



11-253

1/5

Item

L-TOTAL

L-MULTI

L-CST1

L-CST2

L-CST3

L-CST4

Description

Large size copy total copy counter (300 mm long ormore; or, non-default size)

Large size copy copy counter for multifeeder (300mm long or more; or, non-default size)

Large size copy copy counter for cassette 1 (nocounting if front paper deck type; 300 mm long ormore; or, non-default size)

Large size copy copy counter for cassette 2 (notcounting front paper deck type; 300 mm long ormore; or, non-default size)

Large size copy copy counter for cassette 3 (300mm long or more; or, non-default size)

Large size copy counter for cassette 4 (300 mmlong or more; or, non-default size)

Remarks

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

Screen 6-2



11-254

2/5

Item

L-OVERLAY

L-2-SIDE

L-DF

Description

Large size copy copy counter (2nd side of overlay;300 mm long or more; or, non-default size)

Large size copy copy counter (2nd size of two-sided; 300 mm long or more; or, non-default size)

Large size original feed counter (300 mm long ormore; or, non-default size)

Remarks

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

Screen 6-3



11-255

3/5

Item

S-TOTAL

S-MULTI

S-CST1

S-CST2

S-CST3

S-CST4

S-SDK

Description

Small size copy total copy counter (less than 300mm long; or, non-default size)

Small size copy copy counter for multifeeder (lessthan 300 mm long; or, non-default size)

Small size copy copy counter for cassette 1/ rightdeck (no counting if front paper deck type; less than300 mm long; or, non-default size)

Small size copy copy counter for cassette 2/leftdeck (not counting front paper deck type; less than300 mm long; or, non-default size)

Small size copy copy counter for cassette 3 (lessthan 300 mm long; or, non-default size)

Small size copy counter for cassette 4 (less than300 mm long; or, non-default size)

Copy counter for paper deck-A1 (less than 300 mmlong)

Remarks

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

Screen 6-4



11-256

4/5

Item

S-OVERLAY

S-2-SIDE

S-DF

Description

Small size copy copy counter (2nd side of overlay;less than 300 mm long; or, non-default size)

Small size copy copy counter (2nd side of two-sided; less than 300 mm long; or, non-default size)

Small size original feed counter (less than 300 mmlong)

Remarks

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

After '99999999',returns to '00000000'.

Screen 6-5

*Like the RDF’s separation pad, some parts need replacement based onthe number of copies made according to pick-up direction (left or right).



11-257

5/5

Item

WEB

WSTTNR

L_PU*

R_PU*

PRINT-JAM

DH-JAM

Description

Copy counter for after replacing the fixing cleaningbelt (alarm is issued when service mode starts afterhaving made 250,000 copies using the data)

Copy counter for after disposing of the waste tonerfrom the case (alarm is issued when service modestarts after having made 250,000 copies using thedata)

Counter for RDF left pick-up

Counter for RDF right pick-up

Counter for copier and sorter jams

Counter for feeder jams

Remarks

After ‘99999999’,returns to '00000000'.

After ‘99999999’,returns to '00000000'.

After ‘99999999’,returns to ‘00000000’.

After ‘99999999’,returns to ‘00000000’.

After ‘99999999’,returns to ‘00000000’.

After ‘99999999’,returns to ‘00000000’.

nn Count Incrementsq TOTAL

• 1st side of an overlay/two-sided copywhen the sheet is stacked on the holding tray

• one-sided copy or 2nd side of an overlay/two-sided copywhen the sheet is discharged outside the machine (in the bin if a sorter is installed)

w OVERLAY, 2_SIDE• overlay/two-sided copy

when the sheet is discharged outside the machinee MULTI, CST

• when the sheet is discharged outside the machine.• 1st side of an overlay/two-sided copy

when the sheet is stacked on the holding trayr RDF

• when the original is pulled in and its size is identified



11-258

VIII. SELF DIAGNOSIS

The microprocessor on the machine’s DC controller PCB is equipped with amechanism that checks the condition of the machine (of its sensors, in particular), andindicates an error code when it detects a fault.

A. Copier



11-259

Code Cause

• Main thermistor (TH1; poor contact,open circuit)

• Fixing heater (H1, H2; open circuit)• SSR (fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)• Sub thermistor (HH2; poor contact

or open circuit; the power will turnoff in about 5 sec after indication)

• Main thermistor (TH1; short circuit)• SSR (fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)• Sub thermistor (TH2; error

temperature increase)

• Main thermistor (TH1; poor contact,open circuit)

• Fixing heater (H1, H2)• Thermal switch (TS1; open circuit)• SSR (fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Main thermistor (TH1; poor contact)• Fixing heater (H1, H2; open circuit)• Thermal switch (TS1; open circuit)• SSR (fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• SSR (fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Cleaning belt for the fixing assembly(taken up)

• Cleaning belt sensor (PS11; fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Connector for fixing assembly (fault;rear)

• DC controller PCB (fault)

Description

• The temperature of the upper fixingroller does not reach 70°C within 3min and 30 after power-on.

• The temperature of the upper fixingroller exceeds 230°C for 2 sec ormore.

• The temperature of the upper fixingroller does not reach 100°C in 2 minafter it has reached 70°C.

• The temperature of the upper fixingroller does not reach 150°C in 2 secor more after it has reached 100°C.

• The temperature of the upper fixingroller is 70°C or less for 2 sec ormore after it has reached 100°C.

• The SSR used to drive the fixingheater has a short circuit.

• The cleaning belt for the fixingassembly has been taken up morethan specified.

• The fixing feeding assemblybecame disconnected duringcopying.

E000(Note 1)

E001

E002

E003

E004

E005

E006



11-260

Code Cause

• Main motor (M1; fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Waste toner feeding screw (error)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Pick-up motor (M2; fault)• DC controller PBC (fault)

• Hopper motor (M10, M11; fault)• Toner level detection circuit inside

developing assembly (fault)• Toner level detection circuit inside

hopper (fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)• Hopper connector (disconnected)

• Total copy counter (open circuit)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Accessories copy counter (open circuit)• DC controller PCB (fault)• Electromagnetic clutch (CL15) for

vertical path drive (harness broken)

• Deck main motor (M101; fault)• Slide deck drive PCB (fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Holding tray X home position sensor(PS21; fault)

• Holding tray X motor (M8; fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

Description

• After the main motor drive signalhas been generated, 2 or morepulses are not received every 1 sec.

• The waste toner feeding screwcannot rotate, and the switch(MSW4) is pressed several timeswithin a specific period of time.

• After the pick-up motor drive signalhas been generated, 2 or morepulses are not received every 1 sec.

• During copying, the toner supplysignal is ‘0’ (toner absent) for 2 minor more.

• During installation, the toner supplysignal does not go ‘1’ in 10 min ormore when executing toner supplysequence.

• When the total copy counter is off,an open circuit is detected in thetotal counter.

• When the accessories counter is off,an open circuit is detected in theaccessory counter.

• During initial rotation, clock pulsesof the deck main motor are notreceived for 1.4 sec or more.

• During copying, clock pulses of thedeck main motor are not receivedfor 2.8 sec or more.

• While the holding tray X motor (M8)drive signal is being generated, theholding tray X home position signal(HTXHP) is not generated with 4sec.

• While the holding tray X motor (M8)drive signal is being generated, theholding tray X home position signal(HTXHP) is generated for 2 sec ormore.

E013

E015

E010

E020

E030

E043

E050

E031



11-261

Code Cause

• Holding tray Y home position sensor(PS20; fault)

• Holding tray Y motor (M9; fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Scanner motor (M3; fault)• Scanner home position sensor

(PS1; faulty)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Scanner motor (M3; fault)• Scanner home position (PS1; fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Scanner motor (M3; fault)• Scanner original leading edge

sensor (PS3, PS4; fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Lens X home position sensor (PS6;fault)

• Lens X motor (M4; fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Lens Y home position sensor (PS7;fault)

• Lens Y motor (M5; fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

Description

• While the holding tray Y motor (M9)drive signal is being generated, theholding tray Y home position signal(HTYHP) is not generated within 4sec.

• While the holding tray Y motor (M9)drive signal is being generated, theholding tray Y home position signal(HTYHP) is generated for 2 sec ormore.

• The scanner home position signal(SCHP) is not generated within 10sec after the power switch or theCopy Start key has been turned ON.

• The scanner motor clock pulsesignal (SCMCLK) is not generatedeven though the scanner motor isrotating.

• While the scanner motor (M3) drivesignal is being generated, the scan-ner home position signal (SCHP) isgenerated for 0.5 sec or more.

• The scanner leading edge signal(SCDP1) is not generated within 0.8sec after the scanner has started tomove forward.

• The scanner leading edge signal(SCDP2) is not generated within 1.0sec after the scanner has started tomove forward.

• The lens X home position signal(LXHP) is not generated within 9sec after the power switch or theCopy Start key is turned on.

• The lens X home position signal(LXHP) is generated for 2 sec ormore.

• The lens Y home position signal(LYHP) is not generated within 9sec after the power-switch or theCopy Start key is turned on.

• The lens Y home position signal(LYHP) is generated for 2 sec ormore.

E203

(E202)No codeindication;keys locked.

(E204)No codeindicationkeys locked

E210

E212

E051



11-262

Code Cause

• Scanner locked sensor (PS48; fault)• Scanner locking solenoid (SL1;

fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Lamp regulator (fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)


• DC controller PCB (fault)• Control panel PCB (fault)



• RDF controller PCB• Connector (poor contact)• 24V power supply (poor contact)

• Sorter controller PCB (fault)• Connector (poor connection)• 24V power supply

Description

• During copying in stream readingmode, the scanner locked sensorsignal (SCLK) is not generatedwithin a specific period of time.

• The scanner does not stop at thescanner original leading edge 2sensor (PS4).

• During standby, the scanning lampturns on.

• During copying, the scanning lampturns off.

• The lamp ON detection signal(CVRON) is generated although thescanning lamp ON signal (LAON) is‘0’.

• There is an error in thecommunication between themicroprocessor master (Q156) andthe microprocessor slave (Q140) onthe DC controller PCB.

• An error has occurred in thecommunication between the master(Q156) on the microprocessor onthe DC controller PCB and themicroprocessor on the control panelPCB.

• At power-on, the copier detects anerror in communication betweencopier and external device becauseof an error in the copier’scommunication IC (Q158).

• After power-on, the copier detectsan error in communication betweencopier and external device becauseof an error in the copier’scommunication IC (Q158).

• The communication control IC onthe RDF controller PCB goes out oforder.

• The communication control IC onthe sorter controller PCB goes outof order.

E240

E243

E710

E711

E712

E713

E220

E213

Caution:1. When the self-diagnosis mechanism has turned on, you reset the machine by

turning off its power switch. This, however, does not work for E000, E001, E002,E003, E004, E005, E013, or E020. It is to prevent the user from casuallyresetting the machine when the thermistor has an open circuit; otherwise, thefixing roller will overheat or the hopper will overflow.In most models, the power switch will automatically turn off in about 20 sec forE000 through E003 even if you leave the machine alone. The machine’s power-switch, however, will turn off in about 5 sec after indicating ‘E000’ if the subthermistor (TH2) has an open circuit.For E000, E001, E002, E003, E004, E005, E013, and E020, you must initializethe data in the RAM on the DC controller PCB.

1) Start service mode ( ).2) Using the or key, select ‘ERROR’.3) Press ] (user mode) to clear the indication.4) The message panel on the control panel will be refreshed, and the Copy Mode

screen will return.2. For E015, E202, and E204, you can make checks in reference to B-ERR1, B-

ERR2, and B-ERR3 in service mode ( ).]1]

]4]



11-263

E800

E802

Code Cause

• Auto power-off circuit (open circuit)• DC controller PCB (fault)

• Auto power-off circuit (fault)• DC controller PCB (fault)

Description

• The auto power-off has an opencircuit.

• The auto power-off signal is gener-ated twice or more within 2 sec.

• The relay (RY401) in the power sup-ply unit does not operate in responseto the auto power-off signal.

B. RDF-D1



11-264

Code Cause

• Data communication (with copier)

• Pick-up roller sensor (S8, S21; fault)• Pick-up motor (M1; fault)• Pick-up clutch (CL1; fault)

• Belt motor clock sensor (S11; fault)• Belt motor (M3; fault)

• Reversing motor clock sensor (S10;fault)

• Reversing motor (M2; fault)

• Delivery motor clock sensor (S12;fault)

• Delivery motor (M5; fault)

• Pick-up motor clock sensor (S9;fault)

• Pick-up motor (M1; fault)

• Original stopper motor (M7; fault)• Stopper home position sensor (S26;

fault)• Motor (out of order)• Tray trailing edge sensor (low

performance)

• Original tray ascent motor (M6;fauly)

• Tray position sensor (S25; fault)

• Feeding motor clock sensor (S22;fault)

• Feeding motor (M8; fault)

• Registration sensor 1 (S3; fault)• Skew sensor 1 (S4; fault)• Manual feed registration sensor

(S19; fault)• Image leading edge sensor 1 (S20;

fault)• Original sensor 1 (S1; fault)• Original sensor 2 (S27; fault)

Description

• The communication is monitored atall times. The error occurs whenthere is an interruption for 5 sec.

• Initialization does not end in 2 sec.(The flat face of the pick-up roller/D-cut roller is at top, and is at homeposition.)

• The number of belt motor clockpulses within 100 msec is less thanspecified.

• The number of reversal motor clockpulses within 100 msec is less thanspecified.

• The number of delivery motor clockpulses within 200 msec is less thanspecified.

• The number of pick-up motor clockpulses within 200 msec is less thanspecified.

• The guide shift by the originalstopper motor does not end within aspecific period of time.

• The sensor output does not changewhen the original stopper motor hasbeen driven for 2 sec or more.

• The tray shift by the original trayascent motor does not end within aspecific period of time.

• The number of feeding motor clockpulses within 100 msec is less thanspecified.

The sensor output is 2.3 V or more inthe absence of paper.

E400

E401

E402

E403

E404

E407

E408

E406

E405

E411



11-265

When the self-diagnosis has turned on, you can reset the machine by turning it offonce.If the RDF is out of order, disconnect the lattice connector on the RDF side, openthe RDF, and set the original on the copyboard glass to continue to make copies.

Note:

C. Sorter



11-266

Code Cause

• The CPU (Q1) or the communica-tions IC (Q3) on the sorter controllerPCB is not operating normally.

• Feeding motor (M1; fails)• Feeding guide (up/down

mechanism, interference, etc.)

• Push bar motor (M7; fails)

• Reference wall motor (M6; fails)

• Multi guide motor (M5; fails)

• Bin paper sensor automaticadjustment (fails)

• Bin paper sensor (S6, S7; autoadjust fault)

• Guide bar swing motor (M8; fails)

• Stapler unit swing motor (M4; fails)

Description

• An error in the communicationbetween sorter and copier occurred.

• The clock signal from the motorremains off for 250 msec.

• After the motor drive signal hasbeen generated, the operation doesnot end in 2 sec.



• The bin paper sensor cannot beadjusted automatically, or theautomatic adjustment setting has anerror.

• The bin paper sensor (S6, S7)cannot be adjusted automatically, orthe automatic adjustment settinghas an error.

• After the motor drive signal hasbeen generated, the operation doesnot end within a specific period oftime.for front access, 5 secfor others, 2 sec


• Clock signals from the motor clocksensor (PI8) are not received for250 msec.

• The input signal from the swinghome position sensor (PI9) does notchange for 1 sec or more.

E500

E510

E522

E523

E524

E525

E526

E530

E531



11-267

n Sorter•Error Indication, Error Description, Detection Timing

n ResettingIf the copier is making copies,q Indicates the message Jam.w When reset, indicates the message ‘Turn On the Power’.e When turned off and then on, runs a self check. If the results are good, the

machine is reset; otherwise, starts down* state (indicating ‘E5XX’ on its controlpanel).

If the copier is not making copies,q Indicates the message ‘Turn On the Power’.w When turned off and then on, runs a self check. If the results are good, reset;

otherwise, starts down* state (indicating ‘E5XX’ on its control panel).• Down State and Operation (associated with an E code)q Indicates ‘E5XX’.w When the sorter is detached**, ready for making copies (in modes not requiring

the sorter).e Indicates the message Mode Not Available if a mode requiring the sorter is selected.* After the copier started down state, you may turn it off and then on; if the results of the

self check it runs in response are good, it will be reset (with the sorter connected).**You need not detach the sorter from the copier.

Code Cause

• Stapler unit shift motor (M3; fails)

• Stapler paper sensor automaticadjustment (fault)

• Bin shift motor (M9; fails)

• Power supply (fault)

Description

• After the motor drive signal hasbeen generated, the operation doesnot end in 5000 msec.

• The stapler automatic adjustmentmechanism fails, or the automaticadjustment setting has an error.

• After the motor drive signal hasbeen generated, the operation doesnot end within a specific period oftime.for initial, 20 secfor others, 2 sec

• Clock signals from the motor clocksensor (PI17) are not received for250 msec or more.

• Input signals from the lead camposition sensor (PI20) do notchange for 2 sec or more.

• During initial rotation or when theCopy Start key is pressed, 24 VP isnot supplied.

E533

E540

E550

E532



11-268


APPENDIX

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART ..........A-1B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS ...A-2C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM....A-5

D. PAPER DECK-A1 GENERAL CIRCUITDIAGRAM......................................A-7

E. SPECIAL TOOLS LIST .................A-9F. SOLVENTS AND OILS..................A-10

A. GENERAL TIMING CHART I• A4, 2 Copies Continuous, Right Deck

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON) A-1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

Sequence

9

10

11

12

13

14

WMUP INTR CNTR1 CNTR2 LSTR STBY INTR CNTR1 CNTR2 AER SCFW SCRF SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY

15

16

17

18

19

20

FW RV

Controlled to 200°C (205°C)

Copy Start keyON

Power switchOFF

195°C(200°C)

Power switchON

!"#

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

32

Wait indicator

Fixing main heater (H1)


Main motor (M1)





Separation charging assembly

Developing bias DC

Developing bias AC

Pre-exposure lamp (LED)

Blanking exposure lamp (LED)

Scanning lamp

Surface potential measurement

Charging wire cleaning motor

Scanner motor (M3)



Developing clutch






Delivery fan (FM2)

Fixing heat exhaust fan (FM3)

Developing fan (FM5)

Feeding fan (FM6)

Cleaner fan (FM7)

Scanner cooling fan (FM8)

Total copy counter (CNT1)

15 min

10 min

10 min

Half speedFull speed

10 min

10 min

ON (orange)

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)A-2

GENERAL TIMING CHART II (CONSOLIDATED)• Copier + RDF-D1 + Stapler Sorter-E2• A4, 2 Originals, 2 Copies, Right Deck Pick-Up; RDF Right Pick-Up (stream reading); Sorter Double Stapling

"#

!""##

1 Fixing main heater (H1)

Main motor (M1)

Scanning lamp (LA1)


Pick-up motor (M2)

Right deck pick-up roll releasing solenoidPick-up vertical path roller 1 drive clutch (CL14)





Registration sensor (PS23)


Pick-up motor (M1)

Pick-up clutch (CL1)

Paper retaining solenoid 2 (SL5)

Pick-up sensor 2 (S15)/skew sensor 2 (CL16)

Belt motor (M3)

Image leading edge signal

Reversing motor (M2)

Reversal sensor (S5)

Delivery motor (M5)

Delivery sensor (S6)

Feeding motor (M1)

Sorter paper path sensor (PI4)

Guide bar motor (M8)

Stapler unit shift motor (M3)

Stapler swing motor (M4)

Staple swing stop position sensor (MSW2)

Stapler motor (M2)

Paper retaining solenoid (SL3)

Bin shift motor (M9)

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

2-6

2-5

2-4

2-3

2-2

2-1

Scanner motor (M3)


Pick-up vertical path roller 0 drive clutch (CL18)

2-72-82-92-10


Sequence INTR SCFW* SCRV SCFW SCFW* SCRV SCFW SCRV

Copy Start key ON

: motor CW rotation

: motor CCW rotation

1st copy of 1st original

2nd copy of 1st original

1st copy of 2nd original

2nd copy of 2nd original

UP

Stapling request

LSTR

UP DOWN Centering DOWMN

3-13-23-33-43-53-63-73-83-9

Controlled to 200°C (205°C)

Cop

ier

RD

FS

tapl

er S

orte

r

The notation SCFW with an asterisk (*) is in stream reading mode.Note:

B. SIGNALS AND ABBREVIATIONS

1. Signals


ACBTP AC BIAS TIMING PULSE commandACON AC TRANSFORMER DRIVE commandLED2ON BLANK EXPOSURE (0V) commandRDLTP RIGHT DECK LIFTER POSITION signalC3LMD CASSETTE 3 LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE commandC3LTP CASSETTE 3 LIFTER POSITION signalC3PD CASSETTE 3 PAPER DETECT signalC3PL0 CASSETTE 3 PAPER LENGTH signalC3PL1 CASSETTE 3 PAPER LENGTH signalC3PUCD CASSETTE 3 PICK-UP ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE commandC3PURR CASSETTE 3 PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE SOLENOID DRIVE commandC3PW CASSETTE 3 PAPER WIDTH signalC3SS CASSETTE 3 SET UP signalC4LMD CASSETTE 4 LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE commandC4LTP CASSETTE 4 LIFTER POSITION signalC4PD CASSETTE 4 PAPER DETECT signalC4PL0 CASSETTE 4 PAPER LENGTH signalC4PL1 CASSETTE 4 PAPER LENGTH signalC4PUCD CASSETTE 4 PICK-UP ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE commandC4PURR CASSETTE 4 PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE SOLENOID DRIVE commandC4PW CASSETTE 4 PAPER WIDTH signalC4SS CASSETTE 4 SET UP signalCBCC COPYBOARD COVER CLOSED signalCBOP CLEANING BELT OUT PRECAUTION signalCCNNT CONTROL CARD DETECT signalCCNTD CONTROL CARD DRIVE commandCL11D VERTICAL PATH ROLLER 3 CLUTCH DRIVE commandCL13D VERTICAL PATH ROLLER 4 CLUTCH DRIVE commandCL15D VERTICAL PATH ROLLER 1 CLUTCH DRIVE commandCL18D VERTICAL PATH ROLLER 0 CLUTCH DRIVE commandDCBC DC BIAS CONTROL signalDCBTP DC BIAS TIMING PULSE commandDEVCD DEVELOPING CLUTCH DRIVE commandDHRD DRUM HEATER DRIVE commandDPDSD DELIVERY PAPER DEFLECTOR SOLENOID DRIVE commandDSZ1 DOCUMENT SIZE 1 signalDSZ2 DOCUMENT SIZE 2 signalDSZ3A DOCUMENT SIZE 3 signalDSZ3B DOCUMENT SIZE 3 signalDTEP DEVELOPER TONER signalEXDPD EXTERNAL DELIVERY PAPER DETECT signalFCBSD FIXING CLEANING BELT DRIVE SOLENOID DRIVE commandFDOD FRONT DOOR OPEN DETECT signalFFUCNT FIXING/FEEDER UNIT CONNECT signalFFULSD FIXING/FEEDER UNIT LOCK SOLENOID DRIVE commandFM2D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command (HALF SPEED)FM3D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command (HALF SPEED)

FM7D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command (HALF SPEED)FM2D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command (FULL SPEED)FM3D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command (FULL SPEED)FM5D DEVELOPING UNIT COOLING FAN DRIVE commandFM6D FEEDER FAN DRIVE commandFM7D EXHAUST FAN DRIVE command (FULL SPEED)FM8D SCANNING LAMP COOLING FAN DRIVE commandFXCJS FIXING ASSEMBLY CLAW JAM signalFXDEL FIXING UNIT DELIVERY PAPER DETECT signalFXDSD FIXING UNIT DRIVE SOLENOID commandFXGDSD FIXING ASSEMBLY GUIDE DOWN SOLENOID DRIVE commandFXGUSD FIXING ASSEMBLY GUIDE UP SOLENOID DRIVE commandHTCNT HOLDING TRAY CONNECT signalHTDSD HOLDING TRAY D-CUT SOLENOID DRIVE commandHTF1CD HOLDING TRAY FEEDER 1 CLUTCH DRIVE commandHTF2CD HOLDING TRAY FEEDER 2 CLUTCH DRIVE commandHTFCNT HOLDING TARY FEEDER UNIT CONNECT signalHTFWCD HOLDING TRAY FORWARD CLUTCH DRIVE commandHTJSD HOLDING TRAY JOGGING SOLENOID DRIVE commandHTLPD HOLDING TRAY LAST PAPER DETECT HOME POSITION signalHTPDD HOLDING TRAY PAPER DEFLECTOR SOLENOID DRIVE commandHTRGCD HOLDING TRAY REGISTRATION ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE commandHTRVCD HOLDING TRAY REVERSE CLUTCH DRIVE commandHTSPCD HOLDING TRAY SEPARATION CLUTCH DRIVE commandHTWSD HOLDING TRAY WEIGHT SOLENOID DRIVE commandHTXHP HOLDING TRAY X HOME POSITION signalHTYHP HOLDING TRAY Y HOME POSITION signalHUM1 MACHINE INSIDE HUMIDITY signal 1HUM2 MACHINE INSIDE HUMIDITY signal 2HVPCT PRE-TRANSFER CORONA CURRENT CONTROL commandHVSCT SEPARATION CORONA CURRENT CONTROL commandHVTCT TRANSFER CORONA CURRENT CONTROL commandHVTPC PRIMARY CORONA CURRENT CONTROL commandIDPD INSIDE DELIVERY PAPER DETECT signalLAON SCANNING LAMP DRIVE commandLCDLGHT LCD BACK-LIGHT ON commandLED2CK BLANK EXPOSURE command (CLOCK)LED2DT BLANK EXPOSURE command (DATA)LED2LD BLANK EXPOSURE command (DATA LATCH)LINT CVR PWM signalLXHP LENS X HOME POSITION signalLYHP LENS Y HOME POSITION signalM1H/L MAIN MOTOR SPEED CHANGE commandM2BLK PAPER PICK-UP MOTOR BRAKE commandM2H/L PAPER PICK-UP MOTOR SPEED CHANGE commandM3BRK SCANNER MOTOR BRAKE commandM3F/R SCANNER MOTOR FORWARD command

What follow below is a list of signals and abbreviation used in the chapters of the manual and circuit diagrams.The abbreviations within parentheses represent analog signals, shich cannot be expressed in terms of ‘1’ or ‘0’.

COPYRIGHT © 1997 CANON INC. CANON NP6350/NP6251 REV. 0 JULY 1997 PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIME AU JAPON)A-4

M3FS SCANNER MOTOR SPEED signalM3MD0 SCANNER MOTOR REPRODUCTION RATIO SELECT (0) commandM3MD1 SCANNER MOTOR REPRODUCTION RATIO SELECT (1) commandM3MD2 SCANNER MOTOR REPRODUCTION RATIO SELECT (2) commandM3ON SCANNER MOTOR DRIVE commandM3CL SCANNER MOTOR PLL CONTOL commandM4A LENS X MOTOR (A) commandX-HOLD LENS X MOTOR (HOLD) commandM4B LENS X MOTOR (B) signalM5A LENS Y MOTOR (A) signalY-HOLD LENS Y MOTOR (HOLD) signalM5B LENS Y MOTOR (B) signalM8A HOLDING TRAY X MOTOR (A) commandM8B HOLDING TRAY X MOTOR (B) commandM8HLD HOLDING TRAY X MOTOR (HOLD) commandM9A HOLDING TRAY Y MOTOR (A) commandM9B HOLDING TRAY Y MOTOR (B) commandM9HLD HOLDING TRAY Y MOTOR (HOLD) commandM1FG MAIN MOTOR 1/4 CLOCK PULSE signalM1ON MAIN MOTOR DRIVE commandM10ON HOPPER MOTOR (TONER SUPPLY) DRIVE commandM11ON HOPPER MOTOR (TONER STIRRING) DRIVE commandM2ON PAPER FEED MOTOR DRIVE commandM7ON HOLDING TRAY LAST PAPER DETECT MOTOR DRIVE commandMFDC MULTIFEEDER DOOR OPEN DETECT signalMFPCD MULTIFEEDER PICK-UP CLUTCH ROLLER DRIVE commandMFPW MULTI FEEDER PAPER WIDTH signalMFRLSD MULTIFEEDER PICK-UP RELAY SOLENOID DRIVE commandMFS MULTIFEEDER PAPER DETECT signalMHOND MULTIFEEDER PAPER DETECT signalMHRD MAIN HEATER DRIVE commandOPCNTD OPTION COUNTER DRIVE commandOPRST OPERATION PANEL CPU RESET commandPCLHP PRIMARY CORONA WIRE CLEANER HOME POSITION signalPCLM PRIMARY CORONA WIRE CLEANER MOTOR DRIVE commandPEXP PRE-EXPOSURE LED DRIVE commandPOT PHOTOSENSITIVE DRUM SURFACE POTENTIAL signal MOTORPOT-S-ON PHOTOSENSITIVE DRUM SURFACE POTENTIAL SENSOR POWER ON commandPS14D HOLDING TRAY REGISTRATION PAPER DETECT signalPS15D HOLDING TRAY ENTRANCE PAPER DETECT signalPS17D HOLDING TRAY PAPER DETECT signalPS24D PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH-0 PAPER DETECT signalPS27D PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH-3 PAPER DETECT signalPS30D PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH-4 PAPER DETECT signalPS33D PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH-1 PAPER DETECT signalPS36D PICK-UP VERTICAL PATH-2 PAPER DETECT signalPS8D HOLDING TRAY FEEDER 1 PAPER DETECT signalPS9D HOLDING TRAY FEEDER 2 PAPER DETECT signalPTCLHP PRE-TRANSFER CORONA WIRE CLEANER HOME POSITION signalPTRCLM PRE-TRANSFER CORONA WIRE CLEANER MOTOR DRIVE commandPWOFF POWER SWITCH OFF commandRDEL RIGHT DECK LIFTER LIMIT signalRDEOP RIGHT DECK OPEN DETECT signalRDFEDGE RDF DOCUMENT LEADING EDGE signalRDLMD RIGHT DECK LIFTER MOTOR DRIVE command

RDPD RIGHT DECK PAPER DETECT signalRDPUCD RIGHT DECK PICK-UP ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE commandRDPURR RIGHT DECK PICK-UP ROLLER RELEASE SOLENOID DRIVE commandRGCD REGISTRATION ROLLER CLUTCH DRIVE commandRGPD REGISTRATION PAPER DETECT signalRL401D PWU RELAY DRIVE commandRLWDOP RIGHT LOWER DOOR OPEN DETECT signalROED ROLLER ELECTRO BIAS DRIVE commandRUPDOP RIGHT UPPER DOOR OPEN DETECT signalSCDP1 SCANNER DOCUMENT LEADING EDGE 1 signalSCHP SCANNER HOME POSITION signalSHOND SUB HEATER ON DETECT signal (120V)SHRD SUB HEATER DRIVE command (120V)SL10BD MULTIFEED ROLLER SOLENOID DRIVE commandSL10FD MULTIFEED ROLLER SOLENOID DRIVE commandSL10D MULTI FEEDER PICK-UP SOLENOID DRIVE commandSSWON SERVICE SWITCH signalSW1ON POWER SWITCH ON DETECT signalTCNTD TOTAL COUNTER DRIVE commandTEP HOPPER TONER signalTH1 FIXING HEATER THERMISTOR signal 1TH2 FIXING HEATER THERMISTOR signal 2TH DRUM HEATER THERMISTOR signalTSCLHP TRANSFER/SEPARATION CORONA WIRE CLEANER HOME POSITION signalTSCLM TRANSFER/SEPARATION CORONA WIRE CLEANER DRIVE commandWTFL WASTE TONER FEEDING SCREW LOCK DETECT signal

2. AbbreviationsAER AE (MEASUREMENT) ROTATIONCNTR1 CONTROL ROTATION 1CNTR2 CONTROL ROTATION 2INTR INITIAL ROTATIONLSTR LAST ROTATIONSCFW SCANNER FORWARDSCRV SCANNER REVERSESTBY STANDBYWAIT WAITWMUP WARM UPWMUPR WARM UP ROTATION


C. GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

not available

A-7

not available

D. PAPER DECK-A1 GENERAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM


E. SPECIAL TOOLS


APPENDIX

A-9

Tool name

Door switch

Cleaning oil

Mirrorpositioning tool

Potentialsensorcheckingelectrode

Environmentsensorchecking tool

Tool number

TKN-0093

CK-0054

FY9-3011

FY9-3012

FY9-3014

ShapeNo.

1

2

3

4

5

Rank*

A

A

B

B

B

Remarks

Use to clean thefixing roller. (10packs/box)

Use to adjust theNo. 1 and No. 2mirror position.(front and rear ina pair)

Use to check thepotential sensor.

Use to check theenvironmentsensor.

Front door

Point of use

TKN-0464-000

CLEANNING OILHUILE DE NETTOYAGE

CANON INC. JAPAN / JAPON

FFY9-3011

FY9-3011

R

F. SOLVENTS AND OILS


APPENDIX

A-10

Description

Ethyl alcohol (Etanol)

Isopropylalcohol (Isopropanol)

MEK

Heat-resisting grease

Lubricant oil

Lubricant oil

Lubricant oil

Use

Cleaning:e.g., glass, plastic, rubber parts;external covers

Cleaning:e.g., metal;oil or toner

Lubricating; e.g., fixing drive assemblies

Lubricating:scanner rail;spring clutch

Lubricating: plastic drive andfriction parts

No.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Description

• Do not bring near openfire.

• Procure localy.• Isopropyl alcohol may

be substituted.

• Do not bring near fire.• Procure locally.

• CK-0427 (500 g/can)

• CK-0451 (100 cc)

• CK-0524 (100 cc)

• CK-0562 (20 g)

Composition

C2H5O(CHZ3)2 CHOH

CH3COC2H5

Lithium soap(mineral oil family)

Moblybdenumbisulfide

Mineral oil(paraffin family)

Mineral oil(paraffin family)

Slicone oil

Prepared byOFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DEPARTMENT 1

OFFICE IMAGING PRODUCTS TECHNICAL SUPPORT DIVISIONCANON INC.

Printed in Japan

REVISION 0 (JULY 1997) [18723]

5-1, Hakusan 7-chome, Toride-shi, Ibaraki 302 Japan

PRINTED IN JAPAN (IMPRIMÉ AU JAPON) 0797S2.11-1

This publication is printed on 70% reprocessed paper.

canon np6350 sm

Documents